Sony Switch 8000SF User Manual
Multi Format  
Switcher System  
MVS-8000/8000SF System  
(With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel)  
User’s Guide [English]  
Volume 1  
2nd Edition (Revised 1)  
User’s Guide  
Volume 1  
2nd Edition (Revised 1)  
3-206-016-12 (1)  
[
English  
]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MVS-8000/8000SFSystem  
(With CCP-8000 Series Center Control Panel)  
User’s Guide  
Multi Format Switcher System  
Volume 1  
[English]  
2nd Edition (Revised 1)  
Software Version 7.20 and Later  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTICE TO USERS  
© 2001 Sony Corporation. All rights reserved. This  
manual or the software described herein, in whole or in  
part, may not be reproduced, translated or reduced to  
any machine readable form without prior written approval  
from Sony Corporation.  
SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY  
WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE  
OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND  
HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS  
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO  
THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER  
INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY  
CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,  
WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR  
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION  
WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER  
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE  
THEREOF.  
Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any  
modification to this manual or the information contained  
herein at any time without notice.  
The software described herein may also be governed by  
the terms of a separate user license agreement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions Newly Supported in Version 7.20  
The functions newly supported in the MVS-8000 system version 7.20 are as  
follows.  
Functions relating to switcher processor  
Classification  
Functions supported  
Menu No.  
See page  
Vol. 1  
Vol. 2  
System  
1080P/59.94 and 1080P/50 formats  
7313  
1171  
245  
-
a)  
and dual link support  
Transition  
Preset color mix with an image  
342  
-
-
selected on the utility 2 bus in place of  
b)  
a color matte  
Key  
Fixing key fill and key source in key  
1112.4  
1176.1  
55, 393  
42, 93  
c)  
drop off mode (frame delay mode)  
b)  
Frame memory  
-
Clip transition  
Recording and playback of ancillary  
data  
2525, 7316.8 92  
314  
b)  
Recording and recalling of extended  
2521, 2522,  
2523  
87  
-
-
d)  
clip  
DME  
Files  
Applying DME effects to a maximum of 7337.7  
three keys on the SDI interface in  
423  
combination with a dedicated  
interface  
b)  
d)  
7151, 7151.1, 205  
7162  
468, 476,  
482  
• File operations of extended clips  
• Converting between frame memory  
d)  
clips and extended clips  
• Importing extended clips  
d)  
Macros  
Creating and editing macro timelines  
5441, 5441.1 216  
546  
Macro take operation using a GPI input 7325.1, 7352  
-
-
369, 436  
381, 530  
Setting a macro attachment without  
changing cross-points  
7326.6  
Recalling frame memory clips  
Recording with external devices  
-
212  
212  
-
-
-
-
Changing the registers for saving  
macros  
7142.3  
502  
Color corrector  
All the internal signals of the switcher  
7335  
-
410  
c)  
can be selected for color correction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Classification  
Functions supported  
Menu No.  
See page  
Vol. 1  
Vol. 2  
Multi program 2  
Re-entry between the main and sub  
7331  
-
240  
-
b)  
sides of the same M/E bank  
When recalling snapshot, keys on main  
or sub side can be recalled  
239  
-
-
b)  
independently.  
b)  
Diagnosis  
7431  
567  
Displaying communication status  
a) For MVS-8000G only  
b) For other than MVS-8000  
c) For MVS-8000G/8000GSF only  
d) For MVS-8000A or MVS-8000G only  
Functions relating to operability  
Classification  
Functions supported  
Menu No.  
See page  
Vol. 1  
31  
Vol. 2  
Control panel  
Inhibiting cross-point button operations 7321.12,  
7324  
334  
Distinguishable color of the shifted  
button numbers in the Xpt Assign menu  
7322.x1  
-
-
346  
316  
External devices  
Macros  
Making the USB primary setting  
automatic  
7317  
-
Holding down [PRE MCRO] and [POST  
MCRO] buttons together makes it  
possible to set a macro attachment in  
macro only mode  
218, 259 531  
Files  
40 or more directories can be created 71xx  
-
485  
-
Snapshot  
Wipe and DME wipe snapshot  
operations with menu  
1157, 1167  
182  
Functions relating to external devices  
Classification  
Functions supported  
Menu No.  
See page  
Vol. 1  
Vol. 2  
Audio mixer  
GPI output  
Selection of signals linked with the  
audio mixer  
7322,  
7322.11  
33, 342  
350  
Addition of “Device Recording” to the  
actions triggered by control panel or  
DCU GPI output  
7325.3, 7354  
-
370, 439  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Functions Newly Supported in Version 7.20 ..........................................3  
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions  
Introduction ..................................................................................................19  
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System......................22  
Video Processing Flow .................................................................................24  
Signal Selection .............................................................................................25  
Basics of Signal Selection .....................................................................26  
Bus Selection.........................................................................................26  
Signal Assignment and Selection..........................................................29  
Signal Name Display.............................................................................33  
Transitions.....................................................................................................34  
Selecting the Next Transition................................................................34  
Independent Key Transitions.................................................................37  
Transition Types....................................................................................41  
Executing a Transition...........................................................................44  
Keys................................................................................................................48  
Key Types..............................................................................................48  
Key Modifiers........................................................................................52  
Key Memory..........................................................................................56  
Key Snapshots .......................................................................................57  
Blink ......................................................................................................57  
Key Default ...........................................................................................57  
Key Modify Clear..................................................................................58  
Resizer...................................................................................................58  
Wipes .............................................................................................................60  
Types of Wipe Pattern...........................................................................60  
Pattern Mix............................................................................................61  
Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ..................................................63  
Wipe Snapshots .....................................................................................71  
Wipe Modify Clear................................................................................71  
DME Wipes ...................................................................................................72  
Types of DME Wipe Pattern.................................................................72  
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers.........................................80  
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ................................81  
Table of Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Wipe Snapshots ...........................................................................82  
DME Wipe Modify Clear......................................................................83  
Resizer DME wipes...............................................................................83  
Frame Memory .............................................................................................85  
Overview ...............................................................................................85  
Still Image File Functions .....................................................................89  
Frame Memory Clip Function...............................................................92  
Image Data Management.......................................................................94  
Image Data Transfer..............................................................................94  
External Hard Disk Drive Access..........................................................96  
Color Backgrounds.......................................................................................97  
Copy and Swap .............................................................................................98  
Side Flags.....................................................................................................102  
Overview .............................................................................................102  
Side Flag Settings................................................................................102  
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ............................................103  
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ..............................104  
Video Process ..............................................................................................107  
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .......................107  
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus .................................107  
Video Process Memory .......................................................................108  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) ......................................................................109  
Three-Dimensional Transformations...................................................110  
Transformation Operation Modes .......................................................116  
Graphics Display .................................................................................120  
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display ...............................................122  
DME Special Effects...........................................................................122  
Interpolation ........................................................................................151  
Key Density Adjustment .....................................................................152  
Key Source Selection ..........................................................................152  
Global Effects......................................................................................152  
External Devices .........................................................................................158  
Shared Functions for External Device Control ...................................158  
Control of P-Bus Devices....................................................................159  
Control of GPI Devices .......................................................................160  
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control ......................................161  
Regions and Registers ................................................................................165  
Regions................................................................................................165  
Registers ..............................................................................................166  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Keyframes ...................................................................................................168  
Effects..................................................................................................168  
Saving and Recalling Effects ..............................................................169  
Effect Attributes ..................................................................................169  
Effect Editing ......................................................................................169  
Time Settings.......................................................................................171  
Paths ....................................................................................................174  
Effect Execution ..................................................................................180  
Master Timelines.................................................................................181  
Snapshots.....................................................................................................182  
Snapshot Types....................................................................................182  
Snapshot Attributes .............................................................................183  
Utility ...........................................................................................................185  
Shotbox ........................................................................................................186  
Setup ............................................................................................................187  
Overview of Setup...............................................................................187  
System Setup .......................................................................................187  
Saving and Recalling Setup Data ........................................................194  
Panel Setup..........................................................................................195  
Switcher Setup.....................................................................................198  
DME Setup..........................................................................................202  
Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output ..................................................202  
Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface.................203  
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel  
(Option)....................................................................................204  
Files ..............................................................................................................205  
Macros .........................................................................................................210  
Overview .............................................................................................210  
Macro Creation and Editing ................................................................212  
Macro Execution .................................................................................215  
Macro Timeline ...................................................................................216  
Macro Editing Using Menus ...............................................................218  
Macro Attachment...............................................................................218  
Menu Macros.......................................................................................222  
Color Corrector ..........................................................................................223  
Simple P/P Software...................................................................................227  
Overview .............................................................................................227  
Restrictions on Use..............................................................................227  
Multi Program 2 .........................................................................................230  
Table of Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview .............................................................................................230  
Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2.......................................232  
Basic Operations (Required) ...............................................................232  
Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a  
Switcher Bank).........................................................................237  
Optional Operations ............................................................................237  
Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode .......................................241  
Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode.....242  
Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode ....................................243  
Dual Link Support......................................................................................245  
Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel ...............................251  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 1  
(With Standard Transition Modules) .......................................251  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 2  
(With Simple Transition Modules) ..........................................252  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 3  
(With Compact Transition Modules) .......................................255  
Cross-Point Control Block ..................................................................256  
Transition Control Block (Standard Type)..........................................260  
Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type)...........................................264  
Key Control Block...............................................................................267  
Device Control Block (Trackball).......................................................271  
Device Control Block (Joystick) .........................................................277  
Device Control Block (Search Dial)....................................................278  
Keyframe Control Block .....................................................................281  
Numeric Keypad Control Block..........................................................284  
Fade to Black Control Block...............................................................287  
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) ..................................288  
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) .............................291  
Menu Control Block............................................................................294  
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block.....................................................295  
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block..........................................296  
Utility/Shotbox Control Block ............................................................298  
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type)....  
299  
Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) ................304  
Downstream Key Control Block .........................................................306  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block .................................308  
Transition Control Block (Compact Type) .........................................310  
Basic Menu Operations..............................................................................313  
Menu Organization..............................................................................313  
About the Top Menu List ....................................................................313  
Accessing Menus.................................................................................314  
Displaying a Menu ..............................................................................321  
Interpreting the Menu Screen..............................................................322  
Menu Operations .................................................................................323  
Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site ..335  
Shortcut Menu .....................................................................................335  
Chapter 3 Transitions  
Basic Operating Procedure........................................................................340  
Key Priority Setting....................................................................................343  
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block....................343  
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation....................................345  
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................346  
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation..............................348  
Super Mix Settings .....................................................................................349  
Color Matte Settings...................................................................................350  
Executing a Transition...............................................................................351  
Transition Indicator Function..............................................................351  
Setting the Transition Rate..................................................................352  
Pattern Limit........................................................................................355  
Executing an Auto Transition..............................................................359  
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition)....359  
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ..................................360  
Non-Sync State....................................................................................360  
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode.........................................361  
Transition Preview .....................................................................................363  
Independent Key Transitions ....................................................................364  
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations....................................364  
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation..365  
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate......................................366  
Fade to Black...............................................................................................369  
Fade to Black Operation......................................................................369  
Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate...........................................369  
Simple Transition .......................................................................................371  
Table of Contents  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations for Simple Transitions.............................................371  
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ............................373  
Split Fader ...........................................................................................373  
Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module........374  
Chapter 4 Keys  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus.......................................................378  
Key Setting Menus ..............................................................................378  
Key Type Setting.................................................................................379  
Chroma Key Composition...................................................................381  
Chroma Key Adjustments ...................................................................382  
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source .....................................................387  
Key Edge Modifications......................................................................390  
Masks...................................................................................................397  
Applying a DME Effect to a Key........................................................400  
Specifying the Key Output Destination...............................................403  
Key Modify Clear................................................................................404  
Blink Function.....................................................................................404  
Video Processing.................................................................................405  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block .............................406  
Operations in the Key Control Block..................................................406  
Key Edge Modifications......................................................................410  
Masks...................................................................................................414  
Applying a DME Effect to a Key........................................................415  
Other Key Setting Operations .............................................................417  
Resizer .........................................................................................................419  
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys.......................................419  
Resizer Interpolation Settings .............................................................424  
Resizer Crop/Border Settings..............................................................424  
Applying Resizer Effects.....................................................................427  
Key Snapshots.............................................................................................433  
Key Snapshot Operations ....................................................................433  
Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module............435  
Chapter 5 Wipes  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings ...........................................................438  
Wipe Settings Menu ............................................................................438  
Wipe Pattern Selection ........................................................................438  
Pattern Mix..........................................................................................441  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Setting Wipe Modifiers .......................................................................443  
Wipe Modify Clear..............................................................................454  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .....................................455  
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings........455  
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .........................456  
Wipe Snapshots...........................................................................................460  
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad...................................460  
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................463  
Chapter 6 DME Wipes  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings .................................................466  
DME Wipe Settings Menu ..................................................................466  
DME Wipe Pattern Selection ..............................................................466  
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers .............................................................469  
DME Wipe Modify Clear....................................................................476  
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions...........................477  
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings....  
477  
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers................478  
Resizer DME Wipe Setting........................................................................481  
DME Wipe Snapshots ................................................................................482  
DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .........................482  
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .......................................482  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .........................................483  
User Programmable DME Transition Mode .......................................483  
Chapter 7 Frame Memory  
Still Image Operations ...............................................................................490  
Preparations.........................................................................................490  
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu................................................490  
Selecting an Input Image.....................................................................494  
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ....................................495  
Capturing an Input Image (Freeze)......................................................496  
Recalling Still Images .........................................................................500  
Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field Invert Function)  
501  
Image Processing.................................................................................502  
Image Output.......................................................................................507  
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record)...................................508  
Table of Contents 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation)..........509  
Frame Memory Clip Operations...............................................................512  
Preparations for Operation ..................................................................512  
Recalling Clips ....................................................................................512  
Clip Playback ......................................................................................514  
Clip Creation .......................................................................................518  
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders..................................520  
Clip Output..........................................................................................521  
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data.........................................522  
Clip Transition Operations........................................................................524  
Image Data Management...........................................................................527  
Pair File Processing.............................................................................527  
Moving Files........................................................................................528  
Deleting Files ......................................................................................529  
Renaming Files....................................................................................530  
File Backups........................................................................................531  
Restoring Files.....................................................................................531  
External Hard Disk Drive Access .............................................................532  
Hard Disk Formatting..........................................................................533  
Saving Files .........................................................................................533  
Recalling Files.....................................................................................535  
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds  
Color Background Setting Operations .....................................................538  
Color Background Settings Menu .......................................................538  
Basic Color Background Setting Operations.......................................538  
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap  
Basic Copy and Swap Operations.............................................................544  
Copy and Swap Menu Operations.......................................................544  
Copy by Button Operation ..................................................................545  
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.  
Misc Menu Operations...............................................................................548  
Port Settings for Control From an External Device ............................548  
Editing Keyboard Settings...................................................................549  
Side Flag Settings................................................................................550  
Safe Title Settings ...............................................................................552  
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings.......553  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
AUX Menu Operations ..............................................................................555  
AUX Bus Settings ...............................................................................555  
Status Menu ................................................................................................556  
Video Process Settings................................................................................557  
Appendix (Volume 1)  
Wipe Pattern List .......................................................................................560  
Standard Wipes....................................................................................560  
Enhanced Wipes ..................................................................................561  
Rotary Wipes.......................................................................................562  
Mosaic Wipes......................................................................................563  
Random/Diamond Dust Wipes............................................................565  
DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................................566  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .......................566  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode.......................575  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode.....................579  
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List ...............................................................580  
Index ............................................................................................................582  
Table of Contents 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Chapter 1 MVS-8000 Functions  
Introduction ................................................................................................19  
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System ....................22  
Video Processing Flow ...............................................................................24  
Signal Selection ...........................................................................................25  
Basics of Signal Selection ...................................................................26  
Bus Selection .......................................................................................26  
Signal Assignment and Selection ........................................................29  
Signal Name Display ...........................................................................33  
Transitions ...................................................................................................34  
Selecting the Next Transition ..............................................................34  
Independent Key Transitions ...............................................................37  
Transition Types ..................................................................................41  
Executing a Transition .........................................................................44  
Keys ..............................................................................................................48  
Key Types ............................................................................................48  
Key Modifiers ......................................................................................52  
Key Memory ........................................................................................56  
Key Snapshots .....................................................................................57  
Blink ....................................................................................................57  
Key Default .........................................................................................57  
Key Modify Clear ................................................................................58  
Resizer .................................................................................................58  
Wipes ...........................................................................................................60  
Types of Wipe Pattern .........................................................................60  
Pattern Mix ..........................................................................................61  
Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers ................................................63  
Wipe Snapshots ...................................................................................71  
Wipe Modify Clear ..............................................................................71  
DME Wipes .................................................................................................72  
Types of DME Wipe Pattern ...............................................................72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers .......................................80  
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects ..............................81  
DME Wipe Snapshots .........................................................................82  
DME Wipe Modify Clear ....................................................................83  
Resizer DME wipes .............................................................................83  
Frame Memory ...........................................................................................85  
Overview .............................................................................................85  
Still Image File Functions ...................................................................89  
Frame Memory Clip Function .............................................................92  
Image Data Management .....................................................................94  
Image Data Transfer ............................................................................94  
External Hard Disk Drive Access ........................................................96  
Color Backgrounds .....................................................................................97  
Copy and Swap ...........................................................................................98  
Side Flags ...................................................................................................102  
Overview ...........................................................................................102  
Side Flag Settings ..............................................................................102  
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags ..........................................103  
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags ............................104  
Video Process ............................................................................................107  
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal .....................107  
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus ...............................107  
Video Process Memory .....................................................................108  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) ....................................................................109  
Three-Dimensional Transformations .................................................110  
Transformation Operation Modes .....................................................116  
Graphics Display ...............................................................................120  
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display .............................................122  
DME Special Effects .........................................................................122  
Interpolation ......................................................................................151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Density Adjustment ...................................................................152  
Key Source Selection ........................................................................152  
Global Effects ....................................................................................152  
External Devices .......................................................................................158  
Shared Functions for External Device Control .................................158  
Control of P-Bus Devices ..................................................................159  
Control of GPI Devices .....................................................................160  
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control ....................................161  
Regions and Registers ..............................................................................165  
Regions ..............................................................................................165  
Registers ............................................................................................166  
Keyframes .................................................................................................168  
Effects ................................................................................................168  
Saving and Recalling Effects ............................................................169  
Effect Attributes ................................................................................169  
Effect Editing ....................................................................................169  
Time Settings .....................................................................................171  
Paths ..................................................................................................174  
Effect Execution ................................................................................180  
Master Timelines ...............................................................................181  
Snapshots ...................................................................................................182  
Snapshot Types ..................................................................................182  
Snapshot Attributes ...........................................................................183  
Utility .........................................................................................................185  
Shotbox ......................................................................................................186  
Setup ..........................................................................................................187  
Overview of Setup .............................................................................187  
System Setup .....................................................................................187  
Saving and Recalling Setup Data ......................................................194  
Panel Setup ........................................................................................195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switcher Setup ...................................................................................198  
DME Setup ........................................................................................202  
Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output ................................................202  
Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface ...............203  
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel  
(Option) ..................................................................................204  
Files ............................................................................................................205  
Macros .......................................................................................................210  
Overview ...........................................................................................210  
Macro Creation and Editing ..............................................................212  
Macro Execution ...............................................................................215  
Macro Timeline .................................................................................216  
Macro Editing Using Menus .............................................................218  
Macro Attachment .............................................................................218  
Menu Macros .....................................................................................222  
Color Corrector ........................................................................................223  
Simple P/P Software .................................................................................227  
Overview ...........................................................................................227  
Restrictions on Use ............................................................................227  
Multi Program 2 .......................................................................................230  
Overview ...........................................................................................230  
Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 .....................................232  
Basic Operations (Required) .............................................................232  
Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode (When Sharing a  
Switcher Bank) .......................................................................237  
Optional Operations ..........................................................................237  
Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode .....................................241  
Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode ...242  
Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode ..................................243  
Dual Link Support ....................................................................................245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This manual is the User’s Guide for the MVS-8000/8000SF Multi Format  
Switcher system. The MVS-8000 and MVS-8000SF have different numbers of  
M/E banks and input/output signals, but are otherwise functionally identical.  
This manual refers to these generically as the “MVS-8000 system,” and  
describes principally the operation of the system using the CCP-8000 series of  
center control panels.  
The User’s Guide for this system comprises two volumes.  
Contents of Volume 1  
Overview of functions of the MVS-8000 system, and basic switcher operations  
including transitions, keys, and wipes.  
Contents of Volume 2  
DME effects, snapshots, keyframes, and various operations such as setup  
which affect the overall system.  
Devices and system nomenclature  
In this manual, when discussing the principal components of the MVS-8000  
system, in place of the formal product names, abbreviated names  
characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used. When  
distinctions between system configurations must be drawn, the terms in the  
following table are used.  
Principal components and naming  
The formal product names of the principal components of the MVS-8000  
system, and the terms used in this manual are as follows.  
Formal product name  
Term used in this manual  
MVS-8000/8000SF/8000A/8000ASF/8000G/  
Switcher or switcher processor  
a)  
8000GSF Multi Format Switcher Processor  
MVE-8000 (MKS-8800)/8000A Multi Format  
DME Processor  
DME or DME processor or MVE-8000/  
8000A  
MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor  
CCP-8000-series Center Control Panel  
DCU-8000 (MKS-8700) Device Control Unit  
DCU-2000 (MKS-2700) Device Control Unit  
DME or DME processor or MVE-9000  
Control panel or center control panel  
DCU or MKS-8700  
DCU or MKS-2700  
Introduction 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a) Where there are differences among the MVS-8000/8000SF system, MVS-8000A/8000ASF  
system, and MVS-8000G/8000GSF system, these may be noted specifically in the relevant  
place.  
System nomenclature  
The following terms are used for systems, depending on the combination of  
installed options, and the signal format.  
System configuration and features  
Term for system  
System with installed option boards and  
settings to support HDTV format  
HD system  
System with installed option boards and  
settings to support SDTV format  
SD system  
A system in which the center control panel has 4M/E system  
four M/E banks  
A system in which the center control panel has 3M/E system  
three M/E banks  
A system in which the center control panel has 2M/E system  
two M/E banks  
Related manuals  
The following manuals are supplied with the individual products of the MVS-  
8000 Multi Format Switcher system.  
MVS-8400/8300/8200 Switcher Processor Pack  
• MVS-8400/8300/8200 Operation Manual  
• MVS-8400/8300/8200 Installation Manual  
MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Switcher Processor Pack  
• MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Operation Manual  
• MVS-8000A-C/8000AS-C Installation Manual  
MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Switcher Processor Pack  
• MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Operation Manual  
• MVS-8000G-C/8000GS-C Installation Manual  
MVS-8000SF-C Switcher Processor Pack  
• MVS-8000SF-C Operation Manual  
• MVS-8000SF-C Installation Manual  
MVE-8000-C DME Processor Pack  
• MVE-8000-C Operation Manual  
• MVE-8000-C Installation Manual  
MVE-8000A DME Processor Pack  
Introduction  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• MVE-8000A Operation Manual  
• MVE-8000A Installation Manual  
MVE-9000-C DME Processor Pack  
• MVE-9000-C Operation Manual  
• MVE-9000-C Installation Manual  
CCP-8000 Center Control Panel Pack  
• CCP-8000 Operation Manual  
• CCP-8000 Installation Manual  
DCU-8000 Device Control Unit Pack  
• DCU-8000 Operation Manual  
• DCU-8000 Installation Manual  
DCU-2000 Device Control Unit Pack  
• DCU-2000-C Operation Manual  
• DCU-2000-C Installation Manual  
Introduction 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format  
Switcher System  
The MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher system boasts extensible high  
performance and multifunctionality. The following are some of the principal  
features of this system.  
System configuration flexibility  
Multiformat support  
This system supports both HDTV and SDTV signal formats. The format  
selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation. The MVS-  
8000G supports either the HDTV or SDTV signal format, depending on the  
software option selection.  
Extensible system configuration  
By suitable combination of options, the switcher can be configured with  
various inputs and outputs, and different numbers of M/E banks. The system  
offers the flexibility to change and expand as required.  
You can connect up to two MVE-8000/8000A or MVE-9000 extensible DME  
processors, each of which provides any number from one to four channels, for  
a maximum of eight channels of DME functionality.  
Powerful external device interfaces  
By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar, a large system can be  
built. From the control panel, it is also possible to operate other equipment,  
including VTRs and disk recorders.  
Powerful tally system  
The complete system including routing switcher provides an all-inclusive tally  
system. The system can be adapted to different applications and settings, using  
multiple tally outputs, including both on-air and recording tallies.  
Comprehensive video manipulation  
M/E banks  
Each mix/effects bank (M/E bank) is equipped with four keyers, and each  
keyer is capable not only of chroma keying, but also independent key  
transitions separate from the background transitions. The four keys can be  
freely combined, to carry out four different program outputs.  
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Powerful frame memory functions  
In an MVS-8000 system, an HDTV system can hold 58 still image frames (88  
frames in 720P/59.94 format), and an SDTV system can store 222 frames in  
memory, while up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously.  
In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, an HDTV system can  
hold approximately 1,000 still image frames or 2,000 frames in 720P/59.94  
format, and an SDTV system can hold approximately 5,000 frames in 480i/  
59.94 format or 4,000 frames in 576i/50 format in memory, and up to eight  
frames can be recalled and used simultaneously.  
Link operation with DME  
By means of the dedicated DME interface, a range of DME functions including  
DME wipes and processed keys can be handled as switcher functions.  
By connecting two MVE-8000/8000A or MVE-9000 units, in any  
combination, you can interface to a maximum of eight DME channels.  
Note that the MVE-8000A and MVE-9000 can also be used with this system  
by connecting through an SDI interface.  
Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment  
Flexible control panel layout  
Because of its modular design, the various sections of the control panel can be  
laid out as required. This allows a flexible layout appropriate to the system  
operation.  
High-performance user interface  
The menu control block provides a large color LCD panel, with rapid touch-  
panel menu selection.  
The source name displays and buttons in the Flexi PadTM and shotbox control  
blocks have color backlit LCD displays. The signal names, and graphical  
representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide intuitive  
feedback, and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live  
operating environment.  
Features of the MVS-8000 Multi Format Switcher System 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Processing Flow  
The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a  
transition on an M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank.  
Selectcurrentbackground video  
(page 25)  
Select next transition (page 34)  
Background  
Keys 1 to 4  
Select new background video (page 25)  
Make key settings (page 48)  
Select transition type (page 41)  
Cut  
Mix  
NAM  
DME wipe  
Super  
mix  
Wipe  
Preset color  
mix  
Make wipe  
settings (page 60)  
Make DME wipe settings  
(page 72)  
Preview the effect of transition (page 46)  
Execute the transition (page 44)  
Video Processing Flow  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Signal Selection  
You carry out signal selection with the cross-point buttons in the cross-point  
control block of each M/E bank or the PGM/PST bank, and the buttons in the  
auxiliary bus control block.  
The number of buttons in each cross-point row may be 16, 24, or 32, but here  
the description is of the 32-button case as an example.  
Source name displays  
Key 2 row  
KEY4 button  
KEY3 button  
Reentry buttons  
Key 1 row  
Cross-point buttons  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
KEY3  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
KEY4  
HOLD  
MCRO  
ENBL  
MCRO  
ASGN  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
AUTO  
RUN  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
UTIL  
UTIL button  
Reentry buttons  
SHIFT button  
Background B row  
Background A row  
Cross-point control block  
Signal Selection 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basics of Signal Selection  
Each of the M/E banks, PGM/PST bank and auxiliary bus control block has 32  
cross-point buttons and three reentry buttons (four in the case of the auxiliary  
bus control block).  
These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and block,  
and a signal is assigned to each number.  
The basis of signal selection is to select, in a cross-point button row, the cross-  
point button to which is assigned the desired signal.  
Reentry buttons  
To use the output of one M/E bank as background input to another bank, use  
the reentry buttons [M/E1], [M/E2], and [M/E3] (on the auxiliary bus control  
block, [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], and [PGM]) in the cross-point control block  
of the destination bank.  
For example, to feed the output from the M/E-1 bank as the background B input  
to M/E-2, in the M/E-2 cross-point control block, press the [M/E1] button in  
the background B row.  
Bus Selection  
Each row of 32 cross-point buttons is shared by multiple buses.  
For example, in the M/E-1 bank, the key 1 row of buttons can be assigned either  
to the key 1 bus or to the key 3 bus. The [KEY3] button switches between these  
two assignments.  
To assign a bus to the cross-point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block,  
press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus.  
The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and cross-  
point button rows, and the delegation operations.  
Bank  
Bus name  
Cross-point  
button row  
Delegation operation  
a)  
a)  
M/E-1,  
M/E-2,  
M/E-3  
Background A  
row  
–
–
Background A bus  
Background B bus  
Background B  
row  
Key 1 bus  
Key 2 bus  
Key 3 bus  
Key 4 bus  
Key 1 row  
Key 2 row  
Key 1 row  
Key 2 row  
Turn off the [KEY3] button  
Turn off the [KEY4] button  
Turn on the [KEY3] button  
Turn on the [KEY4] button  
Signal Selection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
       
Bank  
Bus name  
Cross-point  
button row  
Delegation operation  
a)  
PGM/PST  
Program row  
Preset row  
–
–
Program bus  
a)  
Preset bus  
DSK 1 bus  
DSK 2 bus  
DSK 3 bus  
DSK 4 bus  
Utility 1 bus  
DSK1 row  
DSK2 row  
DSK1 row  
DSK2 row  
Turn off the [DSK3] button  
Turn off the [DSK4] button  
Turn on the [DSK3] button  
Turn on the [DSK4] button  
M/E-1,  
M/E-2,  
M/E-3,  
PGM/PST  
Background A  
row  
When [UTIL] button mode  
is Hold, hold down the  
[UTIL] button  
Utility 2 bus  
Background B  
row  
DME external video bus Key 1 row  
Hold down the [UTIL]  
button  
DME utility 1 bus  
Key 2 row  
Hold down the [UTIL]  
button, and press the  
[KEY4] button, turning it  
off  
DME utility 2 bus  
Hold down the [UTIL]  
button, and press the  
[KEY4] button, turning it  
on  
Signal Selection 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bank  
Bus name  
Cross-point  
button row  
Delegation operation  
Auxiliary  
bus control  
block  
AUX1 to AUX48 buses  
1st row, 2nd row Turn on the appropriate  
buttons in accordance with  
the signal assignment  
MONITOR 1 to  
MONITOR 8 buses  
made in the Setup menu.  
Frame memory source 1  
and frame memory  
source 2 buses  
DME 1 to DME 8 video  
buses  
DME 1 to DME 8 key  
buses  
Edit preview bus  
M/E-1 UTILITY 1 and  
M/E-1 UTILITY 2 buses  
M/E-2 UTILITY 1 and  
M/E-2 UTILITY 2 buses  
M/E-3 UTILITY 1 and  
M/E-3 UTILITY 2 buses  
P/P UTILITY 1 and P/P  
UTILITY 2 buses  
M/E-1 Key 1 fill to M/E-1  
Key 4 fill buses  
M/E-1 Key 1 source to M/  
E-1 Key 4 source buses  
M/E-2 Key 1 fill to M/E-2  
Key 4 fill buses  
M/E-2 Key 1 source to M/  
E-2 Key 4 source buses  
M/E-3 Key 1 fill to M/E-3  
Key 4 fill buses  
M/E-3 Key 1 source to  
M/E-3 Key 4 source  
buses  
DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill  
buses  
DSK 1 source to DSK 4  
source buses  
M/E-1 external DME bus  
M/E-2 external DME bus  
M/E-3 external DME bus  
P/P external DME bus  
DME UTILITY 1 and  
DME UTILITY 2 buses  
Signal Selection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
a) Dual background bus mode (see below) can be selected.  
Dual background bus mode  
In this mode, the shifted signal on the background A row can be selected on the  
key 1 row, and the shifted signal on the background B row can be selected on  
the key 2 row.  
To switch this mode on and off, it is necessary to assign this function to the  
[PRE MCRO] button in the cross-point control block.  
For details of the assignment operation, see “Overall Control Panel Settings  
(Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Note  
For the following switcher banks, dual background bus mode is not available.  
• When set to “Dual M/E Assign”  
• When M/E Config is set to “DSK”  
Signal Assignment and Selection  
Assigning signals to buttons  
Each of the 32 cross-point buttons and reentry buttons has a corresponding  
button number, to which you assign a signal.  
In addition to the signals input to the PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 80 connectors  
(1 to 34 connectors for the MVS-8000SF/8000ASF/8000GSF) on the rear  
panel of the switcher, you can also select signals generated within the switcher.  
Each button has assigned to it a video signal and a key signal, forming a pair.  
You can set these video and key combinations in a Setup menu.  
For details of Setup menu operations, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Signal Selection 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cross-point button control block button numbers  
Shift button  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
DSK3  
KSK4  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
MCRO  
ENBL  
MCRO  
ASGN  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
AUTO  
RUN  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
UTIL  
1, 2, 3, 4, .......  
....... 29, 30, 31 121 123  
....... 60, 61, 62 125 127  
(first button numbers)  
32, 33, 34, 35, .......  
(second button numbers)  
Shift button  
On each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank, each cross-point button and reentry  
button has two button numbers, and you use the shift button to switch between  
these numbers.  
In the case of a 32-button layout, the button numbers are as follows.  
Cross-point control block button numbers  
Button  
Number when the shift  
button is not pressed  
Number when the shift  
button is pressed  
From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31  
button  
32 to 62  
Reentry buttons  
121 to 123  
125 to 127  
Note  
On the MVS-8000A/8000G, you can use the rightmost button (number 32) as  
a [SIDE FLAG] button. In this case, the shift button moves one to the left, to  
number 31, and the button numbers are offset by one.  
For details of the [SIDE FLAG] button, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Switching button numbers  
The rightmost (32nd) button functions as a shift button.  
(The shift button function can be disabled in a Setup menu.)  
When selecting the signals of button numbers 1 to 31, press the cross-point  
button for the desired signal.  
To select button numbers 32 to 62, hold down the shift button, and press the  
cross-point button for the desired signal.  
Signal Selection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
 
Button numbers in the auxiliary bus control block  
2ND button  
1, 2, 3, 4, .......  
....... 29, 30, 31 121 124  
(1st row)  
LEVEL  
1
LEVEL  
2
LEVEL  
3
LEVEL  
4
RTR  
MCRO  
1
MCRO  
2
MCRO  
3
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
AUX  
3
AUX  
4
AUX  
5
AUX  
6
AUX  
7
AUX  
8
AUX  
9
AUX  
10  
AUX  
11  
AUX  
12  
AUX  
13  
AUX  
14  
AUX  
15  
AUX  
16  
AUX  
17  
AUX  
18  
AUX  
19  
AUX  
20  
AUX  
21  
AUX  
22  
AUX  
23  
AUX  
24  
AUX  
25  
AUX  
26  
AUX  
27  
DME  
UTIL1  
DME  
UTIL2  
FM  
1
FM  
2
EDIT  
PVW  
DEST  
SHIFT  
2ND  
KEY  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
P/P  
P/P  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
32, 33, 34, 35, .......  
....... 60, 61, 62 125 128  
(2nd row)  
When the [2ND] button is unlit  
The cross-point buttons and reentry buttons in the auxiliary bus control block  
have separate upper (1st row) and lower (2nd row) numbers.  
In the case of a 32-button layout, the button numbers are as follows.  
Auxiliary bus control block button numbers ([2ND] button unlit)  
Button  
Button  
Button numbers  
1 to 31  
1st row  
From the left end to the 31st button  
Reentry buttons  
121 to 124  
32 to 62  
2nd row  
From the left end to the 31st button  
Reentry buttons  
125 to 128  
When the [2ND] button is lit  
Different buses can be assigned to the 1st-row buttons and 2nd-row buttons.  
When the 32nd button is set as a shift button, the 1st-row buttons and 2nd-row  
buttons both have the following button numbers.  
Auxiliary bus control block button numbers ([2ND] button lit)  
Button  
Number when the shift  
button is not pressed  
Number when the shift  
button is pressed  
From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31  
button  
32 to 62  
Reentry buttons  
121 to 124  
125 to 128  
Inhibiting cross-point button operations  
For each cross-point button, you can temporarily inhibit operations.  
Signal Selection 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
This setting is cleared when you reset the control panel.  
Assigning a button to the function of disabling cross-point button  
operation  
You can assign the button to be used for the operation to the [PRE MCRO]  
button, in setup. (See Chapter 16, “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config  
Menu)” (Volume 2))  
You can also use the [Inhibit Set] and [Inhibit All Clear] functions, assigned to  
user preference buttons. (See Chapter 16, “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/  
Utility Menu)” (Volume 2))  
Buses for which operations can be inhibited  
This setting applies to the AUX control block and switcher bank cross-point  
buttons.  
For example, if you make the setting for one cross-point button in a switcher  
bank, this inhibits operation of all cross-point buttons with the same number in  
the following buses.  
The corresponding name also disappears from the source name display.  
• Background A, background B  
• Keys 1 to 4  
• Utility 1, utility 2  
• DME utility 1, DME utility 2  
• External DME  
To inhibit operation of a cross-point button  
Hold down the button which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the cross-point  
button whose operation you want to inhibit.  
The button you pressed flashes amber, and this makes the operation inhibited.  
Note  
Even when you inhibit operation of a cross-point button, macro attachment  
settings are still possible (see page 218).  
To clear a cross-point button operation inhibit setting  
Hold down the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned, and press the button  
whose operation is inhibited (flashing amber).  
This clears the operation inhibit setting for the button you pressed.  
To clear all operation inhibit settings  
Press the button to which “Inhibit Set” is assigned and the button to which  
“Inhibit All Clear” is assigned simultaneously.  
Signal Selection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Selection of signals linked with the audio mixer  
When you select a signal in a switcher bank background A row or AUX bus  
control block which is set to be linked with the audio mixer, the program output  
of the audio mixer follows the signal selection.  
For details of the setting, see Chapter 16, “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign  
menu)” (Volume 2).  
Note  
• For details of audio mixers that can be connected, contact your Sony service  
or sales representative.  
• When the signal is switched with a snapshot, keyframe, and so on, the audio  
mixer is not linked.  
• When bus fixed mode is selected in setup (see page 45), the audio mixer  
program output is linked to the bus output as the background.  
Signal Name Display  
You can attach a name (source name) to each signal assigned to a cross-point  
button, with a maximum of 16 characters.  
• The source name displays in the cross-point control block and auxiliary bus  
control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to  
numbers 1 to 31.  
• To display the source names for numbers 32 to 62, press the [SHIFT] button  
to the right of the source name displays.  
• To display the source names of the key signals assigned to buttons, hold  
down the [SPLIT] button in the key control block or the [KEY] button in the  
auxiliary bus control block.  
Colors of lit cross-point buttons  
In a particular row of cross-point buttons, only the last pressed button is  
effective, and lights amber or red. The amber indicates the “low tally” state,  
and the red indicates the “high tally” state, to indicate whether or not the  
selected signal appears in the final output video.  
Significance of colors of lit cross-point buttons  
Color  
Amber  
Red  
State  
Significance  
Low tally  
High tally  
Does not appear in final output video  
Appears in final output video  
Signal Selection 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transitions  
In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, the switch from the current video stream  
(appearing on the corresponding program monitor) to a new video stream is  
referred to as a transition.  
Selecting the Next Transition  
To execute a transition, it is first necessary to decide how the image will be  
changed as a result of the transition. This selection is carried out using the next  
transition selection buttons (see page 261) in the transition control block of  
each M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
For details of operations, “Basic Operating Procedure” (page 340).  
In the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can change one of the images, the  
background, and keys 1 to 4 (downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM/PST bank),  
and also vary combinations of these simultaneously.  
The following are examples of transition.  
Changing the background  
A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the  
background A bus (the current video) to the video selected on the background  
B bus (the new video).  
Transition  
Background A  
Background B  
In the default selection of flip-flop mode (see page 45), the background always  
switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus. When the transition  
completes, the cross-point selections on the A and B buses are interchanged.  
Transitions  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Inserting and deleting a key  
You can insert one or more of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/  
PST bank).  
If you select a key which is already inserted, the transition will delete the key.  
A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible.  
Key 1  
Insert  
Delete  
Key 2  
Inserting or deleting key 1 and key 2  
Key 1  
Transition  
Key 2  
Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2  
Transitions 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Simultaneously changing the background and keys  
You can change any of the four keys (downstream keys on the PGM/PST bank)  
and the background at the same time.  
Key 1  
Transition  
Key 2  
Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously  
Key 1  
Transition  
Key 2  
Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously  
Key 4  
Key 3  
Selecting the key priority  
If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video, you can check or  
change the key priority, that is to say, the order in which the keys are overlaid.  
When a key priority ([KEY PRIOR]) is selected as the next transition, you can  
also change the key priority in the new video.  
For details of this operation, see “Key Priority Setting” (page 343).  
Transitions  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The key priority values go from 1 to 4, with a higher priority key being “in  
front” as seen on the screen.  
1
2
3
4
Priority sequence on the screen  
Independent Key Transitions  
What is an independent key transition?  
In addition to common transitions, it is possible to carry out independent  
transitions on the keyers of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank. These are  
called “independent key transitions.”  
By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common  
transition, different transition types can be used for the background and keys.  
It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key  
deletion by means of a Setup menu setting.  
For details of this operation, see “Basic Independent Key Transition  
Operations” (page 364).  
The following description compares the independent key transition with a  
common transition, taking a simultaneous change of the background and key  
as an example.  
Video used in the transition  
Background B  
Background A  
Key to insert  
Transitions 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effect of a common transition  
In the case shown in the previous illustration, carrying out a common transition  
produces the following change in the image.  
Same wipe is applied to  
background and key.  
Transition type: wipe  
Effect of a common transition  
Effect of use with an independent key transition  
The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background  
changes with a common transition, providing the following result.  
Different wipe patterns are applied to  
the background and key transitions.  
Independent key  
transition type:  
wipe  
Transition type:  
wipe  
Effect of a background transition and independent key transition  
Combining other transitions with independent key transitions  
When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the  
same key, you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix (dissolve)  
(see page 41) to the key simultaneously.  
When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key  
as auto transitions (see page 45), the result depends on the timing of pressing  
the respective [AUTO TRANS] buttons.  
Transitions  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Simultaneous execution  
If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed  
simultaneously, the following is the result.  
Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent  
key transition is a mix (dissolve).  
Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key inserted, it is  
deleted simultaneously with the two transitions.  
When the common transition completes, even if the independent key  
transition is still not completed, the two end simultaneously.  
The key is deleted,  
even if the  
independent key  
transition has not  
completed.  
Wipe and mix  
(dissolve) are  
carried out  
simultaneously.  
Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions  
Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions: With the key not inserted, it  
is inserted simultaneously with the two transitions. If the common  
transition or independent key transition ends first, the other continues to  
completion.  
Wipe and mix  
(dissolve) are  
carried out  
The transitions  
continue until both  
are completed.  
simultaneously.  
Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions  
Time offset execution  
If the [AUTO TRANS] buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time  
offset, the following is the result.  
Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent  
key transition is a mix (dissolve).  
Transitions 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Time offset execution with the key inserted: With the key inserted, it is  
deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset.  
Whichever button is pressed first, when the common transition completes,  
even if the independent key transition is still not completed, the two end  
simultaneously.  
Example: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS] button  
is pressed later  
The key is deleted,  
even if the  
Common transition  
(wipe) start  
Independent key  
transition (mix) start  
independent key  
transition has not  
completed.  
Time offset execution with the key inserted  
Time offset execution with the key not inserted: With the key not inserted,  
it is inserted with the transition whose [AUTO TRANS] button is pressed  
first.  
Since the key is then in the inserted state, with the transition whose [AUTO  
TRANS] button is pressed later, the key is deleted. When the key is  
completely deleted, both transitions complete.  
Transitions  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 1: When the independent key transition [AUTO TRANS]  
button is pressed later  
Common transition Independent key The transition  
(wipe) start  
transition (mix)  
start  
completes with the  
key deleted.  
Example 2: When the common transition [AUTO TRANS] button is  
pressed later  
Independent  
key transition  
(mix) start  
Common  
transition (wipe)  
start  
The transition  
completes with the  
key deleted.  
Time offset execution with the key not inserted  
Transition Types  
Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs.  
Carry out the type selection with the transition type selection buttons in the  
transition control block of each M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
For details of this operation, see “Basic Operating Procedure” (page 340).  
The following are the transition types.  
Mix  
This is a dissolve, in which the new video progressively fades in over the  
current video, with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant. At  
the mid-point of the transition (when the fader lever is in the center position),  
the output of each is 50%.  
This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition. In  
this case, the key either dissolves in or dissolves out similarly, with the  
progress of the transition.  
Transitions 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NAM (non-additive mix)  
In this dissolve, the current video and new video signals are compared, and the  
signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output. The  
current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half of the transition as  
the new video increases progressively to 100%, then the current video is  
progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the second half with the new video  
maintained at 100% output.  
Note  
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.  
Super mix  
In this dissolve, the current video is maintained at 100% output for the first half  
of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to  
100%, then the current video is progressively reduced from 100% to zero in the  
second half with the new video maintained at 100% output.  
Note that you can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at  
the mid-point of the transition, in the range 0 to 100%. (See “Super Mix  
Settings” (page 349).)  
Note  
This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.  
Preset color mix  
This is a two-stage dissolve, comprising two transitions, the first a dissolve to  
a color matte, and the second from the color matte to the new video.  
In the first transition, the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix  
(dissolve), then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new  
video also in a mix (dissolve). You can specify the color matte by luminance,  
saturation, and hue values. (See “Color Matte Settings” (page 350).)  
Also, in place of a color matte you can use an image selected on the utility 2  
bus.  
Notes  
• This transition type is not available for an independent key transition.  
• In the multi-program mode, you can use a preset color mix only when  
selecting the background for the next transition.  
One-stroke mode and one-time mode  
• You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single  
transition. This is called “one-stroke mode.”  
Transitions  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Note  
When the bus fixed mode is selected with a Setup menu setting, a preset color  
mix is always carried out in the one-stroke mode.  
• You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed,  
the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically.  
This is called “one-time mode.”  
When only the background is changed  
Current video  
Color matte  
New video  
Preset color mix (changing background only)  
When a key is inserted  
Key fades out  
When a key is  
selected as the next  
transition  
Key  
When no key is selected  
Key fades in  
Preset color mix (transition including key)  
By means of a Setup menu setting, it is possible to preserve the key state while  
carrying out the color matte mix.  
Transitions 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When, with a key inserted, a key is selected in the next transition  
Key state preserved  
Key gradually  
Key  
removed  
Preset color mix (when set to preserve key state)  
Wipe  
A wipe replaces the current video by the new video according to a  
predetermined pattern. This transition type can also be selected for an  
independent key transition.  
For details, see “Wipes” (page 60) and Chapter 5 “Wipes” (page 437).  
DME wipe  
Using a DME effect, it is possible to obtain a transition to a new image from  
the current image, as in a wipe. You can also use this transition type as an  
independent key transition.  
For details, see “DME Wipes” (page 72) and Chapter 6 “DME Wipes” (page  
465).  
Clip transitions  
Linked to a mix (dissolve) or wipe transition, a frame memory clip (movie) is  
played back.  
Note  
The clip transition function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G.  
Cut  
A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When  
the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously.  
Executing a Transition  
There are two modes of executing a transition: an auto transition by button  
operation or a manual transition using the fader lever.  
Transitions  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
It is also possible to combine both methods, taking control with the fader lever  
of an auto transition which has partly completed, or complete a transition  
started with the fader lever as an auto transition.  
By combining common transitions with independent key transitions, different  
transition types can be applied to the background and keys, for example  
allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve. (See “Executing a  
Transition” (page 351).)  
When the audio mixer is linked in setup, you can carry out an auto transition,  
and also switch the sound with the audio mixer. (See “Transition linked to the  
audio mixer” (page 342).)  
Auto transitions  
Cut  
A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video. When  
the next transition is a key transition, the key cuts in or out instantaneously.  
Auto transition  
The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out  
automatically at a constant rate, using the transition effect selected as the  
transition type.  
You can set the transition rate in advance. (See “Setting the Transition Rate”  
(page 352).)  
Manual transitions  
Using the fader lever, you can manually control the progress of the transition.  
Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the  
transition.  
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode  
The following describes the difference between flip-flop mode and bus fixed  
mode, taking an M/E bank as an example; the functionality is the same,  
however, on the PGM/PST bank.  
Normally, when a background transition is carried out on an M/E bank, the  
signals selected on the A and B rows of cross-point buttons are interchanged at  
the end of the transition. That is to say, except during a transition, the  
background output is always from the background A bus. This is called “flip-  
flop mode.”  
The alternative is known as “bus fixed mode,” in which there is no bus  
interchange. In this mode, when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the  
output from the A bus is always 100%, and when the fader lever is at the bottom  
of its travel the output from the B bus is 100%.  
Transitions 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Flip-flop mode  
BLACK  
BLACK  
A
B
Bus fixed mode  
BLACK  
BLACK  
A
B
Fader  
lever  
Buttons lit  
BLACK  
BLACK  
A
B
Flip-flop mode and bus fixed mode  
For details of fader lever operation in bus fixed mode, see page 361.  
Transition preview  
With the preview output of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, you can check  
the effect of a transition in advance. To carry out a transition preview, press the  
[TRANS PVW] button in the transition control block. (See “Transition  
Preview” (page 363).)  
Note  
In multi-program mode, DSK mode (page 199) or bus fixed mode (page 45),  
it is not possible to carry out a transition preview.  
Pattern limit  
When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition, you can  
specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the  
transition, for each bank independently.  
When the pattern limit function is enabled, carrying out a transition results in  
the following effect for example settings.  
• When the limit value is set to 50%, the effect at the end of the transition is  
the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case  
(with the pattern limit function disabled); the wipe pattern does not complete.  
• When the limit value is set to 0%, the wipe effect is completely disabled, and  
carrying out the transition produces no change in the image.  
Transitions  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• When the limit value is set to the maximum 100%, the image changes in  
exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off, but when the  
transition is completed, the cross-point selections on the background A and  
B buses do not interchange.  
You can specify the limit value either by entering a numeric value in the menu,  
or by operating the fader lever to set the fader lever position. (See “Pattern  
Limit” (page 355).)  
Note  
The pattern limit function is not available in an independent key transition.  
Fade to black  
The PGM/PST bank provides a fade-to-black function, controlled with the  
[FTB] button in the fade to black control block. (See “Fade to Black” (page  
369).)  
Note  
In multi-program mode or DSK mode, it is possible to carry out a fade-to-black  
on a number of programs simultaneously.  
You can also make a Setup menu setting such that a fade-to-black does not  
apply to particular programs.  
For details of the setting, see “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Transitions 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an  
image or superimposed text. The signal determining how the background is cut  
out is termed “key source,” and the signal that replaces the cut-out part is  
termed “key fill.” The system component responsible for processing a key is  
referred to as a keyer.  
Each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank has four keyers, and all of these keyers  
provide the same functions.  
Key Types  
The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut  
out the background. In each bank, you can use the following key types. You  
can select the key type using the key type selection buttons in the key control  
block, or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer. (See “Key Type Setting”  
(page 379).)  
• Luminance key  
• Linear key  
• Color vector key  
• Chroma key  
• Wipe pattern key  
• Key wipe pattern key  
Luminance key  
The background is cut out according to the luminance (Y) of the key source  
signal, and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the  
background signal.  
Linear key  
This is a type of luminance key, but there is a reduced variability in gain,  
allowing more precise adjustment.  
Color vector key  
The key signal is created from a combination of the luminance and  
chrominance components of the key source signal. When perfect keying is not  
possible with a luminance key, this allows a key signal to be created even if the  
luminance level is low, provided that the colors have high saturation.  
Keys  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Clean mode  
In a luminance key, linear key or color vector key, you can enable the clean  
mode. When the clean mode is on, the key source does not affect the key fill,  
which is added unchanged to the background. This improves the keyed image  
quality, but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted  
must be completely black, or it will color the background. You set the clean  
mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer. (See “Setting the key type in  
a menu” (page 379).)  
Note that in the following situations, the clean mode goes off, and cannot be  
turned on.  
• When the key type is a pattern key  
• When key inversion is on  
• When the key fill is a matte  
• When the key edge is an outline  
• When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on  
• When fine key is on  
• When the key positioner is on  
Chroma key  
A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background, and  
the key fill is then inserted. The inserted signal is also referred to as the  
foreground, and the composite image is called a chroma key image.  
Foreground  
Background  
Chroma key image  
Normal mix and additive mix  
In creating a chroma key image, either a normal mix or an additive mix can be  
used. To select which, use the Type >Chroma Adjust menu for the keyer. (See  
“Chroma Key Composition” (page 381).)  
Keys 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Normal mix: The foreground is cut out with the key signal, and then combined  
with the background, which has also been cut out with the key signal.  
Additive mix: The background, which has been cut out with the key signal, is  
combined with the unshaped foreground. This is effective for a natural-  
looking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent  
objects.  
Plane function  
In an additive mix, the foreground is not shaped by the key signal, and  
variations in the (blue) background appear in the composite image. To prevent  
this, it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background, and  
any parts below this level are cut forcibly.  
Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include  
automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function, and manual  
adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately. The optimum  
results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma  
key function, then making any fine adjustments as required.  
The following manual adjustments are possible.  
Key active  
When this function is off, only the foreground is output and you can make  
adjustments of color cancel (see the next paragraph).  
Color cancel  
If the foreground image includes shades of the background color, turn this  
function on to remove the color from the foreground image.  
Chroma key window  
You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching  
the specified hue. When this adjustment is off the default ranges are used.  
Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color (reference  
color) in the foreground (typically a plain blue background), and the “window”  
refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified  
reference color to create the key signal.  
As seen on a vectorscope (that is, in the hue-saturation color space), the range  
for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector. This range is specified by  
two parameters: the “Angle” parameter, which determines the range of the hue  
parameter, and the “Crop” parameter, which determines the degree of  
truncation (see the following figure).  
Keys  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
a)  
Angle  
Reference color  
specified by Hue  
setting  
a)  
Crop  
Range of colors remaining  
as foreground  
Range of colors creating the key signal  
(to be replaced by background signal)  
a) The Crop and Angle values do not change even if  
you use the auto chroma key function.  
Window adjustment  
Y balance  
In normal chroma keying, the key signal is based on the chrominance  
component only, and all elements of the foreground with the same hue are  
replaced by the background. Using the Y balance function, you can specify a  
luminance level range within which the key is active, and replace the specified  
part by the background.  
You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the  
composition and the key signal for the color cancel function. When applied to  
the key signal for the composition, this produces the foreground with the color  
cancel effect applied. This can therefore be used to provide an impression of  
smoke, for example.  
When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key, the relevant  
part is output in its original color without canceling, and therefore it is possible  
to combine colors which are the same color as the background (i.e. typically  
blue) in the foreground.  
Chroma key shadow  
This function provides a more realistic treatment when the shadow of an object  
in the field of view falls on the blue background. Since parts of the blue  
background darker than a specified intensity are treated as shadows, there is no  
effect on cutting out of the foreground.  
Video signal adjustment  
You can vary the foreground signal gain, or change the hue. There are separate  
adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal, and Y and C components.  
Keys 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
For details of video adjustment operations and the adjustment items, see  
“Chroma Key Adjustments” (page 382).  
Wipe pattern key  
This uses the wipe pattern selected for a transition as the key source.  
Key wipe pattern key  
This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition as the key  
source.  
Note on wipe pattern modifiers  
In a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key, you can apply various  
modifications, depending on the pattern used, and the modifiers in common  
with a wipe.  
However, modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not  
reflected.  
Key Modifiers  
Edge modifiers  
You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key. (See “Key Edge  
Modifications” (pages 390 and 410).)  
Normal  
This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied.  
Keys  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Border  
This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key. You can adjust the  
border width and density. You can also enable the separate edge function, and  
adjust the top, bottom, left, and right border widths separately.  
Drop border  
This applies a border below and to the right for example, of the key. You can  
adjust the border width, position, and density.  
Shadow  
This applies a shadow below and to the right for example, of the key. You can  
adjust the shadow width, position, and density.  
Keys 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Outline  
This uses the outline of the original key as the key. You can adjust the width  
and density of the outline. You can also enable the separate edge function, and  
adjust the top, bottom, left, and right outline widths separately.  
Emboss  
This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key. You can adjust the  
width and position of the embossing, and the density. You can adjust the  
density separately for key fill and key edge. When embossing is on, the Fine  
Key and zabton functions go off.  
Soft edge  
This softens the edge of the key.  
Zabton  
This inserts a translucent pattern behind a key. You can adjust the pattern size,  
softness, density and color.  
Edge type and key fill/key source position  
The key edge modification function has two modes: a mode (“key drop ON  
mode”) in which the key fill/key source position moves downward, and a mode  
(“key drop OFF mode”) in which it does not move downward.  
Key drop ON mode: The key fill/key source position moves downward by  
eight scan lines or four scan lines. When a drop border or shadow is  
selected, it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key.  
Key drop OFF mode: The key fill/key source position does not move. When  
a drop border or shadow is selected, it is not possible to apply a border to  
the top edge of the key.  
In the key drop ON mode, a menu setting selects between the mode (“4H  
mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered by four scan lines,  
and the mode (“8H mode”) in which the key fill/key source position is lowered  
by eight scan lines.  
When Fine Key is on, the edge width is forced to the range 0.00 to 4.00.  
Note that in the following situations, the key drop mode is forcibly turned on.  
Keys  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• When the edge type is border, outline, or emboss  
• When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on  
• When Fine Key is on  
To fix key fill / key source in key drop off mode  
In the Edge menu, switch frame delay mode on (see page 393).  
Regardless of the fine key and edge type settings, key fill and key source are  
fixed in key drop off mode. In this mode key image has a one-frame delay.  
Notes  
• This function is only valid on the MVS-8000G/8000GSF.  
• This function uses the resizer, and therefore the normal effect of the setting  
is not obtained while using DME wipe or other effect that uses the resizer.  
Edge fill  
When a border, drop border, or shadow modifier is selected, you can select a  
signal to fill these edge effects.  
The edge fill may be either the signal from the dedicated color matte generator,  
or the signal currently selected on the utility 1 bus.  
In the case of an outline, there is no edge fill signal selection, because the key  
fill signal fills the outline, and the rest of the image remains as the background.  
For the emboss effect, in place of the edge fill signal, the emboss fill matte 1  
and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used.  
Masks  
A mask is used to inhibit the effect of a key over a part of the image. This  
allows parts of the background which would otherwise be keyed to be  
protected, or to correct the key if it is not of the desired shape.  
For details of masking operations, see “Masks” (pages 397 and 414).  
Key mask and background mask  
There are two types of mask: a key mask and a background mask.  
Key mask: This masks out a part of the key, which will result in the  
background appearing.  
Keys 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Background mask: This masks out a part of the background, which will result  
in the key fill appearing.  
Masked area (box)  
Background mask  
Key mask  
Main mask and subsidiary (“sub”) mask  
Each keyer allows two masks to be used simultaneously, and these are referred  
to as the main mask and the sub mask. The signal that determines the mask  
shape and size is termed the mask source, and different sources are used for the  
main mask and sub mask.  
Main mask: This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided  
on each keyer, or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the  
mask source.  
When the box generator is selected, a rectangular mask is formed. You can  
adjust the positions of the four sides of the box separately.  
When the pattern generator is selected, you can select the pattern and apply  
modifiers.  
Sub mask: This uses the wipe generator signal or the signal selected on the  
utility 1 bus, as the mask source.  
When the wipe generator is selected, the patterns and the pattern modifiers  
are the same as in a wipe transition.  
Key Memory  
The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross-point button  
to be automatically stored, so that the next time the same cross-point button is  
selected these settings are recalled automatically.  
There are two modes for key memory: simple mode and full mode.  
The parameters stored in each mode are as follows.  
Simple mode: key type, clean mode (including the plane setting for chroma  
keying), key position, key inversion, and adjustment values for the  
particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter, etc. This includes color  
vector key, wipe pattern key, key wipe pattern key, and chroma key.  
However, in the case of a chroma key, it excludes color cancel, Y balance,  
foreground CCR, window, and shadow.)  
Keys  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Full mode: All settings except transition (the same parameters as simple mode,  
Fine Key, key modifiers, main and sub mask settings, chroma key detailed  
settings, and so on)  
For the settings for these modes, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and  
Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Key Snapshots  
Key settings other than the key on/off status and the key priority can all be  
instantaneously saved in a dedicated register, for recall when required. A key  
snapshot comprises three values: a cross-point button number, key memory full  
mode, and independent key transition, and can be called in any combination.  
There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer.  
For details of key snapshot operations, see “Key Snapshots” (page 433).  
Blink  
The blink function provides the following effects.  
Key blink: The key is inserted and deleted at the specified frequency.  
You can also set the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which  
the key is inserted.  
Edge blink: Key fill and key edge fill are interchanged at the specified  
frequency. You can specify both the frequency and the proportion of the  
cycle for which the interchange occurs.  
The blink settings are in the Transition menu for each key. (See “Blink  
Function” (page 404).)  
Key Default  
With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their  
defaults.  
The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as  
follows.  
• Adjustment values for the particular key type (Clip, Gain, Density, Filter,  
etc.)  
In the case of chroma keying, all adjustment values return to their default  
values.  
• Key position  
• Key inversion  
Keys 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Clean mode  
For details, see “Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults” (page  
418).  
For the menu operation to return the key adjustment values to their defaults,  
see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324).  
Key Modify Clear  
A simple button operation or a menu operation returns the key settings to the  
initial status settings.  
For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On  
(Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
For the menu operation to return the key state to that set in initial status, see  
“Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324).  
Resizer  
Resizer allows you to apply DME-like effects such as image shrinking,  
magnification and movement, as well as change of the aspect ratio, to the  
processed key.  
The following functions are available.  
• Two-dimensional transformations of keys  
• Resizer interpolation settings  
• Resizer crop/border settings  
• Resizer effect settings  
(wide key border, drop shadow, edge enhance, mosaic, defocus, mask)  
Notes  
• The resizer function is supported on the MVS-8000G only.  
• The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one-frame delay.  
• Some effects of resizer are different from what you would expect of DME  
effects.  
Restrictions on the use of effects  
There are restrictions on combined use of resizer effects themselves and that  
with DME wipes.  
For details, see “Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer”  
(page 432).  
Keys  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Relation between resizer and other effects  
You cannot apply DME effects to a key for which the resizer function is  
enabled. When one of the three functions – resizer, DME wipe and DME  
effects – is enabled, the other two are disabled.  
Keys 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wipes  
A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream,  
using a wipe pattern.  
Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a “background  
wipe,” and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a “key wipe.”  
There are two types of wipe: those that can be selected in a common transition,  
and those that can be selected in an independent key transition.  
For details of independent key transitions, see page 37.  
Types of Wipe Pattern  
The patterns that can be used for a wipe are divided into a number of groups,  
as follows. Note that only the standard wipe patterns can be used for an  
independent key transition.  
For wipe patterns, see “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page  
560).  
Standard wipe patterns  
Patterns consisting of straight lines vertically, horizontally, or diagonally, and  
circular patterns.  
Enhanced wipes  
More complex shapes such as hearts, stars, and round corners.  
Rotary wipes  
These patterns involve rotation of the image about a point.  
Mosaic wipe pattern  
This divides the image into small tiles.  
Random and diamond dust wipe patterns  
These patterns consist of small random tiles, or fine particles.  
Wipes  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Pattern Mix  
You can create a new pattern by combining two selected patterns (main and  
“sub”).  
Note  
It is not possible to apply a pattern mix to an independent key transition.  
For details, see “Pattern Mix” (page 441).  
Types of pattern mix  
There are four ways in which patterns can be combined in a pattern mix, as  
follows.  
Mix: The effect of the sub pattern is applied to the main pattern, modifying the  
outline or nature of the main pattern.  
Positive NAM (+Nam): Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all  
points within the outlines of either of the main pattern and the sub pattern.  
Negative NAM (–Nam): Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all  
points within the outlines of both of the main pattern and the sub pattern.  
Mix  
Positive NAM  
Negative NAM  
Morphing: As the transition progresses, the pattern morphs from the main  
pattern, through the “mix” combination, to the sub pattern.  
Wipes 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Parameter settings  
Main pattern at 100%  
Sub pattern at 100%  
Start: Point in the course of the  
transition at which the main pattern  
is at 100%  
End: Point in the course of the transition  
at which the sub pattern is at 100%  
0.00  
100.00  
Transition (0.00 - 100.00)  
Mix ends during  
transition, which  
ends with sub  
Mix combination of  
main and sub  
patterns already  
begun  
Start  
value  
End  
value  
pattern at 100%  
90.00  
–10.00  
0.00  
Begins with main  
pattern at 100%  
Ends with sub  
pattern at 100%  
100.00  
110.00  
Transitionends  
with main and  
sub patterns  
still in mix  
Mix begins after  
transition starts  
combination  
10.00  
• A value of 0.00 corresponds to the beginning of the transition, and a value of  
100.00 to the end of the transition.  
• A negative Start value signifies that the main and sub patterns are already  
combined when the transition starts.  
• An End value of 100.00 or more signifies that the main and sub patterns are  
still combined when the transition complete.  
• If the Start and End values are the same, the main and sub patterns are  
interchanged instantaneously at the corresponding point in the transition.  
• If End is less than Start, as the transition proceeds, it changes from the sub  
pattern to the main pattern.  
Dust mix  
You can apply the effect of a diamond dust wipe to a selected pattern. You can  
also apply the diamond dust wipe effect to the pattern resulting from a pattern  
mix. (See “Pattern Mix” (page 441).)  
When the pattern mix function is off, turning dust mix on results in the main  
pattern and the diamond dust pattern being mixed. This state is the same as a  
pattern mix when the diamond dust pattern is selected for the sub pattern.  
Wipes  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Main and sub modifier link function  
When carrying out a pattern mix, it is possible to link the modifier settings for  
the main pattern and sub pattern. There are two modes for this function.  
FULL LINK (fully linked) mode  
In this mode, all modifier settings are the same for the main pattern and sub  
pattern.  
Changing the modifier settings for one pattern automatically changes the  
settings for the other.  
SEMI LINK (semi-linked) mode  
Only the parameter settings of the modifiers are linked. The modifier on/off  
settings are not linked. When the parameter values for the modifiers of the main  
pattern and sub pattern are different, then after this link mode is selected,  
changing the value of a parameter for one pattern changes the value of the  
parameter for the other pattern to maintain the same difference between the  
two.  
Note  
When carrying out a wipe transition using a pattern mix, it is recommended that  
you set the modifier link function to “FULL LINK” mode.  
If the link function is off, or SEMI LINK mode is selected, the desired effect  
may not be obtained at the start or end of the transition.  
Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers  
You can carry out a wipe with the following variations and modifications to the  
selected pattern.  
For details, see “Setting Wipe Modifiers” (page 443).  
Wipes 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Direction  
You can specify the direction of the wipe: the regular direction is referred to as  
“normal,” and the other direction as “reverse.” You can also select alternating  
directions each time the transition is completed (normal/reverse mode).  
Reverse  
Normal  
Split  
This splits the pattern, making the parts of the wipe move in opposite  
directions.  
Split off  
Split on  
The parameter Split No specifies the number of splits.  
The parameter Spacing specifies the spacing between adjacent patterns.  
Wipes  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edge  
You can apply a border to the pattern, soften the edges, or soften the applied  
border.  
In an independent key transition, only the “Soft” setting is available.  
Soft border  
Soft  
Border  
Border: You can adjust the border width.  
Soft: You can adjust the edge softness.  
Soft border: You can adjust the border width, and the softness of the inner and  
outer edges of the border.  
When a border or soft border is selected, the signal filling the border is called  
edge fill. For the edge fill, you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color  
matte generator, or the signal selected on the utility 2 bus. A matte can include  
color 1 and color 2, and a combination of the two colors (a “color mix”).  
Positioner  
You can move the wipe pattern to any position.  
Positioner off  
Positioner on  
• The parameter H Position controls the horizontal position of the pattern.  
A negative value moves the pattern to the left, and a positive value moves the  
pattern to the right.  
• The parameter V Position controls the vertical position of the pattern.  
A negative value moves the pattern down, and a positive value moves the  
pattern up.  
Rotation  
You can rotate the pattern. There are three rotation modes, as follows.  
Wipes 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Angle  
This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle.  
Angle off  
Angle on  
The parameter Angle determines the angle of pattern rotation.  
A value of –100.00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn  
counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one whole turn  
clockwise.  
With a value of 0.00 there is no rotation.  
Speed  
Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates at a fixed specified  
speed.  
The parameter Speed determines the speed of pattern rotation.  
A value of –100.00 of the parameter Speed corresponds to one turn per second  
counterclockwise; a value of +100.00 corresponds to one turn per second  
clockwise. With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.  
Magnitude  
Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the  
specified angle.  
Wipes  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The parameter Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the  
beginning of the transition.  
• A value of –100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn  
counterclockwise.  
• A value of +100.00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn  
clockwise.  
• With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.  
The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the  
course of the transition.  
• A value of –200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise.  
• A value of +200.00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise.  
• With a value of 0.00 the pattern is stationary.  
Aspect ratio  
You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern.  
Aspect off  
Aspect on  
A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern vertically; a  
positive value stretches the pattern horizontally.  
Pattern replication (“Multi”)  
The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both, up to 63  
times. You can also change the orientation of alternate copies, or change the  
position.  
“Multi” off  
“Multi” on  
Wipes 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• The parameter H Multi determines the number of pattern replications  
horizontally, and the parameter V Multi determines the number of pattern  
replications vertically.  
• The parameter Shift determines the manner of replication.  
At a value of –100.00, the pattern of the adjacent odd-numbered column on  
the left lines up with the central coordinate horizontally.  
At a value of +100.00, the pattern of the adjacent odd-numbered column on  
the right lines up with the central coordinate horizontally.  
For an independent key transition wipe, you can use the “Invert Type”  
parameter to select from the following four types of replication pattern.  
1
2
3
4
1: All replications in the same orientation  
2: Even-numbered rows staggered  
3: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted  
4: Even-numbered columns and rows inverted, and even-numbered rows  
staggered  
Pairing  
This slits the pattern into multiple strips, making it like a venetian blind.  
Pairing off  
Pairing on  
H: Create slits in the horizontal direction.  
V: Create slits in the vertical direction.  
• The parameter Width determines the width of the slits.  
• The parameter H Offset determines the spacing in the horizontal direction.  
If a negative value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move to  
the left, and the odd-numbered pairs move to the right. The value –100.00  
represents the maximum movement.  
If a positive value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move to  
Wipes  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
the right, and the odd-numbered pairs move to the left. The value +100.00  
represents the maximum movement.  
• The parameter V Offset determines the spacing in the vertical direction.  
If a negative value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move  
upward, and the odd-numbered pairs move downward. The value –100.00  
represents the maximum movement.  
If a positive value is set, the even-numbered pairs of strip and slit move  
downward, and the odd-numbered pairs move upward. The value +100.00  
represents the maximum movement.  
Modulation  
The pattern signal can be modulated, giving waves on the horizontal or vertical  
edges, or radially.  
The parameter Shape determines the form of the modulation.  
1: sine wave, 2: triangular wave, 3: rectangular wave  
Note  
When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is not  
available.  
Horizontal modulation  
This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the horizontal direction to  
edges.  
The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves.  
A value of –100.00 generates the maximum downward speed of waves, and a  
value of +100.00 the maximum upward speed.  
Wipes 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Vertical modulation  
This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the vertical direction to  
edges.  
The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves.  
A value of –100.00 generates the maximum leftward speed of waves, and a  
value of +100.00 the maximum rightward speed.  
Fringe  
This modulates the pattern, applying waviness in the radial direction to edges.  
The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves.  
A value of –100.00 generates the maximum counterclockwise speed of waves,  
and a value of +100.00 the maximum clockwise speed.  
Spring  
As the transition progresses, the edge of the pattern is subjected to barrel or  
pincushion distortion.  
Spring on  
Spring off  
Wipes  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A negative parameter value produces pincushion distortion, and a positive  
value produces barrel distortion.  
Spiral  
This deforms the pattern spirally.  
Spiral off  
Spiral on  
• The parameter Magnitude determines the size and direction of the spiral.  
A value of –100.00 represents the maximum movement in the  
counterclockwise direction, and a value of +100.00 represents the maximum  
movement in the clockwise direction.  
• The parameter Wave Speed determines the speed of the lateral waves.  
A value of –100.00 represents the maximum speed to the left, and a value of  
+100.00 represents the maximum speed to the right.  
Wipe Snapshots  
You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of  
its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required.  
There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST  
bank.  
Use the Flexi Pad control block in each switcher bank or the Menu control  
block to save and recall wipe snapshots. (For details, see “Wipe Snapshots”  
(page 460).)  
For simple transitions (see page 371), there are eight wipe snapshot registers  
on each M/E bank and the PGM/PST bank.  
Wipe Modify Clear  
By a simple operation, you can return the wipe state to that set in initial status.  
For details of the menu operation to return the wipe state to that set in initial  
status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page 324).  
Wipes 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
DME Wipes  
A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one  
video image to the next.  
There are two types of DME wipe: those which can be selected for a normal  
transition, and those which can be selected for an independent key transition.  
For independent key transitions, see page 37.  
Note  
On the MVS-8000G, it is also possible to carry out a DME wipe on a key using  
the resizer (see page 58).  
Types of DME Wipe Pattern  
The patterns used for a DME wipe fall into two broad classes.  
Preset patterns: predetermined fixed patterns  
User programmable DME patterns: patterns which you can create using  
keyframe effects  
DME wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be used  
There are three DME wipe execution modes, depending on the number of  
DME channels available: one-channel mode, two-channel mode and three-  
channel mode. The pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as  
follows.  
Execution mode  
Preset pattern numbers User programmable DME pattern  
that can be used  
numbers that can be used  
One-channel mode  
Two-channel mode  
1000 series  
1901 to 1999  
2000 series  
2901 to 2999  
Three-channel mode 3000 series  
3901 to 3999  
DME wipe pattern groups  
The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups.  
For each group (excluding user programmable DMEs), for schematic patterns  
and numbers, see “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page  
566). The black part of the pattern represents the old video, and the white part  
the new video, with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow.  
DME Wipes  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Slide: The new video slides in over the old video.  
(Pattern numbers: 1001 to 1008 (one-channel mode), 2601 to 2608 (two-  
channel mode))  
Squeeze: The new video appears squeezed over the old video, and  
progressively expands to cover it.  
(Pattern numbers: 1021 to 1031 (one-channel mode), 2621 to 2628 (two-  
channel mode))  
Split: The old video splits, and the new video appears in the gap.  
(Pattern numbers: 1011 to 1013 (one-channel mode))  
Door: The new video moves like a door closing, and progressively covers the  
old video.  
(Pattern numbers: 1041 to 1048 (one-channel mode))  
Flip tumble: The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced by the new  
video. During the transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E  
bank appears as the background.  
(Pattern numbers: 1101 to 1104, 1109, 1110, 1121, 1122, 1124, 1131 to  
1133, 1135 (one-channel mode))  
Mirror: The new video appears over the old video as a mirror effect slides in  
all four directions.  
(Pattern numbers: 1355 to 1358 (one-channel mode))  
Sphere: The new video appears wrapped around a sphere over the old video,  
then returns to the original video while unwrapping.  
(Pattern number: 1365 (one-channel mode))  
Character trail: The new video appears with a trail over the old video. Next  
this gradually returns to the original from the periphery.  
(Pattern numbers: 1371, 1372 (one-channel mode))  
Wave: The new video appears with a wave-like effect over the old video. Next  
this returns to the original video as the effect reduces.  
(Pattern numbers: 1378, 1379 (one-channel mode))  
Ripple: The new video appears over the old video like outwardly moving  
ripples.  
(Pattern number: 1381 (one-channel mode))  
Page turn: The old video moves like a page turning, and the new video appears  
behind it.  
(Pattern numbers: 1301 to 1313, 1315 to 1318, 1341 to 1345 (one-channel  
mode), 2701 to 2713, 2715 to 2718, 2741 to 2745 (two-channel mode))  
Page roll: The new video unrolls like a scroll over the old video. This is a type  
of page turn.  
(Pattern numbers: 1321 to 1333, 1335 to 1338, 1346 to 1350 (one-channel  
mode), 2721 to 2733, 2735 to 2738, 2746 to 2750 (two-channel mode))  
Frame in-out: Completed in two transitions. In the first transition, the new  
video appears, then on the second transition the new video goes out and the  
old video returns.  
(Pattern numbers: 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224 (one-channel mode), 2851  
to 2854, 2861 to 2864 (two-channel mode))  
DME Wipes 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture-in-picture: The one-channel mode and two-channel mode differ as  
follows.  
In one-channel mode, this completes in two transitions. In the first  
transition, the old video shrinks, and the new video appears behind it.  
In the second transition, the old video expands again until it is its original  
size.  
(Pattern number: 1251 (one-channel mode))  
In two-channel mode, in the first half of the transition, the old video  
shrinks, and the new video appears. In the second half of the transition, the  
new video expands, and the old video disappears. You can move the  
pattern from the current position by a relative amount. During the  
transition, the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M/E bank appears as the  
background.  
(Pattern numbers: 2651 and 2652 (two-channel mode))  
2D trans: The new video appears over the old video, while undergoing  
expansion, two-dimensional rotation and translation.  
(Pattern numbers: 1051 to 1058, 1061 to 1064, 1068 (one-channel mode))  
3D trans: In one-channel mode, the new video appears over the old video,  
while undergoing expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation.  
(Pattern numbers: 1071, 1072, 1074, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1091 to 1094 (one-  
channel mode))  
In two-channel mode, the old video changes to the new video while both  
undergo expansion, three-dimensional rotation and translation.  
(Pattern numbers: 2631 to 2634, 2642, 2644 (two-channel mode))  
Sparkle: The new video appears over the old video with a nonlinear effect  
applied, such as broken glass, explosion, or melt. Next this returns to the  
original video as the effect gradually reduces.  
(Pattern numbers: 1391, 1393, 1394, 1396, 1398, 1399 (one-channel  
mode))  
Split slide: The new video appears in strip form while sliding interleaved in the  
opposite direction over the old video.  
(Pattern numbers: 1384 to 1389 (one-channel mode))  
Mosaic: In the first half of the transition, a mosaic is gradually applied to the  
old video, then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video.  
In the second half, the mosaic effect on the new video is gradually reduced,  
returning to the original image at 100%.  
(Pattern number: 1701 (one-channel mode))  
Defocus: In the first half of the transition, the old video is gradually defocused,  
then at the 50% point the inner image changes to the new video. In the  
second half, the defocusing effect on the new video is gradually reduced,  
returning to the original image at 100%.  
(Pattern number: 1702 (one-channel mode))  
Brick: In two-channel mode, a brick such that the side surface is visible slides  
in over the old video, then rotates so that the new video can be seen.  
(Pattern numbers: 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814 (two-channel mode))  
DME Wipes  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In three-channel mode, a brick appears over the old video as the image is  
expanding and rotating, and switches to the new video.  
(Pattern number: 3601 (three-channel mode))  
User programmable DME: Using a DME keyframe effect created with a  
keyframe operation, this executes a DME wipe.  
(Pattern numbers: 1901 to 1999 (one-channel mode), 2901 to 2999 (two-  
channel mode), 3901 to 3999 (three-channel mode))  
For details of creating keyframe effects, see “Creating User  
Programmable DME Patterns” (page 483).  
Notes  
• To use the Split, Page Turn, and Page Roll effects on the MVE-8000 requires  
the optional MKS-8830M Nonlinear Effect Board.  
• In an independent key transition, the following patterns can be used.  
Execution mode  
DME wipe patterns that can be used  
One-channel mode  
Slide, split, squeeze, door, 2D trans, 3D trans, frame in-out,  
page turn, page roll, mirror, sphere, character trail, wave, ripple,  
split slide, sparkle, user programmable DME  
Two-channel mode  
Page turn, page roll  
User programmable DME in transition mode  
For the transition mode set when creating a keyframe effect for a user  
programmable DME pattern, the following can be used.  
• Single: single transition mode  
• Flip tumble (Flip Tumble): flip tumble transition mode  
• Dual: dual transition mode  
• Picture-in-picture (PinP): one-channel and two-channel picture-in-picture  
transition mode  
• Compress: a type of picture-in-picture, in which the new image is the  
background, and the currently visible image shrinks, and then expands to its  
original size. (See example in the next item.)  
• Frame in-out (Frame I/O): frame in-out transition mode. When the first  
transition completes, if you move the position of the image, you can move it  
both horizontally and vertically.  
• Frame in-out H (Frame I/O H): a type of frame in-out mode, which is  
specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction.  
The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end  
point. (See page 77.)  
The operation is carried out according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or  
1204.  
• Frame in-out V (Frame I/O V): a type of frame in-out mode, which is  
specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction.  
The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end  
point. (See page 78.)  
DME Wipes 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Transition mode “Compress”  
The change in the image when the transition mode is set to “Compress” is as  
follows, in comparison to the case of “Picture-in-picture.”  
• Example of the image change in the transition mode “Picture-in-  
picture” (one-channel mode)  
First stroke  
Second stroke  
• Example of the image change in the transition mode “Compress”  
First stroke  
Second stroke  
Transition mode “frame in-out”  
In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image  
with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions, but the image  
position at the transition start point and end point does not change.  
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.  
First transition  
completion point  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Image created  
by interpolation  
Background A  
Background B  
Effect execution  
DME Wipes  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the  
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.  
First transition  
completion point  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Image created  
by interpolation  
Background A  
Background B  
Effect execution  
State before  
modification  
Transition mode “frame in-out H”  
This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal  
direction.  
In this mode, when the first transition has completed, you can move the image  
with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image at the  
transition start point and end point also moves.  
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.  
First transition  
completion point  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Image created  
by interpolation  
Background A  
Background B  
Effect execution  
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the  
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.  
DME Wipes 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First transition  
completion point  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Image created  
by interpolation  
Background A  
Background B  
Effect execution  
State before  
modification  
Transition mode “frame in-out V”  
This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical  
direction.  
In this mode, in the state at completion of the first transition, you can move the  
image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions. The image  
at the transition start point and end point also moves.  
The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following.  
First transition  
completion point  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Image created  
by interpolation  
Background A  
Background B  
Effect execution  
DME Wipes  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At the first transition completion point, if you move the image with the  
positioner, the transition appears as in the following figure.  
First transition  
completion point  
Transition start  
Transition end  
Image created  
by interpolation  
Background A  
Effect execution  
Background B  
State before  
modification  
Signals forming part of the background for a DME wipe  
For a two-channel mode page turn, page roll, brick, frame in-out, and so on, the  
part of the pattern shown in gray (see Appendix (Volume 2)) is filled with the  
signal selected on the DME external video bus.  
For three-channel mode brick, the part of the pattern shown in dark gray is  
filled with the DME external video signal, and the light gray portion with the  
signal selected as follows.  
For a DME dedicated interface  
When the DME channel used is 3 or 4, the signal selected on the DME utility  
1 bus. For channel 7 or 8, the signal selected on the DME utility 2 bus.  
For an MVE-8000A or MVE-9000 SDI interface  
Signal selected on the AUX bus assigned in the Engineering Setup >Switcher  
>Device Interface >DME Type Setting >DME SDI interface menu. (The AUX  
bus is determined by which DME channel is being used.)  
DME Wipes 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
For the SDI interface on the MVE-8000A or MVE-9000, in some cases the  
AUX bus is used in place of the DME external bus.  
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”  
in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” section of Chapter 16 (Volume2).  
DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers  
You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary  
wipe pattern, as follows.  
For the setting operations, see “Setting DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 469).  
Direction: You can set the DME wipe direction to normal, reverse, or  
alternating normal/reverse (page 64), except for a key transition, which is  
always in normal/reverse mode. However, a key transition can only be  
specified when the following patterns are selected, and when other patterns  
are selected, this is fixed, as normal/reverse.  
Patterns: 1204, 1207, 1221 to 1224  
Edge: You can apply a border or soft border (see page 65).  
In the case of those user programmable DME patterns for keys in which an  
edge has already been applied to the effect, the bahavior is as follows.  
• When the DME wipe edge setting is on, only part of the edge applied in  
the effect is enabled, and that portion can be adjusted (page 470).  
• When the DME wipe edge setting is off, the edge applied in the effect is  
enabled as is.  
Note  
In an MVS-8000 system, edge cannot be used for a key DME wipe.  
Positioner: You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an  
arbitrary position. Using the position select function, you can also  
instantaneously move the pattern.  
• 1031  
When this pattern number is selected, with the progress of the transition  
the pattern center automatically moves initially from the set position  
toward the center of the screen (see page 65). In other words, the effect  
obtained is the same as in a normal wipe with the positioner set to  
“AUTO CENTER”.  
• 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251  
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position  
when the first transition completes.  
DME Wipes  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• 1381, 1391, 1393, 1394, 1396  
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the center of the  
transition effect.  
• 2651, 2652  
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can move the pattern for  
each channel, or with values relative to the current position the two  
channels simultaneously.  
• 2801 to 2804, 2811 to 2814  
When the these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the vertical  
position as the brick slides in.  
• 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864  
When these pattern numbers are selected, you can set the pattern position  
for each channel setting when the first transition completes.  
Pattern limit: You can restrict the range of the transition as desired. However,  
this is not available for a DME wipe in the independent key transition  
control block.  
For more details, see “Pattern Limit” (page 355).  
Size: This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is  
selected.  
• 1201 to 1208, 1221 to 1224, 1251  
• 2651, 2652, 2851 to 2854, 2861 to 2864  
You can set the size of the image.  
Crop: You can crop the image. It is also possible in 16:9 mode to crop both  
sides, to convert the image to a 4:3 aspect ratio. For the execution of a  
DME wipe crop transition, you can select from the following three  
possibilities.  
• Cut  
• Last 5%  
• Linear  
When [Last 5%] is selected, you can set the [Release Transition] as  
follows.  
• Last 30%  
• Last 5%  
• Off  
Notes  
• When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used.  
• The MVS-8000 does not support the [Last 5%] setting for [Release  
Transition].  
Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects  
The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows.  
DME Wipes 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Relation to ordinary wipes  
• DME wipes do not use the wipe generator built into the switcher. Therefore,  
during the execution of a DME wipe, you can still use a pattern produced by  
the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask.  
• A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask.  
Relation to processed keys  
When using the DME for a processed key, if you select a DME wipe, an  
available DME is automatically allocated to the DME wipe. If all of the DME  
channels are in use, then it is not possible to select a DME wipe.  
If in a Setup menu a setting has been made for DME allocation, that Setup  
menu setting takes precedence (see “Setting the assignments of DME channels  
to use on the individual M/E banks” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Relation to resizer (for MVS-8000G only)  
When resizer is enabled, it is not possible to select a DME wipe.  
For the key 1 and key 2, or key 3 and key 4 combinations, if one is used for a  
dual resizer effect, the other key cannot be used for a DME wipe.  
Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a  
single M/E bank  
DME wipes can be used in five places, including the four independent key  
transitions. When the DME dedicated interface is used, a maximum of two  
DME wipes can be used simultaneously, and when the SDI interface is used,  
only one DME wipe can be used at one time.  
Note  
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, it may be  
possible to use up to three wipes simultaneously.  
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”  
in “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” section of Chapter 16 (Volume2).  
DME Wipe Snapshots  
You can snapshot and save a DME wipe pattern together with the current  
settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when  
required.  
There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the M/E and P/P banks.  
DME Wipes  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To save and recall these registers, use the Flexi Pad control block in each  
switcher bank or the Menu control block. (See “DME Wipe Snapshots” (page  
482).)  
In the case of a simple transition system, there are eight DME wipe snapshot  
registers for each switcher bank.  
DME Wipe Modify Clear  
By a simple operation, you can return the DME wipe state to that set in initial  
status.  
For details of the menu operation to return the DME wipe state to that set in  
initial status, see “Returning to default state in function groupings” (page  
324).  
Resizer DME wipes  
Using the resizer, you can carry out key DME wipes.  
Note  
This function is supported by the MVS-8000G.  
DME wipe patterns available for resizer DME wipe  
You can use the following patterns of the DME wipe pattern one-channel mode  
that can be used in a resizer DME wipe. (7000-series numbers)  
• Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008)  
• Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031)  
• frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224)  
Relation between resizer DME wipes and other effects  
The following relations hold between resizer DME wipes and other effects.  
Relation with processed keys  
It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key for which processed  
key is enabled.  
Relation with resizer  
A resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key for which resizer is enabled.  
Additionally, a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key paired with a key  
for which the dual resizer effect is enabled. Paired keys refer to the  
DME Wipes 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
combinations of key 1 and key 2, or key 3 and key 4. For example, when a dual  
resizer effect is enabled for key 1, a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for key 2.  
DME Wipes  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Frame Memory  
Overview  
Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and  
written to memory, for further use as material for editing.  
You can also play recorded frame memory clips (movies).  
Frame capacity  
The maximum number of images that can be written to memory is as follows.  
MVS-8000 system  
HD system: 58 frames (88 frames in 720P/59.94 format)  
SD system: 222 frames  
MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system  
HD system:  
(Without ancillary data)  
Video format  
1080i/50  
Memory capacity  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 1000 frames  
Approx. 2300 frames  
Approx. 2300 frames  
1080i/59.94  
1080i/60  
1080PsF/24  
1080PsF/25  
1080PsF/29.97  
1080PsF/30  
720P/50  
720P/59.94  
(With ancillary data)  
Video format  
1080i/50  
Memory capacity  
Approx. 700 frames  
Approx. 800 frames  
Approx. 800 frames  
Approx. 600 frames  
Approx. 600 frames  
Approx. 700 frames  
1080i/59.94  
1080i/60  
1080PsF/23.976  
1080PsF/24  
1080PsF/25  
Frame Memory 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Video format  
1080PsF/29.97  
1080PsF/30  
720P/50  
Memory capacity  
Approx. 800 frames  
Approx. 800 frames  
Approx. 1400 frames  
Approx. 1700 frames  
720P/59.94  
SD system:  
(Without ancillary data)  
Video format  
480i/59.94  
576i/50  
Memory capacity  
Approx. 5600 frames  
Approx. 4800 frames  
(With ancillary data)  
Video format  
480i/59.94  
576i/50  
Memory capacity  
Approx. 4700 frames  
Approx. 3900 frames  
Note  
For the MVS-8000A and MVS-8000G, up to two frame memory boards can be  
installed (MKS-8440A for the MVS-8000A, MKS-8442G for the MVS-  
8000G). The above-stated maximum number applies when one frame memory  
board is installed.  
When two boards are installed, the figures are doubled, but of the two boards  
only one can be used for frame memory clips.  
Note that for the MVS-8000/8000SF, MVS-8000ASF and MVS-8000GSF, it  
is not possible to install two frame memory boards.  
For details of operations, see “Still Image Operations” (page 490).  
Types of image and terminology used  
The following types of image are handled in frame memory.  
Freeze image: An input image that has been frozen, but not saved to memory.  
Still image: A freeze frame that has been saved to memory as a file. Each file  
(still file) holds just one still image.  
Frame memory clip: A clip consists of a sequence of still images, which  
appears as a movie on playback. In this manual this is also referred to  
simply as a “clip.” The files (still files) constituting clips are referred to as  
a “clip file.”  
When the above distinctions are not being made, an image is simply referred  
to as an “image.”  
Frame Memory  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About extended clips  
When two frame memory boards (MKS-8440A for the MVS-8000A, MKS-  
8442G for the MVS-8000G) are installed, one is dedicated to clips. Such clips  
held in a frame memory board are called “extended clips.”  
Use of frame memory  
There are eight frame memory channels, FM1 to FM8, and each channel  
independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled.  
By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross-point buttons you can use the still image  
output or clip output from each channel as input material.  
Note  
On the MVS-8000A, an extended clip can only be recalled from FM1 or FM2.  
It is not possible to recall from FM3 to FM8. Note that this restriction does not  
apply to the MVS-8000G.  
Correspondence between input and output  
There are two buses for capturing frame memory material: the frame memory  
source 1 bus and the frame memory source 2 bus.  
These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output, FM1&2,  
FM3&4, FM5&6, and FM7&8. You can freeze a frame in each channel  
separately, or freeze in the two channels simultaneously.  
The source buses allocated to FM1 to FM8 are as follows.  
Input  
Frame memory source bus 1  
Frame memory source bus 2  
Output  
FM1  
FM3  
FM5  
FM7  
FM2  
FM4  
FM6  
FM8  
Pair mode  
By enabling the pair mode, you can link FM1 and FM2, FM3 and FM4, FM5  
and FM6, and FM7 and FM8. For example, when a freeze or image processing  
is carried out on FM1, the same operation is carried out on FM2. The same  
applies to the other pairs. When a pair of images are captured in pair mode, the  
image frozen in FM1 (3, 5, or 7) is referred to as the main file and the other  
frozen in FM2 (4, 6, or 8) is referred to as the sub file.  
Frame Memory 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Pair files and single files  
A file that can be recalled in pair mode is termed a “pair file.” A pair file can  
be created by setting pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the  
coupling function (see page 94) to combine two single files.  
A file other than a pair file is termed a “single file.” A single file can be created  
by switching off pair mode and capturing an image, or by using the separation  
function (see page 94) to split a pair file.  
Operation modes  
The frame memory has the following operation mode.  
V/K mode: When the pair mode is active, the key signal is automatically  
selected on frame memory source bus 2. This is convenient for handling  
the video and key signals together in frame memory. For example, when  
you select a video signal on frame memory source bus 1, the key signal  
assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2. You  
can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus  
2 as a key signal when processing keyframe memory 1.  
To change the pair mode or operation mode, use the Frame Memory menu.  
Frame memory folders  
Still images and clips can be managed in a maximum of twelve groups.  
Such a group is called a “frame memory folder.” Folders can be added or  
deleted, and can be given a name of up to 8 characters.  
Notes  
• This function is not supported on the MVS-8000.  
• When the system is powered off, the folder names are deleted. The folder  
names need to be saved on media.  
• The following names cannot be used for folders.  
Flash1, Flash2  
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,  
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9  
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9  
A folder named “Default” is provided, and this folder cannot be renamed or  
deleted.  
• Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the  
same name.  
Frame Memory  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Still Image File Functions  
The frame memory functions provides the following still image file functions.  
• Freezing an input image  
• Saving a still image  
• Recalling a still image  
• Processing an image  
• Image output  
• Continuously capturing images (record)  
• Recalling a continuous sequence of images (animation)  
Capturing an input image (freeze)  
As the input material for the frame memory, you can use the signal selected on  
the frame memory source bus. For this signal you can use video processing  
(video levels or hue value adjustment) or masking.  
Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FM1 to FM8, then  
carrying out a freeze captures a still image in the corresponding frame memory  
output image, and saves it in temporary memory.  
For a freeze, an image can be captured either as video frame (a “frame freeze”)  
or a video field (“field freeze”).  
Note  
When the system is powered off, any freeze images written to temporary  
memory are lost.  
Saving a still image (store)  
You can save an image in temporary memory which has been placed with the  
freeze function as a file in memory. You can save a single image in a single file  
and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file.  
Note  
The following names cannot be used:  
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,  
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9  
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9  
When the system is powered off, all the files saved in memory are erased.  
Freeze and store mode  
When this mode is set to On, the freeze and store operations occur  
simultaneously. You can set it to On in the Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store  
menu (see page 498).  
This function is not supported on the MVS-8000.  
Frame Memory 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recalling a still image (recall)  
You can recall an image file saved in memory, and allocate to any of the FM1  
to FM8 outputs.  
Processing an image  
You can combine the background image (a still image file allocated to any of  
FM1 to FM8, a freeze image written to temporary memory, or a black signal)  
and the input signal.  
The following types of processing are available.  
Pattern key: Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator, you can cut  
out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame  
memory source bus or a color matte signal. You can adjust the size and  
position of the pattern, and add modifiers.  
External key: When processing an image in FM1 (3, 5, 7), you can use the  
signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the  
background image, and fill with the signal selected on the frame memory  
source bus 1, or a color matte signal.  
When processing an image in FM2 (4, 6, 8), you can use the signal selected  
on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image, and  
fill with a color matte signal (always white).  
Note  
An external key can only be used when the pair mode is enabled (see page  
87).  
MIX: Mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory  
source bus or color matte signal. The mix ratio can be set.  
NAM: Non-additive mix the background image with the signal selected on the  
frame memory source bus or color matte signal.  
Image output  
Moving the output image (reposition function)  
For up to two channels of FM1 to FM8 (one from FM1, FM3, FM5 and FM7  
and the other from FM2, FM4, FM6 and FM8), you can move the output image  
with respect to the screen. The area of the screen around the image that has  
been moved is filled with black. There are two ways of carrying out this  
repositioning.  
Normal mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in two-pixel  
increments.  
Black and white mode: Movement in the horizontal direction is in one-pixel  
increments, and for each pixel moved the color is inverted.  
Frame Memory  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Note  
It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly  
to frame memory.  
Fixing the output image selection (lock function)  
For the output of each of FM1 to FM8, this fixes the image at the current  
output. When this lock is enabled, even if the output is recalled in a snapshot  
or keyframe, the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved.  
Continuously capturing still images (record)  
You can continuously capture (freeze) a sequence of input video frames and  
store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval.  
The name of each image recorded in this way consists of a first character string  
followed by a second string.  
First character string: A common part of name assigned to all the still images  
captured in one record operation. This string includes a maximum of four  
characters, which can be specified using a menu before carrying out the  
capture. The first string is automatically used as the clip name when the  
images are treated as a frame memory clip.  
Second character string: A four-digit number (0000 or greater), which is  
incremented each time a still image is captured.  
Notes  
• When using the record function to continuously capture frames, it is not  
possible to use the mask function.  
• On the MVS-8000, the image file name is “anmxxyyy” (“anm” is constant,  
“xx” is a two-digit number from 00 to 99 incremented by 1 for ever recording  
operation, and “yyy” is a three-digit number from 000 to 999, incremented  
by 1 for each captured image).  
Recalling a continuous sequence of still images (animation)  
You can use a continuous sequence of images captured with the record function  
as keyframes to create an effect. By executing this effect you can recall the  
continuous sequence (animation).  
Notes  
• For example, to create an effect using FM1, FM1 must be assigned to a user  
region. (For details of user region settings, see “Settings for Switcher  
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
• To execute the effect, you must assign the user region to which FM1 is  
assigned to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block.  
(For details of assigning to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad  
Frame Memory 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
control block, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
In the Frame Memory menu, effect creation follows the image file names. Of  
the eight characters in the file names, if files have the same characters except  
for the last three characters they are treated as an image file group, and the  
effect is created with the last three (numeric) characters in sequence.  
Note  
When creating the effect in pair mode (see page 87), the files used must be  
main files and sub files with the same last three (numeric) characters in the file  
name.  
Frame Memory Clip Function  
The frame memory clip function is not supported on the MVS-8000.  
What is a “frame memory clip”?  
Movies can be read into frame memory, and recalled and played back. A movie  
held in frame memory is called a “frame memory clip.”  
A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters. (For details of  
frame memory clip names, see “Continuously capturing still images (record)”  
(page 91).)  
Ancillary data  
In a frame memory clip, in addition to the video image, you can also record and  
play back ancillary data which can be used as embedded audio (MVS-8000A  
and MVS-8000G only).  
To record the ancillary data, in the Setup menu the frame memory saving mode  
must be set to “save with ancillary data” (see “Saving a frame memory clip  
including ancillary data” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).  
Notes  
• With this setting, the saving mode for still images also changes to “save with  
ancillary data,” but when playing back a still image the ancillary data is never  
played.  
• When you change the saving mode, the frame memory is initialized, and any  
existing recorded frame memory data is lost.  
When the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with ancillary data,” the  
following ancillary data status information is added to a frame memory clip.  
Frame Memory  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• Disable(d)  
In this state the ancillary data is not played. This is the status when the  
[Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu is set to Off.  
• Enable(d)  
In this state, ancillary data is present, and can be played back. This is the  
status when the [Ancillary Enable] button in the Frame Memory >Clip menu  
is set to On. This is the status after a clip recording operation.  
This status information is saved in a file, and is followed when the file is  
recalled.  
Frame memory clip settings  
For frame memory clips, you can make the following settings using a menu or  
device control block (trackball/search dial/joystick).  
• Start point  
• Stop point  
• Loop On/Off  
The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register as snapshot attributes,  
and recalled.  
Note  
On the MVS-8000A, it is only possible to replay extended clips as output from  
FM1 or FM2.  
Clip transitions  
A frame memory clip (movie) is played back, linked to a transition using a mix  
(dissolve) or wipe.  
Note  
The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS-8000A/8000G.  
The following restrictions apply to the use of a clip transition.  
• Key frame capture is not possible.  
• It is not possible to apply a pattern limit.  
• Transitions executed in two strokes, such as a preset color mix with the  
stroke mode set to Normal, or a DME wipe with a picture-in-picture pattern,  
will not execute correctly.  
• It is not possible to vary the transition rate of a clip transition.  
• Transition preview cannot be used.  
• The clip transition settings cannot be copied or swapped among the M/E and  
PGM/PST banks.  
• No instantaneous state of a clip transition can be saved as a snapshot.  
Frame Memory 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• When recalling a snapshot including a clip transition during executing  
another clip transition, the follow-on transition does not operate properly. Be  
sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot.  
Image Data Management  
Frame memory folder editing  
Create: Create a new folder.  
Delete: Specify a folder and delete it. You can also delete all folders together  
in a single operation.  
Rename folder: Rename a specified folder.  
File management  
The following operations are possible on files created to hold images.  
Delete: Specify a file to be deleted. It is also possible to delete all files  
simultaneously in a single operation.  
Rename file: Change the name of the specified file.  
Move file: Move a file from one folder to another.  
Backup: Save all files to hard disk in a single operation.  
Restore: Restore the files which have been backed up.  
Pair file processing  
Couple: You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files.  
Separate: You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or  
clip files.  
Note  
This function is not supported on the MVS-8000.  
Image Data Transfer  
Files, including ancillary data, can be transferred between such devices as a  
hard disk and memory card.  
In the File menu, files can be saved and recalled.  
It is possible to import images such as BMP files or convert frame memory files  
into a different format and save them in an external device.  
For details, see Chapter 17 “Files” (Volume 2).  
Frame Memory  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Notes on transferring multiple still images together  
• Transferring all of the still image files within frame memory together fails if  
the capacity of the memory card is too small to hold all of the images. In this  
case, replace with a larger capacity memory card, or delete still images until  
saving is possible.  
The following table roughly shows the relation between memory card  
capacity and number of images that can be saved.  
Memory card capacity  
Number of images that can be saved  
a)  
SD system  
HD system  
256 MB  
214  
46  
a) For all available signal formats except 720P  
Note that when transferring to the hard disk, there is ample capacity, so that  
problems such as this do not occur.  
• If you cancel the operation during a data transfer between frame memory and  
hard disk or memory card, then an image which was not completely  
transferred will not be reproducible. Avoid canceling such operations.  
• When loading a still image file from hard disk or memory card, if [Freeze  
Enable] in the Freeze menu is on, the loaded still image file may sometimes  
be overwritten by the frame memory input image.  
To avoid this when loading a file, ensure that [Freeze Enable] is turned off.  
Notes on saving or recalling a frame memory still image for or by  
a snapshot/keyframe  
• The saving and recalling of frame memory images for snapshots and  
keyframes is restricted to the still images or clips on the eight frame memory  
outputs. The settings made for frame memory images in the Freeze menu,  
Composite menu or other menus do not apply to snapshots or keyframes.  
• To reproduce a frame memory still image or a clip of them by recalling a  
snapshot or keyframe, you must have the same images that were present in  
the frame memory when you saved the snapshot or keyframe. Therefore,  
when saving a snapshot or keyframe using frame memory, you must also  
save the images to a storage media such as the hard disk.  
Note on transferring ancillary data  
Ancillary data is recorded when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save  
with ancillary data,” and can be saved to an external storage device such as a  
hard disk or memory card, and recalled. However, the ancillary data can only  
be saved or recalled when the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with  
ancillary data,” and when ancillary data is present in the saved or recalled  
frame memory file, and moreover when the system signal format is the same  
as the signal format in the file.  
Frame Memory 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External Hard Disk Drive Access  
In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, you can connect a hard  
disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor, to carry out the  
following operations.  
Format: Format the hard disk.  
Backup: Batch saving of files from frame memory to the hard disk.  
Restore: Restoring frame memory from files saved on the hard disk.  
Frame Memory  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Color Backgrounds  
The dedicated generators generate color signals, and these can be used as color  
backgrounds in video effects.  
Color background selection  
There are two color backgrounds, color background 1 and color background 2,  
which you use by assigning to cross-point buttons.  
Color combinations (“color mix”)  
The color generators can output the result of combining two colors, which are  
color 1 and color 2.  
Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator, color 1 and color 2 can be  
combined in the boundary region, forming a color gradation. This is referred to  
in the menu system as “color mix.”  
You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern.  
When the “color mix” function is not used, the result is a flat color, and color  
1 is always output.  
For details of operations, see “Color Background Setting Operations” (page  
538).  
Color Backgrounds 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Copy and Swap  
You can copy and swap the settings among the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST  
banks or between keyers.  
The following settings can be copied or swapped.  
• Overall settings for the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks  
• Keyer settings  
• Wipe settings in a transition control block  
• Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block  
• DME wipe settings in a transition control block  
• DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block  
• Matte data (color 1, color 2, and how to compose them)  
• Color settings  
• DME channel settings  
• Format converter input settings (copy only)  
• Format converter output settings (copy only)  
You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation. Swap  
operations, and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu  
operation.  
For details of the operations, see Chapter 9 “Copy and Swap” (page 543) and  
for color correction settings, “Copy and Swap Operations” in Chapter 19  
(Volume 2).  
M/E copy and M/E swap  
You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the M/E-1 to M/E-3,  
and PGM/PST banks.  
Target bank  
Target data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
Bank settings excluding the following data items:  
• Setup data  
M/E-3  
PGM/PST  
• Flexi Pad settings  
• Snapshots  
• Keyframe effects  
• Key snapshots  
• Key memory  
Note  
If a DME is being used on the source M/E bank, then if for example there are  
insufficient DME channels, it may not be possible to select the DME.  
There are no such restrictions on a swap.  
Copy and Swap  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Keyer copy and keyer swap  
You can carry out copy and swap operations among the 16 keyers listed in the  
following table.  
Target bank  
Target keyer  
Target data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
M/E-3  
Keys 1 to 4  
Key settings excluding the following data  
items:  
• Setup data  
• Key snapshots  
• Key memory  
PGM/PST  
Downstream keys 1 to 4  
Note  
If a DME is being used on the source keyer for a copy or either keyer for a  
swap, then if for example there are insufficient DME channels, or the limit on  
using DME channels within an M/E bank is exceeded, it may not be possible  
to select the DME.  
Wipe copy and wipe swap  
You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the banks listed in the  
following table.  
Target bank  
Target data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
M/E-3  
Wipe settings.  
It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving  
independent key transition wipe settings.  
PGM/PST  
Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition  
control block  
You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the  
following table.  
Target bank  
Target keyer  
Target data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
M/E-3  
Keys 1 to 4  
Wipe settings in the independent key  
transition control block.  
It is not, however, possible to copy or  
swap wipe settings to or from an external  
downstream keyer.  
PGM/PST  
Downstream keys 1 to 4  
DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap  
You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the banks listed in the  
following table.  
Copy and Swap 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Target bank  
Target data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
M/E-3  
DME wipe settings.  
It is not, however, possible to carry out copy or swap involving  
independent key transition DME wipe settings.  
PGM/PST  
DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key  
transition control block  
You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in  
the following table.  
Target bank  
Target keyer  
Target data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
M/E-3  
Keys 1 to 4  
DME wipe settings in the independent  
key transition control block.  
PGM/PST  
Downstream keys 1 to 4  
Matte data copy and swap  
You can copy or swap the matte data among the 38 color generators listed in  
the following table.  
Target bank  
Target keyer and data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
• Keys 1 to 4  
• Downstream keys 1 to 4  
• Matte data for key fill  
• Matte data for key edge fill  
M/E-3  
PGM/PST  
Matte data for wipe border edge  
Color background • Matte data for color background 1  
• Matte data for color background 2  
Color data copy and swap  
You can copy or swap the color data among the 152 color generators listed in  
the following table.  
Target bank  
Target keyer and data  
M/E-1  
M/E-2  
M/E-3  
• Keys 1 to 4  
• Downstream keys 1 to 4  
• Colors 1 and 2 for key fill  
• Colors 1 and 2 for key edge fill  
• “Zabton” color data  
PGM/PST  
Colors 1 and 2 for wipe border  
Color data for preset color mix  
Color background • Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1  
• Colors 1 and 2 for color background 2  
Frame memory  
• FM1 color  
• FM2 color  
Copy and Swap  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Target bank  
Target keyer and data  
DME ch1 to ch8  
• Background  
• Border  
• Sepia  
• Light  
• Shade  
• Drop shadow (other than DME ch4 and DME ch8)  
• Trail  
DME channel copy and swap  
You can copy and swap the channel data among DME channels 1 to 4 or DME  
channels 5 to 8.  
It is not possible to copy or swap the channel data between DME channels 1 to  
4 and DME channels 5 to 8.  
Copying format converter data  
On the MVS-8000G, you can copy data from one format converter input to  
another or from one output to another.  
Copy and Swap 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Side Flags  
Overview  
The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect  
ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a  
separate image selected from the utility 1 bus. (See following figure.)  
You can adjust the width of the side flag area.  
Image to fill the side flag  
areas (selected from utility 1  
bus)  
Input source with aspect ratio  
Turn the side flag  
function on  
Side flag area  
Side flag area  
Note  
The side flag function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G.  
Side Flag Settings  
To use the side flags, the following settings are required.  
Side Flags  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Input source aspect ratio, auto side flags, and auto crop settings  
Aspect ratio 4:3 setting  
Set the input signal to aspect ratio 4:3. If set to 16:9, the side flags are disabled.  
Auto side flag setting  
This function automatically applies side flags when a 4:3 signal is selected in  
the cross-point control block.  
Auto crop setting  
When carrying out a DME wipe, this function automatically crops the image  
during transition to 4:3.  
Adjusting the width of the side flag area  
You can set the left and right sides separately.  
For the operation for the above setting, see “Settings for Switcher  
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Side flag enable/disable setting  
Using the Misc menu or a button operation, you can enable or disable the side  
flags for the background bus of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST  
banks.  
For more details, see “Side Flag Settings” (page 550).  
Assigning the side flag function to a cross-point button  
To switch the side flags on and off with a button operation, it is first necessary  
to assign [SIDE FLAG] to the rightmost cross-point buttons.  
For more details, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags  
When a wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns can  
be used.  
The following illustration shows the action in a wipe.  
Side Flags 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image  
Side flag areas  
16:9 image  
4:3 image (Side flags on)  
Wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags are  
on for both images)  
Side flag areas  
Side flag areas  
4:3 image (Side flags on)  
The circles indicate the  
position of the wipe pattern  
edge when the transition is  
half finished.  
DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags  
When a DME wipe is carried out on an image with side flags, all wipe patterns  
can be used.  
Depending on the setting (On/Off) of [Auto Crop] in the Engineering Setup  
>Switcher >Config menu, the appearance of the 4:3 image changes.  
Notes  
• When using the MVE-9000/MVE-8000A through SDI interface with [Auto  
Crop] being off, side flags are not added to the new image during DME wipe.  
• For signals with the following DME wipe pattern selected on the DME  
external video bus (gray part shown in the pattern illustration), side flags are  
not applied when auto side flags are set to Off.  
– Two-channel page turn  
– Two-channel page roll  
Side Flags  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– Two-channel frame in-out  
– Two-channel brick  
– Three-channel brick  
The following illustration shows the action in a DME wipe.  
DME wipe from a 4:3 image to a 16:9 image  
Wipe action using slide (No. 1001)  
Side flag area  
Auto crop off  
Side flag areas  
Auto crop on  
16:9 image  
4:3 image (Side flags on)  
Side Flags 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME wipe from a 4:3 image to another 4:3 image (when side flags  
are on for both images)  
Wipe action using squeeze (No. 1031)  
a)  
Side flag areas  
Auto crop off  
Side flag areas  
Side flag areas  
Auto crop on  
4:3 image (Side flags on)  
4:3 image (Side flags on)  
a) When using the MVE-9000/MVE-8000A through SDI interface, side flags are not added during  
a DME wipe.  
Side Flags  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Process  
The term “video process” is applied to adjustments to the luminance and hue  
of the input video signal.  
There are two types of adjustment, depending on the application:  
• Adjustment of an individual primary input signal  
• Image effects on a particular bus  
Note  
These types of adjustment may be carried out independently. However, since  
they are implemented by the same hardware, if the same signal is subjected to  
processing twice, there may be limitations on the range of effects obtained in  
the final result.  
Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal  
For each of primary inputs 1 to 80, you can switch video process adjustments  
on or off, and can adjust the parameters (Video Gain, Y Gain, C Gain, Hue  
Delay, and Black Level) in the Setup menu. The adjustments do not, however,  
apply to the output video on the MON (monitor) bus.  
For details of the settings, see “Signal Input Settings” in Chapter 16 (Volume  
2).  
Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus  
Buses to which the adjustments apply  
For each of the following buses, you can switch video process adjustments on  
or off, and adjust the parameters.  
• Following buses in the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST banks  
– Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4  
– Background A and background B buses  
– Utility 1 and utility 2 buses  
• Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses  
• Aux 1 to 48 buses  
These settings also apply to keyframes and snapshots.  
Video Process 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Making the adjustments  
Adjust VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, and HUE DELAY  
in the following menus.  
Applicable bus  
Menu used for operation See page  
M/E-1 to M/E-3  
banks  
Key fill buses for keys M/E-1 to M/E-3 menus  
1 to 4  
page 405  
Background A and B  
buses  
Video Process menu  
page 557  
Utility 1 and 2 buses  
PGM/PST bank  
Key fill buses for  
DSK1 to DSK4  
PGM/PST menu  
page 405  
page 557  
Background A and B  
buses  
Video Process menu  
Utility 1 and 2 buses  
Frame memory source 1 and 2 buses  
Aux 1 to 48 buses  
Frame Memory menu  
AUX/MON menu  
page 498  
page 555  
Video Process Memory  
When using video process adjustments for an image effect on a bus, this  
function saves the final values for each pair number for the signals. The video  
process on/off setting is not saved.  
When you change the adjustments the values are automatically saved, and  
these last values are recalled when the pair number is selected.  
In other words, by switching video process memory on, regardless of the video  
process information for each bus, you can carry out video process adjustments  
for each input signal.  
The parameters saved are as follows.  
VIDEO GAIN, Y GAIN, BLACK LEVEL, C GAIN, HUE DELAY  
Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu.  
For details of setting operations, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and  
Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Video Process  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
DME allows you to add three-dimensional effects such as image movement,  
rotation, magnification and shrinking, as well as a wide variety of special  
effects. DME is the general name for all of these effects.  
You can use up to eight channels as dedicated DME channels. Each channel  
can be used on its own or in combination with other channels, which allows  
you to create advanced effects with more complexity.  
Functions that can be used differ with the models of DME. For details, see  
“Functional Differences With Models of DME” in the Appendix (Volume 2).  
MVE-8000A Multi Format DME Processor  
The MVE-8000A is a “Digital Multi Effects” with multi-format support.  
For the MVE-8000A, a dedicated interface (MKE-9020M) is available to  
enable the MVE-8000A to be used in an MVS-8000 series switcher.  
Installation of an optional MKE-8021A Input/Output Board in the MVE-  
8000A provides an SDI interface.  
Note  
When using the SDI interface, the following operations are required.  
• Setting the interface between the MVE-8000A and the switcher.  
See “Setting the interface between the DME and the switcher” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
• Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE-8000A (AUX bus  
outputs), and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs (reentry  
inputs). However, “Ext In” cannot be set for the DME channel.  
See “Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input” in Chapter 16 (Volume  
2).  
• Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block, but in the  
Global Effect menu.  
See “Combiner Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
MVE-9000 Multi Format DME Processor  
The MVE-9000 is a “Digital Multi Effects” with multi-format support.  
Two interfaces are available for the MVE-9000: a dedicated interface (MKE-  
9020M) for use in an MVS-8000 series switcher, and an SDI interface (MKE-  
9021M).  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note  
When using the SDI interface, the following operations are different from  
when using the dedicated interface.  
• Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE-9000 (AUX bus  
outputs), and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs (reentry  
inputs).  
See “Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input” in Chapter 16 (Volume  
2).  
• Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block, but in the  
Global Effect menu.  
See “Combiner Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
Three-Dimensional Transformations  
Transformation is the process of placing a video image in a three-dimensional  
DME coordinate space and subjecting it to manipulations such as movement,  
rotation, magnification or shrinking.  
Three-dimensional coordinate space  
Source coordinate space and target coordinate space  
Images are placed in one of two types of coordinate space: source coordinate  
space and target coordinate space.  
• The source coordinate space is a three-dimensional coordinate space with  
reference to the image itself. The x- and y-axes are defined parallel to the  
plane of the image, and the z-axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the  
image. When you move the image, the coordinate axes also move.  
• The target coordinate space is a three-dimensional coordinate space with  
reference to the output monitor screen. The x- and y-axes are defined parallel  
to the plane of the monitor screen, and the z-axis is defined perpendicular to  
the plane of the monitor screen. The coordinates do not move even if the  
image moves.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Y
Z
Y
X
X
Z
Source coordinate space  
Target coordinate space  
Source coordinate space and target coordinate space  
For example, as shown in the following figure, the image moves in a different  
direction when you move it along the x-axis of the source coordinate space and  
along the x-axis of the target coordinate space.  
Source coordinate space  
Target coordinate space  
Movement along the x-axes of the source  
coordinate space and target coordinate space  
Local coordinate space and global coordinate space  
The coordinates of an individual DME channel are called its local coordinate  
space. The coordinates common to all channels are called the global coordinate  
space.  
By switching from local to global coordinate space, you can add new  
movement to the movement of images in individual channels, and also apply  
transformation effects to multiple channels that have been combined by Global  
effects (page 152).  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rotation around y-axis in  
local coordinate space  
Rotation around y-axis in  
global coordinate space  
Local coordinate space and global coordinate space  
Three-dimensional parameters  
Three-dimensional parameters are x, y, and z values which define the position  
of an image, its axis of rotation, the position of an imaginary point of view on  
the image, and so on.  
The standard values of parameters are as follows, depending on the aspect ratio  
of your monitor (4:3 or 16:9).  
Values for 4:3 mode  
• Origin at center of image (source coordinate space) or center of monitor  
(target coordinate space)  
x = 0.00, y = 0.00, z = 0.00  
• Upper right corner of image or monitor  
When using SD format signals: x = 4.00, y = 3.00, z = 0.00  
When using HD format signals: x = 12.00, y = 9.00, z = 0.00  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
 
• Lower left corner of image or monitor  
When using SD format signals: x =–4.00, y = –3.00, z = 0.00  
When using HD format signals: x = –12.00, y = –9.00, z = 0.00  
y-axis  
z-axis +  
+3(+9) a)  
x-axis  
–4(–12) a)  
+4(+12) a)  
x-axis  
–3(–9) a)  
z-axis –  
y-axis  
The plus direction on the  
z-axis is depth into the  
image or monitor screen.  
a) The value in parentheses is for HD format.  
Values for x-, y-, and z-axes (4:3 mode)  
Values for 16:9 mode  
• Origin at center of image (source coordinate space) or center of monitor  
(target coordinate space)  
x = 0.00, y = 0.00, z = 0.00  
• Upper right corner of image or monitor  
When using SD format signals: x = 4.00, y = 2.25, z = 0.00  
When using HD format signals: x = 16.00, y = 9.00, z = 0.00  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Lower left corner of image or monitor  
When using SD format signals: x = −4.00, y = −2.25, z = 0.00  
When using HD format signals: x = −16.00, y = −9.00, z = 0.00  
y-axis  
z-axis +  
+2.25 (+9.00)a)  
x-axis  
–4.00 (–16.00)a)  
+4.00 (+16.00)a)  
x-axis  
–2.25 (–9.00)a)  
z-axis –  
y-axis  
The plus direction on the z-axis is depth  
into the image or monitor screen.  
a) The value in parentheses is for HD format.  
Values for x-, y- and z-axes (16:9 mode)  
Limits of three-dimensional parameters  
The following table shows the limits of three-dimensional transformation  
parameters.  
The three-dimensional parameters of an image change when you use the  
trackball or Z-ring to execute a transformation. You can also execute a  
transformation by entering parameter values from the numeric keypad control  
block.  
Operation mode  
Limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters  
Location XYZ  
HD format:  
–999.9999 to +999.9999  
–333.3333 to +333.3333  
–250.0000 to +250.0000  
SD  
format:  
4:3  
16:9  
Rotation, Spin  
Axis Location  
–999.9999 to +999.9999  
HD format:  
–999.9999 to +999.9999  
SD  
format:  
4:3  
–333.3333 to +333.3333  
–250.0000 to +250.0000  
16:9  
Location Size  
Aspect  
0.0000 to +999.9999  
0.0000 to +2.0000  
HD format:  
Perspective (x, y)  
–999.9999 to +999.9999  
–333.3333 to +333.3333  
–250.0000 to +250.0000  
SD  
format:  
4:3  
16:9  
Perspective (z)  
0.0000 to 999.9999  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
Operation mode  
Limits of three-dimensional transformation parameters  
Skew  
–9.9999 to +9.9999  
Detents  
The system defines points called detents at regular intervals on the three-  
dimensional space. Pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block sets  
the current three-dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points.  
(For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation Operations” in Chapter  
11 (Volume 2).)  
The following table shows the interval between successive detents for each  
transformation operation mode (see page 116).  
Operation mode  
Location XYZ  
Rotation, Spin  
Axis Location  
Location Size  
Aspect  
Detent interval  
1.0000  
0.2500  
1.0000  
0.2500  
a)  
1.0000  
Perspective (x, y)  
Perspective (z)  
1.0000  
a)  
1.0000  
Skew  
0.1000  
a) When a value is smaller than 1, 1/Aspect or 1/Perspective (z) is adjusted to an integral value.  
Three-dimensional parameter default values  
Each of the transformation operation modes has default values for three-  
dimensional parameters. If required, you can return the current value to the  
defaults by pressing the [CTR] button in the device control block twice in rapid  
succession. (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation  
Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).)  
The following table shows the default parameter values for each  
transformation operation mode.  
Operation mode  
Location XYZ  
Rotation, Spin  
Axis Location  
Location Size  
Aspect  
Default value  
0.0000  
0.0000  
0.0000  
1.0000  
1.0000  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation mode  
Default value  
Perspective (x, y)  
Perspective (z)  
0.0000  
1.0000  
Skew  
0.0000  
Resetting of parameter values set in the source coordinate space  
In some transformation operation modes, if you switch to the target coordinate  
space after setting up a three-dimensional transformation in the source  
coordinate space, the setting values in the source coordinate space (three-  
dimensional parameter values) are converted to values in the target coordinate  
space (source/target conversion).  
Once a conversion has taken place, the original source coordinate space  
parameters do not return to their original values when you switch back to the  
source coordinate space. They are reset to zeros.  
Source/target conversion occurs in the following operation modes:  
• Location XYZ  
• Rotation  
Transformation Operation Modes  
The following operation modes are available for three-dimensional DME  
transformations. These operations are carried out in the device control block  
(trackball or joystick). (For details, see “Three-Dimensional Transformation  
Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).)  
Location XYZ  
Moves the image on the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. The direction of movement  
differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source  
coordinate space or the target coordinate space.  
Image movement in the source coordinate space  
Movement on the x-axis  
Movement on the y-axis  
Movement on the z-axis  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
     
Image movement in the target coordinate space  
Movement on the x-axis  
Movement on the y-axis  
Movement on the z-axis  
Rotation  
Rotates the image on the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis. The type of rotation differs  
depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate  
space or the target coordinate space.  
Image rotation in the source coordinate space  
Rotation around the y-axis Rotation around the x-axis Rotation around the z-axis  
Image rotation in the target coordinate space  
Rotation around the y-axis  
Rotation around the x-axis Rotation around the z-axis  
Spin  
When rotating the image in Rotation mode, it may not always be possible to  
achieve the kind of rotation around an axis that you want. Combining Rotation  
mode with Spin mode creates an effect that rotates the image around a specified  
axis. The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space. (The  
way the image rotates around an axis is the same as in Rotation mode.)  
Axis Location  
Moves an axis of rotation in the source coordinate space.  
Axis movement  
Z
Y
Z'  
Y'  
Z'  
Z
Y
X
X
Y'  
X'  
X'  
Movement on the y-axis  
Movement on the x-axis  
Movement on the z-axis  
Location Size  
Changes the size of the whole image.  
• Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the source coordinate  
space is done in three-dimensional space, magnifying the image emphasizes  
the sense of perspective.  
• Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the target coordinate  
space is a conversion of the two-dimensional image displayed on the  
monitor, shrinking and magnification does not change the shape of the  
image.  
Magnification and shrinking in the source coordinate space  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
   
Magnification and shrinking in the target coordinate space  
Aspect  
In the source coordinate space, changes the aspect ratio in the x-axis direction  
and y-axis direction, either independently or simultaneously.  
Change of aspect ratio in  
x-axis direction  
Change of aspect ratio in Simultaneous change  
y-axis direction  
aspect ratio in x-axis  
direction and y-axis direction  
Perspective  
In the target coordinate space, changes the perspective on the image by  
changing an imaginary view point, without changing the position of the image.  
The x-axis and y-axis values define the position of the view point. The z-axis  
value defines its distance from the image.  
Change of view point on  
x-axis  
Change of view point on y-  
axis  
Change of distance from  
view point to image  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Skew  
In the source coordinate space, change the skew of the image on the x-axis or  
y-axis.  
Change of skew on x-axis  
Change of skew on y-axis  
Graphics Display  
Graphics display is a function that allows you to display wire frames,  
coordinate axes and a grid over the current DME image, to make it easier to  
create effects in three-dimensional coordinate space.  
Graphics displayed by this function can also be output to the monitor output  
connector.  
Note  
On the MVE-8000 and the MVE-8000A (when using the DME dedicated  
interface), these graphics cannot be output to the monitor output connector.  
To make graphics display settings, use the DME menu. (For details, see  
“Graphics Display” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).)  
You can display the following kinds of graphics.  
Wire frames  
A wire frame displays an image enclosed in a frames, so that you can check the  
position and size of the image. If there is a shadow (see page 157), a frame is  
shown for the shadow as well.  
Coordinate axes  
This is a three-dimensional display of coordinates in local or global coordinate  
space. You can check the origin of the axes and the directions of the x-, y-, and  
z-axes.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
         
Channel ID  
This displays the channel number so that you can check which channel you are  
using, a useful feature when you are working with multiple channels.  
Channel IDs are displayed differently in local and global coordinate space.  
• In local coordinate space, the channel number is displayed along with “F” or  
“B” to indicate whether you are looking at the front (F) or back (B) of the  
current wire frame. For example, “1F” means the front of the wire frame on  
channel 1 in local coordinate space.  
• In global coordinate space, the channel number is displayed along with “G”  
to indicate global. For example, “G2” means channel 2 in global coordinate  
space.  
Local coordinate space axes  
Channel ID  
Wire frame  
Wire frame, local coordinate space axes, and channel ID  
Grid  
This is a grid pattern representing the whole of the monitor screen. The grid  
makes it easy to set the position of an image in two-dimensional coordinates.  
–4 –3 –2 –1  
0
+1 +2 +3 +4  
+3  
+2  
+1  
0
–1  
–2  
–3  
Grid (SD format, 4:3 mode)  
Shrinking the graphics display  
You can shrink the graphics display so that you can see beyond the range  
displayed on the normal monitor screen. This makes it possible to visually set  
the location of images in a larger space. The range displayed on a normal  
monitor screen is indicated by a frame.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wire frame  
Range displayed  
on normal monitor  
screen  
To automatically erase the graphic display  
Turn Auto Erase on. The graphic display is erased automatically whenever a  
keyframe is executed. It is displayed again after the keyframe ends, after the  
time set in Recovery Time.  
Flex Shadow center axis  
When using the Flex Shadow function (see page 125), turn Flex Shadow Axis  
on to display the Flex Shadow center axis. This is an effective aid in making  
settings for this function.  
Note  
The Flex Shadow center axis function is not supported on the MVE-8000/  
8000A.  
Three-Dimensional Parameter Display  
You can display a three-dimensional parameter list for the currently controlled  
image. When more than one DME channel is selected, the status of the  
reference channel is displayed.  
For the method of displaying a parameter list and an example display, see  
“Three-Dimensional Parameter Display” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
DME Special Effects  
You can use DME to add a variety of special effects. To add effects, use the  
DME menu. (See “DME Special Effect Operations” in Chapter 11 (Volume  
2).)  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Border  
This effect adds a border to the image frame. You can adjust the width (or  
thickness) of the border, its color, and the softness of the border edges.  
Crop  
This effect crops away the edges of the image. You can crop the top, bottom,  
left, and right sides individually or all together. You can also soften the cropped  
edges.  
Defocus  
Defocuses the whole image. The degree of defocusing can be set  
simultaneously or separately for video and key signals. (However, when the  
DME dedicated interface is used, the degree of defocusing can be set for video  
signals only.) You can also cancel the black level leaking that occurs at the  
edge of the screen when the Defocus effect is used.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Blur  
Applies a rounded blurring to the whole image.  
Beveled Edge  
This gives an image a beveled edge. You can set the edge width and color. The  
inner edge softness and edge boundary softness can also be set.  
Color  
Light  
Key Border  
This effect adds borders to keys or gives a key consisting of an outline only.  
Note  
The Key Border function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Art Edge  
Adds edges to the inner and outer side of the input image.  
The following items can be set.  
• Art edge width and position  
• Separate softening of the art edge inner and outer sides  
• Color of art edges  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
       
Examples of Art Edge source  
Gradation Matte  
Radial Gradation  
Rainbow Matte  
Radial Rainbow  
Example effect using Art Edge source [Rainbow Matte]  
Note  
The Art Edge function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Flex Shadow  
This effect allows a shadow to be added to the image using only one DME  
channel.  
The following settings can be made for the shadow.  
• The signal to use for the shadow  
– External: Generate shadow using input key signal.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– Internal: Generate shadow using an internally generated, full-size DME  
key signal.  
• Shadow shrinking and magnification  
• Shadow position  
• Shadow color and density  
• Center axis of deformation  
• Shadow slant and perspective  
External  
Internal  
Note  
The Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Wipe crop  
This effect crops the video image to be visible inside or outside a wipe pattern.  
Background  
When Invert is On  
Video image  
Note  
The Wipe Crop function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
 
Color mix  
This is a combination of two colors with a pattern generator. This color mix  
signal can be used to fill parts such as a background or border.  
Color 2  
Color 1  
Note  
The Color Mix function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Multi Move  
Shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally.  
You can specify the center point of the shrinking, the shrinking ratio, and the  
aspect ratio of the image screen.  
Sepia  
Mono  
Overlays a specified color onto the image. You can adjust the sepia color that  
is overlaid, and specify the degree of mixing between the original image and  
the sepia image.  
Converts the image into a monochrome image.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Posterization  
Coarsens the luminance gradations of the image, for a painting-like effect. You  
can specify the degree of luminance coarsening.  
Solarization  
Like the Posterization effect, creates a painting-like effect, but does so by  
coarsening the chroma gradations of the image. You can specify the degree of  
chroma coarsening.  
Nega  
Reverses the luminance and/or chroma of the image.  
Contrast  
Mosaic  
Changes the contrast of the luminance and/or chroma of the image.  
Divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic. You can specify  
the size and aspect ratio of the tiles.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
         
Sketch  
Provides a sketch-like effect based on the outlines of the image, using different  
touches such as sketch, edge color, drawing, relief, and sharp.  
Sketch  
Note  
The Sketch function is not supported on the MVE-8000.  
Metal  
Provides a metallic gloss like that from gold, silver, or a rainbow colored  
surface. A metallic gloss can also be given to a freely selected color.  
Note  
The Metal function is not supported on the MVE-8000.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dim and Fade  
Dim makes the picture progressively dimmer into its depths. Fade  
progressively makes the depths of the picture fade into the background.  
Fade  
Note  
The Dim and Fade functions are not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Glow  
Softens the edges of highlights, giving an effect like being struck by a soft light.  
Note  
The Glow function is not supported on the MVE-8000.  
Mask  
Masks part of the image so that special effects are applied only inside a selected  
pattern.  
The mask function is applied in units made up of the following groups.  
The Mask effect can be applied using effect group 1 and effect group 2  
simultaneously.  
Effect group 1: Posterization, Solarization, Nega, Sepia, Mono, Contrast,  
Mosaic, Sketch, Metal  
Effect group 2: Defocus, Blur, Glow  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
     
Effect video  
image (Mosaic)  
Effect video  
image (Mosaic)  
Video image  
Video image  
Mask (normal)  
Mask (invert)  
Notes  
• The Mask function is not supported on the MVE-8000.  
• On the MVE-8000A, the Mask function cannot be applied to both effect  
group 1 and effect group 2 simultaneously.  
Freeze  
Freezes the input video. The following types are available:  
Hard Freeze: Freezes the input video at an arbitrary timing.  
Time Strobe: Freezes the input video at specified intervals for a specified  
length.  
Film: Slows the apparent frame rate, for an effect like film. You can specify  
the ratio of advancement.  
For Hard Freeze and Time Strobe, you can select the first field or the frame as  
the freeze timing.  
Nonlinear Effects  
You can add a variety of effects, including effects that change the shape of the  
image as a whole.  
The following nonlinear effects are available.  
For more information about settings and operations with nonlinear effects, see  
“Nonlinear Effect Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
Note  
It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time.  
Turning any nonlinear effect on automatically turns all other nonlinear effects  
off.  
Wave  
Produces a wave-like effect in the image.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of the  
waves, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the range. In H&V  
mode, you can also set the wave angle.  
Note  
When 720P/59.94 signal format is used, the wave effect is not supported on the  
MVE-8000.  
Mosaic Glass  
Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval.  
There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of  
waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the  
range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle.  
.
Flag  
Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind.  
There are two modes: H&V and Size. You can set the size and frequency of  
waves in the image, the wave form, the amount of wave movement, and the  
range. In H&V mode, you can also set the wave angle.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
   
Twist  
Twists the image.  
You can twist the image in the horizontal or vertical direction.  
You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image, the wave form, the  
amount of wave movement, and other parameters.  
Ripple  
Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image.  
There are four modes: Radial, Angular, Both, and Shape. The direction of  
modulation differs depending on the mode. You can set the size and frequency  
of the ripples, their direction and speed, their center point, and other  
parameters. In Shape mode, you can select ripple shapes other than circles  
(stars, etc.).  
Rings  
Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the same direction.  
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance  
moved by each block, the amount of movement, the width of the partitions, the  
degree of randomness in partition width, the center point, the starting angle,  
and other parameters.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Broken Glass  
Partitions the image like broken glass, with shards flying outward.  
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance  
moved by each block, the amount of movement, the width of the partitions, the  
degree of randomness in partition width, the center point, the starting angle,  
and other parameters.  
You can also fix the direction in which shards scatter.  
Flying Bar  
Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks as they move.  
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance  
moved by each block, the direction of movement, the width of the partitions,  
the degree of randomness in partition width, the partition angle, and other  
parameters.  
Blind  
Divides the image into bars or wedges, with blocks rotating like the slats of  
venetian blinds.  
There are two modes: Bar and Wedge. You can set the number of rotations by  
blocks, the perspective, the width and position of blocks, the direction, the  
center position, and other parameters.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
     
Split  
Splits the image upper and lower, left and right.  
You can set the degree to which the image is split, the split positions, and other  
parameters.  
Split Slide  
Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in reverse directions.  
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of randomness in the distance  
moved by each block, the degree of sliding, block width, block angle, and other  
parameters.  
Mirror  
Partitions the image vertically and horizontally, creating an image like a  
reflection in a mirror.  
You can choose to reflect in the directions left to right, right to left, bottom to  
top, top to bottom, or any combination of directions. You can also set the  
position of the border between original and reflections.  
Multi Mirror  
Divides the image into originals and reflections, lining them up vertically and  
horizontally.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
You can set the width of the original, the center position of the original, the  
offset of the image with fixed mirrors, the direction of the mirrors, and other  
parameters.  
Kaleidoscope  
Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope.  
You can set the number of blocks, the partition reference point and angle,  
horizontal and vertical offsets, a reflection position, and other parameters.  
Lens  
Creates an image like a view through a lens.  
You can set the shape and aspect ratio of the lens, the angle, the magnification  
ratio, the curve ratio, the size, the center position, and other parameters.  
You can also choose to display only the portion of the image that is seen  
through the lens.  
Circle  
Makes a circle with the image.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
     
You can set the size of the circle, and make the axis of modulation vertical.  
Panorama  
Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of  
perspective.  
You can set the horizontal and vertical curve ratio, and the curve center  
position.  
Page Turn  
Turns the image like a turning page.  
There are four modes: H&V, H, V, and Off. You can select the turn position,  
the radius of the turned portion, the amount and angle of turning, and the input  
video for the front and back pages.  
Roll  
Rolls the image up.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
There are four modes: H&V, H, V, and Off. You can select the turn position,  
the radius of the turned portion, the amount and angle of turning, and the input  
video for the front and back pages.  
Cylinder  
Winds the whole image onto a cylinder.  
You can set the degree of winding onto the cylinder, the radius, the horizontal  
position of the wound image, and front and back side output for the image.  
Sphere  
Winds the whole image onto a sphere.  
You can set the degree of winding onto the sphere, the radius, the horizontal  
position of the wound image, and front and back side output for the image.  
Note  
You cannot monitor the part of a rotating sphere that corresponds to its axis on  
the monitor screen.  
Explosion  
Divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
     
You can set the pattern shape and aspect ratio, the center position, the amount  
of movement by fragments, the curvature of the transition path, and other  
parameters.  
Swirl  
Swirls the image.  
You can set the amount of swirl, the swirl region, the amount of rotation, and  
the swirl center position.  
Melt  
Melts the image away from a specified part.  
You can set the degree of transition, the degree of extension in the image, the  
jaggedness of the melting sections, and the amplitude, frequency, amount of  
movement, and speed of the melting sections. You can also set the slant of the  
borders, the shape of the sections that begin to melt, and other parameters.  
Character Trail  
Extends the edge of the image like a trail.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can set the effect starting position, the degree of expansion, the slant angle  
of the effect region, and trail direction, the degree to which the image  
disappears, the trail type and amount of stardust, and other parameters.  
Lighting  
Provides the effect of light striking the image. You can specify the intensity and  
color of the light and the lighting pattern. The following lighting patterns are  
available:  
Plane: Illumination of the entire screen.  
Bar: Bar illumination. You can specify the width and angle of the bar, and its  
softness.  
Preset: Lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects.  
When Bar is selected, the following modes can be selected.  
Specular  
Mat  
Normal  
Normal: Emphasizes the bar highlight area.  
Specular: An effect like light striking a surface with metallic reflections.  
Mat: An effect like light striking paper, cloth, or another diffusively reflective  
surface.  
Note  
The function for setting the bar mode of the lighting area is not supported on  
the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
 
Combine Shadow  
When there are several images, adds a flex shadow in the depth of an image or  
overlays multiple flex shadows.  
Example 1: When Flex Shadow is enabled on both of two channels.  
Video  
Video  
Over  
Under  
Shadow  
Shadow  
No combine shadow is set.  
Over  
Under  
Over  
Under  
Combine shadow is enabled.  
Density is set to 100.00.  
Combine shadow is enabled.  
Density is set to 0.00.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 2: Flex Shadow is enabled on one channel only.  
Video Video  
Over  
Under  
Shadow  
No combine shadow is set.  
Over  
Under  
Over  
Under  
Combine shadow is enabled.  
Density is set to 100.00.  
Combine shadow is enabled.  
Density is set to 0.00.  
Trail  
Recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of  
afterimages is created. You can make the afterimages stardust trails.  
Note  
Of the three effects of trail, motion decay and keyframe strobe, only one can be  
on at a time. When one of them is on, turning another of them on automatically  
turns off the one that has been on.  
Motion Decay  
Blurs the motion of a moving video by creating afterimages of the moving  
video. (See “Note” in the preceding section “Trail.”)  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
   
You can make the afterimages stardust trails.  
Keyframe Strobe  
Freezes the video each time the effect passes a keyframe. (See “Note” in the  
section “Trail.”)  
You can make the afterimages stardust trails.  
Wind  
This effect strobes the image at regular intervals, and moves the frozen image  
in a fixed direction, leaving an afterimage.  
Note  
The Wind function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Spotlighting  
Creates the effect of a spotlight striking the surface of the image.  
You can set up to three light sources (lights 1 to 3).  
Notes  
• The Spotlighting function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
• The BZDM-9050 Texture Lighting Software (for MVE-9000) is required to  
set lights 2 and 3.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adjustments to the image surface  
The following adjustments can be made to the image surface struck by the  
light.  
• Adjusting the brightness of the whole image  
• Selecting the image surface effect  
Flat: The image surface is unchanged, causing the selected light source to  
appear as the effect.  
Texture: A texture appears on the surface of the image. Textures can be  
selected from among 30 patterns.  
See the appendix “Texture Patterns” (Volume 2) for the texture  
patterns.  
Non Linear: Spotlighting effect is applied to an area to which a DME  
nonlinear effect is applied.  
Note  
The BZDM-9050 is required to enable Texture and Non Linear settings.  
• Test sphere function  
A test sphere is a translucent sphere virtually embedded in the center of the  
input picture to provide an intuitive way for you to check the position and  
direction of the spotlight. When you change the position or direction of a  
light source, the side of the sphere closest to the light source grows brighter.  
You can easily check the position and direction of the light source by  
viewing the test sphere.  
For more information about test sphere, see “Relation between test spheres  
and parallel rays” (page 148).  
• Adjusting the bumpiness of the image surface  
• Coordinate axis on surface of image  
Specify where to apply the texture or test sphere on the image surface.  
Move: The texture moves together with the DME image.  
Image before movement  
Coordinate axis = Move  
Texture moves together  
with DME image.  
Fix: The texture does not move, even if the DME image moves.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
Image before movement  
Coordinate axis = Fix  
Texture does not move, even  
if DME image moves.  
• Texture deformations  
You can change the texture pattern, position, and size, and use the repetition  
function.  
The following figure shows examples of a texture pattern repeated in the X  
and Y directions.  
Original image  
Repetition in X  
direction  
Repetition in Y  
direction  
Repetition in X and Y  
directions  
Setting lights  
• Light source types  
The following type of light sources are available (see figure).  
Parallel: Parallel light source  
Point: Point light source. As the light source is placed further away, the  
illuminated range becomes wider and the light become weaker.  
Line: Line light source  
Whole: Non-directional light source which illuminates the whole image.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light source  
Light source  
Light source  
Parallel  
Point  
Line  
Whole  
• Linking and unlinking image and spotlight  
The spotlight can move together with a DME image, or be fixed in place.  
Source: Place the light source in source coordinate space. The spotlight is  
linked and moves when the image moves.  
Target: Place the light source in target coordinate space. The spotlight  
does not move, even when the image moves.  
Spotlight  
Image before movement  
Coordinate axis = Source Coordinate axis = Target  
Spotlight moves together Spotlight does not move,  
with DME image.  
even if DME image  
moves.  
• Selecting the lighted area  
You can select the area lit by the spotlight.  
FRGD: The light strikes the image foreground.  
BKGD: The light strikes the image background.  
Both: The light strikes both foreground and background.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
Background  
Spotlight  
Foreground  
No effect  
FRGD selected  
BKGD selected  
Both selected  
• Surface Flat  
For the currently selected light source only, you can forcibly make the image  
surface effect flat.  
This is effective when you have selected texture as image surface effect and  
want a flat effect for one light source only.  
• Light shape  
Creates the light shape.  
– Select the shape pattern  
For shape patterns, see the appendix “Shape Patterns” (Volume 2).  
– Set the size, degree of deformation, softness, and rotation.  
• Ring settings  
Shines the light with a hole in the middle, like a doughnut. Adjust the  
following parameters.  
Offset: Distance to move the center of the ring from the initial position (the  
position set when selecting the light source in the <Spot Mode>  
group).  
Radius: Inner side radius of the ring.  
Angle: When an Offset is set, the rotation angle of the ring around the  
initial center position.  
Angle: Rotation angle  
Initial center position  
Angle  
Radius  
Offset  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Fill blending modes  
Specifies the way in which the light is blended with the image.  
Mix: Light as if reflected from a mirror. The light can be given a color.  
Multiply: Light as if reflected from a dull surface (diffuse reflection).  
Relation between test spheres and parallel rays  
The following figure shows an example of the effect of parallel rays on a test  
sphere.  
Test sphere  
Ray  
The direction of a ray is defined by longitude and latitude.  
• Longitude: A direction (angle), expressed as a plus value for clockwise  
rotation in the plus direction with respect to the X axis of the input picture.  
• Latitude: Latitude  
The following figure shows the relationships between the longitude and  
latitude of parallel rays, input picture, and test sphere.  
Z-axis  
Latitude=+0.25  
Parallel rays  
Latitude  
X-axis  
0.00  
Longitude  
0.00  
Input picture  
Y-axis  
Test sphere  
Latitude=−0.25  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
 
The unit of these direction parameters is the number of rotations, with 360°  
(1 rotation) expressed as 1.00, in the same way as 3D rotation parameters.  
The following relationships apply in the example shown in the figure.  
Parameter  
Longitude  
Latitude  
Setting  
0.12  
Angle  
45°  
0.12  
45°  
The fractional part of the setting after the decimal point corresponds to an angle  
0 to 360°. If the fractional parts of two setting values are the same, the effect is  
the same even if the integral parts are different.  
The integral part of a setting value is used when moving a light source with  
keyframes.  
For example, when the longitude of a light source rotates in the clockwise  
direction from 0.88 (315°) to 0.12 (45°), it rotates in the counterclockwise  
direction (the angle grows smaller) if the above values are used. In this case,  
the value of the second keyframe can be set to 1.12 (330° + 45°).  
KF1 = 0.88  
KF2 = 0.12  
Test sphere  
KF2 = 1.12  
Keyframe trajectory  
User texture pattern  
In the spotlighting function, a user generated texture pattern can now be  
selected for the pattern with which the light falls on the image surface.  
To add a texture pattern, create a texture package from a bitmap file, and install  
it.  
The installed texture pattern can be selected in the same way as the texture  
patterns provided by default.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
The user texture pattern function is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
For details of spotlighting, see page 143.  
For details of how to create a user texture pattern, see “Adding user texture  
patterns” in Chpater 16 (Volume 2) , and for how to select a pattern once  
created, see “To select a texture pattern” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
Background  
Adds a color or inputs an external signal to the background of the image.  
Note  
Signal selection for this purpose is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Separate Sides  
Applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the  
image.  
Back  
Front  
Front and back sides  
Shaped Video  
For each of the front and back sides of the image, specifies whether to handle  
input video from the switcher as shaped video (key processed signals).  
Note  
The shaped video function can only be used with the MVE-8000A/9000 (SDI  
interface).  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
       
Invert  
Inverts the input video signal and/or key signal horizontally or vertically. You  
can make separate settings for the front and back.  
Horizontal inversion  
Input signal  
Vertical inversion  
Inversion of input signal  
Interpolation  
Specifies the methods used for interpolation processing of input video signals  
and input key signals.  
For input video signals, you can select from the following four methods.  
• Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance signals separately, and  
switch automatically between fields and frames. You can select the degree of  
change detection.  
• Detect changes in the luminance signal separately, and switch automatically  
between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection.  
• Do interpolation in field units.  
• Do interpolation in frame units.  
For input key signals, you can select from the following three methods.  
• Detect changes in the luminance signal separately, and switch automatically  
between fields and frames. You can select the degree of change detection.  
• Do interpolation in field units.  
• Do interpolation in frame units.  
You can also select the number of pixels used in interpolation processing, and  
select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded.  
Further, you can apply an anti-moire filter to reduce the moire patterns created  
by interpolation.  
Notes  
• Interpolation processing is possible for the following signal formats and  
DME systems.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
– MVE-8000/8000A: 480i/59.94, 576i/50  
– MVE-9000: 480i/59.94, 576i/50, 1080i/59.94, 1080i/50, 1080i/60  
• The anti-moire filter function is only effective when the MVE-8000/8000A  
is used in an HD system.  
Key Density Adjustment  
You can adjust the key density for the key signal input to the DME.  
Key Source Selection  
You can select either the key signals received from the switcher or the key  
signals generated in the DME for application to the front and back of the image  
(see page 150).  
Global Effects  
Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of  
successive channels. The Global Effect menu is used to add these effects.  
For details of this menu, see “Global Effect Operations” in Chapter 11  
(Volume 2).  
The following types of global effects are available.  
Combiner  
When multiple channels are selected on one keyer or for one transition, the  
Combiner automatically combines the selected images. Up to four channels  
can be combined.  
You can also control the way in which the combination is carried out, as a mix  
or an overlap with priority set automatically. For a mix, you can control the  
relative amounts of each channel.  
Images can also be crossed in three dimensions.  
Note  
Three-dimensional image crossing is not supported on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
               
Combination of channel 1 (Ch1) and channel 2 (Ch2)  
Ch1  
Ch2  
1
2
2
Combiner  
Ch1  
1
3
4
Ch3  
Ch4  
3
4
Ch3  
Ch4  
Combination of Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Ch1  
Ch4  
Combiner  
Ch4  
4
4
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Combination of Ch1 and Ch2 / combination of Ch3 and Ch4  
Ch1  
Ch2  
1
2
2
Combiner  
Ch1  
Ch3  
1
1
Ch3  
Ch4  
3
4
Combiner  
3
4
2
Combination of Ch1, Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4  
1
2
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
Ch4  
1
2
3
4
3
Ch1  
4
Combiner  
Mixing Ch1 and Ch2  
Ch1  
Ch2  
1
2
Ch1  
Ch2  
Mix1  
If the Mix1 setting is 70, the proportion of the channels in the mixed portion in  
the previous illustration is as shown in the following table.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Combination  
Indication in figure  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch1 and Ch2  
30%  
70%  
Mixing Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3  
Ch1  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
1
2
3
Mix1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
Mix2  
If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40, the proportions of the  
channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the  
following table.  
Combination  
Indication in figure  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
Ch1 and Ch2  
30%  
70%  
–
Ch2 and Ch3  
–
60%  
–
40%  
70%  
28%  
Ch1 and Ch3  
30%  
30%  
Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3  
42%  
Pairwise mixing of Ch1 and Ch2, and Ch3 and Ch4  
Ch1  
1
Ch1  
Ch2  
Mix1  
Mix2  
Ch2  
Ch3  
2
3
Ch3  
Ch4  
Ch4  
4
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40, the proportions of the  
channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the  
following table.  
Combination Indication in figure  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Ch3  
Ch4  
Ch1 and Ch2  
30%  
70%  
–
–
Ch3 and Ch4  
–
–
60%  
40%  
Ch1 crossed with Ch2  
Ch1  
Ch2  
1
2
Depth  
Brick  
This effect creates a rectangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels.  
The Brick effect can combine Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3, or combine Ch2, Ch3, and  
Ch4. The three images are displayed as shown in the following figure.  
Z
Y
Upper side  
X
Height  
Side V  
Side H  
An example of the Brick effect  
Combinations of Ch1, Ch2, and Ch3  
Upper side: Ch1 image  
Side V: Ch2 image  
Side H: Ch3 image  
Digital Multi Effects (DME)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
 
Combinations of Ch2, Ch3, and Ch4  
Upper side: Ch2 image  
Side V: Ch3 image  
Side H: Ch4 image  
You can adjust the height of the brick, the overlap between the three images  
and the way to insert the side images.  
Shadow  
This effect gives the image a shadow. The effect uses two successive channels.  
You can adjust the position and density of the shadow with respect to the  
image, and the color of the shadow. The channel with the largest number (for  
example, Ch2 in the case of Ch1 and Ch2) becomes the shadow.  
Digital Multi Effects (DME) 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
External Devices  
In this system, you can operate while controlling the following types of  
external device:  
• Devices supporting P-Bus (Peripheral II protocol) (referred to as “P-Bus  
devices” in the manual)  
• Devices supporting GPI  
• VTRs  
• Disk recorder (Sony disk 9-pin protocol and video disk communications  
protocol)  
• Extended VTR (Abekas A53 protocol)  
The following is an outline of external device control.  
For external device control operations, see Chapter 12 “External Devices”  
(Volume 2).  
For details on the devices that can be connected, consult your Sony  
representative.  
Shared Functions for External Device Control  
Keyframe functions  
There are 99 registers, numbered 1 to 99, holding external device control data  
as keyframe data.  
The following are the keyframe functions that can be used.  
• RECALL (1-99), STORE (1-99), RECALL UNDO, STORE UNDO, empty  
register search, AUTO SAVE, RECALL MODE (RECALL, RECALL &  
REWIND)  
• EDIT ENABLE, EDIT UNDO  
• CONST DUR, EFF DUR, KF DUR, DELAY, PAUSE, INSERT BEFORE,  
INSERT AFTER, MODIFY, DELETE, COPY, PASTE BEFORE, PASTE  
AFTER, FROM TO, ALL  
• PREV KF, NEXT KF, GOTO TC, GOTO KF, RUN, REWIND, FF, STOP  
NEXT KF, NORMAL, JOG, KF FADER  
Note  
Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is  
executed in the normal direction. Take care when executing simultaneously  
with a switcher or DME keyframe effect, since the actions are not executed in  
the reverse direction.  
External Devices  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The following keyframe functions cannot be used.  
• KF LOOP, EFFECT LOOP, REVERSE, NORMAL/REVERSE  
• PATH  
Saving to registers  
Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu. You can save  
the set data in keyframe, snapshot, or shotbox registers. You can recall the  
register in which the data is saved, and carry out operations on it with the  
keyframe control block.  
For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2).  
Editing registers  
You can carry out the following operations on the registers in which the data  
for controlling external devices is saved.  
• Copy  
• Move  
• Swap  
• Merge (this cannot be carried out for registers holding VTR, disk recorder,  
or Extended VTR control data.)  
• Lock  
• Name  
File related functions  
As effect data, you can save and recall, using the File menu.  
Control of P-Bus Devices  
You can control P-Bus devices from this system through the 9-pin serial port  
of a DCU.  
P-Bus device control modes  
There are two modes of P-Bus device control, as follows.  
P-Bus trigger mode: Operating a previously specified button outputs the  
command for an action assigned to that button.  
P-Bus timeline mode: Carrying out a keyframe effect under the control of the  
center control panel controls external devices.  
In the setup, select which of P-Bus trigger mode and P-Bus timeline mode to  
use.  
External Devices 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
P-Bus trigger mode actions  
The actions that can be used in P-Bus trigger mode are as follows.  
• Store  
• Recall  
• Trigger  
For details of the buttons assigned to each action, see Chapter 12, “External  
Devices” (Volume 2).  
P-Bus timeline  
At a keyframe point on the P-Bus timeline, you can set an action (setting what  
action command is output to which device). At any single keyframe point you  
can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices.  
P-Bus timeline mode actions  
The actions that can be used in P-Bus timeline mode are as follows.  
• Store  
• Recall  
• Trigger  
For the action setting (or P-Bus timeline editing), use the Device menu.  
You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers.  
Recalling the register starts execution of the keyframe effect, and when this  
reaches the keyframe point at which actions are set, action commands are  
output to external devices through the 9-pin serial port assigned to P-Bus.  
For details, see Chapter 12 “External Devices” (Volume 2).  
Control of GPI Devices  
You can control GPI devices from the control panel of this system, or through  
the GPI output port of a DCU.  
GPI timeline  
For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel, the GPI timeline  
allows you to set an action (setting a trigger output from a particular GPI output  
port) at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline. At any keyframe point, you can  
make a maximum of eight GPI output port settings.  
GPI timeline actions  
The actions that can be used on the GPI timeline are as follows.  
• Control panel GPI output port  
• DCU GPI output port  
For the GPI output settings (keyframe editing), use the Device menu.  
External Devices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
     
The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register. When  
you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect, and advance  
the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set, a trigger pulse  
is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port.  
VTR/Disk Recorder/Extended VTR Control  
In this system, for up to 12 VTRs, disk recorders or Extended VTRs connected  
to a DCU, you can carry out the following manual operations and timeline  
settings.  
• Controlling manually from the device control block (trackball or search dial)  
• Saving a start point, stop point, start delay time, variable speed and so on in  
a data register, then recalling the register to control automatically from the  
keyframe control block. (Cueup & Play and VTR/disk recorder/Extended  
VTR timeline)  
• In the Device menu, you can check the following VTR, disk recorder and  
Extended VTR information:  
– Device name  
– Register number  
– VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR status  
– Current time  
– Start point  
– Stop point  
– Variable speed  
– Start delay time  
– Loop setting  
– Recue setting  
Manual operation  
In the device control block, you can carry out the following operations  
manually.  
• VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR selection  
• Tape transport and disk drive control: You can use the following tape  
transport and disk drive control buttons:  
REC, REW, PLAY, FF, CUE UP, VAR PLAY, SHTL, JOG, STANDBY  
OFF, STOP, and ALL STOP. (For details of the operation of the buttons,  
see “Device Control Block (Trackball)” (page 271), “Device Control  
Block (Joystick)” (page 277) and “Device Control Block (Search Dial)”  
(page 278).)  
Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu, the CUE UP, PLAY and  
STOP operations can be carried out from the transition control block. (For  
details of the operation of the buttons, see “Transition Control Block  
External Devices 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
(Standard Type)” (page 260) and “Transition Control Block (Compact  
Type)” (page 310).  
• Setting a start point: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR  
you can set the start point timecode value as keyframe data.  
• Setting a stop point: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR  
you can set the stop point timecode value as keyframe data.  
• Setting a start delay time: For each selected VTR/disk recorder/Extended  
VTR you can set the start delay as key frame data.  
• Recording to VTR or disk recorder: Record video to the selected VTR/  
disk recorder.  
• Loop/recue 1) setting: You can select loop or recue as the playback mode.  
These operate as follows.  
When loop is selected: Playback repeats from the start to the end of the  
currently recalled file.  
When recue is selected: When playback reaches the stop point,  
automatically cue up to the start point.  
1) EVS XT server (EVS Broadcast Equipment) dedicated function  
Cueup & Play  
By saving the start point timecode, stop point timecode, start delay time, and  
so on for a VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR in an effect register, and  
recalling this register, you can operate the following buttons in the keyframe  
control block to automatically control the VTR, disk recorder or Extended  
VTR.  
[REWIND] button: Cue up to the start point timecode  
[RUN] button: Play  
With this function you can also stop the VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR  
used for playback at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register.  
Disk recorder (video disk communications protocol) operation  
when loop /recue is set  
When loop is set: playback repeatedly between the start point and stop point.  
When recue is set: when playback reaches the stop point, automatically cue  
up to the start point.  
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline  
For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel, the timeline  
allows you to set a VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR action at a keyframe  
point on the timeline.  
Timeline actions  
The actions that can be used on the timeline are as follows.  
• Start  
External Devices  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Stop  
• Cue up  
• Variable speed  
Notes  
• For a disk recorder, the maximum number of files for a single register is  
eight.  
• The timeline does not support loop and recue.  
For the action settings (VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR timeline editing),  
use the Device menu.  
The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register. When  
you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect, and advance  
the effect to the keyframe point for which the action is set, an action command  
is output to the external device through the 9-pin serial port assigned to the  
VTR, disk recorder or Extended VTR.  
Recalling disk recorder/Extended VTR files  
Material held on a disk recorder/Extended VTR is managed in units of files.  
You can recall a file to play it back. (In the case of an Extended VTR, the  
register number is recalled.)  
Accessing the file list  
Before playback and suchlike operations on a disk recorder/Extended VTR, it  
is first necessary to display a list of the disk recorder files on the DCU. The file  
list includes the following information.  
• File name  
• Date of last update 1)  
• Duration of recorded material 1)  
To recall the file list, use the Device menu.  
1) Not displayed in the case of an Extended VTR  
Recalling a file  
In the recalled list of files, select the file you want to play back, and open the file.  
File list sharing  
You can connect multiple DCU serial ports to a single disk recorder/Extended  
VTR.  
You can share the recalled list of files between serial ports connected to the  
same disk recorder/Extended VTR.  
For settings relating to file list sharing, see “Serial Port Settings (Serial Port  
Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
External Devices 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File creation  
To record a new file on the disk recorder, use the Device menu to create a new  
file.  
Note  
In the case of an Extended VTR, it is not possible to record a new file.  
External Devices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
Regions and Registers  
Regions  
The term “region” refers to some sort of functional block of the system.  
When saving or recalling snapshot registers and effect registers, or creating or  
editing effects, you first select the region to which the operation applies. You  
can also select multiple regions simultaneously.  
Classification of the regions  
The regions are classified as follows.  
• Master region  
• The following 36 regions  
– Switcher: M/E1 to M/E3, PGM/PST, User1 to User8  
– DME: DME ch1 to DME ch8 (inclusive of Global)  
– External devices: P-Bus, Router, Device 1 to Device 12, GPI, Macro  
Only the regions assigned to the region selection buttons of the numeric keypad  
control block can be used simultaneously.  
For details of the region assignment to the region selection buttons, see  
“Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Regions applicable to keyframe operations  
Thirty-five regions, that is, the above 36 regions less the Router region.  
Regions applicable to snapshot operations  
Twenty-one regions, that is, the above regions less the external devices’  
regions (P-Bus, Device 1 to Device 12, and GPI) and the Macro region.  
“User” regions  
You can optionally assign the following regions to the regions User1 to User8.  
The User regions shown in parenthesis are the default assignments.  
• Color backgrounds 1 and 2 (User1)  
• AUX1 to AUX48 (User2)  
• Monitor 1 to 8 (User3)  
• Frame Memory 1 to 8 (User4)  
• Color correctors 1 and 2  
For details of the User1 to User8 region assignment, see “Overall Control  
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Regions and Registers 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Reference region  
When multiple regions are selected, only one region appears in the displays for  
menu and numeric keypad operations. This is called the “reference region.”  
The reference region is determined according to the following precedence.  
M/E1 >M/E2 >M/E3 >P/P >User1 > User2 > User3 >User4 >User5  
>User6 >User7 >User8 >DME ch1>DME ch2 >DME ch3 >DME ch4  
>DME ch5 >DME ch6 >DME ch7 >DME ch8 >Device1 >Device2  
>Device3 >Device4 >Device5 >Device6 >Device7 >Device8 >Device9  
>Device10 >Device11 >Device12 >P-Bus >GPI >Router >Macro  
Master region  
The regions saved in a master snapshot register or master timeline register and  
the register numbers saved in such regions can be recalled at a time as the  
master region.  
The master region can be saved or recalled using the numeric keypad control  
block.  
Registers  
A register is an area of memory in a device which holds a snapshot, keyframe,  
macro, and so on.  
For details of macros, see page 210.  
Keyframe effect registers  
Dedicated effect registers  
There are 99 dedicated registers for keyframe effects in each region, numbered  
1 to 99.  
Shared user-programmable DME registers  
In addition to the 99 DME registers for each region (i.e. each channel), there  
are also shared registers for each processor as shown in the following table.  
These are used for user-programmable DME.  
Register number Register allocation  
101 to 199  
201 to 299  
301 to 399  
Shared register for one-channel effects  
Shared register for two-channel effects  
Shared register for three-channel effects  
Note  
When operating with these shared registers, be sure to select the appropriate  
regions depending on the number of channels. When recalling registers in the  
Regions and Registers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
         
200 range, select two consecutive channels for the regions, as for example  
[DME1] and [DME2]. Similarly, for registers in the 300 range, select three  
consecutive registers.  
Work register  
This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes.  
When you recall an effect, it is read from the effect register into the work  
register, and when you save, the contents of the work register are written to the  
effect register.  
Master timeline registers  
There are 99 master timeline registers, numbered 1 to 99, for each control  
panel. They store keyframe effect regions and the register numbers saved in the  
regions.  
Snapshot registers  
These are registers for snapshots, and there are 99, numbered 1 to 99 for each  
region.  
Master snapshot registers  
There are 99 master snapshot registers, numbered 1 to 99, for each control  
panel. They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the  
regions.  
Regions and Registers 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Keyframes  
A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image; it can be saved and  
recalled for reuse.  
Effects  
By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis, and interpolating  
between successive keyframes, you can create an effect in which there is a  
continuous change from each keyframe to the next.  
The following figure shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern (the  
circle) in different positions. This is interpolated to create the effect shown.  
Background A  
Background B  
Interpolated images  
Keyframe 1  
Keyframe 2  
Keyframe 3  
Effect execution  
Example of keyframes and effect execution  
You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a  
register. Then by recalling this register, you can replay the same effect.  
For details of keyframe effect registers, see “Regions and Registers” (page  
165).  
Keyframes  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Saving and Recalling Effects  
To create a new effect, first recall an empty register, then create the keyframes  
one at a time in this register. To run an effect, it is also necessary to set the time  
and the path.  
To edit an existing effect, recall the register holding the effect, then make the  
changes.  
When you have finished creating or editing the effect, save it in the recalled  
register or another specified register.  
Auto save function  
When you recall an effect, the currently recalled effect is automatically saved  
in a register. This is called the auto save function. You can disable this function  
in a Setup menu.  
Effect Attributes  
An individual effect may also have attached special conditions relating to  
switcher or DME operation when the effect is recalled.  
These conditions are called “attributes” of the effect, and can be added when  
the keyframe effect is saved or recalled.  
Type of attribute  
The attribute that can be attached to an effect is as follows.  
Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the effect recall to the state  
at the effect start point is carried out smoothly, by a dissolve. The dissolve  
duration can be set in the Effect menu.  
Temporary attributes  
When a keyframe is recalled, independently of the attributes held in the  
register, you can also enable or disable temporary attributes. These temporary  
attributes are set when the keyframe effect is recalled.  
Effect Editing  
For editing operations such as to insert, delete, or modify a keyframe, it is  
necessary to stop the effect at the corresponding point on the time axis. This is  
termed an “edit point.”  
Keyframes 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
You can edit either on a keyframe within the effect, or at any point between  
keyframes.  
Insert: Insert the current image as a keyframe. Inserting a keyframe in an  
existing effect may change the duration of the effect (see page 172).  
Modify: Modify a keyframe. You can modify a single keyframe or a range of  
keyframes in the effect together.  
Delete: Delete a keyframe. You can delete a single keyframe or a range of  
keyframes in the effect together. Deleting keyframes from an effect  
reduces the duration of the effect (see page 173).  
After deleting a keyframe, you can reinsert the keyframe with a paste  
operation.  
Copy: Copy a keyframe. You can copy a single keyframe or a range of  
keyframes in the effect together.  
Paste: Paste the keyframe last copied or deleted anywhere within the effect.  
Pause: You can set a pause on a particular keyframe, so that when the effect is  
run it pauses on this keyframe. You can make this setting on any number  
of keyframes. To restart the paused effect, repeat the operation to run the  
effect.  
KF Loop: Execute the effect the specified number of times through the  
keyframes in the specified range.  
Undo an edit operation: Undo the effect of the last operation to insert,  
modify, delete, or paste a keyframe.  
Duration modes  
In keyframe editing, there are two duration modes; switch between them in the  
keyframe operation section. (See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)  
Variable duration mode: In this mode, inserting or deleting a keyframe  
increases or reduces the duration.  
Constant duration mode: In this mode, inserting or deleting a keyframe does  
not change the duration. This is useful for keyframe editing of an effect  
with a fixed duration.  
In the variable and constant duration modes, the keyframes to which a modify  
operation applies, and the effect of a paste operation are different.  
Difference in keyframes to which a modify operation applies  
Effect position Variable duration mode Constant duration mode  
On a keyframe Applies to currently  
Applies to currently selected keyframe  
selected keyframe  
a)  
Between two  
keyframes  
Applies to previous  
keyframe  
Modify operation not possible  
a) A new keyframe is inserted at the effect position.  
Keyframes  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Difference in the effect of a paste operation  
Variable duration mode: The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified  
position.  
Constant duration mode: The copied keyframe is written over the specified  
position.  
Transition mode  
You can use an effect created with keyframes as a DME wipe pattern on the  
switcher. In this case, it is necessary to set the transition mode (the way in  
which the effect behaves).  
For details of the setting, see “User Programmable DME Transition Mode”  
(page 483).  
Time Settings  
Keyframe duration and effect duration  
You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the  
keyframe durations or the effect duration.  
Keyframe duration: This is the time from the keyframe to the next keyframe.  
You can set this time in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings”  
in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)  
In constant duration mode (see page 170), it is not possible to change the  
keyframe duration setting.  
Effect duration: This is the total execution time of the effect, from the first  
keyframe to the last. You can set this time in the keyframe control block.  
(See “Time Settings” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)  
When you change the effect duration, the keyframe duration for each  
keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally.  
Keyframe duration  
Keyframe number  
1
2
3
4
5
Effect duration  
Schematic view of keyframe duration and effect duration  
Keyframes 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes.  
Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe  
• When the effect is stopped on a keyframe, inserting a keyframe increases the  
effect duration by the duration of the inserted keyframe.  
• When the effect is stopped between two keyframes, inserting a keyframe  
does not change the effect duration.  
Note  
In constant duration mode (see page 170), the duration of the current keyframe  
is reduced to zero, and the new keyframe is inserted with the previous duration  
of the current keyframe. Thus the effect duration does not change.  
Insertion position  
Change in effect duration  
Insertion before the first  
keyframe  
0
1
2
3
3
4
4
1
2
5
Insertion between two  
keyframes  
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
3
3
5
Insertion at an existing  
keyframe  
1
1
2
2
4
3
4
5
Insertion at the last  
keyframe  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
Keyframe insertion position and the change in effect duration  
Keyframes  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe  
• When the effect is stopped on a keyframe, a delete operation deletes the  
keyframe, and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted  
keyframe.  
• When the effect is stopped between two keyframes, a delete operation  
deletes the preceding keyframe, and reduces the effect duration by the  
duration of the deleted keyframe.  
Note  
In constant duration mode (see page 170), the duration of the keyframe before  
the deleted keyframe is increased by the duration of the deleted keyframe. Thus  
the effect duration does not change.  
Deletion position  
Change in effect duration  
Deletion of the first  
keyframe  
1
2
2
3
3
4
1
Deletion of an  
intermediate keyframe  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Deletion between two  
keyframes  
1
1
2
3
3
4
2
Deletion of the last  
keyframe  
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
Keyframe deletion position and the change in effect duration  
Keyframes 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Delay setting  
You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect,  
and the effect actually starting (that is, the delay until the first keyframe). You  
can make this setting in the keyframe control block. (See “Time Settings” in  
Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)  
Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect.  
Paths  
The term “path” refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out  
from one keyframe to the next.  
For details of the path setting procedure, see “Path Settings” in Chapter 13  
(Volume 2).  
Switcher path settings  
Carry out path settings in the Key Frame menu.  
For each menu, the following settings are available.  
M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P menus  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
M/E1 to M/E3, P/P All  
For each M/E and PGM/PST, path settings for  
the following items are made simultaneously.  
Key1 to Key4  
Overall path settings for items relating to keys  
1 to 4 are made simultaneously.  
Key 1 All to Key 4 All  
Source  
Fill  
Key source path for keys 1 to 4  
Key fill path for keys 1 to 4  
Proc path for keys 1 to 4  
Proc  
Trans  
Transition path for keys 1 to 4  
Bkgd/Util  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
backgrounds and utility buses are made  
simultaneously.  
Bkgd/Util All  
Bkgd A  
Bkgd B  
Util 1  
Path for background A  
Path for background B  
Path for utility 1  
Util 2  
Path for utility 2  
DME 2nd Video  
Path for video to be used for second DME  
channel  
Keyframes  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Wipe/DME Wipe  
Overall path settings for items relating to wipes  
and DME wipes are made simultaneously.  
Wipe  
Wipe/DME  
Wipe All  
Wipe  
Path for wipes  
DME Wipe  
–
Path for DME wipes  
Trans  
Transition path for each M/E and P/P bank  
User1 to User8 menus  
The items that can be adjusted depend on the settings in the Setup menu.  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
User1 All to User8 All  
Overall path settings for the following items for  
each “User” are made simultaneously.  
FM All  
Overall path settings for frame memory items  
are made simultaneously.  
FM Src  
Overall path settings for frame memory source  
items are made simultaneously.  
FM Src All  
FM Src1  
Path for frame memory source 1 and video  
process  
FM Src2  
Path for frame memory source 2 and video  
process  
FM Proc  
Overall path settings relating to the signal  
processing other than frame memory source  
and frame memory freeze outputs are made  
simultaneously.  
FM Proc All  
FM Proc1  
FM Proc2  
Path for frame memory signal processing 1  
Path for frame memory signal processing 2  
FM Still Store  
Overall path settings for frame memory freeze  
image output are made simultaneously.  
FM Still Store All  
FM Still Store 1 to 8  
Paths for frame memory freeze image outputs  
1 to 8  
Aux  
Overall path settings for AUX buses are made  
simultaneously.  
Aux All  
Aux 1 to 48  
Paths for Aux 1 to 48  
Mon  
Overall path settings for monitor buses are  
made simultaneously.  
Mon All  
Mon 1 to 8  
Paths for monitor buses 1 to 8  
Keyframes 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Color Bkgd  
Overall path settings for color backgrounds are  
made simultaneously.  
Color Bkgd All  
Color Bkgd 1  
Color Bkgd 2  
Paths for color background 1  
Paths for color background 2  
CCR  
Overall path settings for color corrector  
CCR All  
CCR 1  
CCR 2  
Path for color corrector 1  
Path for color corrector 2  
Paths relating to DME  
DME 3D Trans Local menu  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
3D Trans Local All  
Overall path settings for local channel three-  
dimensional transform items are made  
simultaneously.  
Loc Size  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image size changes and movement are made  
simultaneously.  
Loc Size All  
Size  
Path for image size  
Post Loc X, Post Loc Paths for movement in the x- and y-axes  
Y
Post Size  
Path for size  
Loc XYZ  
Rot  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image movement are made simultaneously.  
Loc XYZ All  
Loc X, Loc Y, Loc Z  
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image rotation are made simultaneously.  
Rot All  
Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z  
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Spin  
Overall path settings for items relating to spin  
are made simultaneously.  
Spin All  
Spin Src X, Spin Src Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Y, Spin Src Z  
Spin X, Spin Y, Spin Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Z
Asp  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
aspect ratio are made simultaneously.  
Asp All  
Rate X, Rate Y  
Paths for the x- and y-axes  
Keyframes  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Skew  
Overall path settings for items relating to skew  
are made simultaneously.  
Skew All  
Skew X, Skew Y  
Aspect  
Paths for the x- and y-axes  
Path for aspect ratio  
Pers  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
perspective are made simultaneously.  
Pers All  
Pers X, Pers Y, Pers Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Axis Loc  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image rotation axis are made simultaneously.  
Axis All  
Axis X, Axis Y, Axis Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
DME 3D Trans Global menu  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
3D Trans Global All  
Overall path settings for three-dimensional  
transform items in the global channel are made  
simultaneously.  
Loc Size  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image size changes and movement are made  
simultaneously.  
Loc Size All  
Size  
Path for image size  
Post Loc X, Post Loc Paths for movement in the x- and y-axes  
Y
Post Size  
Path for size  
Loc XYZ  
Rot  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image movement are made simultaneously.  
Loc XYZ All  
Loc X, Loc Y, Loc Z  
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image rotation are made simultaneously.  
Rot All  
Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z  
Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Spin  
Overall path settings for items relating to spin  
are made simultaneously.  
Spin All  
Spin Src X, Spin Src Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Y, Spin Src Z  
Spin X, Spin Y, Spin Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Z
Pers  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
perspective are made simultaneously.  
Pers All  
Pers X, Pers Y, Pers Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
Keyframes 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Axis Loc  
Overall path settings for items relating to  
image rotation axis are made simultaneously.  
Axis All  
Axis X, Axis Y, Axis Z Paths for the x-, y- and z-axes  
DME Effect menu  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Effect All  
Overall path settings for DME effect items are  
made simultaneously.  
Edge  
Overall path settings for edge items are made  
simultaneously.  
Edge All  
Border  
Path for border  
Crop/Edge Soft  
Path for crop/edge softness  
Path for beveled edge  
Beveled Edge  
Key Border  
a)  
Path for key border  
a)  
Art Edge  
Path for art edge  
a)  
Flex Shadow  
Wipe Crop  
Color Mix  
Path for flex shadow  
a)  
Path for wipe crop  
a)  
Path for color mix  
Video Modify  
Overall path settings for video modify items are  
made simultaneously.  
Video Modify All  
Defocus/Blur  
Multi Move  
Color Modify  
Mosaic  
Path for defocus/blur  
Path for “multi-move”  
Path for color modify  
Path for mosaic  
b)  
Mask  
Path for mask  
b)  
Sketch  
Metal  
Path for sketch  
b)  
Path for metal  
a)  
Dim/Fade  
Glow  
Path for dim/fade  
b)  
Path for glow  
Freeze  
Path for freeze  
Non-Linear  
Path for nonlinear effects  
Keyframes  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Light  
Overall path settings for lighting items are  
made simultaneously.  
Light All  
Lighting  
Path for lighting  
a)  
Spot Lighting  
Path for spotlighting  
Trail  
Path for trails  
In/Out  
Overall path settings for items relating to input/  
output are made simultaneously.  
In/Out All  
Bkgd  
Path for background  
Path for video/key  
Video/Key  
a) This cannot be used on the MVE-8000/8000A.  
b) This cannot be used on the MVE-8000.  
DME Global Effect menu  
Item  
Paths that can be set  
Global Effect All  
Overall path settings for DME global effect  
items are made simultaneously.  
Combine  
Shadow  
Brick  
Path for combiner  
Path for shadow  
Path for brick  
Types of path  
Path types for Curve  
There are five types, as follows.  
OFF: Executing the effect causes no change.  
Step: There is no interpolation between keyframes, so that the effect  
parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed.  
Linear: Linear interpolation between keyframes, resulting in constant  
speed movement.  
S-Curve: The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and  
after a keyframe, so that the rate of change is maximum midway  
between two keyframes.  
Spline: The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to  
the next.  
Path types for Hue  
There are four types, as follows.  
Keyframes 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CW: The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a  
Vectorscope.  
CCW: The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a  
Vectorscope.  
Short: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and  
counterclockwise directions is shorter.  
Long: The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and  
counterclockwise directions is longer.  
Path types for Xpt  
There are two types, as follows.  
Xpt Hold off: When replaying a keyframe, change the inputs to the  
settings saved in memory.  
Xpt Hold on: When replaying a keyframe, do not change the inputs.  
Effect Execution  
By pressing the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block, you can replay  
the effect as a continuous sequence of images. This is referred to as effect  
execution.  
It is also possible to execute effects from the device control block (see page  
271), the Flexi Pad control block (see page 264) or the transition control block  
(see page 260).  
Range of execution  
Each time the [RUN] button is pressed, the range of execution of the effect is  
from timecode 01:00:00:00 or the current time (the position at which the  
current effect is stopped) to the end point of the effect. However, if there is a  
pause set on a keyframe, the execution range is up to that point. Pressing the  
[RUN] button again resumes the effect, which then runs to the next pause point  
or the end of the effect.  
Run mode setting  
You can select from the following run modes for when the effect is executed.  
DIRECTION: Specify the effect execution direction.  
STOP NEXT KF: Run the effect, and stop at the next keyframe.  
EFFECT LOOP: Repeat the effect in an endless loop.  
Make these settings in the keyframe control block. (See “Run Mode Setting”  
in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).)  
Keyframes  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Master Timelines  
You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register  
numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can  
be applied to two or more regions at a time.  
To save master timeline registers, use the numeric keypad control block or  
menu; to recall them you can use the numeric keypad control block, menu, or  
the Flexi Pad control block.  
For more details, see “Creating and Saving a Master Timeline” in Chapter 13  
(Volume 2).  
Keyframes 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Snapshots  
The term “snapshot” refers to a function whereby the various settings required  
to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data, for  
recall as required, to recover the original state.  
You can carry out snapshot operations using the numeric keypad control block,  
the Flexi Pad control block in each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST  
banks, and the Snapshot menu.  
Note  
If the M/E bank has the Inhibit setting (see “Overall Control Panel Settings  
(Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), it is not possible to recall a  
snapshot on that M/E bank.  
For details of snapshot operations, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2).  
Snapshot Types  
Snapshots are divided as follows.  
Snapshots applying to a particular region (functional block of the  
switcher or DME)  
The term “snapshot” alone usually refers to this type of snapshot. This only  
applies to regions assigned to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad  
control block.  
Master snapshot: This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers  
saved in the regions. A master snapshot can be saved and recalled using the  
numeric keypad control block.  
Snapshots applying only to particular functions  
This type of snapshot includes the following.  
Key snapshot: This includes the key on/off state and all key settings other than  
key priority for each keyer. (See “Key Snapshots” (page 57).)  
Wipe snapshot: This includes the wipe settings of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-  
3 and PGM/PST banks. (See “Wipe Snapshots” (page 71).)  
DME wipe snapshot: This includes the DME wipe settings of each of the M/  
E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.  
The rest of this section describes the snapshots that apply to a particular region  
or regions.  
Snapshots  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Snapshot Attributes  
An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to  
switcher or DME operation when the snapshot is recalled.  
These conditions are called “attributes” of the snapshot, and can be added when  
the snapshot is saved or recalled.  
Types of attribute  
There are five snapshot attributes, as follows.  
Cross-point hold: When the snapshot is recalled, the cross-point button  
selection remains unchanged. This can be set independently for each bus.  
Key disable: When the snapshot is recalled, the key settings remain  
unchanged. This can be set independently for each keyer. A Setup menu  
allows you to select whether or not the key on/off state should also remain  
unchanged.  
For details of the setting operation, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes  
and Frame Memory (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR Menu)” in the Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Effect dissolve: The transition from the state before the snapshot recall to the  
snapshot settings is carried out smoothly, by a dissolve. The dissolve  
duration can be set in the Snapshot menu.  
Auto transition: An auto transition starts the instant the snapshot is recalled.  
The auto transition setting is valid only for M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and  
PGM/PST.  
Note  
If both effect dissolve and auto transition are selected as attributes, the auto  
transition takes precedence.  
GPI output: A GPI output is sent to the allocated GPI port the instant the  
snapshot is recalled.  
The trigger type depends on the switcher GPI output settings made in the  
Setup menu.  
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface  
Menu)” under “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Clip event: Recall a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is  
recalled.  
Snapshots 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Note  
Clip events are not supported on the MVS-8000.  
Auto play: Play a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is  
recalled.  
Table of available attributes  
The attributes that can be used depend on the region, as follows.  
Yes: Can be used No: Cannot be used  
Attribute  
Region  
M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3, and User 1 to User 8  
PGM/PST  
DME ch 1 to  
DME ch 8  
Cross-point hold Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Key disable  
Effect dissolve  
Auto transition  
GPI outputs  
Clip event  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Auto play  
No  
Attribute display  
You can view the attributes of a snapshot in the Snapshot menu.  
For more details, see “Snapshot Operations in the Menus” in Chapter 14  
(Volume 2).  
Temporary attributes  
When recalling a snapshot, you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from  
the attributes set for each register. These are called “temporary attributes.”  
You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot.  
For details of snapshot operations, see Chapter 14 “Snapshots” (Volume 2).  
Bus override  
If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button, the selection  
of the signal on the A or B bus does not change when the snapshot is recalled.  
This function is called “bus override.”  
This function is effective when cross-point hold is off, and you want to  
temporarily maintain the cross-point setting. When cross-point hold is on, the  
above operation is not necessary.  
Snapshots  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utility  
The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary  
action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button, then  
instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button.  
The functions you can assign include menu shortcuts, enabling/disabling  
functions (recalling utility commands), and recalling (shotbox registers or  
macro registers).  
Carry out the button assignment in the Setup menu.  
For details of the operation, see “Setting Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
You can carry out the utility function in the utility/shotbox control block (see  
page 298), in the cross-point control block (see page 256), or using the user  
preference buttons in the menu control block (see page 294).  
Utility 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shotbox  
The term “shotbox” refers to a function whereby for each specified region any  
snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously.  
The simultaneous recall setting data such as region names, snapshot numbers  
and keyframe effect numbers are stored in “registers.” There are 99 registers  
for each control panel.  
Register #1  
Register #2  
Register #3  
Register #99  
M/E-1: Snapshot #1  
User2: Effect #5  
DME ch3: Effect #1  
M/E-1: Snapshot #1  
DME ch1: Snapshot #15  
GPI: Effect #1  
M/E-1: Effect #1  
P/P: Effect #90  
User1: Effect #1  
P/P: Effect #2  
DME ch1: Snapshot #1  
Auto Run: On  
Auto Run: Off  
Auto Run: Off  
Auto Run: On  
Shotbox registers  
The previous figure shows schematically the settings in the 99 shotbox  
registers.  
Each register may contain any combination of the regions to which the register  
applies, with the snapshots or effects to be recalled.  
The Auto Run function is an attribute which can be set for each register. When  
this is set to On, an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run.  
• When register 1 is executed, this recalls M/E-1 snapshot 1, User2 effect 5,  
and DME ch3 effect 1. For register 1, auto run is On, and therefore the User2  
and DME ch3 effects are run as soon as they have been recalled.  
• When register 3 is executed, M/E-1 effect 1, P/P effect 90, and User1 effect  
1 are recalled. For register 3, auto run is off, and therefore to run the recalled  
effects, press the [RUN] button in the keyframe control block.  
Shotbox settings and execution  
Carry out shotbox register settings from the Shotbox menu or using the  
numeric keypad control block.  
You can carry out shotbox execution using the numeric keypad control block,  
the Flexi Pad control block, the utility/shotbox control block, or the cross-point  
control block buttons.  
For details of operation, see Chapter 15 “Shotbox” (Volume 2).  
Shotbox  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup  
Overview of Setup  
Various settings are required, in order to operate the switcher, control panel,  
DME, external devices, and so on, connected together in a single system.  
This is referred to as “setup,” and you can carry out the setup operations from  
the Engineering Setup menu.  
For details of the operations, see Chapter 16 “Engineering Setup” (Volume 2).  
The settings in the Engineering Setup menu are grouped under the following  
headings.  
• System setup (System): Settings relating to the whole system (see the  
following section “System Setup.”)  
• Panel setup (Panel): Settings particular to the control panel (see page 195)  
• Switcher setup (Switcher): Settings particular to the switcher processor  
(see page 198)  
• DME setup (DME): Settings particular to the DME processor (see page  
202)  
• DCU setup (DCU): DCU input and output settings (see page 202)  
• Router/tally setup (Router/Tally): Router interface and tally settings (see  
page 203)  
System Setup  
The system setup settings apply to the whole system. Here the “whole system”  
refers to all devices connected on the Control LAN.  
The DCU is connected through the control panel, but is also included in the  
“whole system.”  
You can make the following settings.  
Network configuration (Network Config)  
This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the Data  
LAN (excluding the DCU), and displays a list of them.  
System configuration (System Config)  
Specify the overall system operation mode and the hierarchical relationship of  
the devices.  
Setup 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Operation mode setting  
• Single Proc mode: The control panel controls a single switcher and up to  
two DMEs.  
• Single Simul mode: See “Special system setting (Single Processor Simul  
mode)” (page 188).  
• Dual Simul mode: The control panel controls two switchers and DMEs  
simultaneously.  
Device hierarchical relationship setting  
• Panel Assign: Specify the switcher controlled by a control panel.  
• Switcher Assign: Specify the DME connected to a switcher.  
Special system setting (Single Processor Simul mode)  
When using a combination of a 4M/E switcher processor and a 4-channel DME  
processor in an HD system, the Single Processor Simul mode is available. In  
this mode, M/E-1 on the switcher processor is linked to M/E-3, and M/E-2 is  
linked to P/P. As a result, the M/E-1 and M/E-2 panel buttons go off, and  
cannot be operated.  
In this mode, the screen aspect ratio is fixed, as follows.  
Processor  
Bank or channel  
M/E-3 and P/P  
Screen aspect ratio  
Switcher processor  
16:9  
4:3  
M/E-1 and M/E-2  
Channels 1 and 2  
Channels 3 and 4  
DME processor  
16:9  
4:3  
Relation between switcher and DME: Operations are linked with the screen  
aspect ratios the same.  
Notes  
• The waveforms for wipe pattern numbers 23, 24, 26, and 27 are the same  
in 4:3 and 16:9 modes.  
• Color backgrounds, frame memory, and other functions used on the  
whole switcher operate at 16:9.  
Note on creating a user programmable DME: The keyframe registers used  
for creating a user programmable DME are divided by screen aspect ratio  
as shown in the following table.  
Register  
numbers  
Screen aspect  
ratio  
Switcher bank  
M/E-3 P/P  
Channel  
101 to 149,  
201 to 249,  
301 to 349  
16:9  
Ch1  
Ch2  
Setup  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Register  
numbers  
Screen aspect  
ratio  
Switcher bank  
M/E-1 M/E-2  
Channel  
151 to 199,  
251 to 299,  
351 to 399  
4:3  
Ch3  
Ch4  
The actual operation is linked between the top and bottom rows of the table  
(e.g. M/E-3 and M/E-1), but the common setting values cannot be used  
between the two screen aspect ratios. The edges of the screen, for example,  
differ between 16:9 and 4:3.  
For image operations in the device control block, first make the settings  
separately on the different channels.  
Recalling a user programmable DME: When recalling a user programmable  
DME, select pattern numbers 1901 to 1949, 2901 to 2949, or 3901 to 3949.  
The effects for the 16:9 and 4:3 screen aspect ratios will be recalled linked  
together.  
Signal format settings (Format)  
Make the following settings.  
Signal format  
Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices.  
The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows.  
System  
Field frequency  
Effective number of scan lines  
HD system  
50  
1080i  
59.94  
60  
23.976  
24  
1080PsF  
25  
29.97  
30  
50  
720P  
59.94  
59.94  
50  
SD system  
480i  
576i  
Software options for multi-format  
To use the MVS-8000G with multi-format support requires the following  
software options.  
Setup 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Product name  
Model No.  
Switcher  
Switcher Upgrade BZS-8500M  
MVS-8000G  
MVS-8000GSF  
Software  
BZS-8510M  
The following software options are also required depending on the number of  
M/E banks.  
Product name  
Model No.  
Switcher  
Mix/Effect  
Upgrade Software  
BZS-8520M  
MVS-8000GSF 2M/E system or  
MVS-8000G 3M/E system  
BZS-8520M and BZS-8530M  
MVS-8000G 4M/E system  
To use the software, you are required to input an install key.  
For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup  
(Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Format converter (for MVS-8000G only)  
Installing the MKS-8450G Format Converter Board in the switcher enables the  
following signal video format conversions.  
• Up-conversion: from SD (4:3) to HD (16:9)  
• Down-conversion: from HD (16:9) to SD (4:3)  
• Cross-conversion: from HD (720P) to HD (1080i), or from HD (1080i) to  
HD (720P)  
The maximum number of input signals for which format conversion is possible  
is 16 (or 8 when only one MKS-8450G board is installed), and the maximum  
number of output signals is 4 (2 for output on the MVS-8000GSF).  
Notes  
• After format conversion, input and output signals have one-frame delays  
with respect to the reference signals.  
• It is not possible to apply the safe title function to output signals subjected to  
format conversion.  
• When the input reference signal for HD system is set to Tri Sync, the format  
converter function is not available.  
For details, see “Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Format combinations allowing conversion  
The supported combinations of switcher signal format and format converter  
(inputs 1 to 8 and inputs 9 to 16) are as follows.  
Setup  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switcher  
signal format  
setting  
Format converter signal format setting  
FC Input 1-8  
FC Input 9-16  
FC Output 1-4  
480i/59.94  
720P/59.94  
1080i/59.94  
1080PsF/29.97  
720P/59.94  
1080i/59.94  
1080PsF/29.97  
Format selected for  
FC Input 1-8  
576i/50  
720P/50  
1080i/50  
720P/50  
1080i/50  
1080PsF/25  
1080PsF/25  
720P/50  
576i/501080i/50  
576i/501080i/50  
720P/59.94  
480i/59.94  
1080i/59.94  
480i/59.94  
1080i/59.94  
1080i/50  
576i/50  
720P/50  
576i/50  
720P/50  
1080i/59.94  
480i/59.94  
720P/59.94  
480i/59.94  
720P/59.94  
1080PsF/25  
576i/50  
576i/50  
1080PsF/  
29.97  
480i/59.94  
480i/59.94  
Screen aspect ratio  
Switch the screen aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9.  
Changing the input reference signal in an HD system  
This changes the input reference signal.  
• Tri Sync: tri-level sync for an HD system  
• BB (Black Burst): black burst or sync for an SD system  
The following table shows the relation between signal format and the  
frequency of a signal that can be used as the input reference signal.  
Signal format  
Input reference signal  
Tri Sync  
Black burst  
1080PsF/29.97,  
1080i/59.94  
59.94  
Black Burst 59.94  
Sync 59.94  
1080PsF/25, 1080i/50  
1080PsF/23.976  
50  
Black Burst 50  
Sync 50  
a)  
a)  
47.952  
Black Burst 59.94  
Sync 59.94  
1080PsF/30, 1080i/60  
1080PsF/24  
60  
–
48  
–
720P/59.94  
59.94  
–
Black Burst 59.94  
Black Burst 50  
Sync 59.94  
Sync 50  
720P/50  
a) Interlock mode  
Setup 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the start up state (Start Up)  
Set the initial state of the devices when the system is powered on.  
For each device, you can select Resume mode or Custom mode.  
Resume mode  
This resumes the setting state at the previous power-off operation. This setting  
is only available for the switcher processor and panel.  
Custom mode  
This uses the settings saved in non-volatile memory or ROM within the device.  
In this mode, there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set  
separately.  
• Setup mode: Select the setup state to be used after powering on from the  
following.  
User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Setup Define].  
Factory: Start up with the factory default settings.  
• Initial status mode: Select the state of each device after powering on  
(excluding the settings to which “setup” applies).  
User: Start up using the user data previously saved with [Initial Status  
Define]. For the control panel, this applies to the key bus delegation  
buttons only.  
Factory: Start up with the factory default settings.  
For details of saving and recalling setup data, see “Saving and Recalling Setup  
Data” (page 194) and the appendix “Data Saved by [Setup Define] and [Initial  
Setup Define]” (Volume 2).  
Autoload function  
Switch on or off the function to automatically load predetermined register data  
or frame memory image data at power on. Set the data to be read in the File  
menu.  
System reset and memory initialization (Initialize)  
• Reset: Reset to state after powering on.  
• All Clear: Clear the memory, and carry out initialization. The Network  
Config, System Config, Format, and Start Up setup values are set by  
reference to data stored in non-volatile memory, and the system  
automatically starts up. It is not necessary to reset the Date/Time settings.  
For more details, see “Saving and Recalling Setup Data” (page 194).  
Installation and device settings (Install/Unit Config)  
This installs the software and firmware in all devices (including the DCU)  
connected to the Data LAN.  
Setup  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Install: Automatically detects the software that can be installed on each device,  
and installs the selected software.  
There are also the following functions.  
Detail Information: Gives details of the software and firmware installed in  
each device.  
Unit Config: Carries out device settings. Switches the color corrector function  
of the switcher processor between secondary color correction and spot  
color adjustment, sets the field polarity of frame memory images, and so  
on.  
License: Makes the license valid or invalid.  
Device management (Maintenance)  
• Date and time setting  
• Formatting a memory card  
• Primary settings for USB external storage device  
• Reloading a USB driver  
• Formatting the hard disk  
• Locking setup menu operations  
– For each VF button group, selecting a set of candidate menus to be locked,  
then locking all of the candidates using a password. Except for list  
scrolling, moving menus, and similar operations, menu operations for all  
settings can be locked.  
– Changing the password  
Setup 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving and Recalling Setup Data  
Hard disk / memory card  
User setup data  
Load  
Save  
File menu:  
[Save]  
File menu:  
[Load]  
RAM  
Current setup data  
(If in Resume mode, settings data is saved.)  
Store  
Initialize  
In Custom mode, power on  
or reset  
Setup  
menu:  
[All Clear]  
Setup menu:  
[Setup Define]  
Non-volatile memory  
User setup data  
ROM  
Factory default setup data  
Concept of saving and recalling setup data  
Updating the switcher or control panel setup data saves the updated setup data  
in RAM in each device.  
• In Resume mode (see page 192), even if devices are reset or powered off, the  
data is preserved in RAM, and recalled when the power is turned back on.  
Note  
The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs.  
• In Custom mode (see page 192), the user-defined settings (user setup data)  
saved in non-volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in  
Setup  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
each device is recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on.  
(See “Selecting the start up state (Start Up)” (page 192).)  
Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel hard disk  
or memory card.  
Panel Setup  
In panel setup, you carry out settings particular to the control panel.  
You can make the following settings.  
For details of the operations, see “Setup Relating to Operations From the  
Control Panel” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Panel settings (Config)  
• M/E Assign: Set the logical configuration of the M/E and P/P banks.  
• M/E Operation: For each of the M/E and P/P banks, make operations  
possible, not possible, or disabled (Enable/Disable/Inhibit).  
• Dual M/E Assign: Using two M/E banks, assign the shift and non-shift  
button rows of a single M/E bank.  
• Dual M/E Xpt Swap: When a setting has been made for Dual M/E Assign,  
swap the shift and non-shift button rows.  
• DSK Fader Assign: Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation  
for the key delegation buttons, in each of the maximum of four downstream  
key control blocks.  
• External Bus Link: Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to  
routing switcher destinations.  
• Key Trans Link: Select whether or not to link transitions between keyers,  
and if so which keyer to link to. You can set the links between keyers for each  
M/E bank separately.  
• Reference Module: When a trackball module and a joystick module are both  
connected as device control blocks, select which is used as the reference.  
• 10 Key Region Assign: Assign any regions to the region selection buttons  
in the numeric keypad control block. Also used for setting the regions  
included in the selection when the [All] button is pressed.  
• Program Button: Make assignments for buttons of some control blocks  
such as assigning the buttons in a transition control block for controlling a  
VTR and assigning the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation.  
• Compact Key Module Assign: You can select which keys can be operated  
with an independent key transition control block (simple type).  
• M/E Operation Inhibit: For each M/E or P/P bank, enable or inhibit utility  
2 bus and key-related operations.  
Setup 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cross-point button settings (Xpt Assign)  
• Xpt Assign: For each control block or bus, display and set the assignments  
to the main table and tables 1 to 14. You can also carry out settings to link  
switcher signal selection to the audio mixer.  
• Main, V/K Pair Assign: Make cross-point settings for the main table.  
– Assign video/key sources for button numbers 1 to 128.  
– For each table, specify whether the rightmost cross-point button in each  
row is used as a shift button, and the operation mode when it is used as a  
shift button.  
– For the [SHIFT] button in the cross-point control block and for each table,  
select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source name  
displays, or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses.  
– Disable cross-point buttons to work.  
• Mixer Xpt Assign: Assign audio mixer cross-points to cross-point buttons  
in the main table.  
• Table Button Assign: Create tables 1 to 14 in the same way as the main  
table.  
• Src Name: Set source names of up to 16 characters.  
• LCD Color: Set the LCD color for source name display.  
• Table Copy: Copy table contents from the main table to tables 1 to 14 or  
between tables 1 to 14 (it is not possible to copy tables 1 to 14 to the main  
table).  
• Name Export: This function sends the source name and destination name to  
the S-Bus.  
• Side Flags Button Assign: Assign the rightmost button in the background  
A/B row to the side flag function (inserting a selected image on both sides of  
a 4:3 image).  
Auxiliary bus control block settings (Aux Assign)  
• Aux Assign: Assign the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control  
block to any bus.  
• Shift Mode: Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation  
buttons is used as a shift button, and when it is used as a shift button, the  
operation mode.  
• RTR Mode Setting: Carry out the following settings for using the auxiliary  
bus control block for router control.  
– Assigning destinations  
– Setting the shift operation in the destination selection button rows  
– Source table settings  
– Setting the shift operation in the source selection button rows  
– Assigning levels to the level selection buttons  
– Setting destination selection buttons to be used for snapshots  
Setup  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Button assignment settings (Prefs/Utility)  
Assign the [PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons in the menu control block, the  
utility/shotbox control block buttons, and the cross-Point control block.  
This assigns recalling frequently used menus (menu shortcuts), enabling/  
disabling functions (recalling utility commands) and recalling shotbox  
registers or macro registers.  
• User Preference: Make the settings for the user preference buttons in the  
menu control block.  
• Utility Module Assign: Make the utility/shotbox control block settings.  
• KEY 2/4 Bus Button Assign: Make the settings for the key 2 row buttons in  
the cross-point control block.  
External device connections (Device Interface)  
• GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger type, and make the action  
settings.  
• GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger type, and make the action  
settings.  
• P-Bus Control: Set the control mode for P-Bus devices.  
• DCU Serial Port Assign: Assign the devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended  
VTR) connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the  
[DEV1] to [DEV12] buttons which become operative when you press the  
[DEV] button on the device control block. For a disk recorder or Extended  
VTR, you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists. Further, you  
can make settings for devices (disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR) operable  
from an editing keyboard.  
• Editor Port Assign: When the BZS-8050 license is valid, make settings for  
the SCU editor panel port.  
Operation settings (Operation)  
• Button Tally: Set whether or not the system tally generation results are  
reflected in the panel tally.  
• Trans Rate Display: Select whether the transition rate display mode is in  
frames or timecode units.  
• S-Bus Name Link: Copy the S-Bus description name to the source name.  
• Effect: For keyframe effects, you can make the following settings. (See  
Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2).)  
– Recall mode  
– Automatically turning off the [EDIT ENBL] button when an effect is  
recalled  
– Automatic insertion of a first keyframe when an empty register is recalled  
– Effect Auto Save  
– Default KF Duration  
– Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI/  
P-Bus/disk recorder/VTR/Extended VTR/Macro effect  
Setup 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Source/Dest Name: For the Source/Dest (source/destination) names used by  
the system, select one of the following:  
– Source name set by cross-point assignment or fixed bus name  
– Description name set on routing switcher  
– “Type + Num” name set on routing switcher  
Names assigned with Xpt Assign can be replaced later with description  
names.  
• Name Display: Specify the number of characters for display of the names  
selected in Source/Dest Name above, as two characters, four characters, or  
Auto.  
• Flexi Pad: Carry out Flexi Pad settings. Specify the delegation selection  
coupling, and display mode for the LCD buttons. You can also make menu  
settings for wipe snapshots.  
• Custom Button: Set the following button operation modes.  
– [ALL] button for next transition selection  
– [AUTO TRANS], [TAKE] or [FTB] button during auto transition  
execution  
– [RUN] button during keyframe execution  
– [AUTO TRANS] and [CUT] button replacement  
– [TRANS PVW] button  
– [UTIL] button  
– [XPT HOLD] button in key rows  
– Selection of signal assigned to the auxiliary bus control block key source  
bus (either key signal only, or either video signal or key signal selectable)  
• Sensitivity: Adjust trackball, joystick and double-click sensitivity, or set the  
relationship between the angle of the search dial and the playback speed.  
• Main Split Fader: When the split fader is active, specify whether the fader  
to control other than mix is the left side or the right side.  
• Macro: Set the macro execution mode and the mode in which to edit macros  
using the standard type Flexi Pad control block.  
Screen saver and other settings (Maintenance)  
• Screen Saver: Make the menu screen saver settings.  
• LCD Brightness: Adjust the LCD brightness.  
• LED Brightness: Adjust the LED brightness.  
• Switch Brightness: Adjust the switch brightness.  
• Touch Beep: Select whether or not to sound a beep when a menu operation  
is carried out.  
• Touch Panel Calibration: Calibrate the touch panel.  
• Initial Menu Set: Specify the menu to be displayed at menu startup.  
Switcher Setup  
In switcher setup, make settings particular to the switcher processor.  
Setup  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
You can make the following settings.  
Settings relating to overall switcher configuration (Config)  
• System Phase: Adjust the switcher internal reference phase.  
• Switch Timing: Specify the timing of video switching.  
• M/E Config: Set the program configuration for the M/E and P/P outputs.  
– Standard mode: Fix the maximum of four outputs (Out1 to 4) and  
program output configuration as follows.  
Out1: Program output  
Out2: Preview output  
Out3: Clean output  
Out4: Key preview output  
Program output: Clean output + key 1 + key 2 + key 3 + key 4  
– Multi-program mode: Increase the number of M/E or P/P programs, and  
assign any of the following to the maximum of six outputs (Out1 to 6). (M/  
E Output Assign)  
Program outputs 1 to 4, preview output, key preview outputs 1 and 2,  
clean output.  
Further, you can select the program background from Clean or Utility2,  
and change the combination of signals from which it is configured. (PGM  
Config)  
– DSK mode: Treat P/P as four DSKs, with no background transitions. Of  
backgrounds 1 to 4, set one to configure the program output. (PGM  
Config) The signals which can be selected as the background are limited  
to Out1 to 6 from M/E-1 to M/E-3.  
Regardless of the current M/E Config mode, you can set the key preview  
configuration to be video mode or key mode. In key mode, select whether  
to link the key state to the on/off operation, or have it always on. (K-PVW  
Config)  
• User 1 to 8 Config: Assign the User regions, being color backgrounds 1 and  
2, AUX1 to 48, monitor 1 to 8, frame memory 1 to 8, and color correctors 1  
and 2, to any of User1 to User8.  
• Logical M/E Assign: Make settings for handling PGM/PST hardware  
logically as an M/E.  
• DME Config: Set the DME channel assignments used on the individual  
M/E and PGM/PST banks.  
• Side Flags: Make settings relating to the side flag function (inserting a  
selected image on both sides of a 4:3 image).  
Input signal settings (Input)  
• Input Phase Adjust: Carry out phase adjustment for each primary input.  
• Through Mode: Set through mode for the input side. This applies only to  
the primary inputs, and can be set independently for each primary input.  
Setup 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Video Process: Switch video processing on or off for each input signal, and  
adjust the brightness, hue and so forth.  
• Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal  
generated by the switcher internal matte generator.  
• FC Adjust (for MVS-8000G only): Set the format converter inputs.  
Output signal settings (Output)  
• Output Assign: Assign the signals output from the Output1 to 48 ports.  
• Video Clip: Adjust the clip levels (White Clip, Dark Clip, and Chroma Clip)  
for the output signals from each of the Output1 to 48 ports.  
• V Blank: Adjust the vertical blanking width for the output signals from each  
of the Output1 to 48 ports. The setting is the number of scan lines from the  
reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should  
be masked.  
• Through Mode: Enable or disable through mode. Through mode can be  
enabled for AUX1 to 48 outputs, M/E and PGM/PST program outputs, and  
clean output.  
• Safe Title: Enable or disable safe title, and carry out settings for box 1 and  
2, cross and grid (for the MVS-8000G only).  
• Ref. Output Phase: Set the reference output mode and phase adjustment  
(for the MVS-8000/8000A only).  
• 4:3 Crop: Set the actual video image to be cropped to a 4:3 aspect ratio when  
an HD system has a screen aspect ratio of 4:3.  
• FC Adjust (for MVS-8000G only): Set the format converter outputs.  
Settings relating to video switching (Transition)  
• Transition Preview: Specify the operation mode for transition preview for  
each of the M/E and P/P banks.  
• Key Transition: Specify the operation mode for independent key  
transitions.  
• Bus Toggle: Switch the bus toggle for each of the M/E and P/P banks on or  
off.  
• Split Fader: When the bus toggle is off, the split fader settings are enabled.  
For each of the M/E and P/P banks, select enable or disable.  
• Fade To Black: Enable or disable fade-to-black for each final program  
output.  
• Preset Color Mix: Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix, the key status  
for a transition including a key, and the mode in which the transition type  
after a transition ends returns to the previous setting.  
• Transition Curve: Set the relationship when carrying out a transition,  
between the fader lever position and the advancement state of the transition.  
Key, wipe and frame memory settings (Key/Wipe/FM/CCR)  
• Key Memory: Set the key memory operation mode for each of the M/E and  
P/P banks.  
Setup  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• Video Proc Memory: Enable or disable video process memory.  
• Show Key: Enable or disable show key for edit preview, M/E and P/P Pvw/  
K-Pvw.  
• Key Auto Drop: For each switcher bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3, PGM/PST),  
specify a key to be turned off automatically when you press a cross-point  
button for the bus to be output as the background.  
• Mask/Border Process: Set the processing order of masks and borders for  
each M/E or P/P bank.  
• Key Priority: Set the key priority operation mode for each of the M/E and  
P/P banks. In DSK mode, the key priority is fixed.  
• Xpt Hold mode: Set the operation mode for the cross-point hold button  
provided on the key bus for each of the M/E and P/P banks.  
• Pattern Limit Transition: Set the operation mode when the pattern limit is  
released for each of the M/E and P/P banks.  
• Wipe Edge Default: Adjust the wipe edge softness for each of the M/E and  
P/P banks.  
• CCR Internal Signal Enable: Select whether signals generated internally to  
the switcher can be select as input material to the color corrector. (MVS-  
8000G/8000GSF only)  
• FM Auto Store: Switch on or off the function to automatically attach a name  
and save in frame memory.  
Link settings (Link)  
• Internal Bus Link: Make a setting of the bus link function that links  
together two buses internal to the switcher.  
• GPI Link: Make settings for linking any cross-point buttons or [CUT] and  
[AUTO TRANS] buttons in the cross-point control block and GPI output  
ports.  
• M/E Link: Make settings to link together two M/E banks.  
• Key Trans Link: Make settings to link key transitions.  
External device connections (Device Interface)  
• Remote Assign: Set the use of the four 9-pin ports.  
• GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the  
action settings.  
• GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the  
action settings.  
• Aux Control: Set whether operations on the AUX buses from the four 9-pin  
ports are inhibited.  
• DME Type Setting: When the DME is an MVE-9000 or MVE-8000A, carry  
out interface settings, and for an SDI interface set the AUX bus outputs and  
reentry inputs.  
Setup 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Setup  
In DME setup, carry out settings particular to the DME processor.  
You can make the following settings.  
Input signal settings (Input)  
• Initial Crop: Make the initial crop setting.  
• Matte Illeg. Color Limit: Switch the illegal limiter for the signal generated  
by the DME internal matte generator on or off.  
• System Phase: Adjust the operation timing of the whole system with respect  
to the reference signal.  
• TBC Center: Set the TBC window center position.  
Output signal settings (Output)  
These settings are possible only when the DME is an MVE-9000 or SDI-  
interfaced MVE-8000A.  
• Monitor Output: Set the signals output from the four monitor output  
connectors.  
• Clip Adjust: Adjust the clip levels of DME1 and DME2 outputs.  
Interface with external devices (Device Interface)  
• Editor Protocol: Set the protocol to be used on the Editor port.  
• Editor Port Setting: Make settings relating to the control of the four editor  
ports installed in the DME.  
• GPI Input: Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities, and make the  
action settings.  
• GPI Output: Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities, and make the  
action settings.  
Setup Relating to DCU Input/Output  
In DCU setup, carry out settings particular to the DCU.  
You can make the following settings.  
• Input Config: Assign GPI inputs to Parallel input ports.  
• GPI Input Assign: Make GPI input settings.  
• Output Config: Assign GPI outputs to parallel output ports inserted in an  
option slot.  
• GPI Output Assign: Make GPI output settings.  
• Serial Port Assign: Set the protocol to match the devices connected to a 9-  
pin serial port. You can also select the control panel used to control each  
device.  
Setup  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally  
Interface  
Carry out settings relating to the interface with the routing switcher, and  
settings relating to the tally interface.  
You can make the following settings.  
Router interface setup (Router)  
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.  
• Matrix Size: Assign the switcher matrix of each switcher processor to S-Bus  
space, and select the matrix size and positioning level, source address  
settings, and so on.  
• External Box: To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with  
a parallel input, assign a matrix as an external selector in the S-Bus space.  
Make the matrix size, assignment level, source address, and other settings.  
• Alias Name Gp: Set the group number for an S-Bus description name to be  
displayed in the source name displays for a cross-point operation.  
Tally interface setup (Tally)  
Group tally settings (Group Tally)  
• Tally Group: Select the group tally (Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8) which can be  
used. (For the parallel tally, all groups can be used regardless of this setting.)  
• S-Bus Tally Enable: Specify S-Bus tally enabled or disabled.  
Wiring information input (Wiring)  
Input the information which specifies the physical wiring between switcher  
and routing switcher or between two routing switchers.  
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.  
Tally enable settings (Tally Enable)  
Specify the destination to be the reference for tally generation, and make  
various settings.  
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.  
• Tally Type: Specify the tally type.  
• Destination: Specify the address and level.  
• Tally Enable: Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled.  
Enable: Always enabled.  
Disable: Always disabled.  
Tally Input: Follow the tally input status.  
Setup 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copy (Tally Copy)  
Copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a different  
source.  
These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally.  
Parallel port settings (Parallel Tally)  
Make the parallel port settings for output of tally information pertaining to  
sources and destinations.  
For each of the tally output terminal numbers, specify the tally type, and source  
address or destination level and address.  
Serial tally settings (Serial Tally)  
Make the serial tally settings, including tally type and source address for each  
serial tally port.  
Simple Connection to MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote  
Panel (Option)  
To connect the MKS-8080/8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to a CCP-8000  
Center Control Panel using an S-Bus data link requires a BKPF-R70A Routing  
Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for  
connection.  
However, using a simple connection, the need for an S-Bus data link primary  
station is avoided, and direct connection to the MKS-8080/8082 is possible.  
A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met:  
• There are no devices other than the CCP-8000 and MKS-8080/8082  
connected on the S-Bus data link.  
• There are no more than 16 MKS-8080/8082 units connected on the S-Bus  
data link.  
For details of the connection procedure, see “Procedure for Simple  
Connection” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Setup  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Files  
You can save register data, including setup information and snapshot  
information, as a file on a hard disk or memory card, and recall it as required.  
You can operate on individual files or registers, or together in a batch.  
Regarding frame memory, it is possible to capture image data stored in an  
external device into frame memory. You can also convert the format of image  
data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device.  
Files that can be manipulated  
The following files can be saved and recalled.  
• Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices  
• Device status data for system startup  
• Key memory setting data  
• Video process memory setting data  
• Keyframe effect setting data  
• Snapshot setting data  
• Wipe snapshot setting data  
• DME wipe snapshot setting data  
• Key snapshot setting data  
• Shotbox setting data  
• Macro setting data  
• Macro attachment data  
• Menu macro setting data  
• Frame memory image data  
File operations  
You can carry out the following file operations.  
When operating on individual files or registers  
Save: Save the data in a register to the hard disk or memory card.  
Load: Load a file from the hard disk or memory card.  
Copy: Copy a file within a directory or from one directory to another. When a  
remote panel is used, this function applies to it, too.  
Rename: Rename a file on the hard disk or memory card.  
Delete: Delete a file from the hard disk or memory card.  
When operating on files or registers in a batch  
The Save, Load, Copy and Delete operations are performable.  
Files 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory  
Import: Import a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card into  
frame memory after changing its format.  
Export: Export a file in a register to hard disk or memory card after changing  
its format.  
You can import TIFF, BMP, and TARGA files as follows into frame memory.  
File type  
Format  
File name  
Notes  
TIFF file  
RGB  
Maximum eight  
• Layers cannot be used.  
• If an alpha channel is  
present, two files are  
created as a pair.  
uncompressed characters, plus  
format extension .tif required  
a)  
BMP file  
Maximum eight  
characters, plus  
extension .bmp required  
–
Windows 24-  
bit format  
TARGA file RGB  
Maximum eight  
• Layers cannot be used.  
• If an alpha channel is  
present, two files are  
created as a pair.  
uncompressed/ characters, plus  
compressed extension .tga required  
format  
a) Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
Note  
This functionality has been tested and confirmed to work with TIFF files  
created by Photoshop, but it may not be possible to use TIFF files created  
with some other software. (Photoshop is a trademark of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated.)  
About import image size  
Pay attention to the following, depending on the signal format which you use.  
SDTV (480i)  
Images 720 × 487 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen.  
The following figure shows how an import image is processed when the 480i/  
59.94 format is used.  
Images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin.  
When an image is smaller than the screen, the remainder of the screen is filled  
with black. When it is larger, parts which extend beyond the screen are  
discarded.  
Files  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
720 pixels  
487 pixels  
Position of small picture  
Parts discarded when  
image is too large  
Section filled with black for  
a small picture  
No pixel ratio conversion is performed when images are imported for the  
SDTV format. When the signal format is 480i/59.94, if you create an image  
with a size of 720 × 540 on a computer and then import it just as it is, the image  
will be too tall. To maintain the shape of the image, first create it as a 720 × 540  
image and then use computer software tools to compress the vertical dimension  
to 487 pixels before importing it.  
HDTV (1080i)  
Images of 1920 × 1080 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full  
screen.  
Like SDTV, images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin.  
When an image is smaller or larger than the screen, processing is the same as  
for SDTV.  
Since the pixel ratio of the HDTV format is 1:1, files created on computers are  
imported in their original shapes.  
The following table shows the image sizes which exactly fill the full screen for  
the various signal formats.  
Signal format  
Image size (H × V)  
480i/59.94  
720 × 487  
576i/50  
720 × 576  
Files 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Signal format  
Image size (H × V)  
1080i/50  
1920 × 1080  
1080i/59.94  
1080PsF/23.976  
1080PsF/24  
1080PsF/25  
1080PsF/29.97  
720P/50  
1280 × 720  
720P/59.94  
Importing 720P movie material  
To import movie material in 720P format, it is necessary to treat each frame as  
a separate image file.  
Directory operations  
You can create a new directory within a hard disk or memory card, and carry  
out other operations, such as renaming and deleting.  
For details of operations, see “Directory Operations” in Chapter 17 (Volume  
2).  
File copying between different unit IDs  
Switcher and DME files within the hard disk or memory card are managed by  
unit ID.  
To copy files between different unit IDs, use the Unit ID Copy menu.  
For details of operations, see “Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs” in  
Chapter 17 (Volume 2).  
Saving data recalled by autoload  
At power on, you can automatically recall data previously stored on the hard  
disk. (Autoload function)  
The following data can be loaded by the autoload function.  
• Keyframe effect setting data  
• Snapshot setting data  
• Wipe snapshot setting data  
• DME wipe snapshot setting data  
• Key snapshot setting data  
• Shotbox setting data  
• Macro setting data  
• Macro attachment data  
Files  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Frame memory image data  
To use the autoload function, the data required must first be saved.  
For the on/off setting of the autoload function, see “Selecting the State After  
Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
For details of saving operations, see “Saving Files Recalled by Autoload” in  
Chapter 17 (Volume 2).  
Files 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Macros  
Overview  
The term “macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal  
selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory,  
so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same  
sequence of operations.  
To record menu operations in memory, use a menu macro (see page 222).  
For details of macro operations, see “Macros” in Chapter 18 (Volume 2).  
Macro registers  
The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a “macro register.” For each  
control panel there are 99 macro registers, numbered 1 to 99.  
Events  
The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed  
“events.” One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events.  
The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control  
panel that can be saved as events in a macro.  
Control block  
Event  
Auxiliary bus control block  
Cross-point selection  
Cross-point selection in router control mode  
Cross-point control block  
• Cross-point selection  
• Recalling a function assigned to a key 2 row button  
Macros  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Control block  
Event  
Transition  
control block  
standard type • Auto transition and cut for the transition execution  
section  
• Auto transition and key on/off for the independent  
a)  
key transition execution section  
• Next transition setting  
• Transition type selection  
• Pattern limit on/off  
• Key snapshot recall  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory  
b)  
clips playback  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory  
b)  
clips stop  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory  
b)  
clips cue-up  
simple type  
• Transition execution section take  
• Tansition type selection  
• Pattern limit on/off  
compact type  
• Transition execution section auto transition and cut  
• Independent key transition execution section auto  
transition  
a)  
• Next transition setting  
• Transition type selection  
• Pattern limit on/off  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory  
b)  
clips playback  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory  
b)  
clips stop  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR /frame memory  
b)  
clips cue-up  
Independent key transition  
control block  
(simple type)  
• Independent key transition execution section take  
a)  
and key on/off  
• Key snapshot recall  
• Selection of independent key transition type  
Flexi Pad  
control block  
standard type Recalling the following data  
• Snapshots  
• Wipe snapshots  
• DME wipe snapshots  
simple type  
Recalling the following data  
• Snapshots  
• Wipe snapshots  
• DME wipe snapshots  
Numeric keypad control block Recalling the following data  
• Effects  
• Snapshots  
• Shotbox  
• Master snapshots  
• Master timeline  
Macros 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control block  
Event  
Keyframe control block  
• Effect rewind  
• Effect execution  
• Effect fast forward  
• Selection of effect execution direction  
Device control block  
(trackball)  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips start point setting  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips playback  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips stop  
(joystick)  
c)  
(search dial)  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips cue-up  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips fast forward  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips rewind  
• VTR/disk recorder record  
• Frame memory clip loop setting  
Downstream key control block • Independent key transition execution section auto  
a)  
transition and cut  
• Key snapshot recall  
Fade to black control block  
Menu control block  
Execution of fade to black transition  
• Disk recorder/Extended VTR file recalling  
• Recalling the functions assigned to [PREFS 1] to  
[PREFS 16] buttons  
• Execution of a menu macro  
• Recalling frame memory clips  
Utility/Shotbox control block  
Recalling the functions assigned to memory recall  
buttons  
a) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key, the key state at the time of event registration  
(inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro. When the macro is executed, the event is  
only replayed if the key state matches the saved state. (Example: For a macro with an event that  
deletes a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted it is deleted, but otherwise  
nothing occurs as concerns keying.)  
b) Function valid only when [PLAY], [STOP], and [CUEUP] have been set in the Setup menu.  
c) When using the device control block (search dial), this operates as a reference module. When  
not used, this operates on the module selected in the Panel >Config menu.  
For details of reference module selection, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)”  
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Macro Creation and Editing  
You can create or edit a macro by recalling a macro register.  
To create a new macro, recall an empty macro register, and create the desired  
sequence of events (by executing the sequence of operations on the control  
panel that you want to save as events in the macro).  
Macros  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To add an event to an existing macro, recall the register holding the macro, and  
create the event you want to add.  
Note  
While editing a macro, it is not possible to execute another macro.  
Creating a macro  
To include all information associated with an operation when  
registering a macro event  
When registering an auto transition operation as an event, you can register the  
auto transition event to include the transition rate and background A/B bus  
selection status. When registering an effect execution, rewind, or fast forward  
as an event, you can also save the region to which this applies.  
To use this capability, assign the following functions to user preference buttons  
in the menu control block or buttons in the utility/shotbox control block, and  
turn the relevant button on before you start an event to register.  
Macro AT with Rate (Macro Auto Trans Event with/without Rate): When  
registering an auto transition macro event in one of the M/E banks or the  
PGM/PST bank, include the transition rate.  
Macro AT with A/B Bus (Macro Auto Trans Event with/without A/B Bus):  
When registering an auto transition macro event in the transition control  
block, include the background A/B bus cross-point.  
Macro TL with Region (Macro Timeline with Region): When registering an  
effect execution, rewind, or fast forward as a macro event, save the  
affected region together in the macro.  
For details of the method of assigning these functions to buttons, see “Setting  
Button Assignments (Prefs/Utility Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Events requiring adjustment when creating a macro  
The following events require time for execution to complete, and therefore  
when executed within a macro sequence, a pause event must be inserted to  
adjust the timing.  
• Rewinding effects involving external device control  
• VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR cue-up  
For example, create a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back as follows.  
Macros 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Macro event execution order:  
Macro events:  
Auto insert mode on/off setting  
You can switch on or off the mode (auto insert mode) in which at the same time  
that a control panel operation is carried out, the event is automatically saved in  
a macro.  
Editing a macro  
You can carry out the following macro editing operations.  
Event insertion  
Insert the control panel operation as an event in a macro.  
Event modification  
Modify any event. You can modify all events within a macro, or events within  
a specified range in a single operation.  
Event deletion  
Delete any one event. You can delete all events within a macro, or events  
within a specified range in a single operation. You can then paste the deleted  
event using the paste function.  
Event copy  
Copy any one event. You can copy all events within a macro, or events within  
a specified range in a single operation.  
Event paste  
Paste a copied or deleted event at a desired position within a macro.  
Undoing an editing operation  
You can undo the last event insertion, modification, deletion, or paste  
operation.  
Macro merging  
During macro editing, you can recall and copy another register to merge it with  
the macro being edited.  
For example, while editing macro register 2 you can recall and copy register 1  
to merge it as shown in the following figure.  
Macros  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recall macro register 2, and  
move to another event.  
Recall register 1.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Macro being edited (register 2)  
Newly recalled macro (register 1)  
Copy contents of  
register 1 and add  
after current event  
(register 2).  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
Contents of  
register 1 remain  
unchanged.  
Macro Execution  
To execute a macro, recall the register in which the macro is held.  
Simultaneous with the register recall, all events stored in the macro are played  
back (executed) in sequence without pause.  
Pausing and restarting macro execution  
It is also possible to execute a macro in the following ways.  
Pause event  
To adjust the execution timing of a particular event (to delay the start of  
execution of the event by a particular time interval), you can store a special  
event which pauses macro execution. This event is called a “pause event.”  
When you store a pause event, you can set the interval for which the macro is  
paused (the pause length) to any value in the range 1 to 999 frames. When the  
set time has elapsed, the macro is automatically executed.  
Pause zero event  
By including a pause event with the time set to zero, you can make macro  
execution pause at the pause event.  
Macros 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Step execution (requires a Setup menu setting)  
By selecting step execution mode in the Setup menu, you can make macro  
execution pause every time an event is executed.  
Take operation  
When a paused macro is restarted, this is referred to as a “Take” operation.  
Macro take operation using a GPI input  
You can carry out a macro take operation using a GPI input on the control panel  
and DCU.  
For GPI input settings, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device  
Interface Menu” and “GPI Input Setting (GPI Input Assign Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).  
Macro Timeline  
By recording macro recall and execute action on a timeline, in the same way as  
for key frames in an effect, you can automatically execute them in a sequence.  
This timeline is called a “macro timeline,” and one macro timeline can have up  
to 99 macros being executed simultaneously in parallel.  
There are 99 registers in the Macro region that can be recorded on the macro  
timeline, numbered 1 to 99. These registers are distinct from the registers  
where individual macros are stored.  
Note  
If you use a macro timeline to superimpose more than one macro, the macros  
may not be executed according to the timing information registered in the  
timeline.  
Available key frame functions  
The following lists the key frame functions that can be used on the macro  
timeline.  
• RECALL(1 to 99), STORE(1 to 99), RECALL UNDO, STORE UNDO,  
search for empty register, AUTO SAVE, RECALL MODE (RECALL,  
RECALL & REWIND)  
• EDIT ENABLE, EDIT UNDO  
• CONST DUR, EFF DUR, KF DUR, DELAY, PAUSE, INSERT BEFORE,  
INSERT AFTER, MODIFY, DELETE, COPY, PASTE BEFORE, PASTE  
AFTER, FROM TO, ALL  
• PREV KF, NEXT KF, GOTO TC, GOTO KF, RUN, REWIND, FF, STOP  
NEXT KF, NORMAL, JOG, KF FADER  
Macros  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The following key frame functions cannot be used  
• KF LOOP, EFFECT LOOP, REVERSE, NORMAL/REVERSE  
• PATH  
Saving to a register  
Set the recall and execute actions for the macros to be registered in the timeline,  
using the Macro Timeline menu. The setting data can be saved in a register as  
key frame data. You can manipulate this data by recalling the register in which  
it is saved, and using the key frame control block.  
For details, see Chapter 18, “Macros” (Volume 2).  
Note  
An action set for a key frame is only executed when the key frame effect is  
executed in the forward direction. It is important to remember that the action is  
not executed in the reverse direction when executing simultaneously with  
switcher and DME key frame effects.  
Forcibly ending a macro timeline  
• If the timeline has completed but a macro is still executing, press the  
[REWIND] or [RUN] button in the key frame control block to forcibly end  
the macro timeline.  
• In a macro timeline, since a take operation is not possible, if a macro included  
in the timeline has a pause event with a pause time of zero, the remainder of  
the timeline after the pause is ignored, and the macro timeline ends at that  
point.  
Register editing functions  
You can use the following editing functions on a register in which a macro  
timeline is stored.  
• Copy  
• Move  
• Swap  
• Merge  
• Lock  
• Name  
• Delete  
File-related functions  
You can save and recall a created macro timeline as effect data, in the File  
menu.  
Macros 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Macro Editing Using Menus  
Macro Register Editing  
You can lock, copy, and delete the contents of macro registers, and rename  
macro registers.  
Lock: Write-protect the contents of a macro register.  
Copy: Copy the contents of a macro register to another macro register.  
Delete: Delete the contents of a macro register.  
Rename: Rename a macro register.  
Online editing of macro events  
Using the On Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing  
operations while checking the control panel operation sequence. You can also  
carry out editing using the panel and menu.  
Insert: Insert a macro event.  
Delete: Delete a macro event.  
Modify: Modify a macro event.  
Offline editing of macro events  
Using the Off Line Edit menu, you can carry out the following editing  
operations in the menu only, unrelated to operation of the control panel.  
Insert: Insert a macro event.  
Add: Add a macro event.  
Delete: Delete a macro event.  
You can also create a new macro.  
Macro Attachment  
Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a  
control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever, linking the  
execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro  
execution.  
Setting a macro attachment to a button  
Select one of the following three linking modes to make the macro attachment.  
Pre-macro: Mode in which the button function is executed after macro  
execution has completed  
Macros  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Post-macro: Mode in which the macro is executed after carrying out the button  
function  
Macro only: Mode in which the button function is not executed, and the macro  
only is executed  
The selection of pre- or post-macro mode is carried out in the cross-point  
control block of the PGM/PST bank or the M/E banks. For the macro-only  
mode, assign the selection function to a utility/shotbox control block button or  
user preference button, and make the selection by pressing the button.  
Alternatively, without pressing the button, you can make the selection simply,  
by simultaneously pressing the pre-macro and post-macro selection buttons in  
the cross-point control block.  
You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a button.  
For a button whose function is switched by delegation, you can make a separate  
macro attachment for each function.  
For each control panel, you can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings.  
The macro attachment setting is possible for the following bus buttons. For  
button locations, see pages in parentheses.  
Block  
Button  
PGM/PST or M/E bank  
• Background A row cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Background B row cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Key 1 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Key 2 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Key 3 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Key 4 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Utility 1 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• Utility 2 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• DME external video bus cross-point buttons (page  
256)  
• DME utility 1 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
• DME utility 2 bus cross-point buttons (page 256)  
a)  
• [AUTO TRANS] button (page 260)  
• [CUT] button (page 260)  
a)  
• [KEY1 ON] to [KEY4 ON] buttons (pages 260,  
304)  
• The button to which the same function as that of  
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips play, cue, and stop buttons (page 260)  
i)  
• Memory recall buttons  
• Buttons set to “Inhibit” (page 256)  
b)  
Auxiliary bus control block  
Keyframe control block  
• Cross-point button1st row (page 288)  
b)  
• Cross-point button 2nd row (page 288)  
• [RUN], [REWIND] and [FF] buttons (page 281)  
• [NORM], [REV], and [NORM/REV] buttons (page  
281)  
Macros 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Block  
Button  
Device control block (trackball,  
joystick)  
The buttons to which the same functions as those of  
VTR/disk recorder/Extended VTR/frame memory  
clips play, cue, stop, and start tc buttons (page 271)  
Device control block (search  
dial)  
[PLAY], [CUE], [STOP] and [START TC] buttons  
a)  
Downstream key control block  
• [DSK1 ON] to [DSK4 ON] buttons (page 306)  
• [TAKE] button (page 306)  
a)  
• [MIX], [WIPE], [DME], and [CUT] buttons (page  
306)  
c) d)  
Transition control block  
• [PTN LIMIT] button  
(page 260)  
c) d)  
• [LIMIT SET] and [KF] buttons  
• [NORM], [NORM/REV], and [REV] buttons  
(page 260)  
c) e)  
(pages 260, 310)  
• [MIX], [NAM], [SUPER MIX], [PST COLOR MIX],  
[WIPE], and [DME] buttons (pages 260, 299, 310)  
d)  
• [MIX], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons (page 260)  
• [ALL], [KEY PRIOR], [BKGD], and [KEY1] to  
[KEY4] buttons (pages 260, 299, 310)  
f)  
• [CUT] button (page 304)  
Fade to black control block  
[FTB] button (pages 287, 308)  
Downstream key/fade to black  
control block  
• [DSK1 ON] and [DSK2 ON] buttons  
• [AUTO TRANS] button  
• [FTB] button  
Utility/shotbox control block  
Menu control block  
Memory recall buttons (page 298)  
[PREFS 1] to [PREFS 16] buttons (page 294)  
a) g)  
Independent key transition  
• [KEYx ON] button  
h)  
a)  
control block (simple type)  
• [TAKE] button  
• [MIX], [WIPE], [DME], and [CUT] buttons  
a) In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key by an independent key transition, the key state  
at the time of event registration (inserted or not inserted) is also saved in the macro. When the  
macro is executed, the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state. (Example:  
For a macro with an event that deletes a key, when the macro is executed, if the key is inserted  
it is deleted, but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying.)  
b) Cross-point buttons of the bus assigned by AUX delegation setting.  
c) Macro attachment can be set with these buttons only when they are assigned to [Play/Stop/Cue]  
in the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >Program Button >Transition Module menu and when  
the [DEV] button in the device control block is lit.  
d) Buttons on the standard type module only.  
e) Buttons on the standard type module and compact type module only.  
f) Independent key transition control block (simple type only).  
g) “KEYx” refers to any of KEY1 to KEY4 and DSK1 to DSK4, depending on the key assigned in  
setup.  
h) When there are a number of control blocks on the control panel, and the keys assigned to them  
in setup are the same, then the macro attachment settings for the above buttons are the same.  
The keys being the same includes cases such as “Key1,2” assigned to PGM/PST being the same  
as “DSK1,2”, “Key1,2” assigned to M/E-1 being the same as “M/E-1 Key1,2”, and so on.  
i) Only when key row is operated in the utility/shotbox mode  
Macros  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
• After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in the auxiliary bus  
control block, if in the Setup menu you change the assignment of buses to the  
AUX delegation buttons, the macro attachment setting disappears.  
• After setting a macro attachment to a button for which you can perform  
function replacement or function assignment, if you change the function  
assignment to the button, the macro attachment setting disappears.  
• After setting a macro attachment to a cross-point button in the cross-point  
control block, if you change the function assignment to the button, the macro  
attachment setting disappears.  
Enabling and disabling macro attachment  
You can temporarily disable the macro attachment settings. When a macro  
attachment is disabled, pressing the button does not cause execution of the  
assigned macro.  
You can enable and disable macro attachments for the PGM/PST bank and M/  
E banks individually.  
Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever  
You can set a macro attachment to any particular position of a fader lever in the  
transition control block.  
Notes  
• In macro-only mode it is not possible to set a macro attachment.  
• It is not possible to set a macro attachment to a fader lever in the keyframe  
control block or downstream key control block.  
• For a split fader, you can set a macro attachment to the main split fader.  
For details of a split fader, see “Split Fader” (page 373).  
Clearing the macro attachments  
You can clear all of the macro attachments in a single operation.  
Displaying the macro attachment list  
You can display the macro attachment settings in the form of a list in the menu  
display to check them.  
Macros 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Macros  
The term “menu macro” refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu  
operations is saved as data in memory, so that it can be recalled as required to  
automatically execute the same sequence of operations.  
For more details of menu macros, see “Menu Macros” in Chapter 18 (Volume  
2).  
Menu macro registers  
The area of memory that holds a menu macro is termed a “menu macro  
register.” For each control panel there are 99 menu macro registers, numbered  
1 to 99. You can manipulate these in the menu macro register menu.  
Menu macro events  
The events that can be recorded in a menu macro are operations carried out in  
a menu.  
For menu operations which are not recorded in menu macros, see the  
appendix, “Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro” (Volume 2).  
Menu macro creation and editing  
Carry out menu macro creation and editing in the menu.  
Executing menu macros  
You execute a menu macro after recalling a menu macro register.  
You can recall and execute simultaneously. You can also recall and execute a  
menu macro from a macro recalled on the control panel.  
Macros  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Color Corrector  
The color corrector enables video signal color correction (black balance/white  
balance adjustment, gamma correction, knee correction, etc.).  
Note  
To use the color corrector function on the MVS-8000/8000A requires the  
MKS-8420M Color Corrector Board. To use the color corrector function on the  
MVS-8000G requires the MKS-8442G Frame Memory Board and BZS-8420  
Color Corrector Software. To use the software, you are required to input an  
install key.  
For the method of inputting an install key, see “Installation and Device Setup  
(Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
The color corrector includes the following functions.  
Input video processing  
Carrying out the following corrections to a YUV signal before conversion to  
an RGB signal.  
• Overall gain adjustment of the video signal  
• Gain adjustment of the Y signal  
• Gain adjustment of the C signal  
• Hue delay  
• Black level adjustment  
Primary color correction  
Carrying out the following corrections to each of the R, G, and B signals.  
Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 0% level input signal.  
White balance adjustment: setting the output level for a 100% level input  
signal.  
Gamma correction: adjusting the curvature of the gamma curve.  
Knee correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the gamma  
curve.  
Color Corrector 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Output level  
Output level  
White balance adjustment  
Gamma  
correction  
Input level  
Input level  
Knee correction  
Black balance adjustment  
Unadjusted signal  
Adjusted signal  
It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected.  
Secondary color correction  
For the six colors R (red), G (green), B (blue), Y (yellow), C (cyan), and M  
(magenta), adjust the luminance and saturation, and also the hue within a range  
of 30 degrees of the center value for each color.  
You can mask a part of the region to be corrected.  
Note  
This function is disabled when spot CCR is enabled with a setup setting. For  
details, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
On the MVS-8000G, this function and spot CCR can be enabled at the same  
time.  
RGB clip  
For each of the R, G, and B signals, you can make dark clip and white clip  
adjustments.  
Luminance processing  
After converting a signal to which RGB color correction has been applied to a  
YUV signal, dividing the luminance levels into three regions, referred to as  
Color Corrector  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dark, Middle, and Bright, and applying video signal adjustments to these  
regions.  
Over Bright point  
Bright/Middle point  
Under Dark point  
Dark  
Middle/Dark point  
Middle  
Bright  
Input signal  
luminance level  
There are three modes for luminance processing, as follows.  
Tint mode: adding a specified color to the original video signal.  
Color Modify mode: adjusting the original video signal.  
Y Modify mode: adjusting the output levels of the input luminance signal.  
• White balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input  
luminance signal at the 100% level.  
• Black balance adjustment: setting the output level for an input  
luminance signal at the 0% level.  
• Y lift correction: adjusting the curvature of the curve.  
• Y dark correction: adjusting the position of the maximum point of the  
curve.  
Output signal  
luminance level  
Output signal luminance level  
White balance adjustment  
Y Lift  
Input signal  
luminance  
level  
Input signal  
luminance  
level  
Y Dark  
Black balance adjustment  
Unadjusted signal  
Adjusted signal  
It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected.  
Color Corrector 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spot color adjustment  
You can change the color of a specified color region to a different color,  
without affecting other regions. You can also mask part of such a region.  
Then for the region other than the region whose color you have changed, you  
can make the following corrections.  
• Video signal overall gain adjustment  
• Y signal gain adjustment  
• Y signal offset adjustment  
• C signal gain adjustment  
• C signal hue adjustment  
Note  
This function is disabled when secondary CCR is enabled with a setup setting.  
For details, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
On the MVS-8000G, this function and secondary CCR can be enabled at the  
same time.  
Output video processing  
Carrying out the following corrections on the YUV signal.  
• Video signal overall gain adjustment  
• Y signal gain adjustment  
• Y signal offset adjustment  
• C signal gain adjustment  
• C signal hue adjustment  
YUV clip  
For each of the luminance and color difference signals, the following  
processing.  
White clip: setting the maximum level of the luminance signal.  
Dark clip: setting the minimum level of the luminance signal.  
Positive clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the positive direction of the  
color difference signal.  
Negative clip: setting the maximum amplitude in the negative direction of the  
color difference signal.  
Copy and swap  
Copying or swapping data between two color correctors (CCR1 and CCR2).  
Color Corrector  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Simple P/P Software  
Overview  
By installing the BZS-8250 Simple P/P Software in the MVS-8000A/  
8000ASF/8000G/8000GSF Switcher Processor, you can use a separate  
program/preset function without using the M/E hardware.  
Getting access to the software  
To use the Simple P/P Software, you are required to enter an install key which  
validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the install key  
is not required.)  
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.  
On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the  
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu  
of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see Chapter 16,  
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” (Volume 2).  
Restrictions on Use  
Since this software is a simple version of the program/preset function, there are  
some restrictions on use. The following lists the points at which operation is  
different from a normal program/preset function. For details of the normal  
operations, set the relevant sections of this manual.  
Restrictions on using a downstream key  
• DSK3 and DSK4 cannot be used.  
For the key priority, set priority 1 or priority 2.  
• The following downstream key types cannot be used.  
– Chroma key  
– Color vector key  
– Wipe pattern key  
– Key wipe pattern key  
• When using a matte as the key fill for a downstream key, a mix color cannot  
be used.  
• It is not possible to modify a downstream key edge. The edge blink also  
cannot be used.  
• For a downstream key, main mask and sub-mask cannot be used.  
Simple P/P Software 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• A processed key cannot be used. Therefore, it is not possible to apply a DME  
effect to a downstream key.  
• As an independent key transition type, wipe and DME wipe cannot be used.  
• The resizer cannot be used.  
• The key frame delay mode cannot be used.  
Restrictions on executing transitions in the transition control  
block  
• DME wipes cannot be used.  
• Wipes can be used, but there are restrictions on use. For details, see the next  
item, “Restrictions when using wipes.”  
Restrictions when using wipes  
• The wipe patterns that can be used are standard wipes (pattern numbers 1 to  
24) only.  
• A pattern mix cannot be used.  
• A split (splitting the wipe pattern) cannot be used.  
• When a border or soft border is selected for a wipe edge, the signal to be  
inserted in the edge (edge fill) is restricted as follows.  
– The utility 2 bus cannot be selected.  
– When using a matte, a mix color cannot be used.  
– Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for M/E and  
Simple P/P, the same image is not obtained.  
• The following wipe modifiers cannot be used:  
– Replication “Shift” and Multi Adjust menu adjustments  
– Pairing  
– Modulation  
– Spring  
– Spiral  
• Changing modifier parameter settings changes the wipe pattern size.  
Restrictions on utility buses  
The utility 1 and utility 2 buses cannot be used.  
Assignment of signals to output connectors  
Connectors to which the P/P row output signal assignment is fixed  
The assignment of the following signals to output connectors OUT17 to  
OUT22 is fixed.  
Simple P/P Software  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output  
connector  
Fixed assigned outputs  
Standard mode  
a)  
Multi-program mode  
DSK mode  
b)  
OUT17  
OUT18  
OUT19  
OUT20  
OUT21  
OUT22  
Program  
Program  
Preview  
Clean  
Program 1  
P/P OUT1  
b)  
Program 2  
P/P OUT1  
b)  
Key preview 1  
Key preview 2  
Clean 1  
P/P OUT2  
b)  
P/P OUT3  
b)  
Key preview  
Preset  
P/P OUT4  
Preset  
Clean 2  
a) In DSK mode, the backgrounds that can be selected in the PGM Config menu are restricted to  
background 1 and background 2.  
b) Depends on the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu.  
OUT5 and OUT6 cannot be used.  
Connectors for which a P/P row output signal can be selected  
For an edit preview bus or AUX bus assigned to output connector OUT23 or  
OUT24, you can select a P/P row output signal.  
If these buses are assigned to other than OUT23 or OUT24, then it is not  
possible to select a P/P row output signal. (Assigning these buses to the two  
connectors is recommended.)  
Output connector  
OUT23  
Assignable bus  
Edit preview bus  
AUX bus  
OUT24  
Format converter output restrictions  
On the MVS-8000G, the signal output from the format converter output  
connectors (FC1, FC2) can be assigned in either of the following ways.  
• Out#15-16: Assignment fixed, signals OUT15 (for FC1), and OUT16 (for  
FC2).  
• Out#17-22: Select from the OUT17 to OUT22 signals. (It is not, however,  
possible to select the same signal for FC1 and FC2.)  
It is not possible to select FC1 and FC2 differently. For example, it is not  
possible to select “Out#15-16” for FC1 and “Out#17-22” for FC2.  
FC3 and FC4 always have the same signals assigned: OUT39 and OUT40  
respectively, and therefore it is not possible to select OUT17-OUT22.  
Logical assignment of the physical PGM/PST  
In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >Logical M/E Assign menu, it is  
not possible to assign the physical PGM/PST as a logical PGM/PST.  
In the <Logical M/E to Physical P/P> group, you can select from M/E-1, M/E-  
2, and M/E-3.  
Simple P/P Software 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi Program 2  
Overview  
What is Multi Program 2?  
By operating the switcher in Multi Program 2 mode, a single switcher mix/  
effects bank can be used to create two separate video outputs, referred to as  
“main” and “sub.” You can set backgrounds, keys, and transitions for each of  
main and sub. Keys 2 to 4, however, are common to main and sub.  
For example, immediately after a score in baseball two versions of the scene  
can be provided as shown below, and switched simultaneously.  
Key 3  
Background A  
(signal from utility 2 bus)  
Background A  
TEAM B  
TEAM A  
Key 1  
Background B  
(signal from utility 3 bus)  
Background B  
Program output for “Main”  
Program output for “Sub”  
Note  
The Multi Program 2 function is only supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G.  
To enable this function requires the BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 software.  
Depending on the CPU module, this function may not be supported. For  
details, consult your Sony service representative or sales representative.  
Using the software  
To use the Multi Program 2 software, you are required to enter an install key  
which validates the software. (If the software has been factory installed, the  
install key is not required.)  
Multi Program 2  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.  
To obtain a key, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the  
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu  
of the switcher.  
For details of the operation, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit  
Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Assigning main and/or sub to switcher banks  
For Multi Program 2 operations, a single switcher bank may be shared, and  
switched between main and sub, or two separate switcher banks may be used,  
each dedicated to main or sub.  
Example 1: Assigning M/E-1 main and sub to a single switcher bank, and  
switching between them  
Used switched between M/E-1 main and sub  
Example 2: Assigning separate switcher banks as “M/E-1 main dedicated” and  
“M/E-1 sub dedicated”  
Used for M/E-1 main operations  
Used for M/E-1 sub operations  
Video creation operations in Multi Program 2 mode  
For each of main and sub, there are differences from the operations in standard  
mode.  
Multi Program 2 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For details, see “Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard  
Mode” (page 242).  
Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2  
Basic operation sequence  
Enter the BZS-8200 install key (first time only)  
↓
Set Multi Program 2 operating mode for each switcher bank  
↓
Assign output signals, and set the background configuration, key  
configuration, and key preview configuration  
↓
For each switcher bank, make a main/sub assignment (one of main dedicated,  
sub dedicated, and main and sub shared)  
↓
For a switcher bank assigned to main and sub shared, assign the [MAIN] and  
[SUB] delegation buttons  
↓
Create the main and sub images  
↓
Execute the transition  
Optional operations  
• Making cross-point settings  
• Enabling DME wipe operations for sub  
• Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection  
• Including Multi Program 2 data in keyframes and snapshots  
• Changing the key assignment for each output  
• Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons in the fade-to-  
black control block  
• Changing the matrix size to Standard  
• Making settings for keyframe timeline operation  
Basic Operations (Required)  
Entering the BZS-8200 install key (first time only)  
After installing the BZS-8200 Multi Program 2 software in the switcher, carry  
out the following procedure.  
Multi Program 2  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
2
In the status area of the Engineering Setup >System >Install/Unit Config  
menu, select the switcher (SWRx), and press [License].  
The License menu appears.  
In the License menu, enter the BZS-8200 install key.  
For details of the operation, see “Installation and Device Setup (Install/  
Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
3
4
Shut down the menus. (see page 333.)  
Power the switcher and SCU off and on again.  
Setting the operating mode for each switcher bank  
To set a desired switcher bank to Multi Program 2 mode, use the following  
procedure.  
1
2
3
Display the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu.  
Select the switcher bank from M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P.  
In the <M/E Config> group, select [Multi Program2].  
Note  
In the PGM/PST when using the simple P/P software (see page 227),  
[Multi Program2] cannot be selected.  
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required, to set the operating mode for all desired  
switcher banks.  
Assigning output signals for Multi Program 2 mode  
To assign signals to outputs  
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >M/E Output Assign menu.  
The difference from standard mode is that OUT1 is fixed, set to PGM1 (main  
program), and OUT6 is fixed, set to PGM2 (sub program), and that for the  
OUT2 to OUT5 signals you can assign any signal selected from the following.  
PGM1, PGM2, PGM3, PGM4, PVW1, PVW2, K-PVW1, K-PVW2,  
CLEAN, SUB CLEAN  
Note  
Each of main and sub can use a maximum of four of the six outputs (OUT1 to  
OUT6). The outputs can be used within the following limits.  
Multi Program 2 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• OUT1, OUT2: main only  
• OUT3, OUT4: can be used for either main or sub  
• OUT5, OUT6: sub only  
For details, see “To assign the output of each bank in Multi Program mode”  
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
To set the background and key configuration  
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >PGM Config menu.  
The following are the differences from standard mode.  
Background configuration: Consists of the following combinations.  
• For main: Clean, Bkgd A, Bkgd B  
• For sub: Sub Clean, Utility 2, Utility 3  
Key configuration: Key1 can be set to “Enable” only when the background is  
Clean, Bkgd A, or Bkgd B.  
For details, see “To set the output configuration for each bank” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
To set the key preview configuration  
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config >K-PVW Config menu.  
The following are the differences from standard mode.  
Background configuration: Clean or Sub Clean  
Key configuration: Key1 can be set to “On” or “Link” only when the  
background is Clean.  
For details, see “To set the key preview configuration” in Chapter 16 (Volume  
2).  
To assign sub outputs to output ports  
Use the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Output >Output Assign menu.  
You can assign a sub output signal to a switcher output port number.  
For details, see “Assigning output signals” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Assigning main and/or sub to switcher banks  
For each switcher bank for which Multi Program 2 mode is selected, set  
whether this is main dedicated, sub dedicated, or main and sub shared.  
To assign main and sub to a single switcher bank  
1
2
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign menu,  
select the switcher bank.  
In the <Main/Sub Assign> group, select [Main&Sub].  
Main: use for main operations.  
Multi Program 2  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub: use for sub operations.  
Main&Sub: use for both main and sub operations.  
When “Main&Sub” is selected, it is necessary to assign [MAIN] and  
[SUB] delegation buttons to the control panel.  
To assign main and sub to two consecutive switcher banks  
For example, to assign the first row (first switcher bank) to M/E-1 main, and  
the second row (second switcher bank) to M/E-1 sub, use the following  
procedure.  
1
In the status area of the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/  
Sub Assign menu, select 1st Row (M/E-1), then press [Main] in the <Main/  
Sub Assign> group.  
2
3
Press [Dual M/E Assign] to assign M/E to two banks.  
In this state, both 1st Row and 2nd Row are set to main.  
Set “2nd Row” to [Sub].  
This cancels the shift/non-shift assignment for dual M/E in standard mode.  
Note  
It is not possible to assign the combinations of Main with Main&Sub, or Sub  
with Main&Sub.  
Assigning the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to buttons  
on the control panel  
You can assign the [MAIN] and [SUB] delegation buttons to any of the  
following three places.  
To assign to the pattern limit buttons (PTN LIMIT and LIMIT SET) in  
the transition control block (standard type)  
For details of the transition control block (standard type), see page 260.  
1
2
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, press [Program Button].  
The Program Button menu appears.  
Press [Transition Module].  
The Transition Module menu appears.  
Multi Program 2 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Select the switcher bank, then in the <PTN LIMIT/LIMIT SET/KF Button  
Assign> group, press [Main/Sub].  
You can now use the [PTN LIMIT] button as [MAIN], and the [LIMIT  
SET] button as [SUB].  
To assign to the wipe direction selection buttons (NORM and  
NORM REV) in the transition control block  
This applies to a standard type and compact type transition control block.  
For details of the transition control block (standard type), see page 260, and  
for details of the transition control block (compact type), see page 310.  
1
2
In the Transition Module menu, select the switcher bank.  
In the <NORM/NORM REV/REV Button Assign> group, press [Main/  
Sub].  
You can now use the [NORM] button as [MAIN], and the [NORM/REV]  
button as [SUB].  
To assign to macro buttons in the cross-point control block  
For details of the cross-point control block, see page 256.  
1
2
3
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, press [Program Button].  
The Program Button menu appears.  
Press [Xpt Module].  
The Xpt Module menu appears.  
Select the switcher bank, then in the <PRE MCRO/POST MCRO> group,  
press [Main Sub].  
You can now use the [PRE MCRO] button as [MAIN], and the [POST  
MCRO] button as [SUB].  
To assign macro operations to different buttons  
If in the above operation you assigned a Multi Program 2 function to the macro  
buttons, you can assign the PRE MCRO and POST MCRO functions to  
different buttons.  
For details, see “Assigning functions to user preference buttons” or  
“Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility/shotbox control  
block” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Multi Program 2  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode  
(When Sharing a Switcher Bank)  
To create video on the M/E or PGM/PST bank assigned to both main and sub  
operations, use the following procedure.  
1
2
3
Press the [MAIN] button, turning it on, and turning off the [SUB] button.  
With the normal operations, create the main video.  
Press the [SUB] button, turning it on, and turning off the [MAIN] button.  
Now you can create the sub video.  
4
Create the sub video.  
The basic method of operation is the same as for the main video, except  
that the utility 2 bus signal is assigned to background A, and the utility 3  
bus signal is assigned to background B.  
For sub, only keys 2 to 4 can be used, and for wipes, standard wipe patterns  
only. There are also other differences in operation from standard mode.  
For details, see “Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and  
Standard Mode” (page 242) and “Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2  
Mode” (page 243).  
5
6
Press the [MAIN] and [SUB] buttons simultaneously, turning them on.  
If both buttons are lit, the control panel shows the status of main.  
Carry out the transition.  
Both main and sub video images are switched.  
Optional Operations  
Making cross-point settings  
Cross-point assign tables can be set not only for main output but also for sub  
output.  
You can set cross-point assign tables for the following banks.  
M/E-1 SUB to M/E-3 SUB  
P/P SUB  
The table actually used is that for which the control panel delegation button is  
lit.  
Multi Program 2 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For details, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Enabling DME wipe operations for sub  
By factory default, DME wipe operations are inhibited for sub background. To  
enable them, in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, set [DME  
Wipe Sub Enable] to On.  
This enables DME wipe operations for sub background.  
This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST  
bank).  
Note  
If a DME wipe for sub is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe, the image will not  
be handled correctly.  
Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection  
In Multi Program 2 mode, you can inhibit other uses of the utility 2 bus signal  
in order to use the signal as the background for sub.  
This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST  
bank).  
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >MP2 Main/Sub Assign menu, set  
[Util2 Inhibit] to On.  
This inhibits operations of selecting from the background B row while holding  
down the [UTIL] button in the cross-point control block.  
Including Multi Program 2 data in recall operations of keyframes  
and snapshots  
In the Engineering Setup >Switcher >Config menu, set [Recall M/E Config] to  
On.  
When a keyframe or snapshot is stored or recalled, the following data is  
included.  
M/E Config, PGM Config, M/E Output Assign, and Key PVW Config  
For details of the above data, see “Setting the operating mode for each  
switcher bank” (page 233) and “Assigning output signals for Multi Program  
2 mode” (page 233).  
This setting applies to the whole control panel (all M/E banks and PGM/PST  
bank).  
Note  
M/E Config data is saved, even when this setting is Off.  
Multi Program 2  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the key assignment for each output (Misc menu)  
In Multi Program 2 mode you can change the key assignments independently.  
The following describes an example using M/E-1, but the operation is the same  
for other banks.  
Notes  
• This setting is linked to the setting in the Engineering Setup >Switcher >  
Config >PGM Config menu.  
• It is not possible to make this setting while the above PGM Config menu is  
locked, or [Recall M/E Config] (see previous item) is set to Off.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF5 ‘Key Assign.’  
The Key Assign menu appears, and the current key assignment is shown  
in the status area.  
Change the setting in “Key Enable” as required.  
Keys recalled in a snapshot recall  
If a snapshot is recalled independently on main or sub, this only retrieves the  
settings for the key assigned to the recalled side. For example, if key 1 and key  
2 are assigned on main, and key 3 and key 4 are assigned on sub, then if you  
recall a snapshot on main, this only retrieves the settings for key 1 and key 2,  
and the state of key 3 and key 4 assigned on sub is not affected.  
Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons  
You can assign the sub preview output to a preview selection button in the  
fade-to-black control block or downstream key/fade-to-black control block.  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).  
When the Multi Program 2 license is valid, by assigning the “Shift” function to  
a button, you can assign two preview outputs, “Shift” and “Unshift” to a single  
button. To use the shift output, always assign “Shift” to some button.  
Changing the matrix size to Standard  
When using a router, if the matrix size is set to [Compact (128×128)], it is not  
possible to control the utility 3 bus on the S-Bus. When using Multi Program  
2, in the <Matrix Size> group of the Engineering Setup >Router/Tally >Router  
menu, select [Standard (136×138)].  
For details, see “Assigning switcher inputs and outputs to S-Bus space” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Multi Program 2 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
As for the bus number of the utility 3 bus, a DME Key bus number is used as  
follows.  
No.  
70  
Bus (Standard)  
M/E-1 DME Key  
M/E-2 DME Key  
M/E-3 DME Key  
P/P DME Key  
Bus (MP2)  
M/E-1 Utility3  
M/E-2 Utility3  
M/E-3 Utility3  
P/P Utility3  
85  
100  
115  
Making settings for timeline-related keyframe operations  
To assign sub regions to the region selection buttons in the  
numeric keypad control block  
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config >10 Key Region Assign menu,  
assign regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control  
block.  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).  
To make region and reference region selections using a menu  
During snapshot or keyframe operations, you can select a region (including  
sub) in the Key Frame >Region Select menu. This is convenient for selecting  
some of the regions assigned to the numeric keypad control block or changing  
the reference region.  
For details, see “Specifying the Region and Edit Points” in Chapter 13  
(Volume 2).  
To assign regions shown in the Timeline menu  
You can select how regions assigned to region selection buttons appear in the  
Key Frame >Timeline menu.  
For details, see “Setting the display of regions in the Timeline menu on or off”  
in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).  
Enabling re-entry between the main and sub sides of the same  
M/E bank  
In the Engineering Setup >Panel >Config menu, set [MP2 Free Re-Entry] to  
On.  
Notes  
• Re-entry adds a 1H delay to the video. Nested re-entry may lead to problems  
in the video.  
Multi Program 2  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• A maximum of eight re-entry stages are possible, with the final output having  
a delay of 4H.  
• The selection order of re-entry signals affects the number of lines by which  
the output signal is lowered.  
• If a delay occurs in the image, even when the through mode is set, the  
ancillary data does not pas through.  
• For example, it is possible to select the re-entry of M/E-1 main on M/E-1  
main.  
Restrictions on Mutual Re-entry When Using Multi Program 2  
The snapshot function is affected by this re-entry function.  
When the [MP2 Free Re-Entry] button is On, and any of the switcher banks are  
in Multi Program 2 mode, then the following restrictions apply.  
If you save and recall snapshots simultaneously with more than one region  
specified, the recorded state is played back in the order of precedence of  
regions (M/E-1 >M/E-2 >M/E-3 >P/P). Therefore, if you save and recall  
snapshots with more than one region specified, the cross-point settings may not  
be recalled correctly.  
To recall the snapshots correctly, press the cross-point button before recalling  
the snapshots, to select a signal other than the re-entry signal, then recall the  
snapshots.  
Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode  
• You can set video processing for the utility 3 bus signal.  
• In the control panel and DCU GPI input settings and switcher GPI link  
settings, the actions that can be selected now also include “Sub Cut” and  
“Sub Auto Trans.”  
• A switcher GPI link can now be set also for the utility 3 bus.  
• To the macro event configuration parameters and macro attachment settings,  
“Main & Sub” and “Sub” have been added.  
• For cross-point button link settings, M/E-1 to M/E-3, and P/P “Sub  
Program,” “Sub Preset,” and “Sub Trans PGM” have been added to the link  
source bus.  
• Snapshot attributes can now be set independently for main and sub.  
• There are additional menus for sub which can be recalled by pressing a  
button twice.  
• You can set [MP2 Auto Correct] to On or Off in the Effect menu or Snapshot  
menu. When this is set to On, for example, copy destination and source data  
is automatically recognized as main or sub, and the data interchanged.  
Multi Program 2 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and  
Standard Mode  
The differences from operation in standard mode are as follows.  
Item  
Main  
Sub  
a)  
Keys 1 to 4 can be used  
Keys 2 to 4 only can be  
used  
Keys  
Wipes  
(background)  
Patterns  
Modifiers  
Same as standard mode  
Same as standard mode  
• Only standard patterns  
can be used  
• Pattern mix is not  
possible  
• Pairing, modulation,  
spring, spiral, and split  
cannot be used  
• Edge fill mattes are  
single-color only  
• Replication can be  
selected from four  
patterns  
Wipes (key)  
DME wipes  
Same as wipes (background) for sub  
Can be used Cannot be used (Can be  
Use  
used, with a setting  
change)  
Patterns for 1 For a dedicated interface, each of main and sub can be  
channel  
used.  
For the SDI interface, only one of main and sub can be  
used.  
Patterns for 2 Only one of main and sub can be used  
channels  
(For each M/E, the number of DMEs that can be used is  
the same as in standard mode.)  
Patterns for 3  
channels  
Backgrounds Wipe edge fill matte  
(including color mix and  
other settings in the Matte  
Adjust menu)  
Wipe edge fill matte  
(single-color only)  
Modifiers  
Same as standard mode  
Wipe border colors are  
single-color only  
Transitions  
Snapshots  
Key priority  
Cannot be used  
Cannot be used  
Transition  
preview  
Preset color Color matte or video signal Color matte only  
mix  
selected on the utility 2 bus  
Cross-point  
hold  
Utility 2 cannot be set  
Utility 3 is added. BKGD  
A/B and Key1 cannot be  
set.  
Control from an editor  
Same as standard mode  
Cannot be used  
Multi Program 2  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Item  
Main  
Sub  
Operation setting for  
switcher GPI inputs and  
outputs  
Same as standard mode  
Cannot be used  
a) Keys 2 to 4 are common to main and sub.  
Notes  
• Allow a transition to complete before carrying out main and sub delegation  
switching.  
• The sub background A bus (utility 2 bus) is shared with wipe edge border fill.  
Making a change to one affects the other.  
• Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for main and  
sub, the same image is not obtained.  
• Changing the position of the wipe pattern for sub also changes the pattern  
size.  
Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode  
• The following functions are not available for sub:  
– Data copy and swap  
– Default recall (except for parametric recall)  
– M/E link  
– [TRANS] button function (see page 268)  
– [TRACE] button function (see page 270)  
– [AUTO] button function (see page 309)  
• Re-entry is limited to four levels. Re-entry is not possible for main and sub  
of the same M/E.  
However, this restriction can be removed. For details, see “Enabling re-  
entry between the main and sub sides of the same M/E bank” (page 240).  
• In the following cases, a transition using the fader lever may not be  
performed correctly:  
– When the main and sub bus toggle modes are set differently  
– For a pattern mix, preset color mix, and so on  
• For an Internal bus link, GPI link, or External bus link, the “Utility 2” bus  
cannot be selected.  
• Screen aspect, show key, and [MCRO ATTCH ENBL] button settings are  
common to main and sub.  
• If a snapshot is recalled simultaneously for main and sub, or a keyframe is  
executed simultaneously for main and sub, then for the following common  
to main and sub the main settings are reflected.  
– Key  
– M/E Config  
– DME external video bus and utility 1 bus  
Multi Program 2 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• When a macro attachment is set on the DME utility 1 bus or DME utility 2  
bus, it is not possible to make separate main and sub settings.  
• When snapshots with different M/E Config settings are recalled:  
– If M/E Config data is not to be included in the snapshot data, the current  
system settings are used for snapshot reproduction.  
– If M/E Config data is to be included in the snapshot data and if it was  
created before Version 5.30, then standard mode is used. If created in  
Version 5.30 or later, first M/E Config data is set, and then other snapshot  
data is recalled.  
• The bus override function is only available on the following buses:  
– M/E-1 to M/E-3 Main BKGD A/B buses  
– M/E-1 to M/E-3 Sub BKGD A/B buses (UTIL-2, UTIL-3 buses)  
– P/P Main PGM/PST bus  
– P/P Sub PGM/PST buses (UTIL-2, UTIL-3 buses)  
• When a master snapshot or master timeline is executed with a key being  
assigned to both main and sub, it is uncertain which data will be reflected.  
• When recalling a master snapshot with different register numbers for main  
and sub, the recall timing may differ by one field or more between main and  
sub.  
• The link state is maintained even when M/E Config is changed. Set the link  
setting again, as required.  
• Since keys 2 to 4 are shared between main and sub, when the main and sub  
fader lever positions are different, if you move the fader lever, the video  
changes instantaneously to the value of the most recently moved fader lever.  
• When the transition type for main or sub is set to preset color mix, it is not  
possible to carry out independent key transition operation (common to main  
and sub).  
Multi Program 2  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Link Support  
By installing the BZS-8560 switcher upgrade software in the MVS-8000G, or  
the BZDM-8560 DME upgrade software in the MVE-8000A, you can switch  
the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50. In this case, signal input/output  
uses a dual link a).  
a) Standard specified by SMPTE 372M-2002. One video signal is carried by two HD-SDI signals,  
allowing data with an increased frame rate to be carried.  
Getting access to the software  
To use the switcher upgrade software and DME upgrade software, you are  
required to enter an install key which validates the software. (If the software  
has been factory installed, the install key is not required.)  
For the method of obtaining an install key, contact your Sony representative.  
On that occasion, you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the  
switcher you are using. You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu  
of the switcher. For details of operating procedures, see Chapter 16,  
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” (Volume 2).  
Note  
Switching the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 requires the optional  
multi-format software.  
For details of this software option, see page 189.  
An MKS-8110G 17-input board and MKS-8160G 24-output board set are also  
required.  
Setting the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50  
You can switch the signal format to 1080P/59.94 or 1080P/50 in setup.  
For details, see “Setting the Signal Format (Format Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
You can also switch the signal format with a GPI input.  
For details, see the following sections of Chapter 16 (Volume 2), depending on  
the device.  
• “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup  
Relating to Switcher Processor”  
Dual Link Support 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• “Interfacing With External Devices” in “Setup Relating to Operations From  
the Control Panel”  
• “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)” in “Setup  
Relating to DME”  
• “GPI Input Settings (GPI Input Assign Menu)” in “Setup Relating to DCU”  
• The available input reference signals are as follows.  
Signal format  
Input reference signal  
Tri Sync  
59.94  
50  
Black burst  
1080P/59.94  
1080P/50  
Black Burst 59.94  
Black Burst 50  
Sync 59.94  
Sync 50  
Switching the signal type of DME output (video/key) assigned to  
a monitor signal  
The function for switching the signal type of the monitor output (one channel)  
to video or key is assigned to one of the Prefs buttons of the Menu control block  
or one of the buttons of the Utility/Shotbox control block (DME MON KEY  
command).  
For details of the assignment, see “Settings Button Assignment (Prefs/Utility  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
To switch the signal type of DME output (video/key) assigned to a  
monitor signal  
Press the DME MON KEY command assigned button and turn it on to assign  
DME key output to a monitor signal. Then press the button and turn it off to  
assign DME video output to a monitor signal. For selection of the DME  
channels to be assigned to a monitor signal, see “Assigning a DME output  
signal as a monitor signal” (page 403) under “Applying a DME Effect to a  
Key” in Chapter 4.  
Selecting the signal output from the DME monitor output  
connector  
1
2
3
4
Display the Engineering Setup >DME >Output >Monitor Output menu.  
Press [DME1] or [DME2] to select the DME to operate on.  
On the left, select MONI OUT#1 or MONI OUT#3.  
On the right, select the signal.  
You can select any of Ch1 Video, Ch1 Key, Ch2 Video, and Ch2 Key.  
Dual Link Support  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Press [Set].  
This assigns the signal.  
Restrictions when using a dual link  
When using a dual link, the switcher and DME resources are linked in duplex  
(link A and link B), resulting in the following restrictions.  
Restrictions  
Details  
Functions that cannot be Functions of the following items in the Engineering  
used in the system  
Setup >Switcher >Config menu  
Single Simul, Dual Simul  
Functions that cannot be • Primary inputs numbers 41 to 80  
used in the switcher  
• Outputs number 25 to 48  
• Monitor buses 2/4/6/8  
• M/E-2 bank a)  
• M/E-3 bank  
• DME utility 1 and 2 buses  
b)  
• Color background 2  
• Color corrector 2  
• Frame memory  
• Format converter  
• Functions of the following items in the Engineering  
Setup >Switcher >Config menu  
Switching Timing, M/E Config excluding Standard, and  
Logical M/E Assign  
Functions that cannot be • DME channels 3, 4, 7, and 8  
used on the DME  
• Freeze in film mode  
• “Freeze Timing” in the following effects  
Input Freeze, Trail, Decay, KF Strobe (always set to  
Frame)  
• Brick  
• Editor ports 3 and 4 when the editor port operation mode  
is set to “Independent.”  
Other restrictions  
• Auto chroma keying operates on the image of link A.  
• Tallies are generated for the link A signal.  
• Key frames are created in units of two frames.  
• It is not possible to change the interpolation method in  
the DME.  
a) When the simple P/P software is not installed  
b) When the switcher is a 2M/E system only  
Dual Link Support 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Link Support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Chapter 2 Menus and Control  
Panel  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel .............................251  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 1  
(With Standard Transition Modules) .....................................251  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 2  
(With Simple Transition Modules) ........................................252  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 3  
(With Compact Transition Modules) .....................................255  
Cross-Point Control Block ................................................................256  
Transition Control Block (Standard Type) ........................................260  
Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type) .........................................264  
Key Control Block .............................................................................267  
Device Control Block (Trackball) .....................................................271  
Device Control Block (Joystick) .......................................................277  
Device Control Block (Search Dial) ..................................................278  
Keyframe Control Block ...................................................................281  
Numeric Keypad Control Block ........................................................284  
Fade to Black Control Block .............................................................287  
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses) ................................288  
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control) ...........................291  
Menu Control Block ..........................................................................294  
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block ...................................................295  
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block ........................................296  
Utility/Shotbox Control Block ..........................................................298  
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (Simple Type) ..  
299  
Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple Type) ..............304  
Downstream Key Control Block .......................................................306  
Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block ...............................308  
Transition Control Block (Compact Type) .......................................310  
Basic Menu Operations ............................................................................313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu Organization ............................................................................313  
About the Top Menu List ..................................................................313  
Accessing Menus ...............................................................................314  
Displaying a Menu ............................................................................321  
Interpreting the Menu Screen ............................................................322  
Menu Operations ...............................................................................323  
Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site 335  
Shortcut Menu ...................................................................................335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the  
Control Panel  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 1  
(With Standard Transition Modules)  
The MVS-8000 system control panel  
comprises a number of modules.  
standard transition modules used in the  
transition control block.  
The following illustration shows a typical  
32-button, 4-M/E configuration, with  
Auxiliary bus control block (page 288)  
M/E-1 bank  
M/E-2 bank  
M/E-3 bank  
PGM/PST (program/  
preset) bank  
Cross-point control block (page 256)  
Control panel configuration 1 (left side)  
(with standard transition modules)  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Keyframe control block (page 281)  
Menu control block (page 294)  
Key control block (page 267)  
Device control block (page 271/page 277)  
Memory card/USB adaptor block (page 295)  
“Memory Stick”/USB connections block (page 296)  
Utility/Shotbox control  
block (page 298)  
Downstream key control block (page 306)  
Transition control block  
(standard type) (page 260)  
Numeric keypad control block (page 284)  
Fade to black control block (page 287)  
Flexi Pad control block (standard type) (page 264)  
Control panel configuration 1 (right side)  
(with standard transition modules)  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 2  
(With Simple Transition Modules)  
The following illustration shows a typical  
configuration, with simple transition  
modules used in the transition control  
block.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Except for the simple modules, this is the  
same configuration as in example  
configuration 1.  
Control panel configuration 2 (left side)  
(with simple transition modules)  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transition control block and Flexi Pad control  
block (simple type) (page 299)  
Independent key transition control block  
(simple type) (page 304)  
Control panel configuration 2 (right side)  
(with simple transition modules)  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
Control Panel: Example Configuration 3  
(With Compact Transition Modules)  
The following illustration shows a typical  
configuration, with compact transition  
modules used in the transition control  
block.  
Transition control block (compact type) (page 310)  
Control panel configuration 3  
(with compact transition modules)  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cross-Point Control Block  
In the cross-point control block, you can  
select the signals to be used in this M/E  
bank or PGM/PST bank.  
All operations except those of the [SHIFT]  
button are the same as for a module with  
source name displays.  
There are also modules without the source  
name displays shown in the following  
figure.  
1 Cross-point buttons  
Key 2 row  
Key 1 row  
Reentry buttons  
7 M/E bank display  
3 Key bus selection buttons  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
KEY3  
KEY4  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
PRE  
MCRO  
POST  
MCRO  
SHIFT  
MCRO  
ATTCH  
ENBL  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
UTIL  
8 Macro buttons  
4 UTIL button  
2 XPT HOLD buttons  
Background B row  
Background A row  
5 Source name displays  
Reentry buttons  
6 SHIFT button  
a Cross-point buttons  
to one or more signal buses within the  
These buttons select the signals used for  
video creation on this M/E bank or PGM/  
PST bank. Each row of buttons corresponds  
switcher.  
Key 1 row: The buttons in this row select  
the key 1 or key 3 signals to be inserted  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
into the video on this M/E bank or  
PGM/PST bank.  
Background B row: Press the desired  
button to select the signal as the  
background after the next transition on  
this M/E bank or PGM/PST bank.  
While the [UTIL] button on the right  
hand side is held down in Hold mode,  
these buttons are assigned to the utility  
2 bus, and can be used to select the  
signal on that bus.  
Reentry buttons: These allow you to select  
the video created on another bank as  
background A or B or one of the keys 1  
to 4. For example, to use the video  
created on the M/E-1 bank as  
To select the key 1 fill signal, check  
that the right-hand [KEY3] button in  
the M/E bank (or the [DSK3] button in  
the PGM/PST bank) is off, then press  
the button assigned to the desired  
signal. To select the key 3 fill signal,  
press the [KEY3] button, turning it on.  
While the [UTIL] button on the right  
hand side is held down, these buttons  
are assigned to the DME external video  
bus allowing you to select the signal on  
that bus.  
Key 2 row: The buttons in this row select  
the key 2 or key 4 signals to be inserted  
into the video on this M/E bank or  
PGM/PST bank.  
background B on the M/E-2 bank, press  
the reentry button [M/E 1] in the  
background B row of buttons on the M/  
E-2 bank.  
To select the key 2 fill signal, check  
that the right-hand [KEY4] button in  
the M/E bank (or the [DSK4] button in  
the PGM/PST bank) is off, then press  
the button assigned to the desired  
signal. To select the key 4 fill signal,  
press the [KEY4] button, turning it on.  
While the [UTIL] button on the right  
hand side is held down, these buttons  
are assigned to the DME utility 1 or 2  
bus as follows.  
• When the [KEY4] button is off,  
holding down the [UTIL] button  
assigns these buttons to the DME  
utility 1 bus.  
• Holding down the [UTIL] button and  
pressing the [KEY4] button, turning  
it on, assigns these buttons to the  
DME utility 2 bus.  
Cross-point button numbers  
This description applies to the example of a  
32-button system.  
From the left, the first 31 buttons are  
numbered 1, 2, ... 30, 31. When the 32nd  
button is set to be a [SHIFT] button, these  
buttons can also be switched to select  
signals numbered from 32 to 62. While the  
[SHIFT] button is held down, these switch  
to numbers 32 to 62, or alternatively, every  
time the button is pressed, switching is  
made between numbers 1 to 31 and 32 to  
62. Similarly, the reentry buttons can be  
switched between two sets of numbers: 121  
to 123, and 125 to 127.  
Both the assignment of the 32nd button to a  
[SHIFT] button and the selection of the  
button operation mode can be done in a  
Setup menu.  
Background A row: Press the desired  
button to select the signal as the current  
background video on this M/E bank or  
PGM/PST bank.  
Assigning signals to button  
You can assign a signal to each button using  
the Setup menu.  
This assignment is common to the cross-  
point buttons in the M/E-1, M/E-2, M/E-3,  
and PGM/PST banks, and the auxiliary bus  
While the [UTIL] button on the right  
hand side is held down in Hold mode,  
these buttons are assigned to the utility  
1 bus, and can be used to select the  
signal on that bus.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
control block. According to the settings  
made in the menu, the video and key signals  
are assigned to the cross-point buttons in  
pairs.  
c Key bus selection buttons  
KEY3 button: Press this button, turning it  
on, to assign the key 1 cross-point  
buttons to the key 3 fill bus.  
You can also make separate signal  
assignments for each operating control  
block.  
KEY4 button: Press this button, turning it  
on, to assign the key 2 cross-point  
buttons to the key 4 fill bus.  
Pressing one of the key delegation buttons  
[KEY1] to [KEY4] in the transition control  
block (standard type) twice in rapid  
succession changes the state of the  
corresponding one of these buttons, so that  
you can make cross-point selections on the  
key bus (see page 263).  
Visual indications on cross-point  
buttons  
The currently selected button in a row (i.e.  
the last button pressed) lights amber or red.  
Amber (“low tally”): The signal selected  
on the bus does not form part of the  
program output from the switcher.  
Red (“high tally”): The signal selected on  
the bus forms part of the program  
output from the switcher.  
d UTIL (utility) button  
While this button is held down, the cross-  
point buttons are assigned to the following  
buses, respectively.  
Background A row: utility 1 bus  
Background B row: utility 2 bus  
Key 1 row: DME external video bus  
Key 2 row: DME utility 1 bus when the  
[KEY4] button is off, or DME utility 2  
bus when the [KEY4] button is lit.  
In a Setup menu, you can select either of the  
following two modes for these buttons.  
• The button takes effect while being held  
down.  
• Every time the button is pressed, it  
toggles between the on and off states for  
key 1 and key 2 rows. For background A  
and background B rows, utility buses  
remain disabled.  
b XPT (cross-point) HOLD buttons  
Turning one of these buttons on enables  
you to recall a keyframe or snapshot while  
keeping the current cross-point selection  
unchanged.  
When the [XPT HOLD] button in the key 1  
or key 2 row is on, then the operation is as  
follows, depending on the setting in the  
Setup menu.  
When the panel setup is “Normal”: The  
operation is as follows, depending on  
the setting in switcher setup.  
Key Disable: The snapshot or  
keyframe is recalled without changing  
the current key settings.  
Key Disable with Status: The  
e Source name displays  
snapshot or key frame is recalled  
without changing the current key  
settings, including the on/off status.  
Xpt Hold: The snapshot or keyframe is  
recalled without changing the current  
cross-point selection.  
These show the names of the signals which  
can be selected on the cross-point buttons,  
in two or four characters, or in auto mode.  
While the [SHIFT] button on the right hand  
side or the [SHIFT] button assigned to the  
column of cross-point buttons is enabled,  
the source name of the signal assigned to  
the column of cross-point buttons in shift  
mode appears. You can select green,  
orange, or yellow for the background color  
When the panel setup is “Protect”: The  
cross-point settings cannot be changed  
by pressing panel buttons.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
of the source name display, for each source  
separately. You can set the source name  
display mode and background color in a  
Setup menu.  
POST MCRO (post macro) button: Use  
this button to set a macro attachment in  
post macro mode. For setting in macro  
only mode, use this in combination  
with a macro only set button assigned  
to the utility/shotbox control block or a  
user preference button. Alternatively,  
without using the button, you can make  
the selection simply, by pressing  
simultaneously with the [PRE MCRO]  
button.  
f SHIFT button  
When this button is enabled, either the  
source name displays show the shifted  
signal names, or the shifted signals for all  
buses in this M/E (P/P) bank are enabled.  
You can select either mode in a Setup  
menu.  
When dual background bus mode or  
utility/shotbox mode is selected in  
setup, this button is disabled.  
Each press of the button toggles between  
the enabled and disabled states.  
In the case of a module without source  
name displays, when “Display” is selected  
in the Setup menu, this button is invalid.  
If in setup the function for disabling  
cross-point button operations is  
assigned to the [PRE MCRO] button,  
then this button is disabled.  
g M/E bank display  
MCRO ATTCH ENBL (macro  
attachment enable) button: When  
this button is on, the macro attachments  
set for the buttons of the M/E bank are  
enabled.  
This indicates the notional mix/effect bank  
name to which the particular M/E or PGM/  
PST bank is assigned, as a four-character  
identifier.  
h Macro buttons  
PRE MCRO (pre macro) button: Use this  
button to set a macro attachment in pre  
macro mode. For setting in macro only  
mode, use this in combination with a  
macro only set button assigned to the  
utility/shotbox control block or a user  
preference button. Alternatively,  
without using the button, you can make  
the selection simply, by pressing  
simultaneously with the [POST  
MCRO] button.  
When dual background bus mode is  
selected in setup, this switches the dual  
background bus mode on and off.  
When set to utility/shotbox mode, this  
enables and disables the use of the key  
2 row as a utility/shotbox.  
If in setup this is assigned to the  
function for disabling cross-point  
button operations, then it enables or  
disables cross-point button operations.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Transition Control Block (Standard Type)  
In the transition control block, you can  
modify the output of the M/E bank or PGM/  
PST bank, and perform transitions. Both  
common transition and independent key  
transition operations are possible.  
9 PRIOR SET button  
1 Next transition selection buttons  
8 Key status display  
2 Transition type selection buttons  
qf Key snapshot setting buttons  
q; Key delegation buttons  
qd Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
K-MOD  
ENBL  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
K-SS  
KEY  
PRIOR  
SUPER  
MIX  
MIX  
PST  
NAM  
K-TR  
ENBL  
K-SS  
STORE  
MIX  
WIPE  
DME  
COLOR  
MIX  
ALL  
WIPE  
DME  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
KEY3  
ON  
KEY4  
ON  
PRIOR  
SET  
NORM  
/REV  
TRANS  
PVW  
NORM  
REV  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
CUT  
PTN  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
KF  
qs Independent key transition  
execution section  
qa Independent key transition type  
selection buttons  
7 KF button  
6 Pattern limit buttons  
5 TRANS PVW button  
3 Transition execution section  
4 Wipe direction selection buttons  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
a Next transition selection buttons  
Press these buttons, turning them on, to  
determine what the next transition will  
apply to.  
BKGD: Next transition changes the  
background.  
KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the  
PGM/PST bank): Press this button,  
turning it on, to make the next  
the signal with the higher luminance  
level is given priority in the output.  
The current video is maintained at  
100% output for the first half of the  
transition as the new video increases  
progressively to 100%, then the current  
video is progressively reduced from  
100% to zero in the second half while  
the new video is maintained at 100%.  
SUPER MIX: The current video is  
maintained at 100% output for the first  
half of the transition as the new video is  
mixed while increasing progressively  
to 100%. The current video is then  
progressively reduced from 100% to  
zero in the second half while the new  
video is maintained at 100%.  
transition insert or remove the  
corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a  
key is currently inserted it will be  
removed, and vice versa.  
In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or  
removes downstream keys 1 to 4.  
KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button  
is lit, the setting of the key priority after  
the next transition is enabled. The key  
priority after the next transition appears  
in the key status display.  
ALL: Pressing this button turns on a  
preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1]  
to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons.  
Make this setting in a Setup menu.  
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first  
transition, the current video is replaced  
by the color matte in a mix (dissolve),  
then in the second transition the color  
matte is replaced by the new video also  
in a mix (dissolve).  
In place of a color matte, you can select  
any signal on the utility 2 bus.  
b Transition type selection buttons  
You can assign these buttons in setup to any  
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2)).  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
determine the type of the next transition.  
When multi-program mode is selected in  
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher  
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the  
following buttons may light.  
MIX: In a background transition, the new  
video fades in as the current video  
fades out. During the transition, the  
overall signal level is maintained at  
100%.  
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the  
new video, using the wipe pattern  
selected in the Wipe menu.  
DME: A wipe type of transition is carried  
out, using the DME effect selected in  
the DME Wipe menu.  
FM1&2ClIP,FM3&4ClIP,FM5&6ClIP,  
FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is  
played back together with the  
transition. At this point, you can also  
carry out a transition (wipe or mix  
(dissolve)) simultaneously together  
with the clip.  
c Transition execution section  
Transition indicator: This comprises  
multiple LEDs, which show the  
progress of the transition.  
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a  
manual transition. Pressing the [KF]  
In a key transition, the key fades in (for  
insertion) or out (for removal).  
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and  
new video signals are compared, and  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
button to turn it on allows you to use  
this as a key frame fader.  
and reverse every time a transition is  
executed.  
Transition rate display: This shows the  
“transition rate” (the time from the  
beginning of a transition to its  
completion) set for an auto transition,  
in frames.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled in  
setup, pressing this button stops the  
tape.  
e TRANS PVW (transition preview)  
button  
When this button is lit, you can check in  
advance the video changes during the  
transition, on the preview output from the  
M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
During the preview, you can use the fader  
lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT]  
button. One of the following functions of  
this button can be selected in a Setup mode.  
• When the transition completes, the  
system returns to the normal mode.  
• The transition preview mode is  
maintained while this button is pressed.  
• Switching is made between the transition  
preview mode and normal mode every  
time this button is pressed.  
You can set the transition rate using the  
numeric keypad control block, Flexi  
Pad control block, or menu.  
AUTO TRANS (transition) button:  
Pressing this button carries out an auto  
transition of the set transition rate  
(duration). The transition starts  
immediately, and the button lights  
amber. When the transition completes,  
the button goes off.  
CUT button: Pressing this button carries  
out the transition as a cut (i.e.  
instantaneously).  
d Wipe direction selection buttons  
When you have selected a wipe or DME  
wipe as the transition type, press one of  
these buttons, turning it on, to select the  
wipe direction.  
NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in  
the direction from black to white as  
shown on the pattern in the lists of  
patterns see “Wipe Pattern List” (page  
560) and “DME Wipe Pattern List”  
(page 566) in Appendix (Volume 1), or  
in the direction of the arrow.  
f Pattern limit buttons  
PTN (pattern) LIMIT: Pressing this  
button, turning it on, enables the  
pattern limit function.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled in  
setup, pressing this button plays the  
tape.  
LIMIT SET: Use this button to set a  
pattern limit when the [PTN LIMIT]  
button is off.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled in  
setup, pressing this button plays the  
tape.  
Move the fader lever to the position of  
a particular pattern size, and stop it  
there, then press this button to set the  
pattern limit range.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled in  
setup, pressing this button stops the  
tape.  
REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the  
opposite direction to that when the  
[NORM] button is pressed.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled in  
setup, pressing this button cues the tape  
automatically to the start point.  
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe  
direction alternates between normal  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
g KF (keyframe) button  
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid  
succession changes its state so that you can  
make cross-point selections on the  
corresponding key bus.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled in  
setup, pressing this button cues the tape  
automatically to the start point. When not,  
pressing this button to turn it on allows you  
to use the fader lever as a key frame fader.  
Key delegation button  
(double press)  
Corresponding  
key bus  
a)  
[KEY1]  
[KEY2]  
[KEY3]  
[KEY4]  
key 1  
h Key status display  
b)  
key 2  
For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding  
ON indicator lights when the key is  
inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4)  
of each key.  
c)  
key 3  
d)  
key 4  
a) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the cross-  
point control block goes off.  
b) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the cross-  
point control block goes off.  
c) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the cross-  
point control block lights.  
d) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the cross-  
point control block lights.  
i PRIOR (priority) SET button  
While this button is held down, you can set  
the key priority.  
The setting mode when this button is  
pressed depends on whether or not the  
[KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows.  
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the  
current key priority is set.  
k Independent key transition type  
selection buttons  
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the  
key priority after the next transition is set.  
Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required,  
to switch between these two modes.  
In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR  
SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1]  
to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you  
want to bring to the front.  
Press one of the following buttons, turning  
it on, to select the independent key  
transition type.  
MIX: Faded in or out.  
WIPE: Inserted or deleted with a wipe.  
DME (DME wipe): Inserted or deleted  
with a DME wipe.  
l Independent key transition  
execution section  
The following controls are used as the  
independent key transition control block.  
KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON (DSK1 ON to  
DSK4 ON in the PGM/PST bank)  
buttons: Press the corresponding one  
of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in  
or out instantaneously. When the key  
corresponding to the button appears in  
the final program output, the button  
lights red, and otherwise lights amber.  
AUTO TRANS (transition) buttons:  
These correspond to keys 1 to 4 from  
left to right; press one to carry out an  
auto transition. The transition rate for  
an independent key transition can be  
j Key delegation buttons  
These buttons delegate this independent  
key transition control block to a desired  
keyer. Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4]  
buttons ([DSK1] to [DSK4] in the PGM/  
PST bank), turning it on.  
You can press more than one button to  
select two or more keyers.  
While these buttons are held down, you can  
select a key source with the cross-point  
buttons for the key bus.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
set in the numeric keypad control  
block, in the Flexi Pad control block, or  
in a menu.  
K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To  
save a key snapshot, hold down this  
button, and press the key source name  
display/key snapshot button  
m Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
corresponding to the register you want  
to save.  
These display the source name selected on  
the corresponding keyer. In key snapshot  
mode, press these buttons, corresponding to  
registers 1 to 4 for the selected keyer, to  
save or recall a key snapshot.  
K-MOD ENBL (key modifier enable): To  
recall key adjustment values and key  
modifier settings when recalling a key  
snapshot, press this button, turning it  
on.  
K-TR ENBL (key transition enable): To  
recall independent key transition  
settings when recalling a key snapshot,  
press this button, turning it on.  
n Key snapshot setting buttons  
K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key  
snapshot mode.  
Flexi Pad Control Block (Standard Type)  
The Flexi Pad control block is used for  
saving and recalling wipe snapshots, DME  
wipe snapshots, and snapshots, for recalling  
effects, and shotbox content, and for  
entering the transition rate.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Mode selection buttons  
5 XPT HOLD status display  
6 Numeric display  
4 UNDO button  
XPT HOLD  
A B 1 2 3 4  
WIPE  
DME  
UNDO  
U
1
U2  
STORE  
STATS  
7
8
9
6
3
SNAP  
SHOT  
TRANS  
RATE  
4
1
0
5
2
BNAK  
0
EFF  
SHOT  
BOX  
BANK  
1
EFF  
DISS  
AUTO  
TRAN  
BANK  
SEL  
MCRO  
2 Bank selection buttons  
3 Memory recall section  
a Mode selection buttons  
SHOTBOX: To recall or execute a  
WIPE: To save or recall a wipe snapshot,  
or recall the pattern number of a wipe  
pattern, use this in combination with  
the buttons of the memory recall  
section.  
DME: To save or recall a DME wipe  
snapshot, or recall the pattern number  
of a DME wipe pattern, use this in  
combination with the buttons of the  
memory recall section.  
SNAPSHOT: To save or recall a snapshot,  
use this in combination with the  
buttons of the memory recall section.  
EFF (effect): To recall the master timeline  
or run an effect, use this in combination  
with the buttons in the memory recall  
section.  
shotbox, use this in combination with  
the buttons of the memory recall  
section.  
MCRO (macro): To save, recall or edit a  
macro, use this in combination with the  
buttons of the memory recall section.  
TRANS RATE (transition rate): To enter  
the transition rate, press this button,  
turning it on. To enter the independent  
key transition rate, hold down this  
button, and press the key delegation  
button in the independent key  
transition control block. To select  
whether the value is entered in frames  
or as a timecode value, switch the [TC]  
button in the memory recall section on  
or off.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
b Bank selection buttons  
BANK0 (bank 0): Assigns the memory  
recall section to bank 0, of registers 1 to  
10.  
DME wipe, a bank number, a register  
number, a transition rate, and so on in up to  
four digits.  
BANK1 (bank 1): Assigns the memory  
recall section to bank 1, of registers 11  
to 20.  
BANK SEL (bank selection): After  
pressing this button, press a button in  
the memory recall section to select  
banks 0 to 9.  
c Memory recall section  
This consists of 12 buttons with LCDs.  
These display changes, according to  
various operation modes.  
d UNDO button  
UNDO: After recalling a register, press this  
button to return to the state before  
recalling the register.  
When contents have been saved to a  
register, hold down the [STORE  
STATS] button and press this button to  
return the register to its state before the  
save operation.  
STORE STATS (store status): When a  
save or delete operation has been  
carried out on a register, this button  
lights amber. After saving to a register,  
hold down this button and press the  
relevant register button to delete the  
data in the register. Again, after a save  
operation on a register, hold down this  
button and press the [UNDO] button to  
restore the register to its state before the  
save operation.  
e XPT HOLD (cross-point hold) status  
display  
A bus for which cross-point hold is set  
appears as a green light.  
f Numeric display  
Depending on the operation mode, this  
shows the pattern number of a wipe or  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Control Block  
Each of the M/E banks and the PGM/PST  
bank includes four keyers (for keys 1 to 4),  
and you can delegate this control block to  
any desired keyer. In this control block, you  
can adjust and modify keys.  
3 Key fill/key source selection buttons  
2 Key type selection buttons  
q; ON AIR indicators  
1 Delegation buttons  
qg RESIZER button  
8 Displays  
7 Knobs  
9 DME channel  
selection buttons  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
RE  
SIZER  
P/P  
KEY4  
CVK  
DME  
1
DME  
2
DME  
3
DME  
4
KEY1  
LUM  
KEY2  
LIN  
KEY3  
CRK  
TRANS  
PTN  
DME  
5
DME  
6
DME  
7
DME  
8
AUTO  
SEL  
MATTE  
FILL  
KEY  
DROP  
SOFT  
EDGE  
SPLIT  
DROP  
BDR  
OUT  
LINE  
FM  
FEED  
BDR  
SHDW  
EMBOS  
MORE  
MON  
OVER  
RIDE  
PROC  
KEY  
AUTO  
DELEG  
SHOW  
KEY  
MAIN  
MASK  
SUB  
MASK  
TRACE  
ZABTN  
qf AUTO DELEG button  
6 SHOW KEY button  
4 Key modifier buttons  
qa Output destination specification  
buttons  
qd TRACE button  
qs OVERRIDE button  
5 MORE button  
a Delegation buttons  
M/E delegation: Press one of the [M/E 1]  
Key delegation: Press one of the [KEY1]  
to [KEY4] buttons to delegate the key  
control block to the corresponding  
keyer.  
to [M/E 3], and [P/P] buttons to select  
the bank (an M/E bank or the PGM/  
PST bank) to which the key control  
block is delegated.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TRANS: By pressing this button, you can  
check the DME channel used for DME  
wipes on the M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
Also, by pressing this button, then  
pressing one of the DME channel  
selection buttons, you can preset the  
DME channel to be used when a DME  
wipe is selected as the transition type  
for the next transition.  
selected in the transition, and this is  
filled with the key fill signal.  
c Key fill/key source selection buttons  
AUTO SEL (selection): Use the signal  
selected on the key fill bus, and the  
paired key source signal. The setting of  
key fill and key source pairs is carried  
out in a Setup menu.  
SPLIT: To use the signal selected on the  
key fill bus as key fill, and a signal  
separate from the signal assigned in a  
pair with key fill for key source, press  
this button, turning it on.  
When presetting the DME channel for  
an independent key transition, hold  
down this button, then press one of the  
[KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons, turning the  
two buttons on, beforehand.  
To select the signal on the key source  
bus, hold down this button, and press a  
button in the key 1 or key 2 row in the  
cross-point control block.  
b Key type selection buttons  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
select the desired key type.  
Depending on the selected key type,  
various parameters are displayed, and you  
can set the values with the knobs.  
LUM (luminance key): The background is  
cut out according to the luminance (Y)  
of the key source signal, and at the  
same time the key fill signal is cut out  
and then added to the background  
signal.  
LIN (linear key): This is a type of  
luminance key with a reduced variation  
in gain and a higher adjustment  
precision.  
To use the signal selected on the key fill bus  
as key source (self keying), press the  
[AUTO SEL] button and [SPLIT] button at  
the same time, so that both are off.  
MATTE FILL: To use a color matte from  
the internal generator as key fill, press  
this button, turning it on. You can  
adjust the color matte using the knobs.  
When this button is off, the signal  
selected on the key fill bus is used as  
key fill.  
d Key modifier buttons  
To add an edge modifier to the key, press  
one of these buttons, turning it on.  
Depending on the edge type selected,  
parameters appear in the displays, and you  
can set the values with the knobs.  
KEY DROP: When drop border or shadow  
is selected, turning this button on  
lowers the key fill and key source  
position by four or eight scan lines as  
set in the key menu.  
CRK (chroma key): A particular hue  
(usually blue) in the key source signal  
is used to determine the hole to be cut  
in the background and filled with the  
key fill signal.  
CVK (color vector key): The background  
is cut out with a key source created by  
adding the luminance and chrominance  
components of the key signal. If the  
saturation is high, this allows perfect  
keying even if the luminance level is  
low and the signal is not suitable for  
luminance keying.  
To select 4H or 8H, use the Key menu.  
When the selected edge type is  
“normal” and soft edge is selected or  
when border, outline, or emboss is  
PTN (wipe pattern key): A hole is cut in  
the background by a wipe pattern  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
selected, this button lights  
automatically.  
it changes from amber to green and the fifth  
and subsequent parameters are assigned to  
the knobs, allowing them to be adjusted.  
BDR (border): Apply a border of a  
uniform thickness to the whole key.  
DROP BDR (drop border): Apply a  
border to two sides of the key (for  
example, below and to the right, or  
below and to the left).  
SHDW (shadow): Apply a shadow to two  
sides of the key (for example, below  
and to the right, or below and to the  
left).  
OUTLINE: Use the outline of the key.  
EMBOS (emboss): Apply an embossing  
effect to the periphery of the key.  
• To select a “normal” as the edge type  
(that is, a plain edge), set all five of the  
above buttons off.  
• When border, drop border, or shadow is  
selected, you can use a special color  
matte or a signal selected on the utility 1  
bus for the edge.  
f SHOW KEY button  
While this button is held down, a key  
processed key source signal is output from  
the specified output port. You can make the  
output specification independently for each  
of edit preview and the preview of each M/  
E or PGM/PST bank in a Setup menu.  
g Knobs  
Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter  
values.  
h Displays  
Each display shows the initial letters of the  
parameter name and the parameter value  
(maximum three digits including a minus  
sign for a negative value).  
• When emboss is selected, you can use the  
dedicated color matte signal for the  
emboss function.  
• When outline is selected, the signal  
selected on the key fill bus is used to fill  
the edge.  
i DME channel selection buttons  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
delegate a DME channel to the keyer. The  
number of valid DME channel selection  
buttons depends on the number of channels  
installed in the DME processor.  
MAIN MASK: Press this button, turning it  
on, to enable the key mask using the  
main pattern. It also enables you to set  
the parameters with the knobs.  
SUB MASK: Press this button, turning it  
on, to enable the key mask using the  
sub pattern. It also enables you to set  
the parameters with the knobs.  
ZABTN (zabton): When this is pressed,  
turning it on, a translucent pattern is  
inserted behind the key. With the  
knobs, you can adjust the color, size,  
density, and softness parameters.  
SOFT EDGE: Soften the edge of the key.  
A maximum of four consecutively  
numbered DME channels from the two sets,  
DME 1 to 4 and DME 5 to 8, can be  
assigned to one keyer. A DME channel  
assigned to a keyer cannot be selected on  
another keyer. However, using the override  
function it is possible to allocate a channel  
already allocated to another keyer to the  
currently selected keyer. If DME channel  
allocations have been made in a Setup  
menu, these buttons cannot be used to make  
DME channel allocations. Using the trace  
function, it is possible to check which keyer  
a DME channel is allocated to.  
e MORE button  
When there are more than four parameters,  
this button lights amber. When it is pressed,  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
j ON AIR indicators  
l OVERRIDE button  
These light red when the corresponding  
DME channels are included in the final  
program output.  
To select a DME channel already allocated  
to another keyer or transition to the  
currently selected keyer(or transition), hold  
down this button, and press the DME  
channel selection button.  
k Output destination specification  
buttons  
MON (DME monitor): Hold down this  
button and press the selection button  
for the DME channel you want to  
assign to the monitor output; you can  
then monitor the output signal on the  
DME monitor output.  
m TRACE button  
When a DME channel is already allocated  
to another keyer or transition, hold down  
this button, and press the corresponding  
DME channel selection button, to switch to  
the state in which the keyer (or transition) to  
which the DME channel is allocated is  
currently selected.  
While this button is held down, the  
DME channel selection buttons light as  
follows, allowing you to check the  
monitor assignment.  
Lit amber: DME channel that can  
currently be monitored  
n AUTO DELEG (auto delegation)  
button  
When this button is on, the key delegation  
selection state of the key control block is  
linked to the key delegation selection state  
of the independent key transition control  
block.  
Lit green: DME channel currently  
assigned to the monitor output  
FM FEED (frame memory feed): When  
you press this button, it lights  
momentarily amber, then for the  
currently selected keyer, the key  
processed signals are selected for frame  
memory sources 1 and 2. If a DME is  
selected on the currently selected  
keyer, the key fill and key source  
signals to which a DME effect is  
applied are assigned to frame memory  
sources 1 and 2; otherwise the key fill  
and key source are assigned.  
o RESIZER button  
Enables or disables resizer on the MVS-  
8000G.  
For details on resizer, see page 419.  
Carrying out a frame memory feed  
causes the [PROC KEY] button to light  
amber.  
PROC KEY (processed key): When this  
button is on, the key fill/source signal  
subjected to key processing or signal  
subjected to a DME effect on the  
currently selected keyer can be selected  
as a reentry signal (PROC V or PROC  
K) for the M/E or PGM/PST bank, on  
the auxiliary bus or the like.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Device Control Block (Trackball)  
The description below of frame memory  
clip operations applies only to the MVS-  
8000A/8000G.  
DME, for wipe pattern position setting, and  
for VTR/disk recorder/frame memory clip  
operation.  
The device control block is used for three-  
dimensional transform operations using a  
5 MENU button  
1 Region selection buttons  
3 Trackball  
M/E1  
DME1  
DME5  
MENU  
M/E2  
DME2  
DME6  
M/E3  
DME3  
DME7  
P/P  
USER  
DEV  
RSZR  
CTRL  
DME4  
DME8  
RUN  
CTRL  
LOCAL  
K1  
CB1  
GLB  
K2  
CB2  
SRC  
K3  
TRGT  
K4  
AXIS  
LOC  
MAIN  
ASP  
PERS  
SUB  
LOC  
SIZE  
ASP  
LOC  
XYZ  
LOC  
ROT  
POS  
RSZR  
CLR  
WORK  
BUFR  
SHIFT  
X
Y
Z
CTR  
2 Operating buttons  
4 Z-ring  
a Region selection buttons  
When the [DME 1] to [DME 8] buttons  
are selected: This enables the three-  
dimensional transform operation mode  
in the device control block.  
The operation mode allocated to the device  
control block depends on the selection state  
of the region selection buttons.  
When the [M/E 1], [M/E 2], [M/E 3], and  
[P/P] buttons are selected: This  
enables the wipe pattern position  
setting (positioner) operation mode in  
the device control block. You can  
select multiple buttons simultaneously.  
When the [USER] button is selected: This  
enables pattern position setting used  
for color backgrounds.  
Press a button, turning it on, to select a  
DME channel. You can select multiple  
buttons simultaneously.  
The number of valid buttons depends  
on the number of DME processor  
channels installed.  
When the [DEV] button is selected: This  
enables the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode in the device  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
control block. In this state, the [M/E 1]  
to [M/E 3] buttons, [P/P] button and  
[DME1] to [DME8] buttons function  
as the device 1 to device 12 allocation  
buttons as follows.  
(DSK1).  
When the [USER] button is selected,  
pattern position setting for color  
background 1 is enabled.  
K2 CB2: Press this button to enable wipe  
pattern position setting for key 2  
(DSK2).  
[M/E1] (DEV1): device 1  
[M/E2] (DEV2): device 2  
[M/E3] (DEV3): device 3  
[P/P] (DEV4): device 4  
[USER] (FM1CLIP): frame memory  
clip 1  
[Unused] (FM2CLIP): frame memory  
clip 2  
[DME1] (DEV5): device 5  
[DME2] (DEV6): device 6  
[DME3] (DEV7): device 7  
[DME4] (DEV8): device 8  
[Unused] (FM LOOP): frame memory  
loop  
K3: Press this button to enable wipe pattern  
position setting for key 3 (DSK3).  
K4: Press this button to enable wipe pattern  
position setting for key 4 (DSK4).  
MAIN: Press this button to enable main  
wipe pattern position setting for normal  
transitions.  
SUB: Press this button to enable sub wipe  
pattern position setting for normal  
transitions.  
Among the [K1 CB1] button, [K2 CB2]  
button, [K3] button, [K4] button, [MAIN]  
button, and [SUB] button, you can select  
multiple buttons.  
[DME5] (DEV9): device 9  
[DME6] (DEV10): device 10  
[DME7] (DEV11): device 11  
[DME8] (DEV12): device 12  
To exit from this mode, press the  
[DEV] button again, turning it off.  
When the [RUN CTRL] button is  
selected: This enables the effect run  
control mode in the device control  
block.  
POS: Press this button to enable pattern  
movement in the x-axis and y-axis  
directions with the trackball.  
When the [USER] button is selected,  
this enables the trackball to move the  
pattern in the x-axis and y-axis  
directions, and the Z-ring to adjust the  
size of the pattern.  
When the [RSZR CTRL] button is  
selected: This enables the resizer  
control mode in the device control  
block of the MVS-8000G.  
X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the  
trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis.  
Z: This restricts the axes affected by the  
trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis.  
CTR (center): When this button is pressed,  
the pattern position returns to the  
center. When the [USER] button is  
selected, the pattern size also returns to  
50.00.  
SHIFT/CLR WORK BUFR: Press this  
button twice in rapid succession to  
reset all parameters on the target M/E  
or PGM/PST to their initial values.  
For details on resizer, see page 419.  
The functions of the operation buttons,  
trackball, and Z-ring vary with the  
operation mode as follows.  
b Operation buttons  
When the positioner operation mode is  
enabled  
K1 CB1: Press this button to enable wipe  
pattern position setting for key 1  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the three-dimensional transform  
operation mode is enabled  
LOCAL: Enable operations in the DME  
local coordinate space.  
GLB (global): Enable operations in the  
DME global coordinate space.  
The [LOCAL] and [GLB] buttons can be  
selected at the same time.  
LOC (location) XYZ: When this button is  
lit, the trackball moves the image in the  
x-axis and y-axis directions, and the Z-  
ring moves the image in the z-axis  
direction.  
SHIFT: While holding down this button,  
pressing the [ASP PERS] button or  
[ROT] button switches to the shifted  
version of the corresponding function.  
CLR WORK BUFR (clear work buffer):  
Press this button once to clear only the  
three-dimensional transform  
SRC (source): Enable operations in the  
DME source coordinate space.  
TRGT (target): Enable operations in the  
DME target coordinate space.  
parameters of the information held in  
the work buffer. Press twice in rapid  
succession to clear all of the  
parameters, and return to the default  
state.  
The [SRC] and [TRGT] buttons cannot be  
selected at the same time. When these  
buttons are held down, trackball and Z-ring  
operation is switched to a finer control.  
(fine mode)  
AXIS LOC (location): When this button is  
lit, the trackball moves the rotational  
axis of the image in the x-axis and y-  
axis directions, and the Z-ring moves  
the axis in the z-axis direction.  
ASP PERS (aspect/perspective): When  
the [SRC] button is lit, pressing this  
button enables the trackball to control  
the x-axis and y-axis directions  
independently, and the Z-ring controls  
the x-axis and y-axis directions  
together, to vary the aspect ratio. When  
the [SHIFT] button is held down and  
this button is pressed, the trackball  
controls the skew of the image in the x-  
axis and y-axis directions.  
ROT (rotation): When this button is lit, the  
trackball rotates the image about the x-  
and y-axes, and the Z-ring rotates the  
image about the z-axis.  
Pressing this while holding down the  
[SHIFT] button enables rotation of the  
image in the “Spin” mode. The  
trackball and Z-ring operate in the  
same manner.  
X, Y, Z: These restrict which axes the  
trackball and Z-ring can control. You  
can select more than one.  
When one of these buttons is selected,  
you can enter the parameter value for  
the corresponding axis using the  
numeric keypad control block.  
CTR (center): Pressing this button  
changes the values of the three-  
dimensional parameters currently  
controlled by the trackball and Z-ring  
to the closest detent values.  
When the [TRGT] button is lit,  
pressing this button enables the  
trackball to control the perspective of  
the image in the x-axis and y-axis  
directions.  
Pressing twice in rapid succession  
returns the parameter values to their  
defaults.  
The Z-ring controls the distance to the  
viewpoint.  
LOC (location) SIZE: When this button is  
lit, the Z-ring controls the image size.  
The trackball moves the image in the x-  
axis and y-axis directions.  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOCAL (DELAY): Press this button,  
turning it on, to enter a delay value  
from the numeric keypad control block.  
GLB (STB OFF: standby off): Press this  
button to switch to standby off mode.  
This button cannot be used for frame  
memory clip operations.  
SRC (REC: record): Press this button at  
the same time as the [Y] button to start  
recording. This button cannot be used  
for frame memory clip operations.  
TRGT (STOP): Press this button to stop  
the tape, disk or frame memory clip.  
AXIS LOC (START TC: start  
timecode): Press this button to set the  
timecode of the start point at that time.  
The timecode of the start point is  
updated to the current time each time  
this button is pressed.  
speed and direction proportional to the  
rotation angle of the Z-ring. The  
variable speed range is –1 to +3 times  
normal playback speed.  
LOC XYZ (SHTL: shuttle): Pressing this  
button and turning the Z-ring plays  
back the tape, disk or frame memory  
clip at a speed and direction  
proportional to the rotation angle of the  
Z-ring.  
ROT (JOG): Pressing this button and  
turning the Z-ring plays back the tape,  
disk or frame memory clip at a speed  
and direction proportional to the  
rotation of the Z-ring.  
CLR WORK BUFR (CUE): Pressing this  
button cues the tape, disk or frame  
memory clip automatically to the start  
point.  
When the device the operation applies  
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the start  
point updated by the setting of the  
[MENU] button is as follows.  
When the [MENU] button is On:  
start point of the timeline  
X (REW: rewind): Press this button to  
rewind the tape, disk or frame memory  
clip.  
Y (PLAY): Press this button to play the  
tape, disk or frame memory clip.  
Z (FF): Press this button to fast forward the  
tape, disk or frame memory clip.  
CTR (ALL STOP): Press this button to  
stop all tape transport/disk drive/frame  
memory operations.  
When the [MENU] button is Off:  
start point of Cueup & Play  
ASP PERS (STOP TC: stop timecode):  
Press this button to set the timecode of  
the stop point at that time. The  
timecode of the stop point is updated to  
the current time each time this button is  
pressed.  
When the resizer control mode is enabled  
(for the MVS-8000G only)  
LOCAL (K1): Select key 1.  
When the device the operation applies  
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the stop  
point updated by the setting of the  
[MENU] button is as follows.  
When the [MENU] button is On: stop  
point of the timeline  
GLB (K2): Select key 2.  
SRC (K3): Select key 3.  
TRGT (K4): Select key 4.  
LOC SIZE (ASP: aspect): Pressing this  
button and operating the trackball or Z-  
ring changes the aspect ratio of a key to  
which the resizer function is applied to.  
When this button is held down, the  
trackball or Z-ring operation is  
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)  
LOC XYZ (LOC: location): Pressing this  
button and operating the trackball or Z-  
When the [MENU] button is Off:  
stop point of Cueup & Play  
LOC SIZE (VAR: variable speed  
playback): Pressing this button and  
turning the Z-ring plays back the tape,  
disk or frame memory clip at a variable  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ring moves, shrinks, or magnifies a key  
to which the resizer function is applied  
to. When this button is held down, the  
trackball or Z-ring operation is  
When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ]  
button is held down, the trackball operation  
is switched to a finer control. (fine mode)  
d
Z-ring  
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)  
ROT (RSZE: resizer): Press this button,  
turning it on, to enable the resizer.  
CLR WORK BUFR (CLR WORK  
BUFR): Pressing this button once  
returns the two-dimensional  
When the positioner operation mode is  
enabled  
When the [USER] button is selected, by  
turning the ring you can adjust the size of  
the pattern.  
transformation settings to the defaults.  
Pressing twice in rapid succession  
returns all resizer parameter values to  
the defaults.  
When the three-dimensional transform  
operation mode is enabled  
Turn this ring to control the z-axis in a  
three-dimensional transform.  
X, Y: These restrict the axes affected by the  
trackball and Z-ring to the x- or y-axis.  
Z: This restricts the axes affected by the  
trackball and Z-ring to the z-axis.  
CTR (center): Pressing this button once  
changes the two-dimensional  
When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held  
down, the Z-ring operation is switched to a  
finer control. (fine mode)  
When the effect run control mode is  
enabled  
transformation settings to the closest  
detent values. Pressing twice in rapid  
succession returns the two-dimensional  
transformation settings to the defaults.  
By turning the Z-ring, you can run the  
keyframe effect, independent of the STOP  
NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar settings  
in the keyframe control block. Turn  
clockwise to run the effect in the normal  
direction, and counterclockwise for the  
reverse direction.  
When the resizer control mode is enabled  
(for the MVS-8000G only)  
By turning the ring, you can zoom the key  
to which the resizer is applied, and change  
the aspect ratio.  
c Trackball  
When the positioner operation mode is  
enabled  
By moving this, you can move the pattern  
in the x-axis and y-axis directions.  
When the three-dimensional transform  
operation mode is enabled  
Move the trackball to control the x- and y-  
axes in a three-dimensional transform.  
When the [SRC] or [TRGT] button is held  
down, the trackball operation is switched to  
a finer control. (fine mode)  
When the [LOC SIZE] or [LOC XYZ]  
button is held down, the Z-ring operation is  
switched to a finer control. (fine mode)  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled  
Turning the Z-ring controls the tape  
transport/disk drive/frame memory clip  
operations, at a speed determined by the  
operating buttons. Turn clockwise for the  
normal direction, and counterclockwise for  
the reverse direction.  
When the resizer control mode is  
enabled (for the MVS-8000G only)  
By turning the trackball, you can move in  
the x- and y-directions of the key to which  
the resizer is applied, and change the aspect  
ratio.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e MENU button  
Press this button, turning it on, to enable  
adjusting the parameters allocated to the  
knobs in the menu using the trackball and  
Z-ring.  
In the case of the DME menu, the operation  
applies to the selected DME channel.  
In VTR/disk recorder/frame memory  
operation mode, press this button, setting it  
to On. This makes it possible to carry out  
timeline start/stop point setting operation  
for the device selected with the device  
selection buttons.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Control Block (Joystick)  
The description below of frame memory  
clip operations applies only to the MVS-  
8000A/8000G.  
of the trackball type, except that the  
trackball and Z-ring operations are carried  
out with the joystick.  
All functions of the joystick type device  
control block are equivalent to the functions  
MENU button  
Region selection buttons  
1 Joystick  
M/E1  
DME1  
DME5  
MENU  
M/E2  
DME2  
DME6  
M/E3  
DME3  
DME7  
P/P  
USER  
DEV  
RSZR  
CTRL  
DME4  
DME8  
RUN  
CTRL  
LOCAL  
K1  
CB1  
GLB  
K2  
CB2  
SRC  
K3  
TRGT  
K4  
AXIS  
LOC  
MAIN  
ASP  
PERS  
SUB  
LOC  
SIZE  
ASP  
LOC  
XYZ  
LOC  
ROT  
POS  
RSZR  
CLR  
WORK  
BUFR  
SHIFT  
X
Y
Z
CTR  
Operating buttons  
a Joystick  
When the positioner operation mode is  
enabled  
• The button on the end of the joystick  
• [SRC] button  
• [TRGT] button  
Depending on the settings made in the  
Setup menu, the operation speed multiple  
can be changed.  
By moving this, you can move the pattern  
in the x-axis and y-axis directions.  
When the three-dimensional transform  
operation mode is enabled  
By moving this, you can carry out  
operations in the x-, y-, and z-axes.  
When the following buttons are held down,  
the joystick operation is switched to a finer  
control. (fine mode)  
When the effect run control mode is  
enabled  
By moving the joystick sideways, you can  
run the keyframe effect, independent of the  
STOP NEXT KF, EFF LOOP, and similar  
settings in the keyframe control block.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Move to the right to run the effect in the  
normal direction, and to the left for the  
reverse direction.  
When the resizer control mode is  
enabled (for the MVS-8000G only)  
Move for operations in the x-, y-, and z-  
axes. Hold down the button on the tip of the  
joystick to switch the joystick operation to  
a finer control. (fine mode).  
When the VTR/disk recorder/frame  
memory operation mode is enabled  
Moving the joystick sideways controls the  
tape transport/disk drive/frame memory  
clip operation, at a speed determined by the  
operating buttons.  
Move to the right for the normal direction,  
and to the left for the reverse direction.  
Device Control Block (Search Dial)  
The description below of frame memory  
clip operations applies only to the MVS-  
8000A/8000G.  
disk recorder, VTR, other external device,  
frame memory clip, or shot box. The device  
control block (trackball) and device control  
block (joystick) can be used together.  
Using the device control block (search  
dial), you can directly operate an XDCAM,  
4 DELAY button  
7 TIMELINE button  
2 Device selection buttons  
8 STOP button  
6 External device  
operation buttons  
1 Timecode display  
CURRENT  
START TC  
STOP TC  
TIME  
LINE  
SHTL  
JOG  
VAR  
ENBL  
STOP  
DEV  
1
DEV  
2
DEV  
3
DEV  
4
DEV  
5
DEV  
6
FM1  
CLIP  
FM2  
CLIP  
SBOX  
1
SBOX  
2
SBOX  
3
DELAY  
SET  
START  
TC  
SET  
STOP  
TC  
START  
TC  
STOP  
TC  
SET  
DUR  
STB  
OFF  
ALL  
STOP  
CUE  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
REC  
5 Editing  
buttons  
9 Search dial  
3 SBOX buttons  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
       
a Timecode display  
FM CLIP: Assign frame memory clips  
FM1 to FM8.  
Device selection buttons can be set as  
SBOX buttons or DELAY button in the  
Setup menu.  
This shows the current time (CURRENT)  
and the start and stop point timecode values  
for the current reference device (START  
TC, STOP TC). When you press a device  
selection button, the button lights, selecting  
the assigned device as the reference device,  
and displaying its setting value.  
In the case of the [SBOX] buttons, the  
display does not change. When the  
operation applies to a VTR/disk recorder,  
the displayed setting value depends on  
whether the [TIMELINE] button is on or  
off, as follows.  
When the [TIMELINE] button is on:  
Displays the start and stop points of the  
last set keyframe on the timeline. When  
the keyframe number is changed and  
the last register and keyframe change,  
the display also changes. (timeline  
setting mode)  
When the [TIMELINE] button is off:  
Displays the Cueup & Play (rewind  
action) start and stop points.  
c SBOX (shotbox) buttons  
Assign a shotbox saved in registers 1 to 99.  
When you press a button, the assigned  
shotbox is selected, and executed. Carry out  
the assignment in the Setup menu (see  
“Overall Control Panel Settings (Config  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).  
SBOX buttons can be set as device  
selection buttons or DELAY button in the  
Setup menu.  
d DELAY button  
When pressed, this button lights green, the  
numeric keypad control block display  
changes to DELAY__ : , and you can set  
the start delay time for the selected device.  
The setting range is from 00:00 to 59:29  
(depends on the video format). This button  
goes off when another timecode setting  
button ([START TC], [STOP TC], [SET  
START TC], [SET STOP TC], or [SET  
DUR]) is pressed. Carry out the assignment  
in the Setup menu (see “Overall Control  
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2)).  
b Device selection buttons  
These buttons are used for selecting  
assigned external devices or frame memory  
clips. Each button can only be assigned to a  
single device. Carry out the assignment in  
the Setup menu (see “Overall Control  
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2)). To select an assigned  
device, press the corresponding button,  
which lights green. To select more than one  
device simultaneously, hold down the  
button for the first selection, while pressing  
the buttons for the other selections in turn.  
The second and subsequent selected  
buttons light amber. If you press another  
button without holding down the first  
selected button, the second button will be  
the reference device and light green.  
DEV: Assign external devices DEV1 to  
DEV12.  
The DELAY button can be set as a device  
selection button or an SBOX button in the  
Setup menu.  
e Editing buttons  
These buttons set start and stop points.  
These operations are only valid while a  
device is selected with the device selection  
buttons.  
START TC: Press this button to set the  
timecode of the start point at that time.  
The timecode of the start point is  
updated to the current time each time  
this button is pressed.  
When the device the operation applies  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the start  
point updated by the setting of the  
[TIMELINE] button is as follows.  
When the [TIMELINE] button is  
On: start point of the timeline  
buttons exits from the standby mode.  
This button cannot be used for frame  
memory clip operations.  
CUE: When pressed, this button flashes  
amber together with the [ALL STOP]  
button, and the device selected with the  
device selection button is cued up to the  
start point of the material. When more  
than one device is selected, the amber  
flashing continues until the reference  
device is cued up, and when the cueing  
up is finished, this button lights green.  
REW: When pressed, this button lights  
amber, and material of the device  
selected with the device selection  
buttons is rewound. To stop during the  
rewind, press the [STOP] button or  
[ALL STOP] button.  
When the [TIMELINE] button is  
Off: start point of Cueup & Play  
STOP TC: Press this button to set the  
timecode of the stop point at that time.  
The timecode of the stop point is  
updated to the current time each time  
this button is pressed.  
When the device the operation applies  
to is a VTR/disk recorder, the stop  
point updated by the setting of the  
[TIMELINE] button is as follows.  
When the [TIMELINE] button is  
On: stop point of the timeline  
When the [TIMELINE] button is  
Off: stop point of Cueup & Play  
SET START TC, SET STOP TC, SET  
DUR: When pressed, these buttons  
light green, “START TC”, “STOP TC”  
or “DUR” appears in the numeric  
keypad control block display, and you  
can enter a timecode from the numeric  
keypad. If you enter a numeric value  
and press the [ENTER] button, the  
button goes off, whereas if you press  
the [ENTER] button without entering a  
numeric value the numeric keypad  
control block display shows  
PLAY: When pressed, this button lights  
amber, and the device selected with the  
device selection buttons plays. The  
playback stops not only if the [STOP]  
button is pressed, but also if any of the  
[STB OFF], [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],  
[REW], [PLAY], [FF], and [ALL  
STOP] buttons is pressed. When the  
[VAR] button is pressed while the  
device is playing back, the device plays  
at one times normal speed in variable  
mode.  
FF: When pressed, this button lights amber,  
and the material of the device selected  
with the device selection buttons is fast  
forwarded. To stop during the fast-  
forward, press the [STOP] button or  
[ALL STOP] button.  
ALL STOP: When pressed, all device  
material playback and other operations  
stop. During cueing up of any of the  
devices, this button flashes amber, and  
when all cueing up operations are  
completed, it lights green.  
REC: When pressed simultaneously with  
the [PLAY] button, this button lights  
red (the [PLAY] button lights amber),  
“--:--:--:--”. To exit the numeric value  
entry mode, either repeat pressing the  
same button, or press a different  
numeric keypad control block linked  
button, or a mode selection button such  
as the [EFF] and [SNAPSHOT]  
buttons in the numeric keypad control  
block. If the timecode has been set  
correctly, the entered numeric value  
appears in the timecode display.  
STB (standby) OFF: When pressed, this  
button flashes amber, and the device  
selected with the device selection  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
and the image from the selected device  
is recorded.  
This button cannot be used for frame  
memory clip operations.  
g TIMELINE button  
Press to switch the device selected with the  
device selection buttons to timeline setting  
mode.  
f External device operation buttons  
ENBL (enable): When this is pressed,  
turning it on, the search dial [VAR],  
[JOG], and [SHTL] button operations  
are enabled.  
h STOP button  
When pressed, this lights amber, and  
operation of the device selected with the  
device selection buttons stops.  
i Search dial  
Use this for search and other operations on  
VAR (variable): Sets the search dial to  
variable mode.  
the material of an external device.  
JOG: Sets the search dial to jog mode.  
SHTL (shuttle): Sets the search dial to  
shuttle mode.  
For details of the method of use, see  
“Controlling Tape/Disk Transport” in  
Chapter 12 (Volume 2).  
Keyframe Control Block  
In the keyframe control block, you can  
carry out effect editing and execution.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 EDIT ENBL button  
4 Duration setting buttons  
8 Effect execution direction selection  
qa AUTO INS button  
buttons  
5 KF LOOP button  
0 EFF LOOP button  
6 PAUSE button  
9 STOP NEXT KF button  
STOP  
EFF  
EDIT  
ENBL  
NEXT  
LOOP  
KF  
KF  
DUR  
EFF  
DUR  
KF  
LOOP  
NORM  
REV  
FF  
PAUSE  
NORM  
/REV  
CONST  
DUR  
AUTO  
INS  
GO TO  
TC  
GO TO  
KF  
DELAY  
FROM  
TO  
COPY  
PASTE  
ALL  
RE  
WIND  
DEL  
MOD  
INS  
UNDO  
PREV  
KF  
NEXT  
KF  
SHIFT  
RUN  
2 Edit point  
specification  
buttons  
7 Effect execution section  
3 Editing buttons  
a EDIT ENBL (edit enable) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to enable  
effect editing operations with the keyframe  
control block.  
When macro editing is carried out, this  
button lights red.  
During macro editing, pressing this  
button moves the edit point to the event  
number specified by numeric entry  
with the numeric keypad control block.  
PREV KF (previous keyframe): When  
this button is pressed, the edit point  
moves to the keyframe immediately  
before the current time (the position  
where the effect is currently stopped).  
During macro editing, pressing this  
button moves the edit point to the event  
immediately before the current event.  
NEXT KF (next keyframe): When this  
button is pressed, the edit point moves  
to the keyframe immediately after the  
current time.  
b Edit point specification buttons  
GO TO TC (Go to timecode): Press this  
button, turning it on, to enter a numeric  
value from the numeric keypad control  
block, and move the edit point to the  
specified timecode position.  
GO TO KF (Go to keyframe): Press this  
button, turning it on, to enter a numeric  
value from the numeric keypad control  
block, and move the edit point to the  
specified keyframe.  
During macro editing, pressing this  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
button moves the edit point to the event  
immediately after the current event.  
COPY: When this button is pressed, the  
selected keyframe (during macro  
editing, macro event) is copied. You  
can also select multiple keyframes or  
macro events, and copy them in a  
single operation.  
PASTE: When this button is pressed, the  
deleted or copied keyframe (during  
macro editing, macro event) is inserted  
after the current keyframe (during  
macro editing, macro event). Pressing  
this button while holding down the  
[SHIFT] button inserts the deleted or  
copied keyframe (during macro  
editing, macro event) before the current  
keyframe (during macro editing, macro  
event).  
SHIFT: Hold down this button, and press  
the [INS] button, [MOD] button, or  
[PASTE] button, to obtain the shifted  
function for the button.  
UNDO: When this button is pressed, the  
last executed keyframe (during macro  
editing, macro event) insertion,  
modification, or deletion, or paste  
operation is canceled.  
c Editing buttons  
ALL: Press this button, turning it on, to  
select all keyframes (during macro  
editing, all events) in the effect.  
FROM TO: Press this button, turning it on,  
to enter numeric values from the  
numeric keypad control block, and  
select a specified range of keyframes  
(during macro editing, the specified  
range of events).  
INS (insert): When this button is pressed, a  
new keyframe is inserted after the  
current keyframe. Pressing this button  
while holding down the [SHIFT]  
button inserts a new keyframe before  
the current keyframe.  
During macro editing, pressing this  
button registers an event after the  
current event.  
MOD (modify): When this button is  
pressed, the selected keyframe is  
modified with the values of the current  
keyframe. When the edit point is  
between two keyframes, the  
immediately preceding keyframe is  
modified. You can also select multiple  
keyframes, and modify them in a single  
operation. At this time, pressing this  
button while holding down the  
[SHIFT] button modifies all selected  
keyframes with the changed values  
taken as relative values.  
d Duration setting buttons  
KF DUR (keyframe duration): Press this  
button, turning it on, to set the  
keyframe duration of the selected  
keyframe, by numeric value entry from  
the numeric keypad control block.  
EFF DUR (effect duration): Press this  
button, turning it on, to set the effect  
duration from the numeric keypad  
control block.  
DELAY: Press this button, turning it on, to  
enter a delay value from the numeric  
keypad control block.  
During macro editing, pressing this  
button amends the selected event.  
DEL (delete): When this button is pressed,  
the selected keyframe is deleted. When  
the edit point is between two  
keyframes, the immediately preceding  
keyframe is deleted. During macro  
editing, pressing this button deletes the  
selected event. You can also select  
multiple keyframes or macro events,  
and delete them in a single operation.  
CONST DUR (constant duration): Select  
the duration mode. When this is lit, the  
mode is constant duration mode, and  
when off, variable duration mode.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
e KF LOOP (keyframe loop) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to execute  
the effect the specified number of times  
through the keyframes in the specified  
range.  
h Effect execution direction selection  
buttons  
NORM (normal): When this button is lit,  
effect execution runs from the first  
keyframe to the last keyframe.  
REV (reverse): When this button is lit,  
effect execution runs from the last  
keyframe to the first keyframe.  
Pressing one of these buttons automatically  
turns the other off.  
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): Press this  
button, turning it on, to reverse the  
direction of the effect when it reaches  
the last keyframe or first keyframe.  
f PAUSE button  
When this button is pressed, a pause is  
applied to the selected keyframe.  
When editing a macro, press this button,  
turning it on, to include a pause event in the  
macro. The pause length can be set in the  
numeric keypad control block.  
g Effect execution section  
RUN: When this button is pressed, the  
effect is run from the first keyframe to  
the last keyframe. However, if a pause  
is set on a keyframe, the effect stops at  
that point. Press this button again to  
resume execution, and continue to the  
next pause point or the end of the  
effect.  
i STOP NEXT KF (stop next  
keyframe) button  
When this button is pressed, turning it on,  
the effect execution range is from the  
current time to the next keyframe.  
j EFF LOOP (effect loop) button  
When the effect reaches the last keyframe  
with this button on, it returns to the first  
keyframe and repeats.  
Effect indicator: This comprises multiple  
LEDs, which show the progress of the  
effect.  
k AUTO INS (auto insert) button  
When editing a macro, press this button,  
turning it on, to enable the auto insert  
function, so that every control panel  
operation you carry out is added to the  
macro as an event.  
Fader lever: Moving this up or down  
manually runs the effect.  
REWIND: When this button is pressed, the  
currently recalled effect is rewound to  
the first keyframe.  
FF (fast forward): When this button is  
pressed, the currently recalled effect is  
advanced to the last keyframe.  
Numeric Keypad Control Block  
The numeric keypad control block is used  
for region selection, for saving and  
recalling snapshots, effects and shotboxes,  
for entering numeric values for trackball  
operation and keyframe operation, and for  
transition rate entry.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1 Mode selection buttons  
5 Display  
SNAP  
SHOT  
SHOT  
BOX  
TRANS  
RATE  
EFF  
MCRO  
P-BUS  
UNDO  
STORE  
STATS  
MASTR  
ALL  
GP1  
+/-  
EFF  
8
5
2
9
7
4
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
DISS  
P/P  
TC  
CLR  
AUTO  
6
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
USER  
4
RTR  
TRANS  
TRIM  
1
0
3
GPI  
ENBL  
DME  
1
DME  
2
DME  
3
DME  
4
DEV  
1
STORE  
RCALL  
DME  
5
DME  
6
DME  
7
DME  
8
DEV  
2
ENTER  
4 Numeric keypad  
3 Function selection buttons  
2 Region selection buttons  
a Mode selection buttons  
EFF (effect): Press to save or recall an  
effect.  
SNAPSHOT: Press to save or recall a  
snapshot.  
SHOTBOX: Press to save or recall a  
shotbox.  
MCRO (macro): Press to save, recall or  
edit a macro.  
TRANS RATE (transition rate): Press to  
set the transition rate.  
b Region selection buttons  
These select the functional block (“region”)  
of the control panel to which operations  
apply.  
You can select more than one region at the  
same time.  
The first button you press is taken as the  
reference region, and lights green, while the  
next pressed button lights amber.  
With the exception of the [MASTER] and  
[ALL] buttons, you can change the region  
assignment to the buttons as desired in the  
Setup menu.  
MASTR: Press this, turning it on, to save  
region information in a master  
snapshot register or master timeline  
register, or to recall such region  
information.  
Hold down this button, and press one of  
the key delegation buttons [KEY1] to  
[KEY4] in the transition control block  
to set an independent key transition  
rate.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ALL: Select all regions. When any region  
is already selected, pressing this button  
makes all regions unselected.  
M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P: Select the  
corresponding regions, M/E-1, M/E-2,  
M/E-3, and PGM/PST.  
. (period): Enters the decimal point.  
When the [TRANS RATE] button is lit,  
enters “00.” When the [EFF] button,  
[SNAPSHOT] button or [SHOTBOX]  
button is lit, this is used to find an  
empty register.  
USER 1 to USER 8: Select a User region.  
DME1 to DME8: Select a DME channel.  
P-Bus: Select the P-Bus region.  
GPI: Select the GPI region.  
+/–/ EFF DISS (effect dissolve): Invert the  
sign, negative or positive.  
When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit,  
applies the effect dissolve attribute to a  
snapshot.  
RTR:Select the router region.  
DEV1 to DEV12: Select the Device 1 to  
Device 12 regions respectively.  
MCRO: Select the macro region.  
CLR/AUTO TRANS (clear/auto  
transition): Clear an input value,  
returning to the previous state.  
When the [SNAPSHOT] button is lit,  
applies the auto transition attribute to a  
snapshot.  
TRIM/GPI ENBL (enable): After  
entering a difference value to be added  
to an existing setting, press this button  
to confirm the change.  
c Function selection buttons  
UNDO: After recalling a register, press this  
button to return to the state before  
recalling the register.  
STORE STATS (store status): This lights  
amber when data is stored in a register.  
After saving data to a register, hold  
down this button and press the  
ENTER: Confirm an entered value.  
[UNDO] button to return the register to  
the state before the data was saved.  
TC (timecode): Press this button, turning it  
on, to switch transition rate entry to the  
timecode entry mode.  
e Display  
This shows the selected region name and  
entered numeric values.  
STORE: Press this button to switch to the  
mode for saving a snapshot, effect,  
shotbox or macro in a register.  
RCALL (recall): Press this button to  
switch to the mode for recalling a  
snapshot, effect, shotbox or macro  
from a register.  
[STORE] button or [RCALL] button  
flashes amber when one or more of the  
regions assigned to the Region selection  
buttons are not selected by the Region  
Select menu.  
d Numeric keypad  
In addition to the buttons for numeric input,  
this includes buttons for adding attributes to  
snapshots.  
0 to 9: Used to input numeric digits.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fade to Black Control Block  
3 AUTO button  
1 FTB button  
2 Preview selection buttons  
FTB  
AUTO  
PST  
P/P  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
M/E  
IK  
M/E  
2K  
M/E  
3K  
P/P  
K
DME  
V
DME  
K
a FTB (fade to black) button  
signal (M/E-1 K-PVW, M/E-2 K-  
PVW, M/E-3 K-PVW, P/P K-PVW) of  
the M/E or PGM/PST bank  
corresponding to the pressed button is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
Press this button to fade to black the  
program output of the PGM/PST bank, at  
the set transition rate. You can set the fade  
to black transition rate in the menu.  
DME V (DME monitor video): When this  
button is pressed, the DME monitor  
output video signal (DME MON V) is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
DME K (DME monitor key): When this  
button is pressed, the DME monitor  
output key signal (DME MON K) is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
b Preview selection buttons  
Press one of these buttons to select a signal  
on the edit preview bus. Each button can be  
assigned to any preview output in setup (see  
Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)).  
PST (preset): When this button is pressed,  
the signal selected on the background B  
row of the PGM/PST bank is selected  
on the edit preview bus.  
M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P  
preview): The preview signal (M/E-1  
PVW, M/E-2 PVW, M/E-3 PVW, P/P  
PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank  
corresponding to the pressed button is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
c AUTO button  
When this button is pressed, the M/E or  
PGM/PST bank preview signal selected on  
the edit preview bus is automatically  
switched to the program signal depending  
on the on-air status.  
M/E1 K to M/E3 K, P/P K (M/E1 to M/E  
3, P/P key preview): The key preview  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for AUX Buses)  
There are also models without the selected  
source name displays and source name  
displays shown in the following figure.  
All operations except those of the [DEST]  
button and [SHIFT] button are the same as  
for a model with selected source name  
displays and source name displays.  
7 KEY button  
8 2ND button  
1 AUX delegation buttons  
qa RTR button  
2 Selected source name displays  
3 DEST button  
qs Level selection buttons  
LEVEL  
1
LEVEL  
2
LEVEL  
3
LEVEL  
4
RTR  
DME  
3K  
DME  
4V  
DME  
4K  
FMS  
1
FMS  
2
EDIT  
PVW  
DEST  
SHIFT  
2ND  
KEY  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
PGM  
PGM  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
5 Cross-point buttons  
2nd  
1st  
9 Source name displays  
0 SHIFT button  
6 XPT HOLD buttons  
4 Selected bus display  
a AUX delegation buttons  
point buttons in the auxiliary bus control  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
block.  
select the bus to which to assign the cross-  
The buses that can be selected are as  
follows.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• AUX buses 1 to 48  
d Selected bus display  
• MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses  
• FMS 1 (frame memory source 1) and  
FMS 2 buses  
This shows the name of the bus selected by  
the auxiliary bus delegation buttons.  
• DME 1V to DME 8V buses  
• DME 1K to DME 8K buses  
• EDIT PVW (preview) bus  
• M/E-1 UTILITY 1 and M/E-1 UTILITY  
2 buses  
• M/E-2 UTILITY 1 and M/E-2 UTILITY  
2 buses  
• M/E-3 UTILITY 1 and M/E-3 UTILITY  
2 buses  
• P/P UTILITY 1 and P/P UTILITY 2  
buses  
• DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses  
• DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses  
• M/E-1 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses  
• M/E-2 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses  
• M/E-3 key 1 fill to M/E-3 key 4 fill buses  
• M/E-1 Key 1 source to Key 4 source  
buses  
• M/E-2 Key 1 source to Key 4 source  
buses  
• M/E-3 key 1 source to M/E-3 key 4  
e Cross-point buttons  
The cross-points in the auxiliary bus control  
block are arranged in two rows: an upper  
row (1st row) and a lower row (2nd row),  
and are allocated to the buses selected with  
the AUX delegation buttons. The 1st row  
contains the cross-point buttons for  
unshifted buses, and the 2nd row contains  
the cross-point buttons for shifted buses.  
When the DME 1V/K to 8V/K buses are  
selected with the AUX delegation buttons,  
the 1st row cross-point buttons are for the  
currently showing side of DME, and the  
2nd row are for the reverse side.  
By holding down the [2ND] button and  
making an AUX delegation selection, you  
can allocate the 2nd row to a different bus  
from the 1st row.  
In this case, if the 32nd button is set to be a  
[SHIFT] button (in a 32-button system), the  
cross-point buttons switch to the shifted  
allocation while the [SHIFT] button is  
enabled.  
source buses  
• M/E-1 external DME bus  
• M/E-2 external DME bus  
• M/E-3 external DME bus  
• P/P external DME bus  
• DME UTILITY1 and DME UTILITY2  
buses  
f XPT HOLD (cross-point hold)  
buttons  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
• CCR (color corrector) 1 and 2 buses  
enable cross-point hold.  
b Selected source name displays  
These show the name of the currently  
selected signal (source) on the bus  
corresponding to the delegation button.  
g KEY button  
While this button is held down, you can use  
the cross-point row of buttons to select key  
signals.  
c DEST (destination) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to display  
the names of buses allocated to the  
delegation buttons in the selection source  
name displays.  
h 2ND button  
After selecting a bus with an AUX  
delegation button, hold down this button,  
and select another AUX delegation, thus  
allocating a different bus in the 2nd row  
from the 1st row.  
In the case of a module without selected  
source name displays, this button is invalid.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
i Source name displays  
These show the names of the source signals  
which can be selected by the cross-point  
buttons. While the [SHIFT] button is  
enabled, the shifted signal name is  
displayed. If a different bus is allocated to  
the 2nd row, while the [2ND] button is held  
down, the 2nd row signal name is  
displayed.  
While the [KEY] button is held down, the  
source name of the key signal assigned to  
the cross-point buttons appears.  
j SHIFT button  
While this button is enabled, the shifted  
signal names appear in the source name  
display. Pressing this buttons toggles the  
source name display between the shifted  
signal names and unshifted signal names.  
In the case of a module without source  
name displays, this button is invalid.  
k RTR (router) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to assign the  
auxiliary bus control block to router  
control.  
For details of the names and functions of  
parts for router control, see the next  
section.  
l Level selection buttons  
Used when the auxiliary bus control block  
is carrying out router control.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Auxiliary Bus Control Block (for Router Control)  
Press the [RTR] button, turning it on, to  
assign the auxiliary bus control block to  
router control.  
7 KEY button  
8 2ND button  
1 Destination selection buttons  
qa RTR button  
2 Selected source name displays  
3 DEST button  
qs Level selection buttons  
LEVEL  
1
LEVEL  
2
LEVEL  
3
LEVEL  
4
RTR  
DME  
3K  
DME  
4V  
DME  
4K  
FMS  
1
FMS  
2
EDIT  
PVW  
DEST  
SHIFT  
2ND  
KEY  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
PGM  
PGM  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
XPT  
HOLD  
2nd  
5 Source selection  
button rows  
1st  
0 SHIFT button  
9 Source name displays  
6 XPT HOLD buttons  
4 Selected destination display  
a Destination selection buttons  
Press a button, turning it on, to select the  
destination to which the router source is  
assigned.  
The button pressed to assign a destination  
to a source selection button in the 1st row  
lights amber. When another button is  
pressed to assign a different destination to a  
source selection button in the 2nd row, it  
lights green.  
b Selected source name displays  
These show the source name selected for  
the destination.  
If the source names and destination names  
are set in the Setup menu to “SW’er Local”  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
mode, then the description names appear  
here.  
Source  
selection  
[SHIFT] [KEY] Selection  
operation  
63 to 93  
Off  
On  
Hold down the  
[KEY] button,  
and press the  
source selection  
button.  
c DEST (destination) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to display  
the names of the destinations assigned to  
the destination selection buttons in the  
selected source name displays.  
94 to 124 On  
On  
Hold down the  
[KEY] button,  
and press the  
[SHIFT] button,  
turning it on (the  
[SHIFT] button  
locks here, even  
when in Hold  
mode), then  
press the source  
selection button.  
d Selected destination display  
This shows the name of the destination  
selected by the destination selection  
buttons. If a protected destination is  
selected, the indication “PROTECT”  
appears.  
e Source selection button rows  
f XPT HOLD (cross-point hold)  
buttons  
Not used in router control mode.  
The destination selected with a destination  
selection button is assigned to a source  
selection button. Press a source selection  
button to select a source. The 1st row of  
buttons are source selection buttons for the  
unshifted destinations, and the 2nd row are  
shifted source selection buttons. By holding  
down the [2ND] button, and selecting a  
destination, you can assign a different  
destination from the 1st row to the 2nd row.  
In the 1st row, the button to which a  
destination is assigned lights amber. If a  
different destination is assigned to a button  
in the 2nd row, the button lights green.  
When the 32nd button is set as a [SHIFT]  
button (in a 32-button system), while the  
[SHIFT] button is active, these switch to the  
shifted source selection buttons. By using  
the [KEY] button, you can expand the  
source selection as follows.  
g KEY button  
When this button is enabled by a setting in  
the Setup menu, by holding it down during  
a source selection you can expand the  
function of the [SHIFT] button. (See  
“Expanding the shift function” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).)  
h 2ND button  
After selecting a destination with the  
destination selection buttons, hold down  
this button and make another destination  
selection to assign a different destination  
from the 1st row to the 2nd row.  
i Source name displays  
These display the names of signals  
(sources) that can be selected with the  
cross-point buttons. While the [SHIFT]  
button is active, the shifted signal names  
appear. While the [KEY] button is held  
down, the expanded signal names appear.  
When a different destination is assigned to  
the 2nd row, the 2nd row signal names  
Source  
selection  
[SHIFT] [KEY] Selection  
operation  
1 to 31  
Off  
Off  
Press the source  
selection button.  
32 to 62  
On  
Off  
Press the  
[SHIFT] button,  
then press the  
source selection  
button.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292  
appear only while the [2ND] button is held  
down.  
j SHIFT button  
While this button is active, the source name  
displays show the shifted signal names.  
Press this button to toggle between the  
shifted and unshifted states.  
k RTR (router) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to assign the  
auxiliary bus control block to router  
control.  
l Level selection buttons  
To each of the four buttons, plural S-Bus  
levels are assigned in the Setup menu. Press  
a button, turning it on, to make operations  
apply to those S-Bus levels.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Control Block  
1 Top menu selection buttons  
2 Menu display  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
HOME  
P/P  
SUB  
MENU  
SITE  
FRAME  
MEM  
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUX  
/MON  
COPY  
SWAP  
MISC  
GLB  
EFF  
DME  
RTR  
DEV  
MCRO  
KEY  
FRAME  
SNAP  
SHOT  
SHOT  
BOX  
EFF  
USER  
SETUP  
ENG  
SETUP  
FILE  
DIAG  
PREFS  
1
PREFS  
2
PREFS  
3
PREFS  
4
PREFS  
5
PREFS  
6
PREFS  
7
PREFS  
8
4 User preference buttons  
3 Knobs  
a Top menu selection buttons  
These select the menu appearing in the  
menu display.  
c Knobs  
These adjust the parameter values  
appearing in the menu.  
It is also possible to change the assignment  
of these buttons in setup.  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
d User preference buttons  
These recall the functions or menus  
assigned to them in the Setup menu. In the  
default setup, nothing is assigned to the  
[PREFS 1] to [PREFS 7] buttons.  
It is also possible to change the assignment  
of these buttons in setup.  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
HOME  
P/P  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
SUB  
MENU  
SITE  
FRAME  
MEM  
COLOR  
BKGD  
AUX  
/MON  
CCR  
COPY  
SWAP  
MISC  
STATS  
PREFS 8 button: When this button is on,  
control of an editor from the Remote1  
port on the rear panel of the switcher is  
possible. However, even when it is off,  
control of the Edit PVW bus is always  
possible.  
GLB  
EFF  
DME  
RTR  
DEV  
MCRO  
KEY  
FRAME  
SNAP  
SHOT  
SHOT  
BOX  
EFF  
USER  
SETUP  
ENG  
SETUP  
FILE  
DIAG  
b Menu display  
This shows the menu currently in use.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Memory Card/USB Adaptor Block  
1 Memory card slot  
2 DEVICE connectors  
a Memory card slot  
This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II  
compliant memory card. You can use it in  
software installation, and for saving and  
reading in data, such as snapshot, keyframe,  
effect, and setup data.  
b DEVICE connectors  
There are three USB connectors.  
You can connect a device such as a mouse,  
keyboard, pen tablet, and so on, that is  
equipped with a USB interface to any of  
these connectors.  
For details on the devices that can be  
connected, consult your Sony  
representative.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
“Memory Stick”/USB Connections Block  
1 “Memory Stick” status indicator  
2 “Memory Stick” slot  
3 DEVICE connectors  
a “Memory Stick” status indicator  
Lights in red during access to a “Memory  
Stick.”  
c DEVICE connectors  
There are three USB connectors.  
You can connect a device such as a mouse,  
keyboard, pen tablet, and so on, that is  
equipped with a USB interface to any of  
these connectors.  
Note  
Do not power the unit off or remove a  
“Memory Stick” when the “Memory Stick”  
status indicator is lit.  
For details on the devices that can be  
connected, consult your Sony  
representative.  
b “Memory Stick” slot  
Insert “Memory Sticks.” You can use it in  
software installation, and for saving and  
reading data, such as snapshot, keyframe,  
effect, and setup data.  
About “Memory Sticks”  
Usable “Memory Sticks”  
This unit has been confirmed to operate  
with those of the following “Memory  
Sticks” that have a capacity of 8 GB  
(gigabytes) or less. However, operation  
with all “Memory Sticks” is not guaranteed.  
• “Memory Stick”  
See the next item, “Memory Sticks” for  
more information about the usable  
“Memory Sticks” and their handling.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• “Memory Stick PRO”  
• “Memory Stick Duo”  
• “Memory Stick PRO Duo”  
Notes  
• When using a “Memory Stick PRO,”  
high-rate data transfer using parallel  
interface is not supported.  
• A “MagicGate Memory Stick” can also  
be used, but this system does not support  
the MagicGate function.  
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo,” be  
sure to use it with a “Memory Stick Duo  
Adaptor” (MSAC-M2 or equivalent). If  
you insert a “Memory Stick Duo”  
without using the adaptor, there is the  
possibility that the stick cannot be  
removed, resulting in a serious accident.  
Handling “Memory Sticks”  
When using “Memory Sticks,” pay  
attention to the following points.  
• Do not touch the connector of the  
“Memory Stick”with anything, including  
your finger or metallic objects.  
• Do not attach anything other than the  
supplied label to the “Memory Stick”  
labeling position.  
• Attach the label so that it does not stick  
out beyond the labeling position.  
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its  
case.  
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory  
Stick.”  
• Do not disassemble or modify the  
“Memory Stick.”  
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get  
wet.  
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick”  
in a location that is:  
– Extremely hot, such as in a car parked  
in the sun  
– Under direct sunlight  
– Very humid or subject to corrosive  
substances  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utility/Shotbox Control Block  
1 Bank selection buttons  
BANK  
1
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
5
6
BANK  
2
10  
16  
22  
11  
17  
23  
12  
18  
24  
BANK  
3
13  
19  
14  
20  
15  
21  
BANK  
4
2 Memory recall buttons  
a Bank selection buttons  
button goes off.) In the case of a shotbox  
function, pressing the button executes the  
assigned shotbox function, and the button  
lights yellow. In the case of a macro  
register, pressing the button executes the  
assigned macro, and the button flashes  
yellow.  
Press any of the [BANK1] to [BANK4]  
buttons to select a bank of 24 memory recall  
buttons. The selected button lights amber.  
b Memory recall buttons  
You can use these buttons to recall  
frequently used menus, utility functions,  
shotbox registers, or macro registers that  
you have assigned.  
When a utility function is allocated to a  
button, the button lights orange (or green  
depending on the status), and the allocated  
function name appears. Pressing the button  
executes the allocated function. When the  
function constitutes a switching on/off  
operation, the button lights green;  
otherwise, it only momentarily lights green.  
When a shotbox register or macro register  
recall is assigned to a button, the button  
lights orange, and the assigned register  
name appears. (If the register is empty, the  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block  
(Simple Type)  
The simple versions of the transition  
control block and Flexi Pad control block  
shown in the following figure is designed to  
allow simplified operations than with the  
standard type. The transitions carried out  
using these simple-type control blocks are  
also referred to as “simple transitions” in  
this User’s guide.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
qa Numeric display  
0 XPT HOLD status display  
2 Key transition selection buttons  
6 Key status display  
1 Transition type selection buttons  
ON  
ON  
XPT HOLD  
MIX  
NAM  
WIPE  
DME  
OVER OVER  
A B  
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4  
KEY1  
KEY2  
WIPE  
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
NORM  
/REV  
LIMIT  
SET  
DME  
PTN  
LIMIT  
REV  
SNAP  
SHOT  
TAKE  
UNDO  
3 Transition execution section  
5 Pattern limit buttons  
4 Wipe direction selection buttons  
7 Mode selection buttons  
9 UNDO button  
8 Memory recall section  
Shown above is the right-hand type transition control block (with the right-hand fader lever).  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block (with INH  
button)  
qs INH button  
XPT HOLD  
LIMIT  
MIX  
SET  
A B  
U1  
U
2
1 2 3 4  
PIN  
LIMIT  
INH  
NAM  
WIPE  
DME  
WIPE  
DME  
NORM  
/REV  
REV  
SNAP  
SHOT  
TAKE  
UNDO  
Memory recall section  
UNDO button  
a Transition type selection buttons  
You can assign these buttons in setup to any  
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2)). Press any of the following  
buttons, turning it on, to select the transition  
type.  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
determine the type of the next transition for  
a background.  
To select the key transition type, hold down  
the [KEY1] or [KEY2] button, and press  
one of the following buttons, turning it on.  
When multi-program mode is selected in  
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher  
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the  
following buttons may light.  
fades out. During the transition, the  
overall signal level is maintained at  
100%.  
In a key transition, the key fades in (for  
insertion) or out (for removal).  
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and  
new video signals are compared, and  
the signal with the higher luminance  
level is given priority in the output.  
The current video is maintained at  
100% output for the first half of the  
transition as the new video increases  
progressively to 100%, then the current  
video is progressively reduced from  
100% to zero in the second half while  
the new video is maintained at 100%.  
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the  
new video, using the wipe pattern  
selected in the Wipe menu.  
MIX: In a background transition, the new  
video fades in as the current video  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DME: This applies a wipe-like transition,  
using the DME effect selected in the  
DME Wipe menu.  
lever, in a background mix transition,  
you can control the background A and  
B buses independently.  
FM1&2ClIP,FM3&4ClIP,FM5&6ClIP,  
FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is  
played back together with the  
Transition indicator: This comprises  
multiple LEDs, which show the  
progress of the transition.  
transition. At this point, you can also  
carry out a background transition (wipe  
or mix (dissolve)) simultaneously  
together with the clip.  
Transition rate display: This displays the  
transition rate (the time from the  
beginning of the transition to its  
completion) set for an auto transition,  
in frames.  
b Key transition selection buttons  
To insert or delete key 1 on the next  
transition, hold down the [KEY1] button,  
and select the type of transition using the  
transition type selection buttons. If the key  
is currently not inserted, the transition will  
insert it, and if the key is currently inserted,  
the transition will delete it. You can use the  
[KEY2] button in a similar way.  
You can set the transition rate using the  
numeric keypad control block or menu.  
TAKE button: Pressing this button carries  
out an auto transition of the set  
transition rate. The transition starts  
immediately, and the button lights  
amber. When the transition completes,  
the button goes off.  
While these buttons are held down, you can  
select a key source with the cross-point  
buttons on the key bus.  
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid  
succession changes the state of the  
corresponding key bus so that a cross-point  
can be selected.  
d Wipe direction selection buttons  
REV (reverse): When this button is off, the  
wipe proceeds in the normal direction.  
When the button is lit, the wipe  
proceeds in the reverse direction.  
The normal direction refers to the black  
to white direction or in the direction of  
the arrow as shown in “Wipe Pattern  
List” (page 560) and “DME Wipe  
Pattern List” (page 566) in Appendix  
(Volume 1).  
Key delegation button  
(double press)  
Corresponding  
key bus  
a)  
[KEY1]  
[KEY2]  
key 1  
b)  
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe  
direction alternates between normal  
and reverse every time a transition is  
executed.  
key 2  
a) The key bus switching button [KEY3] in the cross-  
point control block goes off.  
b) The key bus switching button [KEY4] in the cross-  
point control block goes off.  
e Pattern limit buttons  
LIMIT SET: Move the fader lever to the  
position of a particular pattern size, and  
stop it there, then press this button to  
set the pattern limit range. This button  
is enabled when the [PTN LIMIT]  
button is off.  
c Transition execution section  
Fader lever: Move this vertically to carry  
out a transition.  
When the split fader function is  
enabled, by pressing the projection on  
the left side of the grip you can release  
the lock and separate the two halves of  
the fader lever. With the split fader  
PTN (pattern) LIMIT: When a wipe or  
DME wipe is selected, pressing this  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
button, turning it on, enables the  
pattern limit function.  
the memory recall section for recalling and  
executing a macro.  
f Key status display  
j XPT HOLD (cross-point hold) status  
display  
A bus for which cross-point hold is set  
For each of keys 1 and 2, when the key is  
inserted, the corresponding ON indicator  
lights. The OVER indicators show the  
priority between keys 1 and 2, by lighting  
when the corresponding key is on top. For  
example, when key 1 appears over key 2 on  
the program monitor, the OVER indicator  
for key 1 lights.  
appears as a green light.  
k Numeric display  
Depending on the operation mode, this  
shows a wipe or DME wipe pattern number,  
or a register number in up to four digits.  
In macro mode, this provides indications  
for macro editing.  
The following is the Flexi Pad control  
block.  
l INH (inhibit) button  
Pressing this button, turning it on, disables  
the buttons in the memory recall section  
and the [UNDO] button.  
g Mode selection buttons  
WIPE: When saving or recalling a wipe  
snapshot, use this in combination with  
the buttons of the memory recall  
section.  
DME: When saving or recalling a DME  
wipe snapshot, use this in combination  
with the buttons of the memory recall  
section.  
SNAPSHOT: When saving or recalling a  
snapshot, use this in combination with  
the buttons of the memory recall  
section.  
h Memory recall section  
This consists of eight buttons with LCDs,  
whose display changes according to the  
operation mode. Use these in combination  
with the mode selection buttons to save or  
recall wipe snapshots, DME wipe  
snapshots, or snapshots.  
i UNDO button  
After recalling a register, press this button  
to return to the state before recalling the  
register.  
With a setup setting, this can be switched to  
a mode selection button for macro setting,  
and used in combination with the buttons in  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Independent Key Transition Control Block (Simple  
Type)  
The left side of this control block controls  
key 3, and the right side controls key 4.  
The control block for key 3 only is  
described as an example, but the operations  
on the key 4 control block are the same.  
In setup you can assign any key to either  
side of this control block. For details, see  
“Assigning Keys to the Independent Key  
Transition Control Block (Simple Type)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
3 K-SS button  
4 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons  
K-SS  
WIPE  
MIX  
DME  
CUT  
K-SS  
WIPE  
MIX  
DME  
CUT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
KEY3  
ON  
KEY4  
ON  
TAKE  
TAKE  
2 Independent key transition execution section  
1 Independent key transition type selection buttons  
a Independent key transition type  
SHIFT: This has the following functions.  
• When setting is made in the Setup  
menu to allow a different transition  
type for inserting or deleting a key, it  
is possible to display and set the  
transition type after the next  
selection buttons  
Press one of the following buttons, turning  
it on, to select the independent key  
transition type.  
MIX: Faded in or out.  
transition while this button is held  
down.  
WIPE: Inserted or deleted with a wipe.  
DME: Switches the key with a DME wipe.  
CUT: Inserted or deleted instantaneously.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• While this button is held down, you  
can select a key source with the  
cross-point buttons for the key bus.  
• If you press this button twice in rapid  
succession, the key bus selection  
button [KEY3] in the cross-point  
control block lights, and a key 3 key  
bus cross-point can be selected.  
• If you press this button, while  
holding down [TRANS RATE]  
button in the numeric keypad control  
block, you can set the independent  
key transition rate on the control  
block.  
b Independent key transition  
execution section  
KEY3 ON button: This inserts or deletes  
key 3 instantaneously. When key 3 is  
present in the final program output  
from the switcher, this lights red, and  
otherwise lights amber.  
TAKE button: This carries out an auto  
transition on key 3.  
c K-SS (key snapshot) button  
This enables key snapshot mode. In key  
snapshot mode, it is possible to save and  
recall key snapshots.  
d Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
These show the signal name of the key fill  
selected for key 3 and the transition rate on  
two buttons. In key snapshot mode, these  
correspond to registers 1 and 2 for key 3;  
press to save or recall a key snapshot.  
To save a key snapshot, with the [K-SS]  
button lit amber, hold down [SHIFT] button  
and press one of the key snapshot buttons.  
This saves a key snapshot in the button you  
pressed, which lights yellow.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Downstream Key Control Block  
1 Key delegation buttons  
5 Key source name display/key snapshot  
buttons  
4 Key snapshot setting  
buttons  
DSK1  
DSK3  
DSK2  
DSK4  
UNDO  
SHIFT  
WIPE  
DME  
CUT  
K-SS  
K-SS  
STORE  
MIX  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
DSK3  
ON  
DSK4  
ON  
TAKE  
TAKE  
TAKE  
TAKE  
2 Independent key transition type  
selection buttons  
3 Independent key transition execution section  
a Key delegation buttons  
b Independent key transition type  
Press one of the [DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons  
to delegate this control block to the  
corresponding keyer.  
Using the Setup menu, it is possible to  
delegate this control block to key 1 to key 4  
of the M/E bank.  
selection buttons  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
select the downstream key transition type.  
MIX: Carry out a dissolve with the key  
selected with the key delegation  
buttons.  
While these buttons are held down, you can  
select a key source with the cross-point  
buttons for the key bus.  
WIPE: Carry out a wipe with the key  
selected with the key delegation  
buttons.  
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid  
succession changes its state so that you can  
make cross-point selections on the  
corresponding key bus.  
DME: This switches the key selected with  
the key delegation buttons, using a  
DME wipe.  
CUT: Instantaneously insert or delete the  
key selected with the key delegation  
buttons.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SHIFT: When setting is made in the Setup  
menu to allow a different transition  
type for inserting or deleting a key, it is  
possible to display and set the  
e Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
These display the selected source name for  
each corresponding keyer. In snapshot  
mode, they correspond to registers 1 to 4 of  
the selected keyer, and pressing the button  
saves or recalls a key snapshot.  
transition after the next transition while  
this button is held down.  
c Independent key transition  
execution section  
DSK1 (downstream key 1) ON to DSK4  
ON buttons: Press these to  
instantaneously cut the downstream  
keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 in or, when the  
downstream keys are already inserted,  
cut them out. When the key  
corresponding to the button appears in  
the final program output, the button  
lights red, and otherwise lights amber.  
TAKE buttons: These correspond to  
downstream keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 from  
left to right; press to execute an auto  
transition. The transition starts  
immediately, and the button lights  
amber. When the transition completes,  
the button goes off.  
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a  
manual downstream key transition.  
Transition indicator: This comprises  
multiple LEDs, which show the  
progress of the downstream key  
transition.  
d Key snapshot setting buttons  
K-SS (key snapshot): This enables key  
snapshot mode.  
K-SS STORE (key snapshot store): To  
save a key snapshot, hold down this  
button, and press the key source name  
display/key snapshot button for the  
register you want to save.  
UNDO (key snapshot recall undo): This  
undoes the last key snapshot recall.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Downstream Key/Fade-to-Black Control Block  
4 Key source name display/key snapshot buttons  
3 K-SS button  
5 FTB button  
FTB  
AUTO  
PST  
P/P  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
DSK1  
DSK2  
K-SS  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
M/E  
IK  
M/E  
2K  
M/E  
3K  
P/P  
K
DME  
V
DME  
K
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
7 Preview selection buttons  
2 Independent key  
transition  
1 Key delegation  
6 AUTO button  
execution section  
buttons  
a Key delegation buttons  
Key delegation button  
(double press)  
Corresponding  
key bus  
Press DSK1 or DSK2, to select the keyer.  
Each button can be assigned to any key in  
setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control  
Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume  
2)).  
While these buttons are held down, you can  
select a key source with the cross-point  
buttons on the key bus.  
Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid  
succession changes its state so that you can  
make cross-point selections on the  
corresponding key bus in the PGM/PST  
bank.  
b)  
[DSK2]  
key 2  
a) The key bus selection button [KEY3] in the P/P  
cross-point control block goes off.  
b) The key bus selection button [KEY4] in the P/P  
cross-point control block goes off.  
b Independent key transition  
execution section  
DSK1 ON, DSK2 ON buttons: Press these  
to cut in the corresponding downstream  
key 1 or 2. When the key is already  
inserted, pressing the button cuts it out.  
Each button lights red when the  
corresponding key is inserted in the  
program output (final output from the  
Key delegation button  
(double press)  
Corresponding  
key bus  
a)  
[DSK1]  
key 1  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
308  
   
switcher), and lights amber at other  
times.  
g Preview selection buttons  
Press one of these buttons to select a signal  
on the edit preview bus. Each button can be  
assigned to any preview output in setup (see  
Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)).  
PST (preset): When this button is pressed,  
the signal selected on the background B  
row of the PGM/PST bank is selected  
on the edit preview bus.  
AUTO TRANS buttons: The left button  
applies to DSK1 and the right button to  
DSK2; press these buttons to carry out  
an auto transition. The transition  
immediately starts, and the button  
lights amber. When the transition  
completes, the button goes off.  
c K-SS (key snapshot) button  
M/E 1 to M/E 3, P/P (M/E1 to M/E 3, P/P  
preview): The preview signal (M/E-1  
PVW, M/E-2 PVW, M/E-3 PVW, P/P  
PVW) of the M/E or PGM/PST bank  
corresponding to the pressed button is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
M/E1 K to M/E3 K, P/P K (M/E1 to M/E  
3, P/P key preview): The key preview  
signal (M/E-1 K-PVW, M/E-2 K-  
PVW, M/E-3 K-PVW, P/P K-PVW) of  
the M/E or PGM/PST bank  
corresponding to the pressed button is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
DME V (DME monitor video): When this  
button is pressed, the DME monitor  
output video signal (DME MON V) is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
Pressing this button, turning it on, enables  
the key snapshot mode. In this mode, you  
can save and recall key snapshots.  
d Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
Each column of two buttons relates to the  
corresponding downstream key 1 or 2. The  
upper button displays the name of the key  
fill signal selected for the key, and the  
lower button shows the transition rate.  
In key snapshot mode, these buttons  
correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the keyer  
selected with the key delegation buttons,  
and pressing a button recalls the key  
snapshot. To save a key snapshot, hold  
down the [STORE] button in the numeric  
keypad control block, and press the button  
for the desired register.  
DME K (DME monitor key): When this  
button is pressed, the DME monitor  
output key signal (DME MON K) is  
selected on the edit preview bus.  
e FTB (fade to black) button  
Press this button to fade to black the  
program output of the PGM/PST bank, at  
the set transition rate. You can set the fade  
to black transition rate in the menu.  
f AUTO button  
When this button is pressed, the M/E or  
PGM/PST bank preview signal selected on  
the edit preview bus is automatically  
switched to the program signal depending  
on the on-air status.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transition Control Block (Compact Type)  
The compact version of the transition  
control block shown in the following figure  
has fewer buttons than the standard type.  
Independent key transition operations can  
also be controlled with the compact  
transition control block.  
7 PRIOR SET button  
1 Next transition selection buttons  
6 Key status display  
2 Transition type selection buttons  
8 Independent key transition  
execution section  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
KEY1  
TRANS  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
KEY  
PRIOR  
SUPER  
MIX  
MIX  
PST  
NAM  
KEY2  
TRANS  
COLOR  
MIX  
ALL  
WIPE  
DME  
KEY3  
TRANS  
PRIOR  
SET  
NORM  
/REV  
TRANS  
PVW  
NORM  
REV  
KEY4  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
CUT  
5 TRANS PVW button  
3 Transition execution section  
4 Wipe direction selection buttons  
a Next transition selection buttons  
Press these buttons, turning them on, to  
determine what the next transition will  
apply to.  
KEY1 to KEY4 (DSK1 to DSK4 in the  
PGM/PST bank): Press this button,  
turning it on, to make the next  
transition insert or remove the  
BKGD: Next transition changes the  
background.  
corresponding key (keys 1 to 4). If a  
key is currently inserted it will be  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
removed, and if it is not currently  
inserted, it will be inserted.  
half of the transition as the new video is  
mixed while increasing progressively  
to 100%. The current video is then  
progressively reduced from 100% to  
zero in the second half while the new  
video is maintained at 100%.  
In the PGM/PST bank, this inserts or  
removes downstream keys 1 to 4.  
KEY PRIOR (priority): When this button  
is lit, the setting of the key priority after  
the next transition is enabled. The key  
priority after the next transition appears  
in the key status display.  
ALL: Pressing this button turns on a  
preselected set of the [BKGD], [KEY1]  
to [KEY4], and [KEY PRIOR] buttons.  
Make this setting in a Setup menu.  
PST (preset) COLOR MIX: In the first  
transition, the current video is replaced  
by the color matte in a mix (dissolve),  
then in the second transition the color  
matte is replaced by the new video also  
in a mix (dissolve).  
WIPE: The current video is replaced by the  
new video, using the wipe pattern  
selected in the Wipe menu.  
DME: A wipe type of transition is carried  
out, using the DME effect selected in  
the DME Wipe menu.  
FM1&2ClIP,FM3&4ClIP,FM5&6ClIP,  
FM7&8ClIP: A recorded clip is  
played back together with the  
b Transition type selection buttons  
You can assign these buttons in setup to any  
transition type (see “Overall Control Panel  
Settings (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2)).  
Press one of these buttons, turning it on, to  
determine the type of the next transition.  
When multi-program mode is selected in  
the Setup menu (see “Settings for Switcher  
Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2)), two or more of the  
following buttons may light.  
transition. At this point, you can also  
carry out a transition (wipe or mix  
(dissolve)) simultaneously together  
with the clip.  
MIX: In a background transition, the new  
video fades in as the current video  
fades out. During the transition, the  
overall signal level is maintained at  
100%.  
c Transition execution section  
Transition indicator: This comprises  
multiple LEDs, which show the  
progress of the transition.  
Fader lever: Move this to carry out a  
manual transition.  
Transition rate display: This shows the  
“transition rate” (the time from the  
beginning of a transition to its  
completion) set for an auto transition,  
in frames.  
In a key transition, the key fades in (for  
insertion) or out (for removal).  
NAM (non-additive mix): The current and  
new video signals are compared, and  
the signal with the higher luminance  
level is given priority in the output.  
The current video is maintained at  
100% output for the first half of the  
transition as the new video increases  
progressively to 100%, then the current  
video is progressively reduced from  
100% to zero in the second half while  
the new video is maintained at 100%.  
SUPER MIX: The current video is  
maintained at 100% output for the first  
You can set the transition rate using the  
numeric keypad control block, Flexi  
Pad control block, or menu.  
AUTO TRANS (transition) button:  
Pressing this button carries out an auto  
transition of the set transition rate  
(duration). The transition starts  
immediately, and the button lights  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
amber. When the transition completes,  
the button goes off.  
CUT button: Pressing this button carries  
out the transition as a cut (i.e.  
instantaneously).  
• When the transition completes, the  
system returns to the normal mode.  
• The transition preview mode is  
maintained while this button is pressed.  
• Switching is made between the transition  
preview mode and normal mode every  
time this button is pressed.  
d Wipe direction selection buttons  
When you have selected a wipe or DME  
wipe as the transition type, press one of  
these buttons, turning it on, to select the  
wipe direction.  
NORM (normal): The wipe proceeds in  
the direction from black to white as  
shown on the pattern in the lists of  
patterns (see “Wipe Pattern List”  
(page 560) and “DME Wipe Pattern  
List” (page 566) in Appendix (Volume  
1)), or in the direction of the arrow.  
When the VTR/disk recorder operation  
mode is enabled in setup, pressing this  
button plays the tape.  
f Key status display  
For each of keys 1 to 4, the corresponding  
ON indicator lights when the key is  
inserted. It also shows the priority (1 to 4)  
of each key.  
g PRIOR (priority) SET button  
While this button is held down, you can set  
the key priority.  
The setting mode when this button is  
pressed depends on whether or not the  
[KEY PRIOR] button is lit, as follows.  
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is off, the  
current key priority is set.  
• When the [KEY PRIOR] button is lit, the  
key priority after the next transition is set.  
Press the [KEY PRIOR] button as required,  
to switch between these two modes.  
In either mode, hold down the [PRIOR  
SET] button, and press the button ([KEY1]  
to [KEY4]) corresponding to the key you  
want to bring to the front.  
REV (reverse): The wipe proceeds in the  
opposite direction to that when the  
[NORM] button is pressed.  
When the VTR/disk recorder operation  
mode is enabled in setup, pressing this  
button cues the tape automatically to  
the start point.  
NORM/REV (normal/reverse): The wipe  
direction alternates between normal  
and reverse every time a transition is  
executed.  
h Independent key transition  
execution section  
When the VTR/disk recorder operation  
mode is enabled in setup, pressing this  
button stops the tape.  
KEY1 TRANS (transition) to KEY4  
TRANS (DSK1 TRANS to DSK4  
TRANS in the PGM/PST block)  
buttons: Press the corresponding one  
of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in  
or out automatically at the set transition  
rate. When the key corresponding to  
the button appears in the final program  
output, the button lights red, and  
otherwise lights amber. During a  
transition, the button lights green.  
e TRANS PVW (transition preview)  
button  
When this button is lit, you can check in  
advance the video changes during the  
transition, on the preview output from the  
M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
During the preview, you can use the fader  
lever, [AUTO TRANS] button, and [CUT]  
button. One of the following functions of  
this button can be selected in a Setup menu.  
Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Basic Menu Operations  
Menu Organization  
Operations on the MVS-8000 switcher  
system make frequent use of menu  
operations.  
This section describes the menus and their  
interrelationships.  
Overview  
All detailed settings for basic operations  
such as transitions, keys, DME, or wipes,  
are made in menus. There are also menus  
for carrying out general system control,  
managing setting data, and initial setup.  
To display the top menu  
In the same way as for the top menu  
selection buttons in the menu control block,  
press each button to display the particular  
top menu in the menu display.  
About the Top Menu List  
The top menu list button is the same as the  
default layout of the top menu selection  
buttons. However, even if the assignment of  
the top menu selection buttons is changed,  
this does not affect the top menu list.  
When the control panel is powered on, the  
top menu list appears as shown below.  
You can also display this by selecting VF1  
‘Top Menu List’ after pressing the [HOME]  
button at the upper left in the top menu  
selection button area of the menu control  
block.  
To shut down the menus  
Press the [Shutdown] button at the lower  
right.  
This operation is the same as the shut down  
operation in the top menu window.  
For details, “Shutting down the menus”  
(page 333).  
Basic Menu Operations 313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Accessing Menus  
You can use any of the following methods  
to access a menu, and the initially displayed  
menu page depends on the method used.  
• Pressing a top menu selection button in  
the menu control block.  
This displays the page you last accessed  
in the particular menu. After initially  
powering on the system, however, the  
page of VF1 - HF1 of the particular menu  
is always selected.  
• Pressing a button other than a top menu  
button twice in rapid succession (see  
page 316).  
Depending on the button, this may  
display a fixed page or the page selected  
last time you accessed the menu.  
• Press the menu page selection button at  
the top left of the menu display.  
The top menu window appears; press the  
top menu selection button for the  
particular menu, or enter the menu  
number with the numeric keypad, and  
press the Enter button.  
For details of the VF buttons and HF  
buttons, see “Interpreting the Menu  
Screen” (page 322).  
Basic Menu Operations  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menus accessed from a top menu selection button  
Buttons  
Menus  
Function  
See  
HOME  
Home  
Recalling menus using the top  
menu list or shortcut menu  
Top menu list: page 313  
Shortcut menu: page 335  
M/E 1  
M/E 2  
M/E 3  
P/P  
M/E-1  
Transition, keys, and wipe  
settings for the M/E-1 bank  
page 348 (transitions), page  
378 (keys), page 438 (wipes)  
M/E-2  
Transition, keys, and wipe  
settings for the M/E-2 bank  
M/E-3  
Transition, keys, and wipe  
settings for the M/E-3 bank  
PGM/PST  
Transition, downstream key, and  
wipe settings for the PGM/PST  
bank  
FRAME  
MEM  
Frame Memory  
Color Bkgd  
Frame memory settings  
page 490  
page 538  
COLOR  
BKGD  
Color background settings  
AUX/MON Aux/Mon  
AUX bus settings  
page 555  
CCR  
CCR  
Color corrector settings  
Copy and swap settings  
Chapter 19 (Volume2)  
page 544  
COPY  
SWAP  
Copy/Swap  
MISC  
Misc  
Safe title settings  
page 548  
STATS  
DME  
Status  
Status display  
Chapter 11 (Volume2)  
Chapter 11 (Volume 2)  
Chapter 11 (Volume 2)  
Chapter 12 (Volume 2)  
DME  
DME special effect settings  
Global effect settings  
GLB EFF  
DEV  
Global Effect  
Device  
Settings for external device  
operation  
MCRO  
Macro  
Macro register settings  
Keyframe settings  
Chapter 18 (Volume 2)  
Chapter 13 (Volume 2)  
KEY  
Key Frame  
FRAME  
EFF  
Effect  
Keyframe effect register settings Chapter 13 (Volume 2)  
SNAP  
SHOT  
Snapshot  
Snapshot register settings  
Chapter 14 (Volume 2)  
SHOTBOX Shotbox  
Shotbox register settings  
File settings  
Chapter 15 (Volume 2)  
Chapter 17 (Volume 2)  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2)  
FILE  
File  
ENG  
Engineering Setup  
Setup functions  
SETUP  
DIAG  
Diagnosis  
Status information display  
Chapter 20 (Volume 2)  
Basic Menu Operations 315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menus accessed by pressing a button twice  
For relevant buttons other than the top  
menu selection buttons, pressing twice in  
rapid succession directly recalls a related  
menu page. The following table lists these  
buttons of each control block, together with  
the menus they recall. (XX represents the  
HF menu recalled last in the VF menu.)  
Cross-point control block  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
FM1 to 8 signals assigned  
buttons  
Frame Memory >Still >Recall  
page 500  
Color Bkgd1 signal assigned Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1  
button  
page 538  
Color Bkgd2 signal assigned Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd2  
button  
CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX  
CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX  
Chapter 19  
(Volume 2)  
Transition control block (standard type, compact type)  
Menus  
Buttons  
See  
a)  
a)  
a)  
a)  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX  
page 378  
KEY1 (DSK1)  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX  
KEY2 (DSK2)  
KEY3 (DSK3)  
KEY4 (DSK4)  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX  
WIPE  
DME  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition  
page 438  
page 467  
page 349  
SUPER MIX  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Transition  
page 350  
page 524  
PST COLOR MIX  
FM1&2 CLIP,  
FM3&4 CLIP,  
FM5&6 CLIP,  
FM7&8 CLIP  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Clip Transition  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Key Priority  
page 345  
page 346  
page 455  
PRIOR SET  
KEY PRIOR  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Misc >Next Key Priority  
WIPE (Independent key  
transition type selection  
button (standard type))  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
Basic Menu Operations  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Transition control block (standard type, compact type)  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
DME (Independent key  
transition type selection  
button (standard type))  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe page 477  
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe  
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select  
K-SS STORE  
Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX  
Chapter 14  
(Volume 2)  
a) Including the key delegation buttons of the transition control block (standard type).  
a)  
Independent key transition control block (simple type)  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
WIPE  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
page 455  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
DME  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe page 477  
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe  
Adjust >1ch Pattern Select  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >XX  
page 378  
SHIFT  
a) The menu to be recalled depends on the setup of the key assignment.  
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)  
Buttons  
WIPE  
Menus  
See  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern  
M/E-1, 2, 3, PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX  
Snapshot >Snapshot >XX  
page 438  
page 467  
DME  
SNAPSHOT  
Chapter 14  
(Volume 2)  
EFF  
Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX  
Chapter 13  
(Volume 2)  
SHOTBOX  
MCRO  
Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall  
Macro >Register >XX  
Chapter 15  
(Volume 2)  
Chapter 18  
(Volume 2)  
Basic Menu Operations 317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a)  
Key control block  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
KEY1  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX  
page 378  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 > Key2 > XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX  
LUM  
LIN  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type  
page 379  
CVK  
PTN  
CRK  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust page 382  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Type >Chroma Adjust  
a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E delegation buttons and key delegation buttons  
are selected in the key control block.  
Numeric keypad control block  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
b)  
EFF  
Chapter 13  
(Volume 2)  
• Effect >Effect 1-99 >XX  
c)  
• Effect >Master Timeline >Store  
b)  
SNAPSHOT  
Chapter 14  
(Volume 2)  
• Snapshot >Snapshot >XX  
c)  
• Snapshot >Master Snapshot >Store  
SHOTBOX  
MCRO  
Shotbox >Register >Store/Recall  
Chapter 15  
(Volume 2)  
Macro >Register >XX  
Misc >Transition  
Chapter 18  
(Volume 2)  
a)  
page 355  
TRANS RATE  
d)  
STORE RCALL  
Chapter 13  
Chapter 14  
(Volume 2)  
Key Frame >Region Select  
a) The menu recalled depends on which of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 banks and PGM/PST bank the  
numeric control block is delegated to.  
b) When other than [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons.  
c) When [MASTR] is selected with the region selection buttons.  
d) When the [SNAPSHOT] button or [EFF] button is set to On, or lit green.  
Basic Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
318  
a)  
Downstream key control block  
Menus  
Buttons  
See  
DSK1  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX  
page 378  
DSK2  
DSK3  
DSK4  
WIPE  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key3 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK3 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key4 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK4 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
page 455  
page 477  
DME  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Transition >DME Wipe  
Adjust >Pattern Select  
b)  
Snapshot >Key Snapshot >XX  
Chapter 14  
(Volume 2)  
K-SS STORE  
a) The menu recalled depends on which of keyers 1 to 4 the downstream key control block is  
delegated to.  
b) Recalling is possible only when the [K-SS] button is On.  
Auxiliary bus control block  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
FMS1, FMS2  
Frame Memory >Still >Freeze/Store  
Frame Memory >Still >Recall  
page 496  
page 500  
FM1 to 8 signals assigned  
buttons  
Color Bkgd1 signal assigned Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd1  
button  
page 538  
Color Bkgd2 signal assigned Color Bkgd >Color Bkgd2  
button  
CCR1 signal assigned button CCR >CCR1 >XX  
CCR2 signal assigned button CCR >CCR2 >XX  
Chapter 19  
(Volume 2)  
Device control block (trackball or joystick)  
Menus  
Buttons  
See  
a)  
DME >XX  
Chapter 11  
(Volume 2)  
DME1 to DME8  
b)  
DEV1 to DEV12 assigned  
buttons  
Chapter 12  
(Volume 2)  
• Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play  
c)  
• Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline  
Basic Menu Operations 319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device control block (trackball or joystick)  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP  
assigned buttons  
Frame Memory >Clip >Recall  
–
d)  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2, 3, 4 >Processed Key  
page 419  
K1 to K4  
a) When the three-dimensional transformation operation mode is enabled.  
b) When the [MENU] button is Off.  
c) When the [MENU] button is On.  
d) For the MVS-8000G in resizer control mode  
Device control block (search dial)  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
a)  
DEV1 to DEV12  
Chapter 12  
(Volume 2)  
• Device >DDR/VTR >Cueup & Play  
b)  
• Device >DDR/VTR >Timeline  
FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP  
assigned buttons  
Frame Memory >Clip >Recall  
–
a) When the [TIMELINE] button is Off.  
b) When the [TIMELINE] button is On.  
Downstream key/fade-to-black control block  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
a)  
DSK1, DSK2  
Chapter 16  
(Volume 2)  
• PGM/PST >DSK1, 2 >XX  
a) When a key other than DSK1 or DSK2 is assigned, the menu for the corresponding key appears.  
Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block (simple type)  
Buttons  
Menus  
See  
KEY1 (DSK1)  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key1 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK1 >XX  
page 378  
KEY2 (DSK2)  
WIPE  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Key2 >XX  
• PGM/PST >DSK2 >XX  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >Wipe >Main Pattern  
• PGM/PST >Wipe >Main Pattern  
page 438  
page 467  
DME  
• M/E-1, 2, 3 >DME Wipe >XX  
• PGM/PST >DME Wipe >XX  
SNAPSHOT  
Snapshot >Snapshot >XX  
Chapter 14  
(Volume 2)  
a)  
Macro >Register >XX  
Chapter 18  
(Volume 2)  
MCRO  
a) When the button is assigned to macro function in the Setup menu.  
Basic Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
320  
Displaying a Menu  
To display, for example, the M/E-1 >Key1  
>Type menu, use either of the following  
operations.  
the page number of the M/E-1 >Key1  
>Type menu, which is 1111, and press  
the [Enter] button.  
• Press the top menu selection button [M/E  
1], then press the VF1 ‘Key1’ button and  
the HF1 ‘Type’ button in that order.  
• Press the menu page number button in the  
upper left corner of the menu screen to  
display the top menu window, then enter  
For details of the menu page numbers, see  
the appendix “Menu Tree” (Volume 2).  
The M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu appears in  
the menu display as follows.  
5 Status area  
qs b (previous) button and B (next)  
button  
6 Function button area  
2 Menu page number button  
7 Parameter group button  
1 Menu title button  
0 Keyframe status  
qa Default recall button  
3 VF buttons  
4 HF buttons  
8 Knob  
parameter  
buttons  
9 Previous page button  
M/E-1 >Key1 >Type menu  
Basic Menu Operations 321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Depending on the selected item, the menu  
screen contents including the HF button  
indications change.  
Interpreting the Menu  
Screen  
d HF buttons  
The menu screen consists of the following  
principal parts.  
When buttons on the screen are lit or  
represented in a depressed state, this  
indicates that the corresponding item or  
function is selected (set on).  
These indicate the items within the menu.  
Depending on the selected item, the menu  
indications change.  
Depending on the function, if any one is on,  
the status is shown by an orange bar, as in  
the following figure.  
a Menu title button  
This shows the title of the menu screen.  
You can set different colors for the main  
menu site and subsidiary menu site (see  
page 335).  
e Status area  
b Menu page number button  
This shows the menu screen page number.  
When you press this button, the top menu  
window (see page 332) appears. You can  
enter the page number for the desired menu,  
or press one of the top menu selection  
buttons in the window, to display that  
menu.  
This shows the status of the settings items  
controlled by the selected menu.  
An orange frame appears around the  
parameter area relating to the displayed  
menu. For each of the twelve areas,  
pressing the display jumps to the related  
menu.  
While the system is accessing the hard disk,  
the indicator lights red.  
f Function button area  
This shows the functions which can be  
operated in the currently selected menu by  
means of buttons.  
Indicator for frame  
memory external hard disk  
Each function button corresponds to a  
function which can be set in the currently  
selected menu. Press it to enable the  
function, to display a parameter group and  
adjust the parameters with the knobs, or to  
execute the function.  
Indicator for internal hard  
disk  
Note  
These buttons are in groups by function. In  
the screen example shown on the previous  
page, the [Key Bus] and [Matte] function  
buttons constitute the <Key Fill> group.  
When the indicator is lit, do not power off  
the switcher, or disconnect the IEEE1394  
cable 1).  
1) When an external hard disk drive is connected  
g Parameter group button  
c VF buttons  
These indicate the larger subdivisions of  
this menu.  
This displays parameter group names for  
which the knobs can make adjustments, the  
current parameter setting page number, and  
Basic Menu Operations  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
the total number of the parameter setting  
pages. (Example: Color Vector 1/2)  
When there are more than five parameters  
within the same parameter group, press this  
button to display the sixth and subsequent  
parameters, which can then be controlled  
by the knobs.  
“Menus allowing a return to default  
settings” (page 325).)  
Press this button, turning it on, then press a  
VF button or knob parameter button to  
return the settings to their default values, in  
the following groupings.  
• Function grouping: the functions within  
an HF menu under the VF button  
• Knob parameters (parameters currently  
controlled by the knobs)  
h Knob parameter buttons  
These show the parameters currently  
controlled by the knobs and their values.  
Pressing one of these buttons displays the  
numeric keypad window (see page 330),  
and you can then enter a new value for the  
corresponding parameter with the numeric  
keypad.  
l b (previous) button and B (next)  
button  
The b button returns to the previous menu.  
Press the B button to continue to the next  
menu.  
i Previous page button  
This shows the page number of the  
previously displayed menu screen. Press it  
to go back to that page. When the indication  
[Parent] appears, this displays the parent  
directory.  
Menu Operations  
Selecting an item  
1
Press the VF button (1 to 7) for the  
desired group of items.  
j Keyframe status  
This shows the keyframe status of the  
reference region. Pressing this button  
switches the menu screen as follows.  
When a menu other than the Key Frame  
menu is currently shown: The menu  
screen switches to the Key Frame  
menu.  
The HF button (1 to 7) indications  
change to show the items within the  
selected group.  
2
Press the HF button for the desired  
item.  
When the Key Frame menu is currently  
shown: The menu screen switches to  
the menu that was on the screen  
immediately before the Key Frame  
menu.  
The indications in the status area and  
function button area change, and you  
can now make various changes to the  
selected item.  
In some parts of menus such as the File  
menu, this functions as a “Region selection  
area,” for selecting the region to which  
operations apply.  
Selecting a function  
Press the appropriate function button within  
the function button area.  
Shape and color of the button  
Pressing the button turns it on, and it lights,  
showing the state.  
k Default recall button  
This only appears in those menus for which  
the default recall function is available. (See  
Basic Menu Operations 323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setting parameters  
Lit pale blue: The function is enabled, and  
the parameters can currently be  
This marking on a function button indicates  
that there are parameters which can be  
adjusted with the knobs.  
Pressing this function button assigns  
parameters to the knobs.  
adjusted with the knobs.  
Lit orange: The function is enabled.  
Lit purple: Execution button. Pressing the  
button immediately executes the  
function. (Example: [Auto Start]  
button in the Chroma Adjust menu)  
You can set the parameter values by either  
of the following methods.  
• Turn the knob (1 to 5) corresponding to  
the parameter, to adjust the value.  
• Press the knob parameter buttons (1 to 5)  
corresponding to the parameter. This  
displays the numeric keypad window  
allowing you to enter the desired value.  
Pressing a button of this type displays a  
further menu, allowing more detailed  
settings. (Example: [Chroma Adjust]  
button in the Type menu)  
In the description of specific setting  
procedures, the knob adjustment is  
described, as follows.  
Example: When wipe pattern key is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Key density  
Soft  
Density  
When the [MENU] button in the device  
control block is lit, you can use the trackball  
and Z-ring to control the parameters.  
• Move the trackball on the x-axis to  
control the parameter for knob 1 or on the  
y-axis to control the parameter for knob  
2. Moving up or to the right increases the  
parameter value, and moving down or to  
the left decreases the parameter value.  
• Use the Z-ring to adjust the parameter for  
knob 3. Turning clockwise increases the  
parameter value, and turning  
Going back to the previous menu  
To return to the last displayed menu, press  
the previous page button.  
Returning to default state in function  
groupings  
1
Press the [Default Recall] button,  
turning it on.  
This enters the menu default recall  
mode.  
counterclockwise decreases the  
parameter value.  
2
Press the VF button you want to return  
to the default state.  
Basic Menu Operations  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This returns the settings within the  
function grouping to the default state,  
and the [Default Recall] button goes  
off.  
2
Press the knob parameter button you  
want to return to the default state.  
This returns the knob parameter value  
to the default state, and the [Default  
Recall] button goes off.  
Note  
The default state of the settings depends on  
the setting of the initial status mode, set in  
the Setup menu of system setup, as follows.  
User: The state when [Initial Status Define]  
is executed.  
Notes  
• In the following table, “Menus allowing a  
return to default settings,” the default  
recall function does not apply to some  
knob parameters. For details, see the  
table, “Knob parameters subject to  
restriction on default recall” on page 328.  
• The default recall function does not  
return the horizontal (H) and vertical (V)  
position settings to their default state  
individually. Returning the horizontal  
(H) position to its default state also  
returns the vertical (V) position to its  
default state automatically, and vice  
versa. For details, see the table, “Knob  
parameters subject to restriction on  
default recall” on page 328.  
Factory: Factory default settings  
Returning knob parameters to  
default state  
1
Press the [Default Recall] button,  
turning it on.  
This enters the menu default recall  
mode.  
Menus allowing a return to default settings  
Top menu selection button VF number  
Menu number  
Menu name  
name  
(HF number)  
a)  
M/E1  
VF1  
1110-series  
1120-series  
1130-series  
1140-series  
1150-series  
1160-series  
1170-series  
Key1  
a)  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
Key2  
a)  
Key3  
a)  
Key4  
a)  
Wipe  
a)  
DME Wipe  
a)  
Misc  
Basic Menu Operations 325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Top menu selection button VF number  
Menu number  
Menu name  
name  
(HF number)  
a)  
M/E2  
VF1  
1210-series  
1220-series  
1230-series  
1240-series  
1250-series  
1260-series  
1270-series  
1310-series  
1320-series  
1330-series  
1340-series  
1350-series  
1360-series  
1370-series  
1410-series  
1420-series  
1430-series  
1440-series  
1450-series  
1460-series  
1470-series  
2210  
Key1  
a)  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
VF1  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
VF1  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
VF1  
VF2  
VF1  
VF2  
VF1  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF1  
Key2  
a)  
Key3  
a)  
Key4  
a)  
Wipe  
a)  
DME Wipe  
a)  
Misc  
a)  
M/E3  
Key1  
a)  
Key2  
a)  
Key3  
a)  
Key4  
a)  
Wipe  
a)  
DME Wipe  
a)  
Misc  
a)  
P/P  
DSK1  
a)  
DSK2  
a)  
DSK3  
a)  
DSK4  
a)  
Wipe  
a)  
DME Wipe  
a)  
Misc  
a)  
a)  
COLOR BKGD  
CCR  
Color Bkgd 1  
Color Bkgd 2  
2220  
a)  
2410-series  
2420-series  
2510-series  
2520-series  
2530-series  
2540-series  
2550-series  
2311  
CCR1  
a)  
CCR2  
b)  
FRAME MEM  
Still  
b)  
Clip  
b)  
Reposition/Lock  
b)  
File  
b)  
Folder  
b)  
AUX/MON  
Aux Bus  
Basic Menu Operations  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Top menu selection button VF number  
Menu number  
Menu name  
name  
(HF number)  
b)  
DME  
VF1  
4110-series  
4120-series  
4131  
Edge  
b)  
VF2  
VF3  
VF4  
VF5  
VF6  
VF7  
Video Modify  
b)  
Freeze  
b)  
4141  
Non-Linear  
b)  
4150-series  
4160-series  
4170-series  
Light/Trail  
b)  
Input/Output  
Enhanced Video  
b)  
Modify  
b)  
GLB EFF  
VF1  
4210-series  
4220-series  
6113  
Ch1–Ch4  
b)  
VF2  
Ch5–Ch8  
b)  
KEY FRAME  
(HF3)  
Path  
a) Menu to return to the default settings for particular functions or for particular knob parameters  
(for the relevant knob parameters, see page 327)  
b) Menu to return to the default settings for particular knob parameters (for the relevant knob  
parameters, see page 327)  
Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply  
a)  
Menu name  
Button name  
Knob  
Parameter  
Menu number  
1111  
Type  
[Luminance] and [Linear] in  
<Key Type> group  
4
Filter  
[Color Vector] in <Key Type>  
group  
1
2
Y Filter,  
C Filter  
(Parameter  
group [2/2])  
1111.1  
1112.1  
1113  
Type >CRK Adjust [Key Active]  
[Color Cancel] in <Color  
5
5
Filter  
Filter  
Cancel> group  
Edge >Matte  
[Mix Color] in <Edge Matte>  
group  
5
Pattern  
[Multi]  
3
5
3
Invert Type  
Pattern  
Main Mask  
[Pattern]  
[Multi]  
Invert Type  
Basic Menu Operations 327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply  
a)  
Menu name  
Button name  
Knob  
Parameter  
Menu number  
1116  
Transition  
[Wipe] in <ON Transition Type>  
group  
1
Transition  
Rate  
5
1
Pattern  
[Wipe] in <OFF Transition Type>  
group  
Transition  
Rate  
5
1
Pattern  
[Key Blink] and [Edge Blink] in  
<Blink> group  
Blink Rate  
[Mix] in <Transition Type> group  
1
1
Transition  
Type  
[Wipe] in <Transition Type>  
group  
Transition  
Rate  
5
3
1
4
Pattern  
1116.1  
Transition >  
Wipe Adjust  
[Multi]  
Invert Type  
Width  
[H] and [V] in <Pairing> group  
[H], [V], and [Fringe] in  
<Modulation> group  
Shape  
1154  
Edge/Direction  
[Split] in <Edge> group  
1
3
Split No  
Pattern  
1154.1  
Edge/Direction >  
Matte Adjust  
[Mix Color] in <Edge Matte>  
group  
[Multi]  
3
1
4
Invert Type  
Width  
1155  
Main Modify  
[H] and [V] in <Pairing> group  
[H], [V], and [Fringe] in  
<Modulation> group  
Shape  
1164  
1171  
Edge/Direction  
Transition  
[Independent Trans Rate] in  
<Pattern Limit Release> group  
1
1
Transition  
Rate  
[Mix], [Nam], [Super Mix],  
[Preset Color Mix], [Wipe], [DME  
Wipe], and [FTB] in <Transition  
Type> group  
Transition  
Rate  
a) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M/E-1: the same applies for M/E-2,  
M/E-3, and P/P. Also, content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2, Key3, and Key4.  
Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall  
Menu number Menu name  
Button name  
Knob  
Parameter  
a)  
Type >CRK Adjust [Sample Mark] in the <Auto> group  
1
2
Position H  
Position V  
1111.1  
1112.1  
a)  
Edge >Matte  
Adjust  
[Position]  
a)  
Main Mask  
[Position]  
[Position]  
1113  
a)  
Transition >Wipe  
Adjust  
1116.1  
Basic Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
328  
 
Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall  
Menu number Menu name  
Button name  
Knob  
Parameter  
a)  
Transition >DME  
Wipe Adjust  
[Position]  
1
2
H
V
1116.3  
a)  
Edge Direction  
>Matte Adjust  
[Position]  
1
2
Position H  
Position V  
1154.1  
a)  
Main Modify  
[Position] in the <Position> group  
[Position]  
1155  
a)  
a)  
Main Modify  
>Multi Adjust  
1155.1  
a)  
Sub Modify  
[Position] in the <Position> group  
1156  
Sub Modify >Multi [Position]  
Adjust  
1156.1  
2122.2  
Composite  
[Position]  
1
2
Position H  
Position V  
>Pattern Adjust  
2131  
Reposition  
[Normal]  
[Black&White]  
[Position]  
b)  
2210  
Color Bkgd1  
c)  
Primary CCR  
[Position]  
2412.1  
d)  
>Mask1 Adjust  
4116  
4127  
DME >Edge  
>Wipe Crop  
[Position/Size]  
[Position/Size]  
5
Pattern  
DME >Video  
Modify >Mask  
a) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M/E-1: the same applies to M/E-2,  
M/E-3, and P/P. Equally, content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2, Key3, and Key4.  
b) The same applies to Color Bkgd2.  
c) The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for CCR1: the same applies to CCR2.  
d) The sample applies to Mask2 Adjust.  
Basic Menu Operations 329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can enter a timecode value in the range  
that depends on the signal format (see page  
189) as follows:  
Numeric keypad window  
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:nn,  
where nn = (number of frames per  
second) – 1.  
1 Item display  
2 Max./min. value indication  
3 Input value  
f
– (minus) button  
This toggles the sign of the entered value.  
When it is pressed, the value is negative.  
4 Close button  
5 TC (timecode)  
g Clear button  
button  
This clears the input. It does not change the  
parameter setting.  
6 – (minus)  
button  
7 Clear button  
h Trim button  
8 Trim button  
After entering the difference from the  
current value, press this button to confirm  
the numeric input.  
9 Enter button  
i Enter button  
This confirms the entered value.  
If correctly set, the numeric keypad  
window closes.  
a Item display  
This is the name of the parameter being set  
in the numeric keypad window.  
If not correctly set, the input display  
changes color.  
b Max./min. (maximum/minimum)  
value indication  
This shows the maximum and minimum  
settings of the parameter.  
c Input value  
This is the value being input into the  
numeric keypad window.  
d Close button  
This closes the numeric keypad window.  
e TC (timecode) button  
When the numeric keypad window is  
opened for a setting requiring a timecode  
value to be entered, this button appears in a  
depressed state.  
Basic Menu Operations  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Keyboard window  
space, \, /, :, ;, , (comma), . (dot), <, >,  
*, ?, ", |  
Note  
Except when changing source names, the  
following characters cannot be used. The  
same applies to macro file editing.  
4 BS button  
2 Input string  
1 Item display  
3 Close button  
qd Line feed  
button  
7 Space button  
0 Left button  
6 Shift button  
9 Del button  
5 Caps Lock button  
8 Clear button  
qa Right button  
qs Enter button  
a Item display  
d BS button  
This is the name of the parameter being set  
This clears the character immediately  
in the keyboard window.  
before the cursor in the input string.  
b Input string  
e Caps Lock button  
This is the character string being input in  
This enables input of capital letters only.  
the keyboard window.  
Note  
c Close button  
You can enter items to be displayed on the  
control panel LCD using lowercase letters,  
but these will be converted to capitals for  
display.  
This closes the keyboard window.  
Basic Menu Operations 331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
MS-DOS does not distinguish case in  
filenames, and therefore you are  
recommended to enter filenames in capital  
letters.  
j Left button  
This moves the cursor one character to the  
left in the input string.  
k Right button  
f Shift button  
This moves the cursor one character to the  
right in the input string.  
This selects the characters on the shift side  
of the keys. The shift is released when you  
enter a character.  
l Enter button  
This sets the input string as a parameter  
value, and closes the keyboard window if  
the value has been entered correctly. If the  
value has not been entered correctly, the  
display color changes.  
g Space button  
This enters a space character.  
h Clear button  
This clears all of the characters in the input  
string.  
m Line feed button  
After pressing the Shift button, press this  
button to feed a line. The input string shows  
“|”.  
i Del button  
This clears the character immediately after  
the cursor in the input string.  
Function of the top menu window  
1 Top menu selection buttons  
7 Shut down button  
8 Add Favorite button  
6 Close button  
2 Input display  
3 Numeric entry section  
4 Clear button  
5 Enter button  
Basic Menu Operations  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
a Top menu selection buttons  
These are the same as the top menu  
selection buttons in the menu control block.  
Pressing one of these buttons closes the top  
menu window and displays the selected  
menu in the menu display.  
Shutting down the menus  
1
In the menu screen, press the menu  
page number button to open the top  
menu window.  
Fordetails ofthe topmenuwindow, see  
“Function of the top menu window”  
(page 332).  
b Input display  
This shows the page number entered with  
the numeric entry section.  
2
3
Press [Shut down].  
c Numeric entry section  
Enter a page number.  
A confirmation message appears.  
Press [Yes].  
d Clear button  
Press this to clear the input display.  
This shuts down the menu system after  
a while, and the menu display changes  
to black. Now power off the system.  
e Enter button  
Pressing this button without entering a page  
number closes the top menu window with  
the current menu remaining in the menu  
display.  
To restart menu operations  
Power on the control panel once more.  
If you enter a page number then press this  
button, this confirms the value in the input  
display. If it is a correct page number, the  
top menu window closes, and the menu  
display shows the new menu. If it is not  
correctly set, the input display changes  
color.  
h Add Favorite button  
Pressing this button allows the currently  
displayed menu to be registered to the  
Shortcut menu.  
Registering a menu to the  
Shortcut menu  
f Close button  
1
2
In the Home >Favorites >Shortcut  
menu, select the desired group.  
Press this to close the top menu window.  
g Shut down button  
Shuts down the menus.  
Display the menu you want to register,  
and then press the [Add Favorite]  
button.  
Note  
Be sure to shut down the menus before  
powering off the control panel.  
The currently displayed menu is  
automatically registered to a blank  
button.  
Use of the color palette window  
When a parameter is assigned to the knobs  
as a combination of luminance, saturation,  
and hue, pressing a knob parameter button  
displays a color palette window.  
Basic Menu Operations 333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1Color palette  
buttons  
2Operation  
buttons  
3Color display  
4Numeric  
keypad  
a Color palette buttons  
Press one of these to enter the  
corresponding color in the display.  
By default the following settings are  
available.  
First row: white, yellow, cyan, green  
Second row: magenta, red, blue, black  
Third row: all black  
Default: If you press any color palette  
button with this button held down, the  
color palette button is set to the default  
color.  
c Color display  
This shows the setting color, and the  
parameters (LUM, SAT, and HUE).  
By adjusting the parameters with the knobs,  
you can create any color.  
b Operation buttons  
Set: If you press any color palette button  
with this button held down, the color  
shown in the color display is assigned  
to the color palette button.  
If a parameter value is outside the permitted  
range for RGB (0 to 255), the indication  
“Illegal Color” appears, and this is adjusted  
to a value in range.  
Copy: If you press a color palette button  
with this button held down, the color is  
used as the source for copying. Next  
press a different color palette button to  
copy to that button.  
Swap: If you press two color palette  
buttons in sequence with this button  
held down, the two colors are swapped.  
Cancel: Pressing this button returns to the  
state when the color palette window  
was opened.  
d Numeric keypad  
Use this to enter numeric values for  
parameters.  
For details of use, see page 330.  
Basic Menu Operations  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching Between the  
Main Menu Site and  
Subsidiary Menu Site  
For menu transitions, you can store two  
separate versions in the main and subsidiary  
menu sites.  
By switching sites, and pressing the b  
button and the B button you can trace the  
history in each menu.  
2
3
In the [Group Select] box, select the  
group.  
To switch the subsidiary menu  
site on and off  
Assign [SUB MENU SITE] to a menu  
control block top menu selection button or  
user preference button. To switch to the  
subsidiary menu site, press this button,  
turning it on.  
The group buttons appear.  
Press the button for the desired menu.  
Creating a shortcut menu  
Assign frequently used menus to buttons, to  
create a “Favorites” menu.  
For details of the assignment operation, see  
“Assigning functions to the menu control  
block Top menu and user preference  
buttons” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
To create a menu group  
1
In the Home menu, select VF2  
‘Favorites’ and HF1 ‘Shortcut.’  
The following menu appears.  
Shortcut Menu  
Recalling a menu using the  
shortcut menu  
1
In the Home menu, select VF2  
‘Favorites’ and HF1 ‘Shortcut.’  
The following menu appears.  
2
Press [Group Edit].  
The following menu appears.  
Basic Menu Operations 335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3
Press [Yes].  
This deletes the settings.  
To register a menu on a button  
You can register 15 buttons in one group.  
1
In the Home >Favorites >Shortcut  
menu, press [Button Edit].  
3
With the cursor, select the group name  
(in this case a blank button) for the  
operation.  
4
5
Press [Rename].  
A keyboard window appears.  
Enter a group name (maximum 24  
characters), and press Enter.  
Menu No.  
This confirms the group name.  
Button name  
To copy a menu group  
1
In the Home >Favorites >Group Edit  
menu, press the button for the copy  
source group.  
2
3
Move the cursor to the position where  
you want to display the button. To  
change the content of an already  
displayed button, press the button to  
select it.  
2
3
Press [Copy].  
Press the button for the copy  
destination group.  
Press [Page Set].  
4
Press [Paste].  
A page number input window appears.  
This copies the menu group settings.  
4
5
Enter the page number for the menu  
you want to register.  
To delete menu group settings  
1
2
In the Home >Favorites >Group Edit  
menu, select the group to be deleted.  
Press [Rename].  
A keyboard window appears.  
Press [Clear].  
6
Enter the button name (maximum 24  
characters).  
A confirmation message appears.  
Basic Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
336  
7
8
9
To change the button color, press  
[Color Set].  
Button color samples appear.  
Press the desired color.  
This completes the assignment of the  
menu to the button.  
Repeat steps 2 to 8 to complete the  
“Favorites” menu.  
To copy button settings  
1
In the Home >Favorites >Button Edit  
menu, press the copy source button to  
select it.  
2
3
Press [Copy].  
Press the copy destination button to  
select it.  
4
Press [Paste].  
This copies the button settings.  
To delete button settings  
In the Home >Favorites >Button Edit  
menu, press [Clear].  
This deletes the button settings.  
Note  
The shortcut menu settings are handled as  
part of the control panel setup. You can  
recall and save them in the same way as  
setup data.  
Basic Menu Operations 337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
338  
Chapter 3 Transitions  
Basic Operating Procedure ......................................................................340  
Key Priority Setting ..................................................................................343  
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block ..................343  
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation ..................................345  
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ..........................346  
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation ............................348  
Super Mix Settings ...................................................................................349  
Color Matte Settings .................................................................................350  
Executing a Transition .............................................................................351  
Transition Indicator Function ............................................................351  
Setting the Transition Rate ................................................................352  
Pattern Limit ......................................................................................355  
Executing an Auto Transition ............................................................359  
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual Transition) ..359  
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions ................................360  
Non-Sync State ..................................................................................360  
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode .......................................361  
Transition Preview ...................................................................................363  
Independent Key Transitions ..................................................................364  
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations ..................................364  
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation 365  
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate ....................................366  
Fade to Black .............................................................................................369  
Fade to Black Operation ....................................................................369  
Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate .........................................369  
Simple Transition .....................................................................................371  
Basic Operations for Simple Transitions ...........................................371  
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ..........................373  
Split Fader .........................................................................................373  
Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module ......374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Operating Procedure  
The positions of the principal buttons used for basic transition operation are as  
follows.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
KEY  
PRIOR  
SUPER  
MIX  
MIX  
PST  
NAM  
Next transition  
selection buttons  
COLOR  
MIX  
ALL  
WIPE  
DME  
PRIOR  
SET  
NORM  
/REV  
TRANS  
PVW  
NORM  
REV  
Transition type  
selection buttons  
AUTO  
TRANS  
CUT  
PTN  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
KF  
Transition execution  
section  
Transition control block (for standard transitions)  
1
2
In the cross-point control block, select the background video with the  
background A row of cross-point buttons.  
Select the way in which the transition will affect the image, using the next  
transition selection buttons in the transition control block.  
For an overview, see “Selecting the Next Transition” (page 34).  
To change the background: Press the [BKGD] button, turning it on.  
To insert or delete a key: Press one of the [KEY1] to [KEY4] buttons (or  
[DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the PGM/PST bank), turning it on.  
To enable the key priority setting, which determines the key overlay  
order after the transition: Press the [KEY PRIOR] button, turning it  
on.  
You can press more than one button at the same time.  
To change the keys and background presets in Setup menus  
simultaneously: Press the [ALL] button.  
To allocate a particular next transition button to the [ALL] button  
function, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Basic Operating Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
340  
     
3
4
For the transition to change the key priority, set the priority for after the  
transition.  
For details of the key priority, see “Selecting the key priority” (page 36).  
For details of the key priority setting operation, see “Key Priority Setting”  
(page 343).  
Select the new video used for the transition.  
• In the background B row of cross-point buttons, select the new  
background video.  
• When inserting a key, select the key signal, and make any required  
settings.  
For details of key settings, see Chapter 4 “Keys” (page 377).  
To carry out a cut transition, skip to step 7; otherwise continue to step 5.  
5
Select one of the transition type selection buttons in the transition control  
block.  
To carry out a dissolve to the new video: Press one of the [MIX],  
[NAM], [SUPER MIX], and [PST COLOR MIX] buttons, turning it  
on.  
To carry out a wipe: Press the [WIPE] or [DME] button, turning it on.  
To carry out a transition while playing back a frame memory clip:  
Press one of the buttons corresponding to the clip to be used  
(FM1&2CLIP, FM3&4CLIP, FM5&6CLIP, and FM7&8CLIP).  
You can also use the Misc >Transition menu to select a desired transition  
type for the M/E or PGM/PST bank. (See “Selecting the Transition Type  
by a Menu Operation” (page 348).)  
For an overview of the transition types, see “Transition Types” (page 41).  
Note  
The transition type selection buttons in the transition control block can be  
interchanged in the setup menu.  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
6
Make the required settings, according to the selected transition type.  
For details of the settings, see the relevant section.  
Super mix: “Super Mix Settings” (page 349)  
Preset color mix: “Color Matte Settings” (page 350)  
Wipe: “Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings” (page 438)  
Basic Operating Procedure 341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Wipe: “Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings” (page 466)  
Clip transition: “Clip Transition Operations” (page 524)  
Using the transition preview function (page 363), you can check the  
transition on the preview monitor.  
7
Carry out the transition in the transition execution section.  
For a gradual transition such as a mix (dissolve) or wipe: Press the  
[AUTO TRANS] button, or operate the fader lever.  
To execute a transition by pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button, first  
set the transition rate (specified as the duration of the transition).  
(See “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352).)  
When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type,  
you can also set the transition range. (See “Pattern Limit” (page 355).)  
For an instantaneous transition: Press the [CUT] button.  
For details, see “Executing a Transition” (page 351).  
Transition linked to the audio mixer  
If the video signal selected in the background B row is linked to the audio mixer  
in setup, then the audio mixer sound changes with the transition. That is,  
pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button gives a cross fade, and pressing the  
[CUT] button gives an instantaneous sound switch.  
For details of setup, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).  
Notes  
• The audio mixer is not linked to a snapshot or key frame transition.  
• The audio mixer is not linked to a transition using the fader lever.  
• If the bus-fixed mode (see page 45) is selected in the setup menu, and the  
fader lever is in the lowest position, there is a cross fade from the audio  
selected on the B row to the audio selected on the A row.  
• The audio mixer is not linked to a key transition.  
• In the following cases, the audio and video may be out of sync.  
– When carrying out a cross fade in some DME wipes (for example, “picture  
in picture”)  
– When executing a preset color mix in two-stroke mode  
• For details of audio mixers that can be used, Sony service or sales  
representative.  
Basic Operating Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
342  
 
Key Priority Setting  
You can select the key priority, that is, the order in which the keys are laid over  
each other, in the current video and after the transition. There are two ways of  
setting the priority: either using the [PRIOR SET] button in the transition  
control block, or using the Misc menu to access the Key Priority menu for the  
M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
Note  
When the operating mode is set to multi program, the key priority setting  
cannot be made.  
Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block  
The positions of the buttons used for the operation are as follows.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
Next transition  
selection buttons  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
KEY  
PRIOR  
SUPER  
MIX  
MIX  
PST  
NAM  
KEY PRIOR button  
COLOR  
MIX  
ALL  
WIPE  
DME  
PRIOR  
SET  
NORM  
/REV  
TRANS  
PVW  
NORM  
REV  
PRIOR SET button  
AUTO  
TRANS  
CUT  
PTN  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
KF  
Transition control block (standard type)  
Changing the currently inserted key priority  
1
If the next transition selection button [KEY PRIOR] is on, press another  
next transition selection button to turn the [KEY PRIOR] button off.  
(When the [KEY PRIOR] button is on, the transition control block  
switches to the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition.)  
Key Priority Setting 343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Holding down the [PRIOR SET] button, press the one of the next transition  
selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the  
PGM/PST bank) for the key to appear on top.  
The selected key now appears on top, on the program monitor.  
The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change.  
Key 1 selected.  
Key priority: 3, 1, 4, 2  
Key priority: 1, 3, 4, 2  
To change the priority of more than one key, repeat this operation as  
required.  
Changing the key priority for after the transition  
When executing a transition, turning on the next transition selection button  
[KEY PRIOR] causes the keys to be rearranged based on the set priority.  
To set the key priority for after the transition, use the following procedure.  
1
In the transition control block, hold down the [PRIOR SET] button and  
press the [KEY PRIOR] button to turn it on. Do not release the [PRIOR  
SET] button before advancing to step 2.  
The [KEY PRIOR] button lights green, and it becomes possible to change  
the key priority setting for after the transition.  
2
Hold down the [PRIOR SET] button, and press the one of the next  
transition selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4]  
buttons in the PGM/PST bank) for the key you want to bring to the front  
after the transition.  
To set the priority to be the same as before the transition, press the [BKGD]  
button.  
Note  
The [BKGD] button is only effective when in the mode for changing the  
key priority for after the transition.  
Key Priority Setting  
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the next transition selection button [KEY PRIOR] is on, the selected  
key appears on top on the preview monitor. The priority of keys other than  
the selected one does not change.  
3
4
To change the priority of more than one key, repeat the previous operation  
as required.  
Execute the transition.  
The keys are rearranged based on the set priority.  
Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation  
Changing the priority of the currently inserted keys  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF3 ‘Key  
Priority.’  
The Key Priority menu appears.  
2
For each of <Priority1>, <Priority2>, <Priority3>, and <Priority4>, select  
a key, to determine the key priority sequence.  
The keys are inserted in the key priority sequence with priority 1 at the  
front.  
Priority 1  
Priority 2  
1
2
3
Priority 3  
4
Priority 4  
Note  
It is not possible to select the same key for two or more priority numbers.  
The keys appear in the set order on the program monitor.  
Key Priority Setting 345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Changing the key priority for after the transition  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF4 ‘Next  
Key Priority.’  
The Next Key Priority menu appears.  
2
For each of <Priority1>, <Priority2>, <Priority3>, and <Priority4>, select  
a key, to determine the key priority sequence.  
For details of the key priority sequence, see the figure shown for step 2 in  
the previous item (see page 345).  
The keys appear in the set order on the preview monitor.  
3
Execute the transition.  
The keys are rearranged in the set order on the program monitor.  
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority  
You can check whether keys are currently output, and the key priority setting,  
using the key status display in the transition control block of the M/E or PGM/  
PST bank.  
The display is above the next transition selection buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4]  
([DSK1] to [DSK4] buttons in the PGM/PST bank).  
Display of the key output status  
When a key is included in the output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank, the  
corresponding ON indicator lights.  
Key priority display  
The key priority is indicated by numerals 1 to 4 lighting.  
The topmost key as seen on the program monitor is priority 1, and the keys  
underneath are numbered 2, 3, 4 away from the viewer (see page 345).  
To display the key priority for after the transition, press the [KEY PRIOR]  
button in the transition control block, turning it on. For keys for which the  
priority after the transition is different from the current priority, the  
corresponding numerals 1 to 4 flash. For a key with the same priority, the  
indication remains on.  
Example key status display given when the [KEY PRIOR] button is pressed:  
Current key priority: 1, 2, 3, 4  
Key Priority Setting  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key priority after the transition: 3, 2, 1, 4  
Indicators: 1, 3 (flashing), 2, 1 (flashing), 3, 4  
Lit  
Lit  
Lit  
Flashing Flashing  
Lit  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
BKGD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
Example key status display (showing the key priority after the transition)  
Key Priority Setting 347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu  
Operation  
You can also select the required transition type by a menu operation.  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1  
‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu appears.  
2
Select the required transition type in the <Transition Type> group.  
The parameter settings can now be adjusted with the knobs according to  
the selected transition type.  
For details, see the following.  
• “Super Mix Settings” (page 349)  
• “Color Matte Settings” (page 350)  
• “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352)  
Note  
When multi-program mode is selected in the Setup menu (see “Settings for  
Switcher Configuration (Config Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), there  
may be cases in which two or more transition types have been selected.  
Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
348  
     
Super Mix Settings  
For an overview of the super mix, see page 42.  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1  
‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu appears.  
2
3
Select [Super Mix] in the <Transition Type> group.  
Turn the knobs to adjust the output levels.  
Knob  
Parameter  
A Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00%  
0.00 to 100.00%  
2
3
Background A output level  
Background B output level  
B Gain  
Super Mix Settings 349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Color Matte Settings  
To set the color matte of a preset color mix, use the following procedure.  
For an overview of the preset color mix, see page 42.  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1  
‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu appears.  
2
3
Select [Preset Color Mix] in the <Transition Type> group.  
In the <Preset Color Mix Fill> group, select one of the following.  
Flat Color: monochrome color matte  
Utility 2 Bus: signal selected on the utility 2 bus  
Note  
The utility 2 bus cannot be selected on the MVS-8000.  
4
When “Flat Color” is selected, turn the knobs to adjust the color matte.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
2
3
4
Color Matte Settings  
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Executing a Transition  
There are two ways of executing a transition: as an auto transition by a button  
operation, and as a manual transition using the fader lever. You can also use a  
combination of these two modes.  
For an overview of the auto transitions and manual transitions, see “Executing  
a Transition” (page 44).  
Transition Indicator Function  
In each of the M/E banks and PGM/PST bank, to the left of the fader lever is a  
transition indicator composed of multiple LEDs. This indicator shows the state  
of the transition, whether auto or manual, by which LEDs are lit.  
Lit  
Transition indicator  
For example, in the previous illustration, it can be seen that the transition is  
more than half completed.  
When the transition is completed, all of the LEDs go off.  
Executing a Transition 351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setting the Transition Rate  
There are two ways of setting the transition rate: using the Flexi Pad control  
block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value, or using the  
Misc menu to access the Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
You can also display the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and  
fade-to-black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and  
change the settings. (See “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing  
the Settings” (page 553).)  
Note  
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, it is not possible to set  
the transition rate.  
Frame input mode and timecode input mode  
For numeric input of the transition rate value, there are two modes: frame input  
mode and timecode input mode. You select one of these modes using either the  
Flexi Pad control block (page 353) or the numeric keypad control block (page  
354).  
Frame input mode: The entered value is a number of frames.  
Example: Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 123 frames  
Timecode input mode: The entered value is a timecode value.  
Example: Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 1 second 23 frames.  
Note  
Whereas you can enter a value of up to 999 in frame input mode, a value not  
smaller than 10 seconds cannot be entered in timecode input mode.  
Frame display mode and timecode display mode  
For the transition rate display in the transition control block, there are two  
modes: frame display mode and timecode display mode. You can select one of  
these modes in setup. (See “Operation Settings” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
Note  
The setting is common to all banks of the switcher.  
Frame display mode: Values are shown as from 0 to 999 frames. In this  
display mode, a value entered in timecode input mode is converted for  
display as a number of frames.  
Timecode display mode: Values are shown as timecode values, consisting of  
seconds and frames. In this display mode, a value entered in frame input  
Executing a Transition  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
mode is converted for display as a timecode value. If the value consists of  
four or more digits, the last digit is not shown.  
Example: A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as “9.23” and a value  
of 10 seconds 1 frame appears as “10.0.”  
Setting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block  
Note  
In the PGM/PST bank or when using a simple-type transition control block,  
you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate.  
1
In the M/E bank Flexi Pad control block, press the [TRANS RATE]  
button.  
The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered  
transition rate.  
XPT HOLD  
WIPE  
DME  
UNDO  
A B  
U1  
U2  
1 2 3 4  
STORE  
STATS  
7
8
9
6
3
SNAP  
SHOT  
TRANS  
RATE  
TRANS RATE button  
4
1
0
5
2
BNAK  
0
EFF  
SHOT  
BOX  
BANK  
1
BANK  
SEL  
MCRO  
TC button  
ENTR button  
Memory recall section  
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)  
2
Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad.  
If required, press the [TC] button to toggle the input mode (frame input or  
timecode input).  
• Enter a value of up to three digits.  
• To cancel the entry, press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column  
([WIPE], [DME], ...) or the [TRANS RATE] button.  
Executing a Transition 353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Press the [ENTR] button.  
This confirms the entry, and the new setting appears in the transition  
control block display.  
Setting the transition rate in the numeric keypad control block  
TRANS RATE button  
Display  
Numeric keypad  
SNAP  
SHOT  
SHOT  
BOX  
TRANS  
RATE  
EFF  
MCRO  
P-BUS  
UNDO  
STORE  
STATS  
MASTR  
ALL  
GP1  
+/-  
EFF  
8
5
2
9
6
3
7
4
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
DISS  
P/P  
TC  
CLR  
AUTO  
USER  
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
USER  
4
RTR  
TRANS  
TRIM  
XPT  
1
0
DME  
1
DME  
2
DME  
3
DME  
4
DEV  
1
STORE  
RCALL  
ENBL  
DME  
5
DME  
6
DME  
7
DME  
8
DEV  
2
ENTER  
Region selection buttons TC button  
ENTER button  
Numeric keypad control block  
1
2
In the numeric keypad control block, press the [TRANS RATE] button.  
Press the region selection button for the M/E or PGM/PST bank for which  
you want to set the transition rate, turning it on.  
The numeric keypad control block display now shows the selected region  
name and the current transition rate setting for the region.  
3
4
With the numeric keypad, enter the transition rate.  
If required, press the [TC] button to toggle the input mode (frame input or  
timecode input).  
• Enter a value of up to three digits.  
• To clear the entry, press the [CLR] button.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
Executing a Transition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
354  
   
This confirms the entry, and the selected region name and the set transition  
rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display.  
The transition control block display of the same bank (M/E or PGM/PST)  
also shows the setting.  
To enter a difference from the current value  
After pressing the [+/–] button, enter the difference and press the [TRIM]  
button.  
To change the sign (+ or –), press the [+/–] button.  
Setting the transition rate by a menu operation  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1  
‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu appears.  
2
3
Select any transition type in the <Transition Type> group.  
Turn the knob to set the transition rate.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Transition Rate  
Transition Rate  
0 to 999 (frame count)  
Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the  
settings  
For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, you can display the transition rate,  
independent key transition rate and fade-to-black transition rate, and change  
the settings.  
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the  
Settings” (page 553).  
Pattern Limit  
There are two ways of setting a pattern limit: either by operating the fader lever  
to save the fader position, or by using the Wipe menu or DME Wipe menu to  
access the Edge/Direction menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
For an overview of the pattern limits, see page 46.  
Executing a Transition 355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Notes  
• A pattern limit only applies when a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the  
transition type.  
• A pattern limit cannot be applied to an independent key transition (see page  
364).  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
BKBD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
KEY  
PRIOR  
SUPER  
MIX  
MIX  
PST  
NAM  
COLOR  
MIX  
ALL  
WIPE  
DME  
PRIOR  
SET  
NORM  
/REV  
TRANS  
PVW  
NORM  
REV  
TRANS PVW button  
AUTO  
CUT  
TRANS  
PTN  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
KF  
PTN LIMIT button  
LIMIT SET button  
Transition control block (standard type)  
Setting the pattern limit with the fader lever  
1
Move the fader lever to the position corresponding to a particular pattern  
size.  
• First make sure that the [PTN LIMIT] button is off.  
• To check the pattern size on the preview monitor, first press the [TRANS  
PVW] button, to select the transition preview mode (see page 363).  
2
Press the [LIMIT SET] button.  
This sets the current fader lever position as the pattern limit.  
Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation  
1
When a wipe is selected as the transition type, in the M/E or PGM/PST  
menu, select first VF5 ‘Wipe,’ then HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
When a DME wipe is selected as the transition type, in the M/E or PGM/  
PST menu, select first VF6 ‘DME Wipe,’ then HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
The Edge/Direction menu appears.  
Executing a Transition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
356  
   
2
3
Press the [Pattern Limit] button, turning it on.  
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
b)  
1
Pattern Limit  
Pattern limit  
0.00 to 100.00%  
a) 0.00%: Executing the transition does not change the video output at all.  
b) 100.00%: The transition is the same as when no pattern limit is set, but the cross-point  
button selections of the background A and B buses do not interchange when the transition  
completes.  
Executing a pattern limit transition  
1
2
Press the [PTN LIMIT] button, turning it on.  
The button you pressed lights amber.  
Carry out the transition.  
The transition progresses as far as the set pattern limit. Even if the  
transition completes, the cross-point button assignments of the background  
A and B buses do not interchange.  
3
Carry out the transition once again.  
The status before the previous transition is restored.  
To cancel the pattern limit  
To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 in the previous procedure,  
press the [PTN LIMIT] button, turning it off.  
If after carrying out step 2 in the previous procedure, the pattern limit has been  
reached, carry out the following procedure.  
1
2
Press the [PTN LIMIT] button.  
The button you pressed lights green.  
Carry out the transition.  
The [PTN LIMIT] button goes off, and the pattern limit state is released.  
Depending on the way in which the transition was executed, the action will  
be as follows.  
• When you press the [CUT] button, the pattern limit is immediately  
released, and the image switches instantaneously.  
• When you press the [AUTO TRANS] button, until the state of the next  
transition, the transition is carried out over the duration given by the  
transition rate.  
Executing a Transition 357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• When you move the fader lever, the transition is carried out from the  
pattern limit state to the state before the pattern limit transition was  
carried out.  
Moving the fader lever even a little synchronizes the fader lever position  
with the transition state, and you can move the fader lever either in the  
forward direction or in the reverse direction.  
Depending on the Setup settings, the transition may be executed at the  
instant you press the [PTN LIMIT] button, and the button goes off. In this  
case, execution continues for the time specified by the dedicated transition  
rate in the menu setting, as far as the state of the next transition.  
For details of the setting, see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame  
Memory (Key/Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
To set the transition rate when the pattern limit is released  
1
In the <Pattern Limit Release> group of the Edge/Direction menu, select  
one of the following.  
Auto Trans Rate: Use the transition rate set in the transition rate control  
block  
Independ Trans Rate: Independent transition rate  
2
If you selected “Independ Trans Rate” in step 1, adjust the following  
parameter.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Transition Rate  
Independent transition rate  
0 to 999 (frames)  
Executing a Transition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
358  
Executing an Auto Transition  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4  
BKBD  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
KEY  
PRIOR  
SUPER  
MIX  
MIX  
PST  
NAM  
Fader lever  
COLOR  
MIX  
ALL  
WIPE  
DME  
PRIOR  
SET  
NORM  
/REV  
TRANS  
PVW  
NORM  
REV  
AUTO  
TRANS  
CUT  
PTN  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
KF  
AUTO TRANS button  
CUT button  
Transition control block (standard type)  
To execute a transition on the M/E or PGM/PST bank by a button operation,  
use the following procedure in the transition control block.  
For an overview of the auto transition, see page 45.  
To carry out an instantaneous cut transition: Press the [CUT] button.  
To carry out a gradual transition: Press the [AUTO TRANS] button.  
This executes the transition at the preset transition rate (see page 352).  
While the transition is executing, the [AUTO TRANS] button lights  
amber. When it completes the button goes off.  
To complete a partially executed transition instantaneously: Press the  
[CUT] button.  
The [AUTO TRANS] button goes off.  
Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever (Manual  
Transition)  
To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader lever, use  
the following procedure.  
For an overview of the manual transition, see page 45.  
Executing a Transition 359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To carry out the transition completely: Move the lever over the full range of  
its travel.  
To pause a partly executed transition: Stop moving the fader lever.  
To resume a paused transition: Resume moving the fader lever.  
Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions  
Using the [AUTO TRANS] button, the [CUT] button, and the fader lever, use  
the following procedures.  
Moving the fader lever during an auto transition  
During an auto transition started by pressing the [AUTO TRANS] button,  
operating the fader lever immediately enables the fader lever, and the [AUTO  
TRANS] button goes off. Thereafter, the fader lever controls the progress of  
the transition.  
Executing an auto transition after partly moving the fader lever  
• Press the [CUT] button to instantaneously complete the transition.  
• Press the [AUTO TRANS] button to complete the rest of the transition at the  
preset transition rate.  
If the transition rate is set to 100 frames, and the fader lever has moved  
through 1/4 of the transition, then the remaining 3/4 of the transition is carried  
out in 100 frames.  
Non-Sync State  
If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed  
as an auto transition, then the lever position no longer agrees with the transition  
state. This is termed a non-sync state.  
In a non-sync state, two lit LEDs indicate the position from which a normal  
transition can be carried out. This is either at one end position or both end  
positions of the fader lever travel.  
Moving the fader lever toward the position of the lit LEDs does not carry out a  
transition, but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non-sync state  
is released, and it is now possible to carry out the next transition.  
Executing a Transition  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Once the fader lever is moved  
to this position, the non-sync  
state ends, and the next  
transition (direction shown by  
the arrow) is possible.  
Manual transition completed as auto  
transition when moving the fader  
lever upward: Top two LEDs light.  
Manual transition completed as  
auto transition when moving the  
fader lever downward: Bottom two  
LEDs light.  
• If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs, this  
carries out the next transition, over the remaining part of the fader lever  
travel.  
• Even in a non-sync state, you can carry out an auto transition by pressing the  
[AUTO TRANS] button. During the auto transition, the indicators show the  
transition progress in the usual way, but when the transition completes, they  
once again indicate the non-sync state.  
Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode  
In the bus fixed mode there is a fixed relationship between the position of the  
fader lever and the signal output on each bus. Depending on the direction of the  
transition, the fader lever must therefore always be moved in a particular  
direction, as shown in the following table. This does not affect an auto  
transition, which is executed regardless of the fader lever direction.  
For an overview of the bus fixed mode, see “Flip-flop mode and bus fixed  
mode” (page 45).  
Fader lever operating direction in bus fixed mode  
Next transition  
Transition direction  
A t B  
Fader lever movement  
Downward  
Background  
B t A  
Upward  
Executing a Transition 361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Next transition  
Transition direction  
Fader lever movement  
Downward  
Keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 On t Off (deletion)  
Off t On (insertion)  
Upward  
• When a transition applies to a combination of more than one of the  
background and keys 1, 2, 3, and 4, then the transition for all of these must  
be in the same direction complying with the above table.  
• If as a result of an auto transition, for example, the fader lever position does  
not agree with the signal output, this is a non-sync state (see page 360) and  
LEDs light at both end positions of the fader lever travel. Moving the fader  
lever does not carry out a transition, but when the fader lever reaches the end  
position the non-sync state is released, and it is now possible to carry out the  
next transition. If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit  
LEDs, this carries out the next transition, over the remaining part of the fader  
lever travel.  
Executing a Transition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
362  
Transition Preview  
Carrying out a transition preview  
For an overview of the transition preview, see page 46.  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST bank transition control block, press the [TRANS  
PVW] button.  
The [TRANS PVW] button lights green, and the switcher is now in the  
transition preview mode. At this point, the preview output is the same as  
the program output before the [TRANS PVW] button was pressed.  
2
Operate the fader lever, or press the [AUTO TRANS] button or [CUT]  
button.  
On the preview monitor, you can check the effect of the transition.  
To terminate a transition preview  
There are three modes for a transition preview. To terminate a transition  
preview, carry out the operation which depends on the mode, and press the  
[TRANS PVW] button, turning it off.  
Lock: Toggling the [TRANS PVW] button on and off switches between the  
transition preview mode and the normal mode.  
Hold: The preview mode obtains only while the [TRANS PVW] button is held  
down.  
One Time: Each time a transition ends, it reverts to the normal mode.  
Set the transition preview mode in the following combinations. For details, see  
Chapter 16 “Engineering Setup” (Volume 2).  
Transition Preview  
mode  
Switcher setup  
Panel setup  
(Transition menu)  
(Operation >Custom Button  
<Transition Preview> group menu)  
<Trans Pvw> group  
Lock  
Normal  
Lock  
Hold  
Normal  
Hold  
–
One Time  
One Time  
Notes  
• During a transition, whether executed with the [AUTO TRANS] button or  
the fader lever, it is not possible to press the [TRANS PVW] button.  
• In bus fixed mode (see page 45), transition previews are not available.  
• When using the simple-type transition control block (see page 371),  
transition previews are not available.  
Transition Preview 363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Independent Key Transitions  
Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
K-MOD  
EMBL  
Key delegation buttons  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
K-SS  
K-TR  
ENBL  
K-SS  
STORE  
MIX  
WIPE  
DME  
Independent key transition type  
selection buttons  
KEY1  
ON  
KEY2  
ON  
KEY3  
ON  
KEY4  
ON  
Independent key transition  
execution section  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
Independent key transition control block (standard type)  
To set independent transitions for the keyers on the M/E or PGM/PST bank,  
use the independent key transition control block.  
For an overview of the independent key transitions, see page 37.  
Basic Independent Key Transition Operations  
1
Select one or more of the delegation buttons [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1]  
to [DSK4] in the PGM/PST bank), turning them on.  
You can press more than one button at the same time.  
Select the transition type.  
2
To fade a key in or out: Press the [MIX] button, turning it on.  
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern: Press the  
[WIPE] button, turning it on.  
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern: Press  
the [DME] button, turning it on.  
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion and deletion as independent  
modes, make the settings for the next transition in the independent key  
Independent Key Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
364  
         
transition control block.  
Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting  
it. For example, with the key not inserted, if you select the transition type  
and carry out a transition, this will be the setting when inserting a key.  
You can also use the Transition menu to select a desired independent key  
transition type for each key (see the next section).  
For details of the wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for Independent Key  
Transitions” (page 455). For details of DME wipe settings, see “DME  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 477).  
3
Execute the transition.  
To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition:  
Press the [AUTO TRANS] button.  
For details of the transition rate, see “Setting the Independent Key  
Transition Rate” (page 366).  
For details of operation together with a common transition, see  
“Combining other transitions with independent key transitions” (page  
38).  
To cut the key in or out instantaneously: Press the [KEY ON] button on  
the keyer.  
Note  
In an independent key transition, the pattern limit function is not available.  
Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu  
Operation  
You can also select the required independent key transition type by a menu  
operation.  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first the desired one from VF1  
‘Key1’ to VF4 ‘Key4,’ then HF6 ‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu for the selected appears.  
2
Select the required transition type in the <Transition Type> group.  
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion/deletion as independent modes,  
make the settings for insertion in the <On Transition Type> group, and the  
settings for deletion in the <Off Transition Type> group.  
Independent Key Transitions 365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate  
There are two ways of setting the transition rate: using the Flexi Pad control  
block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value, or using the  
Key menu to access the Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
You can also display the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and  
fade-to-black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and  
change the settings. (See “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing  
the Settings” (page 553).)  
When the setup selection is for separate transition rates for inserting or deleting  
a key, you can set both rates independently. For example, with the system in  
the state with the key not inserted, the transition rate setting applies to key  
insertion.  
Setting the independent key transition rate in the Flexi Pad  
control block  
Note  
In the PGM/PST bank or when using a simple-type transition control block,  
you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate.  
1
In the Flexi Pad control block of the M/E bank, hold down the [TRANS  
RATE] button, and in the independent key transition control block, press  
the delegation button [KEY1] to [KEY4] for the key for which you want  
to set the transition rate.  
The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered  
independent key transition rate.  
2
3
Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad.  
• Enter a value of up to three digits.  
• To cancel the entry, press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column  
([WIPE], [DME], ...) or the [TRANS RATE] button.  
For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode, see page 352.  
Press the [ENTR] button.  
Independent Key Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
366  
     
Setting the independent key transition rate in the numeric  
keypad control block  
Note  
You cannot use the numeric keypad control block to set the transition rate for  
a simple transition.  
1
In the numeric keypad control block, hold down the [TRANS RATE]  
button, and in the independent key transition control block, press the  
delegation button [KEY1] to [KEY4] ([DSK1] to [DSK4] in the PGM/PST  
bank) for the key for which you want to set the transition rate.  
The numeric keypad control block changes to the mode for inputting the  
independent key transition rate, and its display now shows the  
corresponding region name and the current transition rate set for the  
region.  
2
3
With the numeric keypad, enter the transition rate.  
• Enter a value of up to three digits.  
• To clear the entry value, press the [CLR] button.  
For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode, see page 352.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
This confirms the entry, and the selected region name and the set transition  
rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display.  
To enter a difference from the current value  
After pressing the [+/–] button, enter the difference and press the [TRIM]  
button.  
To change the sign (+ or –), press the [+/–] button.  
Setting the independent key transition rate by a menu operation  
1
In the M/E or PGM/PST menu, select first the desired one from VF1  
‘Key1’ to VF4 ‘Key4,’ then HF6 ‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu for the selected key appears.  
2
Select any transition type in the <Transition Type> group.  
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion/deletion as independent modes,  
make the settings for insertion in the <On Transition Type> group, and the  
settings for deletion in the <Off Transition Type> group.  
Independent Key Transitions 367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Turn the knob to set the transition rate.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Transition Rate  
Transition rate 0 to 999 (frame count)  
Independent key transition rate display  
To check the set independent key transition rate, press the key source name  
display/key snapshot button above the corresponding delegation button when  
the [K-SS] button is off.  
Displaying the independent key transition rates in a menu and  
changing the settings  
For each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, you can also display the transition  
rate, independent key transition rate and fade-to-black transition rate, and  
change the settings.  
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the  
Settings” (page 553).  
Independent Key Transitions  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fade to Black  
Fade to Black Operation  
FTB button  
FTB  
AUTO  
PST  
P/P  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
M/E  
IK  
M/E  
2K  
M/E  
3K  
P/P  
K
DME  
V
DME  
K
Fade to black control block  
Carrying out a fade to black  
To carry out a fade to black, press the [FTB] button in the fade to black control  
block.  
The fade to black is carried out with the transition rate set for the program  
output of the PGM/PST bank.  
During the transition, the [FTB] button lights amber. When the transition  
completes (the video is completely black), the button lit color changes to red.  
For an overview of the fade to black, see page 47.  
Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate  
Setting the fade to black transition rate  
1
In the PGM/PST menu, select first VF7 ‘Misc,’ then HF1 ‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu appears.  
Fade to Black 369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2
3
Select [FTB].  
Turn the knob to set the fade to black transition rate.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Transition Rate  
Transition rate  
0 to 999 (frame count)  
Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the  
settings  
You can also display the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and  
fade-to-black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and  
change the settings.  
For more details, see “Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the  
Settings” (page 553).  
Fade to Black  
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simple Transition  
The “simple transitions” refer to the transitions carried out using the simple-  
type transition control block (or simple-type independent key transition control  
block).  
Key transition selection buttons  
Key status display  
Transition type selection buttons  
ON  
ON  
MIX  
NAM  
WIPE  
DME  
OVER OVER  
KEY1  
KEY2  
NORM  
/REV  
LIMIT  
SET  
PTN  
LIMIT  
REV  
TAKE  
Transition execution section  
Transition control block (simple right-hand type)  
Basic Operations for Simple Transitions  
Carrying out a transition using a simple-type transition control  
block  
1
With the background A row of cross-point buttons in the cross-point  
control block, select the background video.  
Simple Transition 371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Using one of the following methods, select the way in which the transition  
will affect the image.  
Use a combination of the transition type selection buttons ([MIX], [NAM],  
[WIPE] and [DME]) and the next transition selection buttons ([KEY1] and  
[KEY2]).  
For an overview of the mix, NAM, wipe, and DME wipe transition types,  
see “Transition Types” (page 41).  
To change the background only: Press one of the [MIX], [NAM],  
[WIPE], and [DME] buttons.  
The [KEY1] and [KEY2]buttons go off, and the system changes to the  
background transition mode.  
To insert or delete key 1: Hold down the [KEY1] button and press one of  
the [MIX], [NAM], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons.  
To insert or delete key 2: Hold down the [KEY2] button and press one of  
the [MIX], [NAM], [WIPE], and [DME] buttons.  
To insert or delete key 1 and key 2 simultaneously: Hold down the  
[KEY1] and [KEY2] buttons, and press one of the [MIX], [NAM],  
[WIPE], and [DME] buttons.  
To use a super mix or preset color mix: Select [Super Mix] or [Preset  
Color Mix] in the Misc >Transition menu for the M/E or PGM/PST  
bank.  
To set the key priority, use the Misc >Key Priority menu for the M/E or  
PGM/PST bank. For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu  
Operation” (page 345).  
Note  
The transition type selection buttons ([MIX], [NAM], [WIPE], and  
[DME]) can be assigned to other transition types in setup.  
For details, see “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
3
Select the new background for after the transition.  
• Select the background video with the background B row of cross-point  
buttons.  
• To insert a key, select the key signal, and make various settings as  
required.  
For details of key settings, see Chapter 4 “Keys” (page 377).  
4
Depending on the transition type selected in step 2, make the required  
settings.  
For details of the settings, see the following sections:  
Simple Transition  
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Super mix: “Super Mix Settings” (page 349)  
Preset color mix: “Color Matte Settings” (page 350)  
Wipe: “Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings” (page 438)  
DME Wipe: “Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings” (page 466)  
Clip transition: “Clip Transition Operations” (page 524)  
5
Carry out the transition in the transition execution section.  
For a gradual transition such as a mix or wipe: Press the [TAKE]  
button, or operate the fader lever.  
See “Setting the Transition Rate” (page 352) and “Pattern Limit” (page  
355) as required.  
Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority  
You can check the output status of keys 1 and 2 and the key priority setting, in  
the key status display in the transition control block.  
The key status display includes two ON indicators corresponding to keys 1 and  
2.  
Display of the key output status  
When the key is inserted in the output from the M/E or PGM/PST bank, the  
indication “ON” lights, and when it is not inserted, the indication goes off.  
Key priority display  
The key lying in front on the program monitor has an indication “OVER” lit.  
To set the key priority, use the Misc >Key Priority menu for the M/E or PGM/  
PST bank. For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation”  
(page 345).  
Split Fader  
What does “split fader” mean?  
The term “split fader” refers to the function of carrying out a transition with the  
fader lever split into left and right halves, so that the background A and  
background B buses can be manipulated separately.  
To use the split fader, the following conditions must be met.  
• The fader lever is in bus fixed mode. (See “Settings Relating to Video  
Switching (Transition Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
Simple Transition 373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• The necessary settings have been made in a Setup menu to enable the split  
fader (See “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
• A background is selected for the next transition.  
• For the transition type, [MIX] or [NAM] is selected.  
Split fader operation  
The two halves of the split fader lever correspond to the buses as follows.  
Right fader lever: Background A bus  
Left fader lever: Background B bus  
The relationship between the positions of the two fader levers and the image  
output in a mix is as follows.  
Left lever position Right lever  
position  
A bus output  
B bus output  
Top  
Top  
100%  
100%  
0%  
0%  
Bottom  
Top  
Top  
100%  
0%  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Center  
Bottom  
Center  
0%  
100%  
50%  
50%  
• When the transition type is NAM, the outputs of the A bus and B bus in the  
above table are the outputs subjected to NAM.  
• The transition indicators always show the progress of the background A bus.  
• The operation of the left lever and that of the right lever can be swapped. (See  
“Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition  
Module  
You carry out independent key transition operations using the independent key  
transition control block (simple type). This controls only keys 3 and 4.  
However, each key button can be assigned to any key in setup (see Chapter 16  
“Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)” (Volume 2)).  
Simple Transition  
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key 3 control block Key 4 control block  
K-SS  
WIPE  
MIX  
DME  
CUT  
K-SS  
WIPE  
MIX  
DME  
CUT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
KEY3  
ON  
KEY4  
ON  
TAKE  
TAKE  
Independent key transition  
execution section  
Independent key transition type  
selection buttons  
The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same.  
Independent key transition control block (simple type)  
Carrying out a transition using a simple-type independent key  
transition control block  
1
Select the transition type for key 3 or key 4 using the independent key  
transition type selection buttons.  
To fade a key in or out: Press the [MIX] button, turning it on.  
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern: Press the  
[WIPE] button, turning it on.  
To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern: Press  
the [DME] button, turning it on.  
For details of wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for Independent Key  
Transitions” (page 455). For details of DME wipe settings, see “DME  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 477).  
To cut the key instantaneously in or out: Press the [CUT] button, turning  
it on.  
Simple Transition 375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If, in the Setup menus, you set insertion and deletion as independent  
modes, make the settings for the next transition in the independent key  
transition control block.  
Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting  
it. For example, with the key not inserted, if you select the transition type  
and carry out a transition, this will be the setting when inserting a key.  
2
Carry out the transition in the independent key transition execution  
section.  
To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition:  
Press the [TAKE] button.  
To set the independent key transition rate using a simple-type transition  
control block, use the key 3 and key 4 Transition menus. For details, see  
“Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate” (page 366).  
To cut the key in or out instantaneously: Press the [KEY 3 ON] button  
or [KEY 4 ON] button.  
Note  
In an independent key transition, the pattern limit function is not available.  
Simple Transition  
376  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Keys  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus .....................................................378  
Key Setting Menus ............................................................................378  
Key Type Setting ...............................................................................379  
Chroma Key Composition .................................................................381  
Chroma Key Adjustments .................................................................382  
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source ...................................................387  
Key Edge Modifications ....................................................................390  
Masks .................................................................................................397  
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................400  
Specifying the Key Output Destination .............................................403  
Key Modify Clear ..............................................................................404  
Blink Function ...................................................................................404  
Video Processing ...............................................................................405  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block ...........................406  
Operations in the Key Control Block ................................................406  
Key Edge Modifications ....................................................................410  
Masks .................................................................................................414  
Applying a DME Effect to a Key ......................................................415  
Other Key Setting Operations ...........................................................417  
Resizer .......................................................................................................419  
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys .....................................419  
Resizer Interpolation Settings ...........................................................424  
Resizer Crop/Border Settings ............................................................424  
Applying Resizer Effects ...................................................................427  
Key Snapshots ...........................................................................................433  
Key Snapshot Operations ..................................................................433  
Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module ..........435  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
There are two ways of making key settings: either using menus, or using the  
key control block.  
This section describes basic procedures for making key settings using the  
menus, taking the M/E-1 >Key1 menu as an example.  
Operations in the Key menus are the same for all banks (M/E-1 to M/E-3 and  
PGM/PST).  
For details of the method of using the key control block, see “Key Setting  
Operations With the Key Control Block” (page 406).  
Key Setting Menus  
The key setting menus for each bank (M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST) are as  
follows.  
Bank  
Keys set  
Menus  
M/E-1  
Keys 1 to 4  
M/E-1 >Key1 to 4  
M/E-2 >Key1 to 4  
M/E-3 >Key1 to 4  
PGM/PST >DSK1 to 4  
M/E-2  
Keys 1 to 4  
M/E-3  
Keys 1 to 4  
PGM/PST  
Downstream keys 1 to 4  
Accessing a key setting menu  
For example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, carry out any of the following  
procedures.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], then  
press VF1 ‘Key1.’  
• In the M/E-1 bank transition control block, press the KEY1 next transition  
selection button twice in rapid succession.  
• In the M/E-1 bank independent key transition control block, press the key  
delegation button [KEY1] twice in rapid succession.  
• In the key control block, press the M/E delegation button [M/E1], then press  
the key delegation button [KEY1] twice in rapid succession.  
Any of the above operations displays the M/E1 >Key1 menu.  
Note that you can access the DSK menus by pressing the button for the  
corresponding key in the downstream key control block twice in rapid  
succession.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
378  
         
Key Type Setting  
Setting the key type in a menu  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’  
The Type menu appears.  
In the <Key Type> group, select the key type.  
Luminance: luminance key  
Linear: linear key  
Chroma: chroma key  
Color Vector: color vector key  
Wipe Pattern: wipe pattern key  
Key Wipe Pattern: key wipe pattern key  
For the selected key type, you can now set the parameters.  
For an overview of the key types, see page 48.  
3
Carry out the following settings as required, depending on the key type  
selected in step 2.  
To enable clean mode (see page 49) for a luminance key, linear key or  
color vector key: Select [Clean Mode] so that it is set on.  
When clean mode is enabled, key fill is added to the background  
without cutting out with key source.  
When chroma key is selected: Select [Chroma Adjust] to access the  
Chroma Adjust menu (see page 382), and make the required settings.  
When a wipe pattern key is selected: In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu (see  
page 438), select the pattern and set any modifiers, then return to the  
M/E-1 >Key1 menu.  
When a key wipe pattern key is selected: In the M/E-1 >Key1 >  
Transition >Wipe Adjust menu (see page 455), carry out pattern  
selection and modifier setting, then return to the M/E-1 >Key1 >Type  
menu.  
Note  
For a wipe pattern selected for a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key,  
the [Edge] and [Direction] modifier settings are not available.  
4
Set the parameters.  
• When a luminance key or linear key is selected  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Clip  
Reference level for generating the +109.59 to –7.31  
key signal  
2
3
4
Gain  
Key sensitivity  
Key density  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Density  
Filter  
a)  
Filter coefficient  
1 to 9  
a) Setting this value to 1, produces the “through” state in which no filter is applied. The larger  
the value, the more strongly the filter applies.  
• When a chroma key is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
3
Density  
Key density  
0.00 to 100.00  
• When a color vector key is selected  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Y Clip  
Reference level for creating  
luminance signal  
+109.59 to –7.31  
2
3
Y Gain  
C Clip  
Luminance signal sensitivity  
–100.00 to +100.00  
100.00 to 0.00  
Reference level for creating  
chrominance signal  
4
5
C Gain  
Density  
Chrominance signal sensitivity  
Key density  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
Y Filter  
C Filter  
Luminance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9  
Chrominance signal filter  
coefficient  
1 to 9  
• When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Pattern size  
Soft  
Degree of edge softness  
Key density  
Density  
5
Make the following settings as required.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
380  
 
To invert the black and white sense of the key source: Press [Key  
Invert], turning it on.  
To adjust the horizontal position or key source width for a luminance  
key, linear key, or chroma key: Press [Key Position], turning it on,  
and set the parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
H Phase  
Left  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
–4.00 to +4.00  
–4.00 to +4.00  
–4.00 to +4.00  
1
2
3
Key horizontal position  
Key left edge position  
Key right edge position  
Right  
To set the key priority: Press [Key Priority] or select VF7 ‘Misc’ and  
HF3 ‘Key Priority’ to access the Key Priority menu.  
For details, see “Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation” (page  
345).  
Chroma Key Composition  
Composing an image by chroma keying  
There are two types of composition for chroma keying: normal mix, and  
additive mix.  
For an overview of the chroma key composition, see page 49.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’  
Select [Chroma] in the <Key Type> group.  
It becomes possible to adjust the key density (see page 380).  
3
4
Select [Chroma Adjust].  
The Chroma Adjust menu appears.  
Carry out auto chroma key adjustments.  
Also carry out manual adjustments if necessary to obtain an optimum  
chroma key image.  
For the adjustment procedures, see page 382.  
5
In the <Mix Mode> group, select [Normal Mix] or [Additive Mix]  
depending on the desired type of chroma key composition.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When using an additive mix for chroma keying, the (typically blue)  
background parts of the foreground video must be converted to black. For this,  
use the color cancel function (see page 383).  
Using the plane function  
In an additive mix, since no key is applied to the foreground, any variations in  
the (typically blue) background may appear in the composite image. To avoid  
this, a particular luminance level can be set for the (blue) background, and  
regions of lower luminance forcibly cut.  
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Plane] on.  
Adjust the following parameter.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Luminance  
Luminance level  
0.00 to 100.00  
Chroma Key Adjustments  
There are two ways of making chroma key adjustments: automatically, using  
the auto chroma key function, or manually, making individual adjustments  
such as color cancel adjustments and window adjustments.  
Making auto chroma key adjustments  
Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to  
specify a part of the foreground video (for example, the blue background color)  
and use it as a reference for creating the chroma key image.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type,’ then select [Chroma] in the  
<Key Type> group.  
Select [Chroma Adjust].  
The Chroma Adjust menu appears.  
3
4
Select [Sample Mark] in the <Auto> group.  
The foreground video only appears on the monitor, with a white box-  
shaped sample selector.  
Adjust the position and size of the sample selector, to specify the color to  
be used as the basis of chroma keying (typically a blue background).  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
382  
         
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
3
Position V  
Size  
Vertical position  
Size  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1.00 to 100.00  
a) The setting ranges depend on the signal format, screen aspect ratio, and size settings.  
5
Select [Auto Start] in the <Auto> group.  
This executes an auto chroma key based on the color specified by the  
sample selector, and displays the composite image on the monitor.  
Making key active adjustments  
When the key active function is on, the composite image is output to the  
monitor, and you can watch the monitor while manually adjusting the keying.  
When the key active function is off, only the foreground image appears. Set  
this off when manually adjusting color cancel (see the next section).  
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Key Active] on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Clip  
Adjustment  
Chroma key reference level  
Key gain  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1 to 9  
1
2
3
4
5
Gain  
Hue  
Hue  
Density  
Filter  
Density  
Filter coefficient  
Making color cancel adjustments  
If the background color is leaking into the foreground video, turning the color  
cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage.  
1
In the Chroma Adjust menu, turn [Key Active] off.  
Only the foreground image appears on the monitor.  
2
3
In the <Color Cancel> group, set [Color Cancel] on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1 to 9  
1
2
3
5
Filter  
Filter coefficient  
4
Set [Key Active] on.  
The chroma key composite image now appears in the monitor.  
Making key signal adjustments for color cancel  
When the color cancel function is set on, you can adjust the key signal for color  
cancel.  
1
2
In the <Color Cancel> group of the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Color  
Cancel] on.  
In the <Color Cancel> group, set [Cancel Key] on.  
The cancel key is now on, and you can now adjust the key signal for color  
cancel.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Clip  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Color cancel key reference level  
Color cancel key gain  
Gain  
–100.00 to +100.00  
3
Make the following settings, as required, in the <Color Cancel> group.  
• When setting [Key Position] on and adjusting the color cancel key  
edge position  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Phase  
Move left and right edges of the  
color cancel key simultaneously  
Left edge position  
value shown  
2
3
Left  
Move left edge of the color cancel –3.00 to +3.00  
key  
Right  
Move right edge of the color  
cancel key  
–3.00 to +3.00  
• When setting [Window] on and adjusting the detection range of the  
color cancel key  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Crop  
Crop value  
100.00 to 0.00  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
384  
 
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
2
Angle  
Angle value  
180.00 to 0.00  
For details of the crop and angle parameters, see “Chroma key window”  
(page 50).  
• When setting [Y Balance] on and adjusting the ratio in which Y  
balance is added to the color cancel key  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Mixture  
Ratio of Y balance key  
0.00 to 100.00  
Adjusting the window  
Setting the window function on allows you to adjust the detection range used  
to determine the key signal. When this function is off, the default range is used  
for the key.  
For an overview of the window, see “Chroma key window” (page 50).  
After making sure that the values of Clip, Gain, and Hue are adjusted  
appropriately, use the following procedure to make the window adjustment.  
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Window] on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Crop  
Adjustment  
Crop value  
Angle value  
Setting values  
100.00 to 0.00  
180.00 to 0.00  
1
2
Angle  
Adjusting the Y balance  
Setting the Y balance on allows you to specify that, even if the hue is the same,  
only portions of a particular luminance will be replaced by the background.  
For an overview of the Y balance, see page 51.  
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Y Balance] on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Clip  
Adjustment  
Luminance range  
Key gain  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Gain  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
3
Luminance  
Luminance  
0.00 to 100.00  
Adjusting the chroma key shadow  
This function allows a shadow falling on the (typically blue) background color  
to be rendered more realistically. Since portions of the (blue) background of  
less than a certain luminance are treated as shadows, there is no effect on  
cutting out of the foreground.  
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [Shadow] on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
Reference luminance for shadows 0.00 to 100.00  
Shadow key gain  
Shadow opacity  
Shadow softness  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Density  
Soft  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Note  
When chroma key shadow is on, key edge is changed to normal, and soft edge  
is switched off.  
Adjusting the video signal  
You can change the gain of the foreground signal, or vary the Hue. There are  
separate adjustments for the gain of the whole video signal, or Y and C  
individually.  
1
2
In the Chroma Adjust menu, set [FRGD CCR] on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Video Gain  
Y Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
Overall gain of video signal  
Y signal gain  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
C Gain  
C signal gain  
Hue  
Hue offset amount  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
386  
 
Selecting Key Fill and Key Source  
Selecting key fill and key source  
To select key fill and key source for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the following  
procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF1 ‘Type.’  
The Type menu appears.  
In the <Key Fill> group, select either of the following for use as key fill.  
Key Bus: signal selected on the key 1 fill bus  
Matte: signal from the dedicated color matte generator  
3
If you selected [Key Bus] in step 2, select the key fill signal on the key 1  
row in the cross-point control block.  
To select key fill for key 3 or key 4 in the cross-point control block, press  
the [KEY3] button or [KEY4] button to the right of the key bus buttons,  
turning it on, to allocate the key 1 row or key 2 row to the key 3 fill or key  
4 fill, then press the desired cross-point button.  
4
If you selected [Matte] in step 2, in the same Type menu, press the [Matte  
Adjust] button to display the Matte Adjust menu, then adjust the single-  
color or two-color combination color matte. Select whether to use a single-  
color matte or a two-color combination in the <Fill Matte> group.  
Flat Color: Adjust color 1 with the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
Mix Color: Carry out a color mix. Adjust color 1 and color 2, and select a  
mix pattern (see the next section).  
5
In the <Key Source> group, specify the key source selection mode.  
Self: The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key source.  
When the key type is selected as chroma key, select [Self].  
Auto Select: The signal allocated, being paired with the key fill bus signal,  
to a cross-point button is automatically selected as the key source. The  
setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in the Setup menu.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(See “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).)  
Split: You can select a key source signal independently of the key source  
automatically selected in Auto Select mode.  
6
When [Split] was selected in step 5, hold down the [SPLIT] button in the  
key control block, then in the cross-point control block key 1 row, select  
the key source signal. Alternatively, hold down the key delegation button  
in the transition control block and press a cross-point button in the key 1  
row to select the key source signal.  
Notes  
• In the above-stated key 1 row operation, you can only select a key signal  
assigned to a cross-point button. For the method of selecting a video  
signal, see “To select a video signal assigned to a cross-point button”  
below.  
On the MVS-8000, the video signal selection operation is not supported.  
• When [Split] is selected, the key memory function (see page 56) is  
disabled.  
To select a video signal assigned to a cross-point button  
By selecting the key source bus with an auxiliary bus control block AUX  
delegation button, and pressing the cross-point button, it is possible to select  
the video signal assigned to the cross-point button.  
(If you press the cross-point button with holding down [KEY], the key signal  
assigned to the cross-point button.)  
Note  
In the above operation, the following settings must have been made.  
• Assigning the key source bus to an AUX delegation button  
For details, see “Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings (Aux Assign Menu)”  
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
• Setting the [KEY] button operating mode  
For details, see “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
This operation is not supported on the MVS-8000.  
Carrying out a color mix for key fill  
When [Matte] is selected for key fill, you can combine color 1 and color 2. For  
the combination, you can use not only a key wipe generator pattern, but also  
the dedicated pattern for key edge color mix.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
388  
 
1
In the <Key Fill> group of the Type menu, select [Matte] and press [Matte  
Adjust].  
The Matte Adjust menu appears.  
2
3
Select [Mix Color] in the <Fill Matte> group.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Pattern size  
Soft  
Softness of the edge of the  
pattern  
4
Select the combining pattern in the <Mix Pattern> group.  
Key Wipe: The wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition is  
used for combination. You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern  
Select] to open the menu for key wipe pattern selection (Pattern Select  
menu), and make adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the  
menu for pattern adjustment (Wipe Adjust menu).  
Key Edge Pattern: Combine using the dedicated pattern selected for the  
color mix in the key edge fill. You can change this pattern by pressing  
[Pattern Select] to open the menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe  
pattern selection (Mix Pattern Select menu), and make adjustments by  
pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the menu for pattern adjustment  
(Matte Adjust menu).  
For details, see “Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte”  
(page 394).  
5
6
In the Type menu, adjust color 1 and color 2.  
To adjust color 1, select [Color1], and to adjust color 2, select [Color2],  
then adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning  
it on.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Edge Modifications  
To modify the key edge of key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the following  
procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF2 ‘Edge.’  
The Edge menu appears.  
Select the edge type in the <Edge> group.  
For an overview of the key edge modifications, see “Edge modifiers”  
(page 52).  
Normal: unadorned edge  
Border: edge with border applied  
Drop Border: edge with drop border applied  
Shadow: edge with shadow applied  
Outline: edge used as outline  
Emboss: embossing effect applied to edge  
If you select [Normal], skip to step 7.  
3
Set the border width and other parameters.  
When border or outline is selected: The setting parameters depend on  
the key type and whether the separate edge function is enabled or not.  
To enable the separate edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it  
on.  
• Separate edge off  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Width  
Width  
0.00 to 8.00  
b)  
(0.00 to 100.00)  
3
Density  
Density  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0.00  
to 4.00.  
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type  
• Separate edge on  
The left, right, top, and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
390  
     
independently. The separate edge function is only valid when a  
luminance key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Top  
Top edge width  
0.00 to 8.00  
a)  
2
3
4
5
Left  
Left edge width  
Right edge width  
Bottom edge width  
Density  
0.00 to 8.00  
a)  
Right  
0.00 to 8.00  
a)  
Bottom  
Density  
0.00 to 8.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0.00  
to 4.00.  
When drop border or shadow is selected: The setting parameter values  
depend on the on/off setting of key drop and the selection of 4H mode/  
8H mode (see page 54).  
• “Key drop OFF” mode  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Adjustment  
Width  
Setting values  
0.00 to 8.00  
1
2
3
Position  
Density  
Position  
Density  
359.99 to 180.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
• “Key drop ON” mode  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Width  
Width  
0.00 to 8.00  
2
3
Position  
Density  
Position  
Density  
359.99 to 0.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0.00  
to 4.00.  
When emboss is selected:  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Adjustment  
Width  
Setting values  
0.00 to 4.00  
1
2
3
Position  
Position  
Density  
359.99 to 0.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
a)  
Density  
a) The Density adjustment only affects the key edge. This can be adjusted separately from  
Key Density, and if Key Density is set to 0.00, the embossed edge effect only can be  
applied.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make edge fill adjustments, carry out the settings in step 6.  
4
5
Select the edge fill signal in the <Edge Fill> group.  
Utility 1 Bus: signal selected on the utility 1 bus  
Matte: signal from dedicated color matte generator.  
It becomes possible to adjust color 1.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
When the edge type is outline, in place of the edge fill signal, the selected  
key fill signal fills the outline, and elsewhere remains as the background.  
Carry out the following operation, depending on the selection in step 4.  
When [Utility 1 Bus] is selected: Hold down the [UTIL] button in the  
cross-point control block, and select the signal in the background A  
bus row.  
While the [UTIL] button is held down, the background A bus changes  
to the utility 1 bus.  
Note  
To enable the [UTIL] button, its operation mode must be set to [Hold]  
beforehand. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).)  
When [Matte] is selected: Press [Matte Adjust] in the same EDGE menu,  
to display the Matte Adjust menu, and adjust a single color or two-  
color combination color matte.  
You can select whether to use a single color matte or a two-color  
combination color matte in the <Edge Matte> group.  
For the color mix operation, see “Carrying out a color mix for the key edge  
fill matte” (page 394).  
6
When emboss is selected for the edge type, adjust the color in the <Emboss  
Fill> group.  
To adjust matte 1 press [Matte1], and to adjust matte 2 press [Matte2], then  
adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Luminance  
Luminance  
0.00 to 100.00  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
392  
Knob  
Parameter  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
2
3
7
8
To make the edge soft, press [Soft Edge] to set it on, and adjust the  
softness.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Soft  
Edge softness  
0.00 to 100.00  
For a normal edge, when [Soft Edge] is enabled, [Key Drop] is kept on.  
To make separate fine adjustments to the positions of the left, right, top,  
and bottom of the source edge, press [Fine Key], to set it on, and adjust the  
following parameters.  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob  
Parameter  
Top  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
–2.00 to +2.00  
–2.00 to +2.00  
–2.00 to +2.00  
–2.00 to +2.00  
1
2
3
4
Key top edge position  
Key left edge position  
Key right edge position  
Key bottom edge position  
Left  
Right  
Bottom  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Phase  
Key horizontal position  
Left edge position  
value shown  
2
V Phase  
Key vertical position  
Top edge position  
value shown  
Note  
In the emboss function it is not possible to set [Fine Key] on.  
• When the edge type is normal, drop border or shadow, enabling the [Fine  
Key] function keeps [Key Drop] on.  
• When applying a border to the key edge, enabling the [Fine Key]  
function halves the border width setting range.  
To fix key fill and key source in key drop off mode  
1
In the Edge menu, press [Key Delay Mode].  
The Key Delay Mode menu appears.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
This function is only supported on the MVS-8000G.  
2
Press [Frame Delay], setting it to On.  
Note  
This function uses the resizer, and therefore the expected result of the  
setting may not be obtained if conditions do not allow the resizer to be  
used.  
Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte  
When you select ‘Matte’ for the edge fill of a border, drop border, or shadow,  
you can create a combination of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern  
generated by the dedicated pattern generator.  
1
In the <Edge Fill> group of the Edge menu, select [Matte], then press  
[Matte Adjust].  
The edge fill Matte Adjust menu appears.  
In the <Edge Matte> group, select [Mix Color], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
2
3
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Pattern size  
Soft  
Softness of pattern edge  
Pattern number  
a)  
Pattern  
1 to 24  
a) The patterns are the same as standard wipes. (For details, see “Wipe Pattern List” in  
Appendix (Volume 1) (page 560).)  
To select the pattern, display the Mix Pattern Select menu by pressing  
[Mix Pattern] in the edge fill Matte Adjust menu. After selecting one of the  
patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) displayed in the Mix Pattern  
Select menu, you can adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Pattern size  
Soft  
Softness of pattern edge  
4
Adjust color 1 and color 2.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
394  
 
To adjust color 1 press [Color 1], and to adjust color 2 press [Color 2],  
turning it on respectively, and adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
5
If required, set the pattern modifiers.  
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
a) See page 65.  
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2
3
V Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
Invert Type  
Replication layout  
1 to 4  
a) See page 68.  
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and inclining the  
pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the  
pattern at a constant speed  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Speed  
Rotation rate of pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
6
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press [Color Invert], turning it on.  
Applying the zabton effects  
1
2
In the Edge menu, press [Zabton], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Soft  
Pattern edge softness  
Density  
Density  
Note  
If in the pattern selection described below you select “Mask Pattern,” and  
“Box” for the main mask, the “Size” parameter here cannot be adjusted.  
Set “Size” in the Main Mask menu.  
3
4
To adjust the pattern and color, press [Zabton Adjust].  
The Zabton Adjust menu appears.  
In the <Zabton Pattern> group, select the pattern.  
Key Wipe: Use a key wipe.  
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the  
menu for key wipe pattern selection (Pattern Select menu), and make  
adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to open the menu for pattern  
adjustment (Wipe Adjust menu).  
Key Edge Pattern: Use a color mixing pattern for key edge.  
You can change this pattern by pressing [Pattern Select] to open the  
menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe pattern selection (Mix Pattern  
Select menu), and make adjustments by pressing [Pattern Adjust] to  
open the menu for pattern adjustment (Matte Adjust menu).  
Mask Pattern: Use the main mask Box or Pattern.  
You can also press [Pattern Select], and in the corresponding pattern  
adjustment menu, change the pattern.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
396  
 
5
To adjust the color, press [Zabton Color] and adjust the following  
parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
4
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Density  
Density  
Masks  
There are two masks, which can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key  
or background, or to remove defects, and these are known as the main mask and  
subsidiary mask. You can either use the main mask and subsidiary mask  
independently, or at the same time.  
For an overview of the masks, see page 55.  
Using the main mask  
For example, to use the main mask for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF3 ‘Main Mask.’  
The Main Mask menu appears.  
In the <Mask Type> group, select the mask type.  
Key Mask: Masks a part of a key.  
Bkgd Mask: Masks a part of a background.  
3
4
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.  
Box: signal from the dedicated box generator  
Pattern: signal from the dedicated pattern generator  
Set the mask source parameters.  
• When a box is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Top  
Top position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Knob  
Parameter  
Left  
Adjustment  
Left position  
Right position  
Bottom position  
Box softness  
Setting values  
2
3
4
5
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Right  
Bottom  
Soft  
• When a pattern is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
5
Soft  
Edge softness  
Pattern number  
a)  
Pattern  
1 to 24  
a) The pattern is the same as a standard wipe. (See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume  
1) (page 560).)  
To select the pattern, display the Mask Ptn Select menu by pressing the  
[Mask Ptn Select] button in the Main Mask menu. After selecting one of  
the patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) displayed in the Mask Ptn  
Select menu, you can adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Soft  
5
6
To invert the black and white sense of the mask source, press the [Mask  
Invert] button, turning it on.  
When a pattern is selected as the mask source, set the pattern modifiers as  
required.  
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
a) See page 65.  
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
398  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
2
V Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
3
Invert Type  
Replication layout  
1 to 4  
a) See page 68.  
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and setting the  
angle of the pattern rotation  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Pattern angle  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and setting the  
rate of pattern rotation  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Speed  
Rate of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
Using the subsidiary mask  
For example, to use the subsidiary mask for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF4 ‘Sub Mask.’  
The Sub Mask menu appears.  
In the <Mask Type> group, select the mask type.  
Key Mask: Masks a part of a key.  
Bkgd Mask: Masks a part of a background.  
3
In the <Mask Source> group, select the mask source.  
Wipe: wipe pattern selected for a transition  
If you select [Wipe], select the pattern and make modifier settings in  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 399  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the M/E-1 >Wipe menu (see page 438), then return to this M/E-1  
>Key1 menu.  
In the case of a wipe pattern selected for a mask, the modifier [Edge]  
and [Direction] settings are not available.  
Utility 1 Bus: signal selected on the utility 1 bus  
When you selected [Utility 1 Bus], hold down the [UTIL] button in the  
M/E-1 bank cross-point control block, and select the signal with the  
background A bus buttons. While the [UTIL] button is pressed, the  
background A bus switches to the utility 1 bus.  
Note  
To enable the [UTIL] button, its operation mode must be set to [Hold]  
beforehand. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).)  
4
5
Set the mask source parameters.  
• When wipe is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Soft  
• When utility 1 bus is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Clip  
Reference level for creating mask +109.59 to –7.31  
signal  
2
Gain  
Gain  
–100.00 to +100.00  
To invert the black and white sense of the mask source, press the [Mask  
Invert] button, turning it on.  
Applying a DME Effect to a Key  
Note  
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including DME wipes) can be used in up to  
two places on the dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface  
simultaneously.  
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, you can apply  
DME effects to a maximum of three keys. (Requires a setting in setup.)  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
400  
   
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”  
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Assigning a DME to a key  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF5 ‘Processed Key.’  
The Processed Key menu appears.  
In the <DME Select> group, select the DME channel (DME1 to DME8) to  
be used.  
The lit colors of [DME1] to [DME8] indicate the DME assignment.  
Lit green: Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key.  
Lit amber: Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently  
selected key.  
Off: DME is not assigned.  
To select a DME being used by another keyer  
Press [Override], turning it on, then select the DME channel.  
The later selection is valid, and the button lights green.  
Using two or three DME channels on one keyer  
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.  
1
2
3
Select the DME for the first channel (see the previous item, “Assigning a  
DME to a key”), then select the successive channel for the second channel.  
For the third channel select the channel after that.  
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1  
row (DME external video bus).  
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following  
operation.  
• If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4, turn off the [KEY4]  
button in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME  
utility 1 bus).  
• If the selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8, turn on the [KEY4] button  
in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2  
bus).  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 401  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using four DME channels on one keyer  
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.  
1
Select the DME channel 1 (or channel 5) for the first channel (see  
“Assigning a DME to a key” (page 401)). In the same way, select the DME  
channel 2 (channel 6) for the second channel, the DME channel 3 (channel  
7) for the third channel, and the DME channel 4 (channel 8) for the fourth  
channel.  
2
3
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1  
row (DME external video bus).  
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following  
operation.  
• If the selected DME is channel 3, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).  
• If the selected DME is channel 7, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).  
4
To select the video signal for the fourth channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following  
operation.  
• If the selected DME is channel 4, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).  
• If the selected DME is channel 8, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).  
When using the SDI interface  
The operations to select the video signals for the third and fourth channels  
differ from those in the previous procedure: select the video signals on the  
AUX bus allocated in a Setup menu (Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device  
Interface >DME Type Setting >DME SDI Interface menu).  
Note  
In setup (Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device Interface menu), if “Up to  
3Keys” is selected, the second channel video signal is also selected on the AUX  
bus.  
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface Menu)”  
in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 556).  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
402  
Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal  
1
In the Processed Key menu, press [Monitor].  
The Monitor menu appears.  
2
3
Press [Monitor Set], turning it on.  
In the <DME Select> group, select the DME channel (DME1 to DME8) to  
be used.  
This assigns the selected DME output to DME MON V and DME MON K.  
The colors with which [DME1] to [DME8] are lit show the key assignment  
status.  
Lit green: DME currently being monitored  
Lit amber: DME that can be monitored  
Off: Unassigned DME  
Specifying the Key Output Destination  
Using the key processed keyer signals (external processed key)  
To select the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX  
buses, press [Ext Proc Key], turning it on, in the Processed Key menu.  
This assigns the key fill and key source signals for M/E-1 key 1 to reentry  
signals PROC V and PROC K.  
Note  
You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross-point  
selection buttons of the M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
Using the key processed keyer signals or signals to which a DME  
effect is applied in frame memory (frame memory feed)  
To use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the frame  
memory source buses, in the Processed Key menu, press [FM Feed]. [Ext Proc  
Key] turns on, and the key fill and key source signals processed on the  
currently selected keyer are automatically assigned to frame memory source  
buses 1 and 2. When a DME is selected on the keyer, the key fill and key source  
signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned.  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 403  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Key Modify Clear  
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then  
press the corresponding VF button (VF1 to VF4) to return the key settings to  
their initial status.  
For details of menu operations, see “Menu Operations” (page 323).  
Blink Function  
With the blink function, you can obtain the following effects.  
Key blink: The key is alternately inserted and deleted at regular intervals. You  
can set the period of blinking, and the proportion of each cycle for which  
the key is inserted.  
Edge blink: The key fill and key edge fill signals are interchanged at regular  
intervals. You can set the period of blinking, and the proportion of each  
cycle for which the original state holds.  
Using the blink function  
For example, to make the required settings for key 1 on the M/E-1 bank, use  
the following procedure.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF6 ‘Transition.’  
The Transition menu appears.  
2
3
In the <Blink> group, select [Key Blink] or [Edge Blink] to set it on.  
Set the blink parameters.  
• When key blink is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Blink Rate  
Duty  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
Length of blink cycle  
1 to 100  
Proportion of cycle for which key 0.00 to 100.00  
inserted  
• When edge blink is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Blink Rate  
Duty  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1 to 100  
1
2
Length of blink cycle  
Proportion of cycle for which  
original state holds  
0.00 to 100.00  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
404  
         
Video Processing  
You can adjust the luminance and hue of the selected key fill signal.  
For example, to apply video processing to the signal selected on the M/E-1  
bank key 1 fill bus, use the following procedure.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 menu, select HF7 ‘Video Process.’  
The Video Process menu appears.  
2
3
Press [Video Process], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Video Gain  
Y Gain  
Adjustment  
Video gain  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
5
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–7.31 to +109.59  
Luminance gain  
Chrominance gain  
Hue delay  
C Gain  
Hue Delay  
Black Level Luminance black level  
To return adjustment values to their defaults  
Press [Unity].  
Key Setting Operations Using Menus 405  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Setting Operations With the Key  
Control Block  
This section describes the basic procedures for key settings using the key  
control block.  
Key delegation buttons  
Displays  
M/E delegation buttons  
Key type selection buttons  
Knobs  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
RE  
SIZER  
P/P  
KEY4  
CVK  
DME  
1
DME  
2
DME  
3
DME  
4
KEY1  
KEY2  
LIN  
KEY3  
CRK  
TRANS  
PTN  
LUM  
DME  
5
DME  
6
DME  
7
DME  
8
AUTO  
SEL  
MATTE  
FILL  
KEY  
DROP  
SOFT  
EDGE  
SPLIT  
DROP  
BDR  
OUT  
LINE  
FM  
FEED  
BDR  
SHDW  
EMBOS  
MORE  
MON  
OVER  
RIDE  
PROC  
KEY  
AUTO  
DELEG  
SHOW  
KEY  
MAIN  
MASK  
SUB  
MASK  
TRACE  
ZABTN  
Key fill/key source selection buttons  
Edge type selection buttons  
MORE button  
Key control block  
Operations in the Key Control Block  
Parameter adjustment with the knobs  
When the button for a function requiring parameter settings is pressed (that is,  
on), you can set the parameters with the four knobs. If there are more than four  
values to be assigned to the knobs, the [MORE] button lights amber. At this  
point, press the [MORE] button, which turns green, to assign the fifth and  
subsequent parameters to the knobs, so that the parameter settings can be made.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
406  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting the bank and keyer  
To make key settings, first select the bank (from M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/  
PST) and keyer, then assign them to the key control block.  
For example, to set key 1 on M/E-1 with the key control block, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
Using the M/E delegation buttons in the key control block, press the [M/  
E1] button, setting it on.  
Using the key delegation buttons in the key control block, press the  
[KEY1] button, setting it on.  
This assigns the key control block to M/E-1 key 1.  
Selecting the key type  
To select the key type, press one of the key type selection buttons in the key  
control block.  
[LUM] button: luminance key  
[LIN] button: linear key  
[CRK] button: chroma key  
[CVK] button: color vector key  
[PTN] button: key wipe pattern key  
When using a wipe pattern key as the key type, in the <Key Type> group  
of the Type menu for the keyer, select [Wipe Pattern] and make the  
settings.  
For an overview of the key types, see page 48.  
The button you pressed lights green, and you can now adjust the parameters  
with the knobs. The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the  
parameter name and the three-digit setting value.  
• When the [LUM] or [LIN] button is lit green  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Clip  
Reference level for generating the  
key signal  
+109 to –7  
2
Gain  
Key sensitivity  
–100 (shown as –00)  
to +100  
3
4
Density  
Filter  
Key density  
0 to 100  
1 to 9  
Filter coefficient  
• When the [CRK] button is lit green  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 407  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Clip  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
Chroma key reference level  
Key sensitivity  
0 to 100  
Gain  
–100 (shown as –00)  
to +100  
3
4
Hue  
Hue  
0 to 359  
0 to 100  
Density  
Key density  
• When [Key Active] is off, only the parameters Hue and Density are  
displayed.  
• When both [Key Active] and [Color Cancel] are off, only the parameter  
Density is displayed.  
• When the [CVK] button is lit green  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob  
Parameter  
Y Clip  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
Reference level for Y signal  
Y signal sensitivity  
+109 to –7  
Y Gain  
–100 (shown as –00)  
to +100  
3
4
C Clip  
Reference level for chrominance  
signal  
100 to 0  
C Gain  
Chrominance signal sensitivity  
–100 (shown as –00)  
to +100  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob  
Parameter  
Y Filter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
4
Y signal filter coefficient  
1 to 9  
C Filter  
Chrominance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9  
Key density 0 to 100  
Density  
• When the [PTN] button is lit green  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Key density  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
Soft  
0 to 100  
Density  
0 to 100  
Selecting key fill  
Select whether to use a color matte as key fill, or the signal on the key fill bus.  
When using a color matte: Press the [MATTE FILL] button, setting it on. The  
button lights green, and you can now set the parameters with the knobs.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
408  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
Color 1 luminance  
Color 1 saturation  
Color 1 hue  
0 to 100  
359 to 0  
When [Mix Color] is selected in the key fill Matte Adjust menu, you can  
further adjust color 2.  
When [Mix Color] is on, and the [MORE] button is lit amber  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
4
Color 1 luminance  
Color 1 saturation  
Color 1 hue  
0 to 100  
359 to 0  
Size  
Pattern size  
0 to 100  
When [Mix Color] is on, and the [MORE] button is lit green  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
4
Color 2 luminance  
Color 2 saturation  
Color 2 hue  
0 to 100  
359 to 0  
Soft  
Edge softness  
0 to 100  
When using the key fill bus signal: Press the [MATTE FILL] button, turning  
it off.  
To select the key fill signal, use the key 1 or key 2 bus buttons in the cross-  
point control block.  
To select the key fill signal for key 3 or key 4 in the cross-point control  
block, press the [KEY3] button or [KEY4] button to the right of the key  
bus buttons, turning it on, to allocate the key 1 bus row or key 2 bus row  
to the key 3 fill bus or key 4 fill bus, then press the desired cross-point  
button.  
Selecting key source  
• To use the key source paired with the key fill signal selected on the key fill  
bus, press the [AUTO SEL] button, turning it on. The pairing of the cross-  
point buttons for key fill and key source is carried out in the Setup menu. (See  
“Cross-Point Settings (Xpt Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
• To select key source independently of the key fill signal selected on the key  
fill bus and paired with key source, hold down the [SPLIT] button, turning it  
on, then press the desired Key 1 or Key 2 button in the cross-point control  
block.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 409  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• To use as key source the same signal as the key fill signal selected on the key  
fill bus, select the SELF mode by pressing the [AUTO SEL] button and  
[SPLIT] button simultaneously so that both are off. When chroma key is  
selected as the key type, select the SELF mode.  
Key Edge Modifications  
To apply a modification to the key edge, press one of the edge type selection  
buttons in the key control block.  
[BDR] button: border  
[DROP BDR] button: drop border  
[SHDW] button: shadow  
[OUTLINE] button: outline  
[EMBOS] button: emboss  
For an overview of the edge modifications, see page 52.  
The pressed button lights green, and you can now adjust the parameters with  
the knobs. The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter  
name and the three-digit setting value.  
Setting the border parameters  
When the [BDR] button is lit green, the parameter settings depend on the key  
type and whether the separate edge function is active. To activate the separate  
edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it on, in the Edge menu for the  
key.  
• Separate edge off  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Width  
Border width  
0 to 8  
b)  
(0 to 100)  
4
Density  
Border density  
0 to 100  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.  
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type  
• Separate edge on  
The border width settings can be made independently for left, right, top, and  
bottom sides. The separate edge function is only available when luminance  
key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
410  
       
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Top  
Top edge width  
0 to 8  
a)  
2
3
4
Left  
Left edge width  
0 to 8  
a)  
Right  
Bottom  
Right edge width  
Bottom edge width  
0 to 8  
a)  
0 to 8  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.  
To adjust the edge fill color  
When [BDR] is selected, the [MORE] button lights amber. Pressing the  
[MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color  
parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
4
0 to 100  
359 to 0  
Density  
Density  
0 to 100  
Setting the drop border or shadow parameters  
When the [DROP BDR] or [SHDW] button is lit green, the parameter settings  
differ between the “key drop OFF” and “key drop ON” modes (see page 54) as  
shown below. Switching between these two modes is made by turning the  
[KEY DROP] button on or off.  
• “Key drop OFF” mode  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Width  
Width  
0 to 8  
2
4
Position  
Density  
Position  
Density  
359 to 180  
0 to 100  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.  
• “Key drop ON” mode  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Width  
Width  
0 to 8  
2
4
Position  
Density  
Position  
Density  
359 to 0  
0 to 100  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 411  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To adjust the edge fill color  
When [DROP BDR] or [SHDW] is selected, the [MORE] button lights amber.  
Pressing the [MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge  
fill color parameters with the knobs.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
4
0 to 100  
359 to 0  
Density  
Density  
0 to 100  
Setting the outline parameters  
When the [OUTLINE] button is lit green, the parameter settings depend on the  
key type and whether the separate edge function is active. To activate the  
separate edge function, press [Separate Edge], setting it on, in the Edge menu  
for the key.  
• Separate edge off  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Width  
Outline width  
0 to 8  
b)  
(0 to 100)  
4
Density  
Outline density  
0 to 100  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.  
b) When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type  
• Separate edge on  
The outline width settings can be made independently for left, right, top, and  
bottom sides. The separate edge function is only available when luminance  
key, linear key, or chroma key is selected as the key type.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Top  
Top edge width  
0 to 8  
a)  
2
3
4
Left  
Left edge width  
0 to 8  
a)  
Right  
Bottom  
Right edge width  
Bottom edge width  
0 to 8  
a)  
0 to 8  
a) In the “4H mode” and when [Fine Key] (page 393) is on, the setting value range is 0 to 4.  
When [Outline] is selected with separate edge on, the [MORE] button lights  
amber. Pressing the [MORE] button to turn it green then allows you to adjust  
the key fill density parameter with a knob.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
412  
 
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
4
Density  
Outline density  
0 to 100  
Setting the embossing parameters  
When the [EMBOS] button is lit green, adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Setting values  
0 to 4  
1
2
4
Position  
Density  
359 to 0  
0 to 100  
Selecting a normal edge  
When all five edge type selection buttons are off, a normal edge is selected. If  
one of the buttons is lit, press it, turning it off.  
Softening the edge  
Press the [SOFT EDGE] button, turning it on. The button lights green, and you  
can now adjust the softness with the knob.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Soft  
Edge softness  
0 to 100  
• For a normal edge, when [SOFT EDGE] is enabled, “Key Drop” mode turns  
on.  
• When a luminance key or linear key is selected as the key type, and clean  
mode is enabled, enabling [SOFT EDGE] ends the clean mode.  
Applying the zabton effects  
When the [ZABTN] button is lit green, adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
Pattern size  
Soft  
Pattern edge softness  
0 to 100  
Press the [MORE] button lit amber, changing it to green, then adjust the  
following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
0 to 100  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 413  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Knob  
Parameter  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Hue  
Setting values  
359 to 0  
3
4
Density  
Density  
0 to 100  
Masks  
Using the main mask  
In the key control block, press the [MAIN MASK] button, turning it on. The  
parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as [Box] or [Pattern] in  
the <Mask Source> group of the Main Mask menu for the key.  
• When box is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Top  
Adjustment  
Top position  
Left position  
Right position  
Bottom position  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
–100 (shown as –00) to +100  
–100 (shown as –00) to +100  
–100 (shown as –00) to +100  
–100 (shown as –00) to +100  
Left  
Right  
Bottom  
When box is selected and the [MORE] button is lit amber, there are more  
settings. Press the [MORE] button, so that it changes from amber to green to  
make the extra setting.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Soft  
Box softness  
0 to 100  
• When pattern is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
3
Soft  
Edge softness  
Pattern number  
0 to 100  
a)  
Pattern  
1 to 24  
a) The pattern is the same as a standard wipe. (See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1)  
(page 560).)  
Using the subsidiary mask  
In the key control block, press the [SUB MASK] button, turning it on. The  
parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as [Wipe] or [Utility 1  
Bus] in the <Mask Source> group of the Sub Mask menu for the key.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
414  
         
• When wipe is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0 to 100  
1
2
Soft  
0 to 100  
• When utility 1 bus is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Clip  
Reference level for  
creating mask signal  
+109 to –7  
2
Gain  
Gain  
–100 (shown as –00) to +100  
Applying a DME Effect to a Key  
Note  
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including DME wipes) can be used in up to  
two places on the dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface  
simultaneously.  
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, you can apply  
DME effects to a maximum of three keys. (Requires a setting in setup.)  
Assigning a DME to a key  
1
In the key control block, press the delegation buttons [M/E1] and [KEY1].  
2
Using the DME channel selection buttons, select the DME channel (DME1  
to DME8) for applying the effect.  
The lit colors of the [DME1] to [DME8] buttons indicate the DME  
assignment.  
Lit green: Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key.  
Lit amber: Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently  
selected key.  
Off: DME is not assigned.  
To select a DME being used by another keyer  
Press [Override], turning it on, then select the DME channel.  
The later selection is valid, and the button lights green.  
Using two or three DME channels on one keyer  
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 415  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
2
3
Select the DME for the first channel (see the previous item, “Assigning a  
DME to a key”), then select the successive channel for the second channel.  
For the third channel select the channel after that.  
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1  
row (DME external video bus).  
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following  
operation.  
• If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4, turn off the [KEY4]  
button in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME  
utility 1 bus).  
• If the selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8, turn on the [KEY4] button  
in the key 2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2  
bus).  
Using four DME channels on one keyer  
When using the DME dedicated interface, proceed as follows.  
1
Select the DME channel 1 (or channel 5) for the first channel (see  
“Assigning a DME to a key” (page 415)). In the same way, select the DME  
channel 2 (channel 6) for the second channel, the DME channel 3 (channel  
7) for the third channel, and the DME channel 4 (channel 8) for the fourth  
channel.  
2
3
To select the video signal for the second channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and select the signal in the Key1  
row (DME external video bus).  
To select the video signal for the third channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following  
operation.  
• If the selected DME is channel 3, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).  
• If the selected DME is channel 7, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).  
4
To select the video signal for the fourth channel, hold down the [UTIL]  
button in the cross-point control block, and carry out the following  
operation.  
• If the selected DME is channel 4, turn on the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 4 row (DME utility 2 bus).  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
416  
• If the selected DME is channel 8, turn off the [KEY4] button in the key  
2 row, then select the signal in the key 2 row (DME utility 1 bus).  
When using the SDI interface  
The operations to select the video signals for the third and fourth channels  
differ from those in the previous procedure: select the video signals on the  
AUX bus allocated in a Setup menu (Engineering Setup >Switcher >Device  
Interface >DME Setting >DME SDI Interface menu).  
Note  
When using a second key in combination with a dedicated interface, select the  
signal to be used on the AUX bus.  
You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu (see page 556).  
Assigning the DME output signal to a monitor signal  
1
Holding down the output destination specification button [MON] in the  
key control block, use the DME channel selection buttons to select the  
DME channel (DME1 to DME8) you want to use.  
The selected DME output is assigned to DME MON V and DME MON K.  
To check the DME assignment status, hold down just the [MON] button.  
2
While it is held down, the lit color of the [DME1] to [DME8] buttons  
shows the key assignment status.  
Lit green: Shows the DME currently being monitored.  
Lit amber: Shows a DME which can be monitored.  
Off: DME is not assigned.  
Other Key Setting Operations  
Using an external processed key  
You can select and use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals  
on the AUX buses.  
1
2
Select the keyer to be allocated.  
In the key control block, press [PROC KEY], turning it on.  
The button lights amber, and on the currently selected keyer, the key fill  
and key source are assigned to reentry signals PROC V and PROC K.  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 417  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross-point  
selection buttons of the M/E or PGM/PST bank.  
Using a frame memory feed  
When you press the [FM FEED] button in the key control block, it lights  
momentarily amber, then the key fill and key source signals processed in the  
currently selected keyer are assigned to frame memory sources 1 and 2.  
If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer, then the key fill and key  
source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory  
sources 1 and 2.  
Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the [PROC KEY] button to light  
amber.  
Using the show key function  
While the [SHOW KEY] button is held down, the key-processed key source  
signal appears on the specified output. (Show key mode)  
Even when the [SHOW KEY] button is released, for a preset time the show key  
mode is maintained. You can specify the output to which the show key function  
is applied and set the time for which the show key mode is maintained after  
releasing the button in a Setup menu.  
For details see “Settings Relating to Keys, Wipes and Frame Memory (Key/  
Wipe/FM Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Using the auto delegation function  
To couple the selection in the key delegation buttons of the independent key  
transition control block so that the key control block delegation selection is  
automatically switched, in the key control block press the [AUTO DELEG]  
button, turning it on.  
Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults  
Holding down a key type button ([LUM], [LIN], [CRK], [CVK], or [PTN])  
recalls the key default values (page 57).  
Key modify clear  
When an M/E delegation button is held down, holding down a key delegation  
button together returns the key settings to the initial status settings.  
For details of the initial status, see “Selecting the State After Powering On  
(Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block  
418  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Resizer  
Resizer allows you to apply DME-like effects such as image shrinking,  
magnification and movement, as well as change of the aspect ratio, to the  
processed key.  
Notes  
• The resizer function is supported on the MVS-8000G only.  
• The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one-frame delay.  
Two-Dimensional Transformations of Keys  
Note  
When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3 in HD format, when the resizer is used to  
shrink a video image, this is applied to the 16:9 screen including the added  
video on the left and right sides. Use the crop function as required to extract the  
4:3 image.  
Menu operations for key shrinking, magnification and movement  
For example, to shrink, magnify or move key1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Location X  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Move key  
horizontally  
HD  
–99.9999 to  
+99.9999  
SD 4:3  
SD 16:9  
–33.3333 to  
+33.3333  
–24.9999 to  
+24.9999  
Resizer 419  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
2
Location Y  
Move key vertically HD  
–99.9999 to  
+99.9999  
SD 4:3  
SD 16:9  
–33.3333 to  
+33.3333  
–24.9999 to  
+24.9999  
3
Size  
Magnify or shrink  
key  
0.0000 to 99.9999  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
Aspect X  
Change aspect  
ratio horizontally  
0.0000 to 99.9999  
0.0000 to 99.9999  
0.0000 to 2.0000  
Aspect Y  
Change aspect  
ratio vertically  
Aspect Ratio  
Change aspect  
ratio horizontally  
and vertically at a  
time  
Resizer  
420  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key control block operations for key shrinking, magnification  
and movement  
Delegation buttons  
Knobs  
RESIZER button  
M/E  
1
M/E  
2
M/E  
3
RE  
P/P  
SIZER  
DME  
1
DME  
2
DME  
3
DME  
4
KEY1  
LUM  
KEY2  
LIN  
KEY3  
CRK  
KEY4  
CVK  
TRANS  
PTN  
DME  
5
DME  
6
DME  
7
DME  
8
AUTO  
SEL  
MATTE  
FILL  
KEY  
DROP  
SOFT  
EDGE  
SPLIT  
DROP  
BDR  
OUT  
LINE  
FM  
FEED  
BDR  
SHDW  
EMBOS  
MORE  
MON  
OVER  
RIDE  
PROC  
KEY  
AUTO  
DELEG  
SHOW  
KEY  
MAIN  
MASK  
SUB  
MASK  
TRACE  
ZABTN  
MORE button  
1
Use the delegation buttons to select the key to which you want to apply a  
resizer function.  
2
3
Press the [RESIZER] button, turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters with the knobs.  
(To switch between displaying parameter group 1/2 and 2/2, press the  
[MORE] button.)  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
X
Move key  
horizontally  
HD  
–99 to +99  
SD 4:3  
SD 16:9  
–33 to +33  
–24 to +24  
–99 to +99  
–33 to +33  
–24 to +24  
2
Y
Move key vertically HD  
SD 4:3  
SD 16:9  
Resizer 421  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.0 to 99  
3
S
Magnify or shrink  
key  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
X
Y
R
Change aspect  
ratio horizontally  
0.0 to 99  
0.0 to 99  
0.0 to 2.0  
Change aspect  
ratio vertically  
Change aspect  
ratio horizontally  
and vertically at a  
time  
Device control block operations for key shrinking, magnification  
and movement  
RSZR CTRL button  
Delegation buttons  
Trackball  
M/E1  
DME1  
DME5  
MENU  
M/E2  
DME2  
DME6  
M/E3  
DME3  
DME7  
P/P  
USER  
DEV  
RSZR  
CTRL  
DME4  
DME8  
RUN  
CTRL  
LOCAL  
K1  
CB1  
GLB  
K2  
CB2  
SRC  
K3  
TRGT  
K4  
AXIS  
LOC  
MAIN  
ASP  
PERS  
SUB  
LOC  
SIZE  
ASP  
LOC  
XYZ  
LOC  
ROT  
POS  
RSZR  
CLR  
WORK  
BUFR  
SHIFT  
X
Y
Z
CTR  
RSZR button  
Z-ring  
LOC button  
ASP button  
1
Press the [RSZR CTRL] button, turning it on.  
Resizer  
422  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
3
4
Press the delegation button to select the key.  
Press the [RSZR] button, turning it on.  
• To change the aspect ratio, turn on the [LOC SIZE(ASP)].  
• To shrink, magnify, or move the key , turn on the [LOC XYZ(LOC)].  
Hold these buttons down while carrying out the operation of step 5 to  
enable fine adjustment (fine mode).  
5
Use the trackball and joystick for the operation.  
For details of parameters, see step 3 of “Key control block operations for  
key shrinking, magnification and movement” (page 421).  
For details of parameters, see step 3 of “Key control block operations for key  
shrinking, magnification and movement” (page 421).  
Entering parameters  
This operation is the same as DME three-dimensional parameter input.  
For details, see “Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values” in Chapter  
11 (Volume 2).  
Resetting parameters  
This operation is the same as DME three-dimensional parameter resetting.  
For details, see “Entering Three-Dimensional Parameter Values” in Chapter  
11 (Volume 2).  
Clearing resizer effects  
To clear two-dimensional transform parameters only and set the  
initial state  
In the device control block, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the  
operation buttons.  
To clear all resizer parameters, and set the initial state  
In the device control block, press the [CLR WORK BUFR] button in the  
operation buttons, twice in rapid succession.  
For the initial state, you can select either the factory default settings or user  
settings.  
For details of how to make this selection, see “Selecting the State After  
Powering On (Start Up Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Resizer 423  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resizer Interpolation Settings  
For example, to make the interpolation settings for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank,  
use the following procedure.  
1
2
3
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.  
This enables the resizer function.  
Press [Resizer Process].  
The Resizer Process menu appears.  
In the <Video Field/Frame Mode> and other groups, make the  
interpolation settings.  
These settings are the same as those for input video signals. For details,  
see “Interpolation Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
Resizer Crop/Border Settings  
Making a crop setting for a key for which resizer is on  
For example, to make the crop settings for key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
3
4
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.  
This enables the resizer function.  
Press [Border/Crop].  
The Border/Crop menu appears.  
Press [Crop], turning it on.  
This enables the adjustment of crop.  
Set the parameters.  
These settings are the same as those for crop of DME. For details, see  
“Crop Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
Resizer  
424  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note  
If mosaic or defocus is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode> group you  
select Video/Key, then the crop is disabled.  
Applying a border to a key for which resizer is on  
1
2
3
4
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.  
This enables the resizer function.  
Press [Border/Crop].  
The Border/Crop menu appears.  
Press [Boreder], turning it on.  
This enables the adjustment of crop.  
Set the parameters.  
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of  
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,  
as follows.  
• SD format  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment Setting  
Values  
1
H
Simultaneously adjust width of left 0.00 to 4.00  
and right borders  
2
3
5
V
Simultaneously adjust width of top 0.00 to 3.00 (4:3)  
and bottom borders  
0.00 to 2.25 (16:9)  
All  
Simultaneously adjust width of all Value of H shown  
four borders  
Density  
Density of the borders  
0.00 to 100.00  
• HD format  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment Setting  
Values  
1
H
Simultaneously adjust width of left 0.00 to 12.00 (4:3)  
and right borders 0.00 to 16.00 (16:9)  
2
3
5
V
Simultaneously adjust width of top 0.00 to 9.00  
and bottom borders  
All  
Simultaneously adjust width of all Value of H shown  
four borders  
Density  
Density of the borders  
0.00 to 100.00  
Resizer 425  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To apply color to a border  
1
2
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Flat Color].  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment Setting  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Values  
1
2
3
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
Hue  
To soften the inner edge of a border  
1
2
In the Border/Crop menu, press [Border Soft].  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment Setting  
Values  
1
Inner Soft  
Border inner softness  
0.00 to 100.00  
To apply a beveled light edge  
1
2
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Beveled  
Light Edge].  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Top  
Adjustment Setting  
Top edge  
Values  
1
2
3
4
5
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Value of Left shown  
Left  
Left edge  
Right  
Bottom  
All  
Right edge  
Bottom edge  
Four edges  
3
4
Press [Border Soft].  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Inner Soft  
Bound Soft  
Adjustment Setting  
Border inner softness  
Border boundary softness  
Values  
1
2
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Resizer  
426  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To apply a beveled color edge  
1
2
In the <Border Mode> group of the Border/Crop menu, press [Beveled  
Color Edge].  
In the <Color Adjust> group, select the edges for adjustment among the  
[Top], [Left], [Right], and [Bottom] edges. To select all the four edges,  
press [All].  
3
Set the color parameters.  
For details, see “To apply color to a border” (page 426)  
4
5
Press [Border Soft].  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Inner Soft  
Bound Soft  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Border inner softness  
Border boundary softness  
Applying Resizer Effects  
For example, to apply effects to key 1 of the M/E-1 bank, use the following  
procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key menu, press [Resizer], turning it on.  
This enables the resizer function.  
Press [Enhanced Effect].  
The Enhanced Effect menu appears.  
Resizer 427  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Applying a wide key border  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Dual  
Rszr Effect], turning it on.  
2
3
Press [Wide Key Border], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H
Simultaneously adjust border  
width of left and right edges  
0.00 to +100.00  
2
3
V
Simultaneously adjust border  
width of upper and lower edges  
0.00 to +100.00  
All  
Simultaneously adjust border  
width of all four edges  
Value of H shown  
a)  
4
5
Softness of border  
Density of border  
0.00 to +100.00  
0.00 to +100.00  
Soft  
Density  
a) Shared with the drop shadow “Soft” value.  
To add an outline, press [Out Line], turning it on.  
To adjust the border color, press [Border Color].  
Set the color parameters.  
4
5
6
For details, see “To apply color to a border” (page 426)  
Applying a drop shadow  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Dual  
Rszr Effect], turning it on.  
Press [Drop Shadow], turning it on.  
Set the parameters.  
2
3
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of  
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,  
as follows.  
• SD format  
Resizer  
428  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
H
V
Horizontal position of shadow  
Vertical position of shadow  
–8.00 to +8.00  
–6.00 to +6.00 (4:3)  
–4.50 to +4.50 (16:9)  
3
4
Size  
Shadow size  
0.00 to 2.00  
a)  
Softness of shadow  
0.00 to 100.00  
Soft  
5
Density  
Density of shadow  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) Shared with the wide key border “Soft” value.  
• HD format  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H
Horizontal position of shadow  
–24.00 to +24.00  
(4:3)-32.00 to +32.00  
(16:9)  
2
3
4
V
Vertical position of shadow  
Shadow size  
–18.00 to +18.00  
0.00 to 2.00  
Size  
a)  
Softness of shadow  
0.00 to 100.00  
Soft  
5
Density  
Density of shadow  
0.00 to 100.00  
a) Shared with the wide key border “Soft” value.  
Edge enhancement  
Adjusting the gain sharpens the image.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Edge  
Enhance], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
H
Horizontal gain adjustment  
Vertical gain adjustment  
V
0.00 to 100.00  
All  
Both horizontal and vertical  
adjustment  
H value is displayed  
Applying a mosaic  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press  
[Mosaic], turning it on.  
Resizer 429  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
3
Set the parameters.  
This operation is the same as the DME mosaic setting. For more details,  
see “Mosaic Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
In the < Mosaic/Defocus Mode > group, select the signal to which to apply  
the mosaic effect.  
Video/Key: Video signal and key signal  
Video: Video signal only  
Note  
If mosaic is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode> group you select  
Video/Key, then the crop and mask are disabled.  
4
Set the parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
H
Horizontal defocusing  
Vertical defocusing  
V
All  
Horizontal and vertical defocusing H value shown  
To make the mosaic like a relief pattern  
1
2
With [Mosaic] on, press [Relief], turning it on.  
In addition to the mosaic parameters, set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
–8.00 to +8.00  
3
4
Relief depth of mosaic cells  
Light source direction  
Angle  
Defocusing  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press  
[Defocus], turning it on.  
2
Set the parameters.  
This operation is the same as the defocusing setting when using the DME  
with the DME dedicated interface. However, <Mosaic/Defocus Mode>  
appears in place of <Defocus Mode>. For more details, see “Defocus  
Settings” in Chapter 11 (Volume 2).  
Resizer  
430  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
If defocus is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode> group you select  
Video/Key, then the crop and mask are disabled.  
Applying a mask to mosaic or defocus  
1
In the M/E-1 >Key1 >Processed Key >Enhanced Effect menu, press [Dual  
Rszr Effect], turning it on.  
2
Press [Mask], turning it on.  
This enables the mask function.  
To make the mask settings, continue with steps 3 and following.  
3
4
Press [Mask Menu].  
The Mask menu appears.  
In the <Mask Source> group, select either of [Box] and [Circle].  
Box: Use a box pattern as the mask signal.  
Circle: Use a circle pattern as the mask signal.  
5
Set the parameters.  
The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of  
signal format (SD/HD) and aspect ratio (4:3/16:9) selected in the system,  
as follows.  
The parameters are the same as for drop shadow. For more details, see  
“Applying a drop shadow” (page 428), except that knobs 3 and 5 are as  
follows.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Size  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
3
5
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
The rotation and inversion operations are the same as for a DME mask  
setting. For more details, see Chapter 11 “Mask Settings” (Volume 2).  
Notes  
• When a mask effect is applied to a border, the boundary becomes  
discontinuous, giving an unnatural effect. Avoid applying a mask to a  
border.  
• If mosaic or defocus is enabled, and in the <Mosaic/Defocus Mode>  
group you select Video/Key, then the mask is disabled.  
Resizer 431  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restrictions on resizer effects  
Restrictions on the use of effects  
Of the resizer effects, using mask, drop shadow, or wide key border requires  
two units of hardware for the resizer function.  
These are called “dual resizer effects”.  
In a dual resizer effect, predetermined combinations, key 1 and key 2, or key 3  
and key 4 are used.  
For example, if either of key 1 and key 2 has resizer set to On, the other key  
cannot be used for a dual resizer effect.  
The same restriction applies when using a resizer DME wipe in place of resizer.  
Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer  
The following combinations of resizer effects cannot be simultaneously on.  
• Mosaic and edge enhance  
• Defocus and wide key border  
• Mask and drop shadow  
• Mask and wide key border  
Resizer  
432  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Snapshots  
Using the key snapshot function, you can instantaneously save all of the key  
settings, except the key insertion state (on/off) and key priority, in dedicated  
registers for later recall as required.  
For an overview of the key snapshots, see page 57.  
Key Snapshot Operations  
Key snapshot operations are carried out in the independent key transition  
control block or downstream key control block. Each keyer is provided with  
four dedicated key snapshot registers.  
Key source name display/key snapshot buttons  
K-MOD  
EMBL  
KEY1  
KEY2  
KEY3  
KEY4  
K-SS  
Key delegation buttons  
K-TR  
ENBL  
K-SS  
STORE  
MIX  
WIPE  
DME  
DSK1  
ON  
DSK2  
ON  
DSK3  
ON  
DSK4  
ON  
Key snapshot setting  
buttons  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
AUTO  
TRANS  
PTN  
LIMIT  
LIMIT  
SET  
KF  
Independent key transition control block (standard type)  
Saving a key snapshot  
For example, the following procedure saves the state of the M/E-1 key 1  
settings.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the key  
delegation button [KEY1], turning it on.  
Press the [K-SS] button, turning it on.  
Key Snapshots 433  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The system switches to key snapshot mode, and the key source name  
display/key snapshot buttons show the status of registers 1 to 4 for key 1.  
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.  
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.  
For a register holding a snapshot, the register name is shown as up to eight  
characters.  
3
Hold down the [K-SS STORE] button, and press the key source name  
display/key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you  
want to save the snapshot.  
The key source name display/key snapshot button which you pressed lights  
yellow.  
Note  
If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or  
yellow, the existing contents of the register are overwritten.  
Recalling a key snapshot  
For example, the following procedure recalls the state of the M/E-1 key 1  
settings.  
1
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the key  
delegation button [KEY1], turning it on.  
2
3
Press the [K-SS] button, turning it on.  
Set the following buttons on or off, depending on the information you want  
to recall.  
(These buttons are not provided in the downstream key control block.)  
[K-MOD ENBL] button: When this is on, the key settings and key  
modifiers are recalled. When this is off, they are not recalled.  
[K-TR ENBL] button: When this is on, the independent key transition  
settings are recalled. When this is off, they are not recalled.  
If both buttons are off, the key memory function is enabled and only the  
saved selection of key fill and key source signals is recalled.  
4
Press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to  
the register you want to recall.  
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this recalls the key snapshot.  
To cancel a recall carried out in the downstream key control block, press  
the [UNDO] button in the downstream key control block.  
Key Snapshots  
434  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition  
Module  
When using a simple transition module, the key snapshots hold the settings for  
key 3 and key 4. However, each key control block can be assigned to any key  
in setup (see Chapter 16 “Overall Control Panel Settings (Config Menu)”  
(Volume 2)).  
You can carry out key snapshot operations in the independent key transition  
control block (simple type) and Flexi Pad control block (simple type).  
There are two dedicated key snapshot registers for each of keys 3 and 4.  
Key 3 control block Key 4 control block  
Key source name display/key  
snapshot buttons  
K-SS  
WIPE  
MIX  
DME  
CUT  
K-SS  
WIPE  
MIX  
DME  
CUT  
K-SS button  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
KEY3  
ON  
KEY4  
ON  
TAKE  
TAKE  
The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same.  
Independent key transition control block (simple type)  
Saving a key snapshot  
For example, to save the settings of M/E-1 key 3, use the following procedure.  
1
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the [K-SS]  
button in the key 3 control block, turning it on.  
This switches to key snapshot mode, and the key source name display/key  
snapshot button shows the state of registers 1 and 2 for key 3.  
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.  
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.  
For a register holding a snapshot, the register name is shown as up to eight  
characters.  
Key Snapshots 435  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
In the Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [SNAPSHOT] button and  
press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to  
the register in which you want to save the snapshot.  
The key source name display/key snapshot button which you pressed lights  
yellow.  
Note  
If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or  
yellow, the existing contents of the register are overwritten.  
Recalling a key snapshot  
For example, the following procedure recalls the state of the M/E-1 key 3  
settings.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 independent key transition control block, press the [K-SS]  
button in the key 3 control block, turning it on.  
Press the key source name display/key snapshot button corresponding to  
the register you want to recall.  
The button you pressed lights yellow, and this recalls the key settings  
(excluding the key insertion state (on/off) and key priority).  
Key Snapshots  
436  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 Wipes  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings .........................................................438  
Wipe Settings Menu ..........................................................................438  
Wipe Pattern Selection ......................................................................438  
Pattern Mix ........................................................................................441  
Setting Wipe Modifiers .....................................................................443  
Wipe Modify Clear ............................................................................454  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ...................................455  
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings ......455  
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers .......................456  
Wipe Snapshots .........................................................................................460  
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .................................460  
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus .....................................463  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
You carry out wipe setting operations principally using the Wipe menu for each  
of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.  
This section describes the basic procedures for wipe settings, taking the M/E-  
1 >Wipe menu as an example.  
For details of independent key transition wipe settings, see “Wipe Settings for  
Independent Key Transitions” (page 455).  
Wipe Settings Menu  
Accessing the wipe settings menu  
To access the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, use any of the following operations.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and  
press VF5 ‘Wipe.’  
• In the transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the transition type  
selection button [WIPE] twice in rapid succession.  
• In the Flexi Pad control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the [WIPE] button  
twice in rapid succession.  
Any of the above operations displays the M/E-1 >Wipe menu.  
Wipe Pattern Selection  
You can select a wipe pattern in the Wipe menu, or by entering a pattern  
number from the Flexi Pad control block.  
For how to use the Flexi Pad control block, see “Selecting a wipe pattern in  
the Flexi Pad control block” (page 440).  
Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF1 ‘Main Pattern.’  
The Main Pattern menu appears.  
Select the wipe pattern group with the pattern group selection button.  
Standard: standard wipes  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
438  
             
Enhanced: enhanced wipes  
Rotary: rotary wipes  
Mosaic1 to Mosaic3: mosaic wipes  
Random/Dust: random/diamond dust wipes  
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.  
For details of wipe patterns, see “Types of Wipe Pattern” (page 60) and  
“Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page 560).  
3
4
Press the button to select the desired pattern.  
The parameters change according to the selected pattern, and you can  
adjust the pattern.  
• When a polygon wipe is selected (pattern number 49)  
Knob  
Parameter  
No  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
Number of points  
Angularity of star  
3 to 64  
a)  
Star Rate  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) A value of –100.00 completely removes the star “rays,” leaving a circle; at +100.00 the  
“rays” are at their sharpest.  
• When a mosaic wipe is selected (pattern numbers 200 to 203, 206 to  
213, 224 to 247, 250 to 257, 260 to 269)  
Knob  
Parameter  
H Tile No  
V Tile No  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
2 to 36  
1
2
Number of tiles horizontally  
Number of tiles vertically  
2 to 18  
• When a karaoke wipe is selected (pattern numbers 220 to 223)  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
b)  
1
Start  
Position of start tile  
–100.00 to +100.00  
1 to 36  
2
3
Row No  
Phase  
Number of rows of tiles  
Delay for next row  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) At –100.00 tiles appear from the top (or left edge) of the screen; at +100.00 from the  
bottom (or right edge) of the screen.  
b) At –100.00 all rows appear simultaneously; at +100.00 until one row of tiles is completely  
displayed, the next row does not start to appear.  
• When a random wipe is selected (pattern number 273)  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Size  
Tile width  
0.00 to 100.00  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 439  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knob  
Parameter  
V Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
2
3
Tile height  
Volatility  
Rate of tile generation  
• When a diamond dust wipe is selected (pattern number 274)  
Knob  
Parameter  
H Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Particle width  
V Size  
Particle height  
Flash Rate  
Rate of generation of particles  
Note  
When Flash Rate is set to 0.00, you cannot change the pattern. In this state,  
adjusting H Size or V Size has no effect on the pattern.  
For details of a pattern mix, see the next section.  
For details of applying pattern modifiers, see “Setting Wipe Modifiers”  
(page 443).  
Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block  
To select a pattern with a standard type Flexi Pad control block, use the  
following procedure. (It is not possible to select a wipe pattern with a simple  
type Flexi Pad control block.)  
1
2
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, press the [WIPE] button.  
This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe snapshot mode.  
In the memory recall section, press the [PTN NO] button.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
440  
   
This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe pattern number recall  
mode, and the memory recall section display changes as shown in the  
following figure.  
WIPE button  
Numeric display  
XPT HOLD  
A B 1 2 3 4  
WIPE  
DME  
UNDO  
U1  
U2  
STORE  
STATS  
7
8
9
SNAP  
SHOT  
TRANS  
RATE  
4
1
0
5
2
6
BNAK  
0
EFF  
3
SHOT  
BOX  
BANK  
1
PTN  
NQ  
ENTR  
BANK  
SEL  
MCRO  
Memory recall section  
3
Use the buttons in the memory recall section to enter the pattern number  
consisting of up to three digits, and press the [ENTR] button.  
The entry is confirmed, and now the numeric display shows the pattern  
number.  
For the pattern numbers, see “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1)  
(page 560).  
Pattern Mix  
Combining two patterns  
You can combine two selected patterns (referred to as main and “sub”) to form  
a new pattern. Select a main pattern in the Main Pattern menu, then use the  
following procedure.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF3 ‘Sub Pattern.’  
The Sub Pattern menu appears.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 441  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
In the same way as for the main pattern, select the sub pattern.  
The patterns that can be selected for the sub pattern depend on the pattern  
selected for the main pattern (see the following table).  
Possible combinations of main pattern and sub pattern  
Yes: Combination possible No: Combination not possible  
Main  
pattern  
Sub pattern  
Standard  
Enhanced Rotary  
Mosaic  
Random/  
diamond  
dust  
Standard  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Enhanced Yes  
Rotary  
Mosaic  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Random/  
diamond  
dust  
Yes  
3
4
Select HF2 ‘Pattern Mix.’  
The Pattern Mix menu appears.  
In the <Pattern Mix> group, select the type of pattern mix.  
Mix: mix  
+Nam: positive Nam  
–Nam: negative Nam  
Morphing: morphing  
For an overview of types of pattern mix, see page 61.  
5
Depending on the selection in step 4, set the following parameters.  
• When mix, positive Nam, or negative Nam is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Mix Ratio  
Proportion of sub pattern to the  
main pattern  
0.00 to 100.00  
• When morphing (see page 61) is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
2
Start  
Point in transition at which main  
pattern is at 100%  
–50.00 to +150.00  
3
End  
Point in transition at which sub  
pattern is at 100%  
–50.00 to +150.00  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
442  
6
In the <Main/Sub Link> group, make the main/sub modifier link function  
settings. (See “Main and sub modifier link function” (page 63).)  
Full: fully linked mode  
Semi: semi-linked mode  
Applying the effect of a diamond dust wipe to the selected  
pattern (Dust mix)  
1
2
In the Pattern Mix menu, press [Dust Mix], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters as required.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Mix Ratio  
Proportion of diamond dust  
pattern in mix  
0.00 to 100.00  
2
3
4
H Size  
Particle width  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
V Size  
Particle height  
Flash Rate  
Rate of generation of particles  
You can also apply the dust mix function to the pattern generated by a  
pattern mix.  
Note  
When a random/diamond dust wipe (pattern numbers 270-274) is selected,  
the dust mix function is not available.  
Setting Wipe Modifiers  
You can apply various modifiers to the wipe pattern: setting the wipe direction,  
pattern position, and so on.  
For an overview of the wipe modifiers, see “Wipe Pattern Variation and  
Modifiers” (page 63).  
Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using. For  
details, see “Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers” (page  
454).  
Main pattern and sub pattern modifiers  
You can make independent settings of the modifiers for the main pattern and  
sub pattern.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 443  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• To set the modifiers for the main pattern, in the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select  
HF5 ‘Main Modify,’ and make the settings in the Main Modify menu.  
• To set the modifiers for the sub pattern, select HF6 ‘Sub Modify,’ and make  
the settings in the Sub Modify menu.  
Operations in the Main Modify menu and Sub Modify menu are the same.  
Independently set modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern  
• Positioner  
• Rotation  
• Aspect ratio  
• Pattern replication (MULTI)  
• Pairing  
• Modulation  
• Spring  
• Spiral  
The following sections show examples of modifying the main pattern.  
Specifying the wipe direction (Direction)  
You can specify the wipe direction (normal/reverse).  
To specify the wipe direction in a menu  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
The Edge/Direction menu appears.  
In the <Direction> group, specify the wipe direction.  
Normal: regular direction  
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition  
Reverse: reverse direction to normal  
To specify the wipe direction with a button in the transition control  
block  
In the transition control block of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST  
banks, press the following direction selection buttons.  
NORM: Normal  
NORM/REV: Normal/reverse  
REV: Reverse  
Splitting the wipe pattern  
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
The Edge/Direction menu appears.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
444  
     
2
3
Press [Split], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Split No  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1 to 4 (integer)  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Number of splits  
Spacing  
Spacing between adjacent  
patterns  
Modifying the wipe pattern edge  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
The Edge/Direction menu appears.  
In the <Edge> group, select the edge type.  
Border: border  
Soft: soft edge  
Soft Border: soft border  
For an overview of the edge types, see “Edge” (page 65).  
3
Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2.  
• When border is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Width  
Border width  
0.00 to 100.00  
• When soft edge is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Soft  
Edge softness  
0.00 to 100.00  
• When soft border is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Border width  
Inner Soft  
Outer Soft  
Border inner softness  
Border outer softness  
4
When you selected border or soft border, select the edge fill signal in the  
<Edge Fill> group.  
Utility 2 Bus: signal selected on the utility 2 bus  
Matte: signal from the dedicated color matte generator  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 445  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Depending on the operation in step 4, carry out the following operation.  
When ‘Utility 2 Bus’ is selected: Hold down the [UTIL] button in the  
cross-point control block, and select the signal on the background B  
bus.  
While the [UTIL] button is held down, the background B bus changes  
to the utility 2 bus.  
Note  
To enable the [UTIL] button, its operation mode must be set to [Hold]  
beforehand. (See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).)  
When ‘Matte’ is selected: In the same Edge/Direction menu, press [Matte  
Adjust] to display the Matte Adjust menu, then adjust the single-color  
or two-color combination color matte. Select whether to use a single-  
color matte or a two-color combination in the <Edge Matte> group.  
Flat Color: Adjust color 1 with the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
When you select [Mix Color] for a two-color combination, see the next  
paragraph.  
Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte  
When you selected [Matte] for the border or soft border edge fill, you can  
combine color 1 and color 2.  
For the combination, you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern, but  
also the dedicated color mix pattern.  
1
In the <Edge Fill> group of the Edge/Direction menu, select [Matte], and  
press [Matte Adjust].  
The Matte Adjust menu appears.  
2
3
In the <Edge Matte> group, select [Mix Color], turning it on.  
In the <Mix Pattern> group, make one of the following selections.  
Wipe: Use the wipe pattern selected for the transition.  
Pattern: Use the dedicated pattern.  
4
Depending on the selection in step 3, set the following parameters.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
446  
 
• When Wipe is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Soft  
• When Pattern is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Soft  
Edge softness  
Pattern number  
a)  
Pattern  
1 to 24  
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix  
(Volume 1) (page 560).  
If you selected Pattern, you can also carry out the pattern selection by  
pressing the [Mix Ptn Select] button in the Matte Adjust menu, to display  
the Mix Ptn Select menu. Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn  
Select menu (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24) by pressing the appropriate  
button, and you can then adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Soft  
5
If you selected Pattern in step 4, if required, the following modifiers can  
be added. After selecting a wipe mix, skip to step 6.  
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
a) See page 65.  
• When turning [Multi] on and using replications of the same pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2
3
V Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
Invert Type  
Replication layout  
1 to 4  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 447  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a) See page 68.  
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the  
pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the  
pattern at a constant rate  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Speed  
Rotation rate of pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
6
7
To adjust color 1, set [Color 1] on, and to adjust color 2 set [Color 2] on,  
then adjust the parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning  
it on.  
Setting the wipe position (Positioner)  
You can set the position independently for the main pattern and sub pattern.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on, and set the pattern  
position.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
448  
   
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
a) See page 65.  
To return the pattern position to the center of the screen  
In the <Position> group, press [Center].  
To move the pattern from its current position to the center through  
the course of a transition  
In the <Position> group, press [Auto Center], turning it on.  
To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick  
You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device  
control block.  
1
In the device control block, press the [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], or [P/P]  
button, turning it on.  
The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position  
setting as follows.  
Table 1: Buttons and assigned settings  
Button name  
MAIN  
Setting  
Wipe position for common transition (main pattern)  
Wipe position for common transition (sub pattern)  
SUB  
Table 2: Buttons assigned to functions  
Button name  
POS  
Function  
Toggle Position on or off.  
X, Y  
Fix the operating direction.  
Return the pattern position to the center of the screen.  
CTR  
2
3
4
Press the [MAIN] button or [SUB] button, turning it on.  
Press the [POS] button, turning Position on.  
Move the trackball or joystick, to set the wipe position. By pressing the [X]  
button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction,  
and by pressing the [Y] button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to  
the vertical direction.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 449  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotating the wipe pattern (Rotation)  
You can apply rotation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
In the <Rotation> group, select the rotation type.  
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.  
Speed: Rotate at a fixed rate.  
Magnitude: Rotate through a particular angle during the course of the  
transition.  
For an overview of the rotation, see page 65.  
3
According to the selection in step 2, set the following parameters.  
• When Angle is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When Speed is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Speed  
Rotation rate of pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When Magnitude is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation at start of  
transition  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
Magnitude  
Angle of rotation through course  
of transition  
–200.00 to +200.00  
a) See page 67.  
Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)  
You can set the aspect ratio independently for the main pattern and sub pattern.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
450  
       
2
3
Press [Aspect], turning it on.  
Set the following parameter.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
Setting the wipe pattern replication (Multi)  
You can set pattern replication independently for the main pattern and sub  
pattern.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
2
3
Press the [Multi] button, turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2
3
V Multi  
Shift  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
Replication layout  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 68.  
4
5
To make more adjustments, press the [Multi Adjust] button.  
The Multi Adjust menu appears.  
Make the following settings, as required.  
H Invert: When this is on, alternate tiles are inverted left-to-right.  
V Invert: When this is on, alternate tiles are inverted top-to-bottom.  
Non-Mask: When this is on, even if the positioner function is used to  
move the pattern position, the pattern is always present on the screen.  
Position: By adjusting the following parameters, move the pattern position  
within the divisions determined in step 3.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position of pattern  
–200.00 to +200.00  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 451  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
2
Position V  
Vertical position of pattern  
–200.00 to +200.00  
a) See page 65.  
Making a wipe pattern like a Venetian blind (Pairing)  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
In the <Pairing> group, select the slit direction.  
H: Create slits in the horizontal direction.  
V: Create slits in the vertical direction.  
3
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
Width of the slits  
1 to 128 (integer)  
a)  
a)  
H Offset  
Spacing in the horizontal direction  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
3
V Offset  
Spacing in the vertical direction  
a) See page 68.  
Applying modulation to the wipe pattern (Modulation)  
You can apply modulation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern.  
Note  
When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is not  
available.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
Depending on the desired effect, in the <Modulation> group select one of  
the following.  
H: Modulate the pattern, applying waviness in the horizontal direction to  
edges.  
V: Modulate the pattern, applying waviness in the vertical direction to  
edges.  
Fringe: Modulate the pattern, applying waviness in the radial direction to  
edges.  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
452  
     
3
Set the following parameters.  
.
Knob  
Parameter  
Amplitude  
Frequency  
Speed  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Amplitude of modulation  
Frequency of modulation  
Speed of waves  
a)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
b)  
4
Shape  
Form of the modulation  
1 to 3  
a) See page 69.  
b) See page 69.  
Applying barrel or pincushion distortion to the edge of the wipe  
pattern (Spring)  
You can set the spring function independently for the main and sub patterns.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
2
3
Press [Spring], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Gain  
Degree of barrel distortion  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 71.  
Applying a spiral effect to the wipe pattern (Spiral)  
You can set the spiral function independently for the main and sub patterns.  
1
In the M/E-1 >Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Main Modify.’  
The Main Modify menu appears.  
2
3
Press [Spiral], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Magnitude  
Size and direction of the spiral  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
Wave Speed Speed of the lateral waves  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 453  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
a) See page 71.  
Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers  
Yes: Can be used No: Cannot be used  
Modifiers  
Type of wipe  
Standard  
Enhanced Rotary  
Mosaic Random/  
diamond dust  
Direction  
Split  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Edge  
Yes  
a)  
b)  
c)  
c)  
Positioner  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Rotation  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
d)  
Aspect ratio  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
e)  
Pattern  
replication  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
f)  
Pairing  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Modulation  
(H/V)  
Yes  
Yes  
g)  
Modulation  
(Fringe)  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
g)  
Spring  
Spiral  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
h)  
No  
a) Not patterns 1 to 16, 19, and 20  
b) Not patterns 300 to 303  
c) Not patterns 100 to 103, 150, 151, 516, 518, 604, and 606  
d) Not patterns 1 to 8, 17, and 18  
e) Not patterns 220 to 223  
f) Not patterns 19 and 20  
g) But patterns 21, 23 and 24 are possible  
h) But patterns 21 and 23 are possible  
Wipe Modify Clear  
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then  
press VF5 ‘Wipe’ to return the wipe settings to their initial status.  
For details of menu operations, see “Menu Operations” (page 323).  
Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
454  
       
Wipe Settings for Independent Key  
Transitions  
You carry out independent key transition wipe setting operations using the  
Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer.  
For an overview of independent key transitions, see page 37.  
This section describes the independent key transition wipe settings, taking the  
M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >Wipe Adjust menu as an example.  
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe  
Settings  
Accessing the independent key transition wipe settings menu  
As an example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >Wipe Adjust menu,  
carry out either of the following operations.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1] and  
select VF1 ‘Key1’ and HF6 ‘Transition’ to display the Transition menu for  
key 1, then press [Wipe Adjust].  
• In the independent key transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the  
key delegation button [KEY1], then press the independent key transition type  
selection button [WIPE] twice in rapid succession.  
Carrying out the above operation displays the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition  
>Wipe Adjust menu (which will be referred to below as simply the Key1 Wipe  
Adjust menu).  
Selecting the independent key transition wipe pattern  
You select the independent key wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed  
in the menu.  
Note  
In an independent key transition, you can only use the standard wipe patterns  
(pattern numbers 1 to 24).  
To select a wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the  
following procedure.  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 455  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1
2
In the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, select [Pattern Select].  
The Pattern Select menu appears.  
Press the button for the desired pattern.  
Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers  
Available modifiers  
You can use the following modifiers with an independent key transition wipe.  
Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using.  
• Direction  
• Edge  
• Positioner  
• Rotation  
• Aspect ratio  
• Pattern replication  
Setting the wipe direction (Direction)  
In the <Direction> group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, make any of the  
following selections.  
Normal: regular direction  
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition  
Reverse: reverse direction to normal  
Softening the wipe pattern edge (Soft edge)  
1
2
Press [Soft] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.  
Set the following parameter.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Soft  
Edge softness  
0.00 to 100.00  
Setting the wipe position (Positioner)  
There are two methods of setting the wipe position: using the device control  
block, or in a menu.  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
456  
               
To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick  
You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device  
control block.  
1
In the device control block, press the [M/E1], [M/E2], [M/E3], or [P/P]  
button, turning it on.  
The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position  
setting as follows.  
Table 1: Buttons and assigned settings  
Button name  
K1 CB1  
Setting  
Wipe position for independent key 1 transition  
Wipe position for independent key 2 transition  
Wipe position for independent key 3 transition  
Wipe position for independent key 4 transition  
K2 CB2  
K3 FM1  
K4 FM2  
Table 2: Buttons assigned to functions  
Button name  
POS  
Function  
Toggle Position on or off.  
X, Y  
Fix the operating direction.  
Return the pattern position to the center of the screen.  
CTR  
2
Press one of the buttons in Table 1 above, to select the wipe position to  
which the operation applies. Multiple selection is possible.  
3
4
Press the [POS] button, turning Position on.  
Move the trackball or joystick, to set the wipe position. By pressing the [X]  
button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction,  
and by pressing the [Y] button, turning it on, you can restrict movement to  
the vertical direction.  
To set the wipe position by a menu operation  
1
2
Press [Position] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 457  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a) See page 65.  
To move the pattern from its current position to the center through  
the course of a transition  
Press [Auto Center] in the <Position> group, turning it on.  
Rotating the wipe pattern (Rotation)  
1
In the <Rotation> group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, select the rotation  
type.  
Angle: Incline the pattern through a fixed angle.  
Speed: Rotate at a speed rate.  
Magnitude: Rotate the pattern through a fixed angle during the course of  
the transition.  
2
According to the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.  
• When Angle is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When Speed is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Speed  
Rotation rate of pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When Magnitude is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation at start of  
transition  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
Magnitude  
Angle of rotation through course  
of transition  
–200.00 to +200.00  
a) See page 67.  
Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio (Aspect ratio)  
1
2
Press [Aspect] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.  
Set the following parameter.  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
458  
     
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
Replicating the wipe pattern (Multi)  
1
2
Press [Multi] in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu, turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2
3
V Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
Invert Type  
Replication layout  
1 to 4  
a) See page 68.  
Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 459  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wipe Snapshots  
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad  
Buttons used  
You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of  
its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required.  
In a standard transition system there are ten wipe snapshot registers for each of  
the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks, and in a simple transition module  
eight registers for each bank.  
Numeric display  
UNDO button  
WIPE button  
STORE STATS button  
XPT HOLD  
A B 1 2 3 4  
WIPE  
DME  
UNDO  
U1  
U2  
STORE  
STATS  
7
8
9
6
3
SNAP  
SHOT  
TRANS  
RATE  
4
1
0
5
2
BNAK  
0
EFF  
SHOT  
BOX  
BANK  
1
EFF  
DISS  
AUTO  
TRAN  
BANK  
SEL  
MCRO  
Memory recall buttons  
Flexi Pad control block (standard type)  
Wipe Snapshots  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
460  
       
WIPE button  
Numeric display  
XPT HOLD  
A B  
U
1
U
2
1 2 3 4  
WIPE  
1
2
4
6
8
3
5
7
DME  
SNAP  
SHOT  
UNDO  
Memory recall buttons  
UNDO button  
Flexi Pad control block (simple type)  
Saving a wipe snapshot  
1
2
Make the wipe settings that you want to save.  
In the Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [WIPE] button, and press the  
memory recall button corresponding to the register in which you want to  
save.  
Notes  
• If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow, the existing contents  
of the register are overwritten.  
• If you carry out a pattern mix, and both the main pattern and sub pattern  
are selected, then the memory recall button shows the main pattern.  
The pattern appears on the button you pressed, which lights yellow.  
The numeric display shows the number of the corresponding pattern.  
It is also possible to display the register name using a Setup menu (see  
“Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)).  
Wipe Snapshots 461  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Meaning of the state of buttons  
Off: Nothing is saved in the register.  
Lit orange: Settings are saved in the register.  
Lit yellow: The most recently recalled register.  
Canceling the saving of a wipe snapshot  
To cancel the saving of a wipe snapshot immediately after performing it, hold  
down the [STORE STATS] button, and press the [UNDO] button. The  
[STORE STATS] button changes from amber to green.  
Note  
On a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to cancel the saving  
of a wipe snapshot.  
Recalling a wipe snapshot  
1
In the Flexi Pad control block, press the [WIPE] button.  
This switches the Flexi Pad control block to the mode for recalling a wipe  
snapshot.  
2
Press the memory recall button for the register from which you want to  
recall the wipe snapshot.  
The button lights, and the saved wipe snapshot is recalled. At this point,  
the numeric display shows the pattern number or register name.  
Canceling the recall of a wipe snapshot  
To cancel the recall of a wipe snapshot, press the [UNDO] button.  
Deleting a wipe snapshot  
When the [WIPE] button is lit in the Flexi Pad control block, hold down the  
[STORE STATS] button and press the memory recall button for the register in  
which you want to delete the wipe snapshot.  
The indication of the memory recall button reverts from the wipe pattern or  
register name to the register number.  
Note  
In a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to delete a wipe  
snapshot.  
Wipe Snapshots  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
462  
   
Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus  
Menus used  
As an example, when operating on M/E-1, select M/E-1 >Wipe >Wipe  
Snapshot.  
The Wipe Snapshot menu appears.  
Memory recall buttons  
Button displays  
In setup you can select whether the memory recall buttons show the pattern  
number or register name.  
See “Operation Settings (Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Saving a wipe snapshot from the menu  
1
2
3
Set up the wipe you want to save.  
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press [Store], lighting it amber.  
Press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to save.  
Wipe Snapshots 463  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes  
• If you press a button which is already lit, this overwrites the contents of  
the register.  
• When both the main pattern and sub pattern are selected for a pattern  
mix, the button in the memory recall section shows only the main  
pattern.  
Recalling a wipe snapshot from the menu  
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press the memory recall button for the wipe  
snapshot you want to recall.  
This recalls the wipe snapshot, and the button you pressed lights amber.  
In the upper left is shown the currently recalled register name or number.  
Note  
The Flexi Pad and menu settings are linked.  
A setting in setup determines whether register names or pattern numbers  
appear.  
Deleting a wipe snapshot from the menu  
1
2
In the Wipe Snapshot menu, press [Delete].  
Press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to delete.  
This deletes the wipe snapshot.  
Wipe Snapshots  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
464  
Chapter 6 DME Wipes  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings ...............................................466  
DME Wipe Settings Menu ................................................................466  
DME Wipe Pattern Selection ............................................................466  
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers ...........................................................469  
DME Wipe Modify Clear ..................................................................476  
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions .........................477  
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings ..  
477  
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers ..............478  
Resizer DME Wipe Setting ......................................................................481  
DME Wipe Snapshots ..............................................................................482  
DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad .......................482  
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus .....................................482  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns .......................................483  
User Programmable DME Transition Mode .....................................483  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
You carry out DME wipe setting operations principally using the DME Wipe  
menu for each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.  
This section describes the basic procedures for DME wipe settings, taking the  
M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu as an example.  
For details of independent key transition DME wipe settings, see “DME Wipe  
Settings for Independent Key Transitions” (page 477).  
For details of resizer DME wipe (for MVS-8000G only), see page 481.  
Note  
For one M/E bank, DME effects (including external processed keys) can be  
used in up to two places on the DME dedicated interface and in only one place  
on the SDI interface simultaneously.  
When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface, you can apply  
DME effects to a maximum of three keys. (Requires a setting in setup.)  
DME Wipe Settings Menu  
Accessing the DME Wipe menu  
To access the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, use any of the following operations.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and  
press VF6 ‘DME Wipe.’  
• In the transition control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the transition type  
selection button [DME] twice in rapid succession.  
• In the Flexi Pad control block of the M/E-1 bank, press the [DME] button  
twice in rapid succession.  
Any of the above operations displays the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu.  
DME Wipe Pattern Selection  
You can select a DME wipe pattern in the DME Wipe menu, or by entering a  
pattern number from the Flexi Pad control block.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
466  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Selecting a DME wipe pattern by a menu operation  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF1 ‘1ch’ for one-channel mode,  
HF2 ‘2ch’ for two-channel mode or HF3 ‘3ch’ for three-channel mode.  
Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following  
buttons.  
• Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze  
• Split/Door: split and door  
• Flip Tumble: flip tumble  
• Mirror/Sphere: mirror and sphere  
• Character Trail: character trail  
• Wave/Ripple: wave and ripple  
• Page Turn/Roll: page turn and page roll  
• Frame I/O/PinP: frame in/out and picture-in-picture  
• 2D Trans/3D Trans: 2D trans and 3D trans  
• Sparkle/Split Slide: sparkle and split slide  
• Mosaic/Defocus: mosaic and defocus  
• Brick: brick  
• User Program: user programmable DME  
Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in one-channel mode: All of the  
above groups except for Brick.  
Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in two-channel mode: Slide/  
Squeeze, Page Turn/Roll, Frame I/O, PinP, 3D Trans, Brick and User  
Program.  
Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in three-channel mode: User  
Program and Brick.  
For details of DME wipe patterns, see “Types of DME Wipe Pattern”  
(page 72) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page  
566).  
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.  
Press the button to select the desired pattern.  
3
Note  
For a key transition, the page turn, page roll and picture-in-picture cannot  
be used.  
Adjusting DME wipe pattern parameters  
Of the DME wipe patterns, the following have parameters that can be adjusted.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 467  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When Brick (for two channels) is selected (pattern numbers 2801  
to 2804, 2811 to 2814)  
Knob  
Parameter  
Side V Size X  
Side V Size Y  
Height  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.01 to 8.00  
1
2
3
4
Horizontal magnification  
Vertical magnification  
Height of brick  
0.01 to 8.00  
0.01 to 100.00  
a)  
b)  
Center X  
Horizontal center position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
5
Center Y  
Vertical center position  
a) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the left  
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.  
b) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom  
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.  
When Frame in-out (for two channels) is selected  
• Pattern numbers 2851 to 2854  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
5
Delay  
Timing for video selected on –100.00 to +100.00  
a utility bus to appear on the  
screen  
• Pattern numbers 2861 to 2864  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Rot X  
Rotation about the Y axis  
(horizontal direction)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
Rot Y  
Rotation about the X axis  
(vertical direction)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
3
5
Rot Z  
Delay  
Rotation about the Z axis  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Timing for video selected on –100.00 to +100.00  
a utility bus to appear on the  
screen  
When Brick (for three channels) is selected (pattern number 3601)  
Parameter group [1/2]  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Side V Size X  
Side V horizontal  
magnification  
0.01 to 8.00  
2
Side V Size Y  
Side V vertical  
magnification  
0.01 to 8.00  
a)  
3
4
Height  
Height of brick  
0.01 to 100.00  
b)  
Side V Center X  
Side V horizontal center  
position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
468  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
c)  
5
Side V Center Y  
Side V vertical center  
position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) Shared with knob 3 for parameter group 2  
b) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the left  
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.  
c) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom  
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.  
Parameter group [2/2]  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Side H Size X  
Side H horizontal  
magnification  
0.01 to 8.00  
2
Side H Size Y  
Height  
Side H vertical  
magnification  
0.01 to 8.00  
a)  
3
4
Height of brick  
0.01 to 100.00  
b)  
c)  
Side H Center X Side H horizontal center  
position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
5
Side H Center Y Side H vertical center  
position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) Shared with knob 3 for parameter group 1  
b) The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side H. At –100.00 the center is at the left  
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the right edge of the screen.  
c) The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side H. At –100.00 the center is at the bottom  
edge of the screen, and at +100.00 the center is at the top edge of the screen.  
Selecting a DME wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block  
In the standard type Flexi Pad control block, enter a 4-digit pattern number,  
using the [DME] button.  
For details, see “Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block” (page  
440).  
Note  
You cannot select a DME wipe pattern in the simple type Flexi Pad control  
block.  
Setting DME Wipe Modifiers  
You can apply various modifiers to the DME wipe pattern: setting the DME  
wipe direction, pattern position, and so on.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 469  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For an overview of the DME wipe modifiers, see “DME Wipe Pattern  
Variation and Modifiers” (page 80).  
Specifying the DME wipe direction (Direction)  
You can specify the DME wipe direction (normal/reverse).  
To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
The Edge/Direction menu appears.  
In the <Direction>group, specify the DME wipe direction.  
Normal: regular direction  
Normal/Reverse: alternate between regular and reverse for each transition  
Reverse: reverse direction to normal  
To specify the DME wipe direction with a button in the transition  
control block  
In the transition control block of each of the M/E-1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST  
banks, press the following direction selection buttons.  
NORM: Normal  
NORM/REV: Normal/Reverse  
REV: Reverse  
Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge  
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF4 ‘Edge/Direction.’  
The Edge/Direction menu appears.  
2
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-  
channel mode, proceed as follows.  
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.  
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select  
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at  
the same time.  
3
4
In the <Edge> group, select the edge type.  
Border: border  
Soft Border: soft border  
Set the parameters according to the selection in step 3.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
470  
         
• When border is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Adjustment  
Border width  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
3
4
5
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
• When soft border is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Width  
Adjustment  
Border width  
Border inner softness  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
4
5
Inner Soft  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Hue  
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same  
time  
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered  
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the  
settings on the other channels by the same amount.  
Setting the DME wipe position (Positioner)  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’  
The Modify menu appears.  
Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one-channel mode or  
two-channel mode, proceed as follows.  
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.  
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select  
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at  
the same time.  
3
4
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 471  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
2
V
Vertical position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same  
time  
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered  
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the  
settings on the other channels by the same amount.  
To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen  
In the <Position> group, press [Center].  
Displaying and moving the position of the DME wipe pattern  
(position select)  
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’  
The Modify menu appears.  
In the <Position Select> group, the one of the [Top Left], [Top Right],  
[Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right] buttons that is on indicates the current  
display position of the DME wipe pattern.  
2
3
In the <Position> group, press [Position], turning it on.  
Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one-channel mode or  
two-channel mode, proceed as follows.  
In one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.  
In two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select the  
corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at the  
same time.  
4
To move the position of the DME wipe pattern, press the button where you  
want to move to, turning it on.  
The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of  
the specified button.  
Setting relative positions to move the DME wipe pattern  
In two-channel mode, use the following procedure.  
1
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’  
The Modify menu appears.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
472  
2
3
4
In the <Ch Select> group, select the target channels.  
Press [Position] in the <Position> group, turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
4
Relative H  
Relative movement in the  
horizontal direction  
–400.00 to +400.00  
5
Relative V  
Relative movement in the vertical –400.00 to +400.00  
direction  
For details of the method of DME wipe pattern selection, see “DME Wipe  
Pattern Selection” (page 466).  
Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’  
The Modify menu appears.  
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-  
channel mode, proceed as follows.  
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.  
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select  
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at  
the same time.  
3
4
Press [Size], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Size  
Set size of effect  
0.00 to 200.00  
a) The effect size when [Size] is off is taken as 100.00%.  
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same  
time  
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered  
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the  
settings on the other channels by the same amount.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 473  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping  
Note  
When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected, crop cannot be used.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’  
The Modify menu appears.  
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-  
channel mode, proceed as follows.  
For a pattern in one-channel mode: press [1st Ch], turning it on.  
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select  
the corresponding channel. You can select more than one channel at  
the same time. Some patterns need no selection which is fixed in the  
<Ch Select> group.  
3
4
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Top  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
Crop the top of the image  
Crop the left of the image  
Crop the right of the image  
Crop the bottom of the image  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Left  
Right  
Bottom  
Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same  
time  
The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest-numbered  
channel. When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings, this changes the  
settings on the other channels by the same amount.  
In 16:9 mode, to crop to 4:3 aspect ratio  
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [4:3], turning it on.  
To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed  
1
2
In the M/E-1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify.’  
The Modify menu appears.  
Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one-channel mode or two-  
channel mode, proceed as follows.  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
474  
 
For a pattern in one-channel mode: in the <Ch Select> group, press [1st  
Ch], turning it on.  
For a pattern in two-channel mode: from the <Ch Select> group, select  
the corresponding channels. You can select more than one channel at  
the same time.  
3
4
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop] or [4:3 Crop] (to crop from 16:9  
to 4:3 aspect ratio), turning it on.  
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].  
The Remove From Begin menu appears.  
5
In the <Crop Transition> group, select the execution mode for the DME  
wipe crop transition.  
Cut: Cut mode. The cropping does not change during the transition, but at  
the end point of the transition the cropping is removed (enlarges).  
Last 5%: The cropping is maintained for the first 95% of the transition,  
and is progressively removed during the last 5% of the transition  
(enlarges).  
Linear: The cropping is removed linearly through the whole course of the  
transition (enlarges).  
Transition  
Cropping  
Transition  
Cropping  
Transition  
Cropping  
y
y
y
(%)  
100  
(%)  
100  
(%)  
100  
95  
t
t
t
0
0
0
100 (%)  
95 100 (%)  
100 (%)  
[Cut]  
[Last 5%]  
[Linear]  
t: transition execution time  
y: change in transition and cropping amount  
Setting the timing of transition completion  
When the execution mode for a DME wipe crop transition is set to [Last 5%],  
you can select the timing of transition completion from 70% ([Last 30%]), 95%  
([Last 5%]), and 100% ([Off]).  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 475  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
3
In the M/E 1 >DME Wipe menu, select HF5 ‘Modify’.  
The Modify menu appears.  
In the <Crop Mode> group select [Remove From Begin].  
The Remove From Begin menu appears.  
In the <Release Transition> group, select the timing of transition  
completion.  
Last30%: The transition completes at the end of 70% of the transition  
execution time. The transition has a dead zone from 70% to 95% of the  
transition time.  
Last5%: The transition completes at the end of 95% of the transition  
execution time. When the transition completes, the cropping is  
removed during the last 5%.  
Off: The transition completes at the end of the transition execution time.  
During the last 5% of the transition, the transition and cropping  
removal proceed together.  
Transition  
Cropping  
Transition  
Cropping  
Transition  
Cropping  
y
y
y
(%)  
100  
(%)  
100  
(%)  
100  
“Dead Zone”  
95  
t
t
t
0
0
0
70  
95 100 (%)  
70  
95 100 (%)  
95 100 (%)  
[Last 30%]  
[Last 5%]  
[Off]  
t: transition execution time  
y: change in transition and cropping amount  
DME Wipe Modify Clear  
Press [Default Recall] at the lower left of the menu display, turning it on, then  
press VF6 ‘DME Wipe’ to return the DME wipe settings to their initial status.  
For details of menu operations, see “Menu Operations” (page 323).  
Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
476  
   
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key  
Transitions  
You carry out independent key transition DME wipe setting operations using  
the DME Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer.  
For an overview of independent key transitions, see page 37.  
This section describes the independent key transition DME wipe settings,  
taking the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust menu as an example.  
Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME  
Wipe Settings  
Accessing the independent key transition DME wipe settings  
menu  
As an example, to access the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition >DME Wipe Adjust  
menu, carry out the following operation.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [M/E 1], and  
select VF1 ‘Key1’ and HF6 ‘Transition’ to display the Transition menu for  
key 1. Next, press [DME Wipe Adjust].  
• Press the key delegation button [Key1] in the independent key transition  
control block of the M/E-1 bank, then press the independent key transition  
type [DME] twice in quick succession.  
Carrying out the above operation displays the M/E-1 >Key1 >Transition  
>DME Wipe Adjust menu (which will be referred to below as simply the Key1  
DME Wipe Adjust menu).  
Selecting the independent key transition DME wipe pattern  
You select the independent key DME wipe pattern from the list of patterns  
displayed in the menu.  
To select a DME wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M/E-1 bank, use the  
following procedure.  
1
In the <Pattern Select> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press  
[1ch] for one-channel mode or [2ch] for two-channel mode.  
The Pattern Select menu appears.  
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 477  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2
Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following  
buttons.  
In two-channel mode, only Page Turn and Page Roll are selectable.  
• Slide/Squeeze: slide and squeeze  
• Split/Door: split and door  
• Mirror/Sphere: mirror and sphere  
• Character Trail: character trail  
• Wave/Ripple: wave and ripple  
• Page Turn/Roll: page turn and page roll  
• Frame I/O: frame in/out  
• 2D Trans/3D Trans: 2D Trans and 3D Trans  
• Sparkle/Split Slide: sparkle and split slide  
• User Program: user programmable DME  
For details of DME wipe patterns, see “Types of DME Wipe Pattern”  
(page 72) and “DME Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix (Volume 1) (page  
566).  
The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen.  
Press the button to select the desired pattern.  
3
Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe  
Modifiers  
You can add modifiers such as pattern position and size for an independent key  
transition DME wipe.  
For introductory information, see “Positioner” (page 80) and “Size” (page  
81).  
Setting the DME wipe position (Positioner)  
For applicable pattern numbers, see page 80.  
1
2
In the <Position> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press  
[Position], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
H
V
Horizontal position  
Vertical position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
478  
     
To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen  
In the <Position> group, press [Center].  
Setting the DME wipe pattern size (Size)  
For applicable pattern numbers, see page 81.  
1
2
In the Key 1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press [Size], turning it on.  
Set the following parameter.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Size  
Set size of effect  
0.00 to 200.00  
a) The effect size when [Size] is off is taken as 100.00%.  
Cropping a key DME wipe  
1
2
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press  
[Crop], turning it on.  
Set the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Top  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
Cropping of the top of the image  
Cropping of the left of the image  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Left  
Right  
Cropping of the right of the image –100.00 to +100.00  
Bottom  
Cropping of the bottom of the  
image  
–100.00 to +100.00  
To crop to 4:3 in 16:9 mode  
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [4:3 Crop], turning it on.  
To set the operation for DME wipe crop transition execution  
1
2
3
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press  
[Crop], turning it on.  
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Crop] or [4:3 Crop] (to crop to 4:3 in  
16:9 mode), turning it on.  
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin].  
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 479  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Remove From Begin menu appears.  
For subsequent operations, see step 5 of “To set the action when a DME  
wipe crop transition is executed” (page 474).  
To set the timing of transition completion  
1
2
In the <Crop Mode> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press  
[Crop], turning it on.  
In the <Crop Mode> group, press [Remove From Begin]..  
For subsequent operations, see “Setting the timing of transition  
completion” (page 475).  
Applying a border to a key DME wipe  
In the <Edge> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press [Border],  
turning it on.  
For subsequent operations, use the same process as in step 4 of “Modifying the  
DME wipe pattern edge” (page 470).  
DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
480  
Resizer DME Wipe Setting  
Notes  
• This function is supported by the MVS-8000G.  
• When the screen aspect ratio is 4:3 in HD format, when the resizer DME  
wipe is used to shrink a video image, this is applied to the 16:9 screen  
including the added video on the left and right sides. Use the crop function  
as required to extract the 4:3 image.  
Relation between DME wipes and other effects  
The following relations hold between a resizer DME wipe and other effects.  
Relation to processed keys  
It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key with processed key  
enabled.  
Relation to resizer  
It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key with resizer enabled.  
It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key forming a pair with a key  
with the dual resizer effect enabled. The key combinations forming pairs are  
keys 1 and 2, and keys 3 and 4. For example, when a dual resizer effect is  
enabled for key 1, it is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe on key 2.  
Making resizer DME wipe settings  
1
In the <Pattern Select> group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu, press  
[1ch], turning it on.  
The 1ch Pattern Select menu appears.  
2
Select [Resizer Slide/Squeeze] or [Resizer Frame I/O].  
The patterns of the selected group appear.  
The wipe patterns that can be used for a resizer DME wipe are as follows.  
• Slide (pattern numbers: 7001 to 7008)  
• Squeeze (pattern numbers: 7021 to 7031)  
• Frame in-out (pattern numbers: 7201 to 7208, 7221 to 7224)  
3
Press the desired pattern to select it.  
For more about resizer DME wipe modifiers, see “Setting Independent  
Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers” (page 478).  
Resizer DME Wipe Setting 481  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DME Wipe Snapshots  
DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad  
To carry out DME wipe snapshot operations, use the Flexi Pad control block.  
You can save, recall and delete DME wipe snapshots using the procedures  
similar to the procedures for wipe snapshot operations. In DME wipe snapshot  
operations, use the [DME] button instead of the [WIPE] button used in wipe  
snapshot operations.  
Notes  
• A button in the memory recall section in which a DME wipe snapshot is  
saved shows the pattern, and lights yellow.  
For a user-programmable DME, the register number (see page 483) appears.  
Depending on the setting of the Setup menu (see “Operation Settings  
(Operation Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2)), you can also display a  
register name.  
• In a simple type Flexi Pad control block, it is not possible to delete a DME  
wipe snapshot.  
For details of the operating procedures, see “Wipe Snapshots” (page 460).  
DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus  
In the same way as for wipe snapshots, you can save, recall, and delete DME  
snapshots.  
For details of the operations, see “Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus”  
(page 463).  
DME Wipe Snapshots  
482  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns  
With a user programmable DME, you can use DME effects created through the  
use of keyframes for a transition on the switcher system.  
Note the following points when creating a keyframe effect for use as a user  
programmable DME pattern.  
Register numbers and pattern numbers  
When saving a keyframe effect as a user programmable DME pattern, specify  
the register number that corresponds to the pattern number as shown in the  
following table.  
Execution mode  
One-channel mode  
Two-channel mode  
Three-channel mode  
Register number  
101 to 199  
Pattern number  
1901 to 1999  
2901 to 2999  
3901 to 3999  
201 to 299  
301 to 399  
For details of registers and keyframe effects, see “Registers” (page 166) and  
Chapter 13 “Keyframe Effects” (Volume 2), respectively.  
Keyframe effects in the global channel  
When the effect with the same number as the reference channel is present on  
the DME global (GLBL) channel, executing the user programmable DME will  
also execute the effect on the global channel simultaneously.  
When executing a user programmable DME, take note of whether the effect is  
present on the global channel.  
User Programmable DME Transition Mode  
To create a user programmable DME, it is necessary to set the transition mode  
(the way in which the effect moves). To set the transition mode, use the Key  
Frame >DME User PGM menu.  
For details of the operating procedures, see “Transition Mode Settings for  
User Programmable DME” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 483  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
The following transition modes are available.  
Channels  
Transition mode  
Effect group  
One-channel mode  
Single transition mode  
Slide, Split, Door, Page turn,  
Page roll, Squeeze, Mirror,  
Sphere, Character Trail, Wave,  
Ripple, 2D Trans, 3D Trans,  
Sparkle, Split Slide  
Flip Tumble  
Flip Tumble, Mosaic, Defocus  
Frame in-out  
Frame in-out  
a)  
Frame in-out  
Frame in-out H  
Frame in-out V  
Frame in-out  
b)  
Picture-in-picture  
Picture-in-picture  
c)  
Picture-in-picture  
Compress  
Two-channel mode  
Dual transition mode  
Slide, Squeeze, 3D Trans  
Two-channel picture-in-picture Picture-in-picture  
a) Transition according to DME wipe patterns 1202, 1203, or 1204  
b) Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1201  
c) Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1251  
For details, see “DME Wipes” (page 72).  
Note  
For the following group of effects available in two-channel mode, no user  
programmable DME wipe patterns can be created.  
Page turn, Page roll, Frame in-out, Brick  
Notes on creating keyframe effects  
When creating a keyframe effect to be used as a user programmable DME  
pattern, note the following, depending on the transition mode used.  
Notes on single transition mode (one-channel mode)  
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the  
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• Create the last keyframe to be a full-size image.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [Single].  
Notes on flip tumble (one-channel mode)  
• Create the first keyframe image at full size. In the <Back> group of the DME  
>Input/Output >Video/Key menu, depending on the direction of the rotation  
you want during the transition, press [H Invert] or [V Invert], turning it on.  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
484  
 
• Create the last keyframe with the image inverted so the back side is visible,  
and with the size at full size.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [Flip Tumble].  
Notes on frame in-out (one-channel mode)  
Create a minimum of three keyframes.  
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the  
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the  
screen. At this point, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control  
block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.  
• Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the image  
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [FRAME I/O].  
Notes on Frame in-out H (one-channel mode)  
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.  
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the  
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• As the state after completion of the first transition, move the image  
horizontally to make it visible within the screen. At this time, press the  
[PAUSE] button in the keyframe control block, turning it on, to set a pause  
for the keyframe.  
• For the last keyframe move the image horizontally to place it outside the  
screen area or set the image size to zero, so that the image is not visible  
within the screen.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [FRAME I/O H].  
Notes on frame in-out V (one-channel mode)  
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.  
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the  
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• As the state after completion of the first transition, move the image vertically  
to make it visible within the screen. At this time, press the [PAUSE] button  
in the keyframe control block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.  
• For the last keyframe move the image vertically to place it outside the screen  
area or set the image size to zero, so that the image is not visible within the  
screen.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [FRAME I/O V].  
Notes on picture-in-picture (one-channel mode)  
Create a minimum of three keyframes.  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 485  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the  
image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the  
screen. At this point, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe control  
block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.  
• Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area, or set the image  
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [P In P].  
Notes on compress (one-channel mode)  
Create a minimum of three keyframe points.  
• Create the first keyframe with the image at full size.  
• In the state at completion of the first transition, create the image to be visible  
within the screen. At this time, press the [PAUSE] button in the keyframe  
control block, turning it on, to set a pause for the keyframe.  
• For the last keyframe, once again set the image size to full size.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [Compress].  
Notes on dual transition mode (two-channel mode)  
• Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows.  
Channel 1: create the image full-size.  
Channel 2: either create the image outside the screen area, or set the image  
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
• Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows.  
Channel 1: either create the image outside the screen area, or set the image  
size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen.  
Channel 2: create the image full-size.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [Dual].  
Notes on picture-in-picture (two-channel mode)  
Create a minimum of three keyframes.  
• Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows.  
Channel 1: create the image full-size.  
Channel 2: since the priority is low, it will not be visible on the screen, so  
no particular restrictions apply.  
In the Global Effect >Ch1 to Ch4 >Combiner menu, when setting the priority  
of channel 1 and channel 2, set the channel 1 priority higher.  
• In the intermediate part of the transition, create the two images so that both  
are visible within the screen. In the Global Effect >Ch1 to Ch4 >Combiner  
menu, when setting the priority of channel 1 and channel 2, set the channel 2  
priority higher.  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
486  
Note  
It is recommended to make the priority settings at a keyframe point at which  
the two images are not overlapping.  
• During the course of a transition, there is a “dead zone” corresponding to the  
intermediate point of the whole effect (see following figure), during which  
the image does not change. Therefore, it is necessary to create the effect so  
that the image in the intermediate part of the transition is the keyframe for  
the mid-point of the whole effect. The range of this “dead zone” corresponds  
to the central one-third of the range of the transition indicator. This also  
applies to an auto transition.  
Change in image through transition  
Image at point C  
appears  
Keyframe effect  
B
A
C
Image at point B  
appears  
First keyframe  
Last keyframe  
(dead zone)  
Mid-point of effect  
Image at point A  
appears  
Transition indicator  
Fader lever  
• Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows.  
Channel 1: since the priority is low, it will not be visible on the screen, so  
no particular restrictions apply.  
Channel 2: create the image full-size.  
• In the <Transition Mode> group of the Key Frame >DME User PGM menu,  
select [P In P].  
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 487  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating User Programmable DME Patterns  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
488  
Chapter 7 Frame Memory  
Still Image Operations .............................................................................490  
Preparations .......................................................................................490  
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu ..............................................490  
Selecting an Input Image ...................................................................494  
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory ..................................495  
Capturing an Input Image (Freeze) ....................................................496  
Recalling Still Images .......................................................................500  
Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field Invert Function)  
501  
Image Processing ...............................................................................502  
Image Output .....................................................................................507  
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record) .................................508  
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images (Animation) ........509  
Frame Memory Clip Operations .............................................................512  
Preparations for Operation ................................................................512  
Recalling Clips ..................................................................................512  
Clip Playback ....................................................................................514  
Clip Creation .....................................................................................518  
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders ................................520  
Clip Output ........................................................................................521  
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data .......................................522  
Clip Transition Operations ......................................................................524  
Image Data Management .........................................................................527  
Pair File Processing ...........................................................................527  
Moving Files ......................................................................................528  
Deleting Files ....................................................................................529  
Renaming Files ..................................................................................530  
File Backups ......................................................................................531  
Restoring Files ...................................................................................531  
External Hard Disk Drive Access ...........................................................532  
Hard Disk Formatting ........................................................................533  
Saving Files .......................................................................................533  
Recalling Files ...................................................................................535  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Still Image Operations  
For an overview of frame memory concepts, see “Frame Memory” (page 85).  
Notes  
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the  
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may  
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after  
stopping clip playback.  
• The following sections describe the operations available in the MVS-8000A  
system and MVS-8000G system.  
The MVS-8000 system uses the same menus as those of Version 5.30. For  
its operating procedures, see the User’s Guide of Version 6.00 or earlier.  
Preparations  
Allocating the frame memory outputs (FM1 to FM8) to cross-  
point buttons  
To output a frame memory image to a monitor, for example, the output signal  
from the frame memory (FM1 to FM8) must be allocated to a cross-point  
button. Carry out this allocation in the Setup menu.  
Accessing the Frame Memory menu  
Most frame memory operations are carried out using the Frame Memory menu.  
To access the Frame Memory menu, use either of the following procedures.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [FRAME  
MEM].  
• Press the cross-point button to which the frame memory output is allocated  
twice in rapid succession.  
Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu  
The menu screen consists of the following principal parts.  
The frame memory selection area display is the same for all except the Pattern  
Adjust/Pattern Select/Field Invert/File (excluding Pair Recombination menu)/  
Folder/External HDD menus.  
Still Image Operations  
490  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
1 Auto store status display  
2 Display of available image capacity  
4
Pair selection button  
5 Pair button  
Frame memory  
selection area  
3Target FM  
selection buttons  
7Frame  
memory  
folder  
selection  
area  
6 File selection area  
8Direct  
Recall  
button  
Frame Memory menu  
a Auto store status display  
Depending on the setup settings, this appears when the auto store function is  
enabled.  
b Display of available image capacity  
This shows the remaining number of frames. When no more frames can be  
stored, in pair mode “1” or “0” appears in red, and in single mode “0” appears  
in red.  
The lower figure shows the remaining number of frames that can be used as  
extended clips.  
Still Image Operations 491  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c Target FM selection buttons  
Ancillary data-attached clip display  
Extended clip display  
Status display  
Still/duration display  
Reposition/Lock status display  
The border color shows the status as follows:  
Blue: selected as the reference channel  
Amber: selected, but not the reference channel  
Black: not selected  
Press one of these to select which of the selected outputs (FM1 and FM2 in the  
example shown) the operation applies to.  
The following information appears on the button.  
Status display  
File name (e.g. image001) and thumbnail: when a file is output  
Black: when a black signal is output  
Through: when the input image is output  
Freeze: when a freeze is output  
Composite: when a composite image is processed  
Record: when continuously capturing images (record)  
Still/duration display  
When a still image is selected, “Still” is shown. When a clip is selected, a  
duration indication such as “00:00:10” is shown.  
Reposition/Lock status display  
This shows “R” when the reposition function (see page 507) is on, and shows  
“L” when the lock function (see page 508) is on.  
Extended clip display  
For an extended clip, an “E” appears.  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
492  
 
Ancillary data-attached clip display  
For an ancillary data attached clip, an “A” appears.  
d Pair selection button  
Select the pair to be displayed in the target FM selection buttons.  
(in the following figure, the pair of FM1 and FM2 is selected.)  
Status display  
The border color shows the status as follows:  
Blue: selected as the reference channel  
Amber: selected, but not the reference channel  
Black: not selected  
The following information appears on the button.  
Status display  
For a pair, shows the status for the reference.  
Thumbnail: when a file is output  
Black: when a black signal is output  
Through: when the input image is output  
Freeze: when a freeze is output  
Compos: when a composite image is processed  
Record: when continuously capturing images (record)  
e Pair button  
Press this button, turning it on, to enable pair mode.  
f File selection area  
You can select from the displayed still image files or clip files.  
Still Image Operations 493  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File information detail display  
Selected file.  
When a pair file is selected each press switches the front and the back.  
Thumbnail indications  
Still image files and clip files: Still image files are displayed as gray buttons  
and clip files are displayed as yellow buttons.  
Single files and pair files: Single files are displayed with shadow and pair files  
are displayed with no shadow.  
Selected file: Pale blue border. When more than one file is selected, only the  
first is pale blue, and the remainders are amber. If the pair file was selected,  
each press switches the front and the back.  
File information detail display  
For the selected file, this shows the file name, “P” if a pair file, “E” if an  
extended clip, “A” if an ancillary data attached clip, and the duration.  
g Frame memory folder selection area  
Select the frame memory folder to be displayed.  
h Direct Recall button  
Toggle on and off the direct recall mode in which pressing a thumbnail  
immediately recalls the file.  
Selecting an Input Image  
For the input image to frame memory, you can use either the signal selected on  
one of the two frame memory source buses or a dedicated color matte signal.  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
494  
     
When using the signal on frame memory source bus 1 or 2 for the input image,  
select the signal as described below.  
For the method of using a color matte signal, see “Freezing an image and  
writing it to memory” (page 496).  
Selecting the signal on a frame memory source bus  
As an example, to select a signal on frame memory source bus 1, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
In the auxiliary bus control block, press the AUX delegation button to  
which frame memory source bus 1 is allocated, turning it on.  
For allocation of buses to the AUX delegation buttons, see “AUX  
Delegation Buttons Settings (Aux Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume  
2).  
In the auxiliary bus control block cross-point buttons, select the signal to  
be used for the input image.  
To select a signal with a key or DME effect applied on the frame  
memory source bus  
In the key control block, press the [FM FEED] button, turning it on.  
This automatically assigns the key fill and key source signals being keyed by  
the currently selected keyer to frame memory source buses 1 and 2.  
When DME is selected on the keyer, the key fill and key source signals to  
which a DME effect is applied are assigned.  
Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory  
Selecting outputs (FM) and target frame memory  
The following description applies to the case of settings for FM1&2, but the  
procedures are similar for the other cases.  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, press one of VF1 to VF4, and select the  
required HF menu.  
The current status of frame memory appears. (See page 490).  
2
From the pair selection buttons, press the buttons corresponding to FM1  
and FM2.  
This assigns the signals to FM1 and FM2.  
Still Image Operations 495  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To the right of the target FM selection buttons, the FM1 and FM2 output  
status appears (see page 492).  
3
4
If required, press [Pair], to select the FM operation mode (pair mode).  
On: Operate on FM1(3, 5, 7) and FM2(4, 6, 8) as a pair.  
Off: Operate on FM1(3, 5, 7) and FM2(4, 6, 8) individually.  
For more details, see “Pair mode” (page 87).  
Note  
In the Pair Recombination menu, the [Pair] operation is not possible.  
Press the target FM selection button [FM1] or [FM2] (see page 492) to  
select the FM operations apply to.  
When [Pair] is On: Whichever of FM1 and FM2 you press, the pair is  
selected.  
When [Pair] is Off: One of the targets must be selected. However, in the  
Clip >Play menu you can also select both FM1 and FM2.  
Selecting a frame memory folder  
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area (see page 494).  
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum of  
12 folders.  
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.  
Capturing an Input Image (Freeze)  
Freezing an image and writing it to memory  
To freeze the signal selected as input material, and write it to memory, use the  
following procedure.  
1
2
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF2 ‘Freeze/Store.’  
The Freeze/Store menu appears.  
Select the target frame memory.  
For the procedure, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and target frame  
memory” (page 495).  
3
To enable V/K mode, press [V/K Mode] turning it on.  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
496  
             
4
5
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the  
folder to hold the freeze image.  
For details of the selection method, see page 496.  
Note  
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze  
image.  
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following  
step 5.  
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.  
Press [Freeze Enable], turning it on.  
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair  
of FMs selected in step 2, a freeze is now possible.  
6
7
If necessary, make the video process settings (see page 498) or mask  
settings (see page 499) for application to the selected signal.  
In the state in which you want to freeze, press one of the following in the  
<Freeze> group, to write the freeze image to temporary memory.  
Frame: Freeze one frame.  
Field: Freeze one field.  
Off: Release the freeze, and delete the recorded freeze image.  
After carrying out the freeze, to return to the state immediately before the  
freeze, press [Undo] in the <Freeze> group.  
Notes  
• All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system  
is powered off.  
• If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the  
freeze images written to temporary memory, all the freeze images in  
temporary memory are lost, unless the auto store function has been  
enabled in setup. With the auto store function enabled, the freeze images  
written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame  
memory selection is changed.  
• For the following signal formats, a field freeze is not possible.  
1080PsF/23.976, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/29.97, 720P/  
50, 720P/59.94  
Still Image Operations 497  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving a freeze image  
To save a captured still image in a file, use the following procedure in the Still  
>Freeze/Store menu.  
1
2
Press [Store].  
The keyboard window (see page 331) appears.  
In the keyboard window, enter the file name (maximum 8 characters).  
Note  
The following names cannot be used:  
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2,  
COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9  
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,  
LPT9  
3
In the keyboard window, press the [Enter] button.  
This saves the still image file in memory.  
The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of “Freezing an image  
and writing it to memory.”  
If the entered folder name already exists, a message to confirm overwriting  
appears.  
When the system is powered off, the file saved in memory is erased.  
However, you can recall a backed up file in the Frame Memory menu.  
For details, see “File Backups” (page 531), and “Restoring backed up  
files” (page 531).  
Carrying out a freeze and store simultaneously  
Press [Freeze & Store], turning it on.  
The system enters the freeze and store mode.  
In this state, if you press [Frame] or [Field], this carries out a freeze, and  
simultaneously stores in a still image file.  
Setting video processing  
To set video processing for the signal selected on a frame memory source bus,  
use the following procedure in the Still >Freeze/Store menu.  
1
2
In the <Video Process> group, press [Video Process], turning it on.  
Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters.  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
498  
     
Knob  
Parameter  
Video Gain  
Y Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
5
Overall gain of the video signal  
Y signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–7.31 to +109.59  
C Gain  
Chrominance signal gain  
Hue delay  
Hue Delay  
Black Level Y signal black level  
To return the settings to the default values, press [Unity] in the <Video  
Process> group.  
Note  
When a pair setting is active, it is coupled to the video process on/off  
setting, but the above parameter settings are only valid for frame memory  
source bus 1. The pair setting cannot be used to set the frame memory  
source bus 2. If you want to set video process for frame memory source bus  
1 only with the pair setting when old settings for frame memory source bus  
2 remain, return the frame memory source bus 2 settings to their default  
values. When setting video process for the frame memory source bus 2,  
disable the pair setting.  
Setting a mask  
Masks can be set separately for frame memory source buses 1 and 2. To apply  
a mask to the signal selected on frame memory source bus 1, for example, use  
the following procedure in the Still >Freeze/Store menu.  
1
2
Press [Box Mask] turning it on.  
Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Top  
Adjustment  
Top position  
Left position  
Right position  
Bottom position  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
Left  
Right  
Bottom  
3
To link the masks on frame memory source buses 1 and 2, press [Mask  
Link], turning it on.  
Still Image Operations 499  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recalling Still Images  
Recalling a still image  
To recall a still image file saved in memory using the thumbnails, and assign it  
to an FM output, use the following procedure.  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF1 ‘Recall.’  
The Recall menu appears.  
• When [Pair] is on, only pair files (pairs of main file and sub file) are  
displayed.  
Sub file  
Main file  
• When [Pair] is off, both single files and pair files appear.  
Single file  
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM to be assigned. (See  
page 495.)  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
500  
   
3
4
If [Direct Recall] is on, press and turn it off.  
Select the desired folder in the folder selection area.  
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum  
of 12 folders.  
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.  
5
Using the arrow keys or turning the knob, scroll the file thumbnail display.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Scroll  
Thumbnail display  
scrolling  
1 and upwards  
6
7
Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall.  
Press [Recall].  
This recalls the still image file, which is assigned to the FM you selected  
in step 2.  
To recall in direct recall mode  
Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file.  
In this mode, only the front thumbnail file is recalled.  
1
2
In step 7 above, instead of pressing [Recall], press [Direct Recall].  
Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall.  
This immediately recalls the file.  
To display the subsidiary file in front  
With the direct recall mode on, press [Sub Display], turning it on.  
Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image (Field  
Invert Function)  
Note  
This function is valid when the signal format is HD (excluding 720P).  
However, it is not valid if the frame memory saving mode is set to “save with  
ancillary data.”  
Still Image Operations 501  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To invert the field polarity of a saved still image  
1
2
3
In the Frame Memory >Still menu, press HF7 ‘Field Invert.’  
The Field Invert menu appears.  
This automatically switches pair mode off, and the status area shows  
thumbnails of all images currently saved in frame memory.  
Press the arrow keys or turn the knob to scroll the thumbnail display.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Scroll  
Scroll thumbnail display  
1 and upwards  
Select the thumbnail of the still image on which you want to carry out field  
inversion. You can also select more than one image.  
To select all still images, press [Select All].  
The file names for the selected still images appear in reverse video.  
To cancel the selection, press once more, returning to the normal display.  
The last still image selected is automatically recalled, and a pale blue  
border appears around the thumbnail.  
You can now select thumbnails while checking the still images.  
4
To carry out field inversion, press [Field Invert].  
Field inversion starts, and a popup window shows the progress of the  
operation.  
Note  
When the system is powered off, files held in memory are lost, but backed-up  
files can be recalled in the Frame Memory menu.  
For details, see “File Backups” on page 531 and “Restoring Files” on page  
531.  
Image Processing  
Combining the background image and input signal  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF3 ‘Composite.’  
The Composite menu appears.  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
502  
   
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM to be assigned. (See  
page 495.)  
3
4
To select V/K mode, press [V/K Mode], turning it on.  
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the  
folder to hold the freeze image.  
For details of the selection method, see page 496.  
Note  
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze  
image.  
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following  
step 5.  
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.  
Press [Edit Enable], turning it on.  
5
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair  
of FMs selected in step 2, and the combining of the background signal (the  
signal providing the background for combination) and the input signal (the  
signal providing the foreground for combination) is now possible.  
Note  
The input signal is lowered by one line, but when you apply a freeze, the  
freeze image is returned to the correct position.  
6
7
To use a color matte signal for the input signal, press [Frgd Color], turning  
it on.  
Even when pair mode is enabled, you can make separate settings for each  
FM.  
Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
8
If you turned [Frgd Color] off in step 6, if required press [Input Adjust] to  
display the Input Adjust menu, and make the video process (see page 498)  
and mask (see page 499) settings for the input signal.  
Still Image Operations 503  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
To set the background signal to black, press [Bkgd Black], turning it on.  
Notes  
• When the background signal is originally black, [Bkgd Black] remains  
on.  
• When the background signal is a freeze image (an image frozen, but not  
saved), turning [Bkgd Black] on erases the unsaved freeze image and, as  
a result, [Bkgd Black] remains on.  
10In the <Type> group, set the type of combination (see page 505).  
11In the state in which you want to freeze, press one of the following in the  
<Freeze> group, to write the freeze image to temporary memory.  
Frame: Freeze one frame.  
Field: Freeze one field.  
Off: Release the freeze, and delete the recorded freeze image.  
After carrying out the freeze, to return to the state immediately before the  
freeze, press [Undo] in the <Freeze> group.  
Notes  
• All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system  
is powered off.  
• If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the  
freeze images written to temporary memory, all the freeze images in  
temporary memory are lost, unless the auto store function has been  
enabled in setup. With the auto store function enabled, the freeze images  
written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame  
memory selection is changed.  
• For the following signal formats, a field freeze is not possible.  
1080PsF/23.976, 1080PsF/24, 1080PsF/25, 1080PsF/29.97, 720P/50,  
720P/59.94  
Saving a processed freeze image  
To save a processed freeze image as a file, in the Still >Composite menu use  
the following procedure.  
1
Press [Store].  
The keyboard window appears.  
2
3
In the keyboard window, enter the file name (maximum eight characters).  
In the keyboard window press [Enter].  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
504  
This saves the freeze image as a still image file in memory.  
The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of “Combining the  
background image and input signal” (page 502).  
If the entered folder name already exists, a message to confirm overwriting  
appears.  
Selecting the way in which images are combined  
To select the way in which the background image and input signal are  
combined (see page 90), use the following procedure.  
1
In the <Type> group of the Still >Composite menu, select one of the  
following methods of combination.  
• Pattern Key: pattern key  
• Ext Key: external key  
(This can only be selected when the pair mode is enabled. The signal  
selected on the frame memory source 2 bus is used as the key signal.)  
• Mix: mix  
• Nam: non-additive mix  
If none of the above is selected, image combination is not carried out.  
2
Depending on the selection in step 1, set the following parameters.  
• When [Pattern Key] is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Size of pattern  
Soft  
Edge softness of pattern  
Pattern number  
a)  
Pattern  
1 to 24  
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix  
(Volume 1) (page 560).  
• When [Ext Key] is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Clip  
Reference level for key  
signal generation  
+109.59 to –7.31  
2
Gain  
Key sensitivity  
–100.00 to +100.00  
• When [Mix] is selected  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Mix Rate  
Mix proportion  
0.00 to 100.00  
Still Image Operations 505  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
When you selected a pattern key, press [Pattern Adjust].  
The Pattern Adjust menu appears. In the menu, set the pattern modifiers as  
required.  
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–100.00 to +100.00  
–100.00 to +100.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
a) See page 65.  
• When turning [Multi] on and replicating the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of  
pattern horizontally  
1 to 63  
2
3
V Multi  
Number of repetitions of  
pattern vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
Invert Type  
Replication layout  
1 to 4  
a) See page 68.  
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
• When turning [Rotation Angle] on and inclining the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
To select the pattern, display the Pattern Select menu by pressing [Pattern  
Select] in the Pattern Adjust menu. You can change the pattern selected in  
step 2 here. After selecting one of the patterns (standard wipe patterns 1 to  
24) displayed in the Pattern Select menu, you can adjust the following  
parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Soft  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
506  
4
When you selected a pattern key or external key, if required press [Key  
Invert] in the Still >Composite menu to invert the key.  
Image Output  
There are two functions related to image output: the reposition function for  
moving the output image, and the lock function for fixing the output image.  
For an overview of the image output, see page 90.  
Moving the output image (reposition function)  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF3 ‘Reposition/Lock’ and HF1  
‘Reposition.’  
The Reposition menu appears. In this menu, you can also enable the V/K  
mode (see page 496).  
2
3
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM output. (See page 495.)  
In the <Reposition> group, select the movement mode (see page 90).  
Normal: Move in normal mode.  
Black&White: Move in black & white mode.  
4
With the knobs, adjust the parameters to move the image.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Move in horizontal direction  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Move in vertical direction  
a) See page 65.  
The surroundings of the moved image on the screen are filled with black.  
5
To return the image moved by the reposition function to the center  
position, in the <Reposition> group press [Center].  
Note  
It is not possible to write the image moved by the reposition function  
directly to frame memory.  
Still Image Operations 507  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fixing the output image selection (lock function)  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF3 ‘Reposition/Lock’ and HF2  
‘Lock.’  
The Lock menu appears.  
2
3
In the frame memory selection area, select the FM output. (See page 495.)  
Press [Lock], turning it on.  
This fixes the currently selected frame memory output image.  
To release the lock, set [Lock] to off.  
Continuously Capturing Still Images (Record)  
Continuously freezing input images and writing to memory  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF4 ‘Animation  
Record.’  
The Animation Record menu appears.  
Select the desired frame memory.  
2
For details of the operating procedures, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and  
target frame memory” (page 495).  
3
4
To use V/K mode, press [V/K Mode], turning it on.  
Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area, to select the  
folder to hold the freeze image.  
For details of the selection method, see page 496.  
Note  
The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze  
image.  
It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following  
step 5.  
An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder.  
Press [Record Enable], turning it on.  
5
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
508  
       
The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair  
of FMs selected in step 2, the recording function is now possible.  
6
7
Input the file name if required.  
Pressing [File Name] displays the keyboard window and you can enter the  
first character string (up to four characters) of the file name.  
Set the recording time if required.  
Pressing [Duration] displays the numeric keypad window, in which you  
can enter the recording time in the form of timecode.  
If you set the recording time to zero, this uses all frame memory in which  
storing is possible for recording.  
8
9
If required, set video processing for the selected signal.  
For details of the operating procedures, see “Setting video processing”  
(page 498).  
Press [Record], to start recording.  
When the recording time is set, recording stops once the time has elapsed.  
10Press [Stop] to stop recording.  
Even if the recording time is set, you can still stop recording before the set  
time has elapsed.  
Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images  
(Animation)  
To recall a continuous sequence of still images, create an effect in the user  
region with the still image files as a keyframe, and run the created effect.  
Note  
With the 720P format, you can continuously recall images using the frame  
memory in units of two frames only.  
Creating an effect with still image files as a keyframe  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF1 ‘Still’ and HF5 ‘Create Key  
Frame.’  
The Create Key Frame menu appears.  
Still Image Operations 509  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• A thumbnail appears for each group of files having the same characters,  
except for the last three characters, in the file name.  
• When [Pair] is on, only pair files (each pair comprising a main file and  
a sub file) appear.  
• When [Pair] is off, both single files and pair files all appear.  
2
In the frame memory selection area, select the frame memory to be  
assigned.  
This creates the effect in the user region to which the selected frame  
memory is assigned.  
For details of the operating procedures, see “Selecting outputs (FM) and  
target frame memory” (page 495).  
3
4
Select the desired folder in the folder selection area.  
By pressing [More] to switch the display, you can select from a maximum  
of 12 folders.  
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.  
Turn the knob to select the register number in the user region.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
5
Register  
Effect register number  
1 to 99  
Note  
To search for an empty register in the user region, use the numeric keypad  
control block (see step 3 of “Recalling a Register” in Chapter 13  
(Volume 2)).  
5
Use the arrow keys or turn the knobs to scroll the thumbnail display of the  
files.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Scroll  
Thumbnail display  
scrolling  
1 and upwards  
6
7
Select the thumbnail of the files to be used for the keyframe.  
If necessary, turn the knob to check the animation effect in the thumbnail  
display.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
3
Viewer  
Animate thumbnail display 00:00:00 and upwards  
of files  
Still Image Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
510  
8
9
Using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block,  
select one of the regions (User1 to User8) to which the frame memory  
output signals have been assigned.  
Carry out either of the following.  
• To clear the effect register selected in step 4, and create a new effect:  
press [Create Key Frame].  
• To add to the end of the effect register selected in step 4, press [Append  
Key Frame].  
A confirmation message for creating the effect appears.  
If there is an inappropriate condition for creating the effect, an error  
message appears.  
For details of error messages, see “Error Messages” in the Appendix  
(Volume 2).  
10Press [OK].  
This creates the effect in the selected user region register.  
To cancel creating the effect  
Press [Cancel].  
Notes  
• The effect is built with the selected files, in increasing order of the last three  
characters of the file name. If you do not want to include some of these files  
in the effect, first delete or rename them.  
• A maximum of 99 keyframes can be included in a single effect.  
Recalling a sequence of still images  
Run the effect created by the foregoing procedure.  
The procedure for doing this is the same as for any other effect.  
For details, see “Executing Effects” in Chapter 13 (Volume 2).  
Still Image Operations 511  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
For an overview of frame memory clip concepts, see “Frame Memory Clip  
Function” (page 92).  
Notes  
• The frame memory clip function is supported on the MVS-8000A/8000G  
only.  
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the  
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may  
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after  
stopping clip playback.  
Preparations for Operation  
The preparations for using a frame memory clip (hereafter, a “clip”) are the  
same as for a still image operation. See “Preparations” (page 490) and  
“Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory” (page 495).  
Recalling Clips  
Recalling a clip  
You can recall a clip from each of frame memories 1 to 8.  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF1 ‘Recall.’  
The Recall menu appears. (See following figure)  
• When [Pair] is set to On, only pair files (sets of main file and sub file)  
are shown.  
• When [Pair] is set to Off, both of single files and pair files are shown.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
512  
       
Frame memory  
folder selection area  
Target selection buttons  
Pair selection buttons  
Frame memory  
selection area  
Clip file selection area  
Direct Recall button  
2
In the frame memory selection area, select an assigned target FM. (See  
page 495)  
Note  
For the MVS-8000A, if other than FM1 and FM2 is selected, extended  
clips are not displayed.  
3
4
If [Direct Recall] is on, press the button, turning it off.  
In the folder selection area, select the desired folder.  
By pressing [More] to switch the displays, you can select from a maximum  
of 12 folders.  
Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear.  
5
Using the arrow keys or turning the knob, scroll the file thumbnail display.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Scroll  
Thumbnail display  
scrolling  
1 and upwards  
Frame Memory Clip Operations 513  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
7
Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall.  
Press [Recall].  
This recalls the clip file, which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2.  
In pair mode, if a clip is selected, the main file is output to FM1, and the  
sub file to FM2. In single mode, when only one of FM1 and FM2 is  
selected, the front file on the thumbnail is output.  
To recall in direct recall mode  
Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file.  
In this mode, only the front thumbnail file is recalled.  
1
2
In step 7 above, instead of pressing [Recall], press [Direct Recall].  
Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall.  
This immediately recalls the file.  
To display the subsidiary file in front  
With the direct recall mode on, press [Sub Display], turning it on.  
Clip Playback  
You can play a recalled clip by a menu operation or by using the device control  
block.  
Note  
With a pair file recalled, it is possible to set [Pair] to Off and carry out a single  
file operation, but if you then set [Pair] to On again, the output of frame  
memory may be black. In such cases it is necessary to recall the pair file once  
more.  
Playing a clip using the menu  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF2 ‘Play.’  
The Play menu appears. The status of the clip shown in the current target  
FM selection buttons appears here.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
514  
 
Status buttons  
Current position  
(red bar)  
These show the timecode values for  
the start point, current position, and  
end point.  
Playback start point  
(pale blue bar)  
Playback end point  
(yellow bar)  
2
3
4
When [Pair] is Off, press a target FM selection button to select the target.  
To set loop playback, press [Loop], turning it on.  
To start playback, press [Play]. During playback, to stop, press [Stop].  
To cue up  
Press [Cue].  
To play the image at the beginning of the clip (Clip Begin)  
Press [Rewind].  
To play the image at the end of the clip (Clip End)  
Press [FF].  
Frame Memory Clip Operations 515  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To specify the playback start point  
To set the current position as the playback start point, in the <Start TC> group,  
press [Set]. To set a different position, press the [Start] status button, and enter  
a timecode value from the numeric keypad window.  
To specify the playback stop point  
Start playback, and at the desired position press the [STOP] button to stop  
playback, then in the <Stop TC> group, press [Set]. To set to any position,  
press the [Stop] status button, and enter a timecode value from the numeric  
keypad window.  
To change the current position  
To change the current position, press the [Current] status button, and enter a  
timecode value from the numeric keypad window.  
Using the device control block (search dial) to play back clips  
Carry out the following operation with the device control block (search dial).  
Note  
A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation.  
1
With the device selection buttons, select the frame memory clip to be  
played (FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP).  
If the pair mode is on, both main and subsidiary FMs light.  
Press the [PLAY] button, turning it on.  
2
To stop playback, press [STOP] or any of the [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],  
[REW], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons.  
For details of the buttons in the device control block (search dial), see  
“Device Control Block (Search Dial)” (page 278) in Chapter 2.  
To specify the playback start point  
To make the current position the playback start point, press the [START TC]  
button. To set a different position, press the [SET START TC] button, then  
enter the timecode from the numeric keypad control block.  
To specify the duration  
Press the [SET DUR] button, and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad  
control block. If the playback start point is already set, this automatically sets  
the playback stop point. If the playback stop point is already set, this  
automatically sets the playback start point. (The duration setting is not  
displayed in the device control block.)  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
516  
 
To specify the playback stop point  
Start playback, and at the desired position press the [STOP] button to stop  
playback, then press the [STOP TC] button. To set to any position, press the  
[SET STOP TC] button, and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad control  
block.  
To carry out the variable speed playback  
Use the search dial.  
For details on using the search dial, see “Controlling the Tape/Disk  
Transport” in Chapter 12 (Volume 2).  
To apply a loop to a frame memory clip  
Press the [LOOP] button.  
Using the device control block (trackball) or device control block  
(joystick) to play back clips  
Carry out the following operation with the device control block (trackball) or  
device control block (joystick).  
Note  
A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation.  
1
Press the [DEV] button in the region selection buttons, and select the frame  
memory clip for playback (FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP).  
If the pair mode is on, both main and subsidiary FMs light.  
Press the [PLAY] button, turning it on.  
2
To stop playback, press [STOP] or any of the [SHTL], [JOG], [CUE],  
[REW], [FF], and [ALL STOP] buttons.  
For details of the buttons in the device control block (trackball) or device  
control block (joystick), see “Device Control Block (Trackball)” (page 271) in  
Chapter 2.  
For details of the playback start point, stop point, and duration settings, see the  
previous item, “Using the device control block (search dial) to play back clips”  
(page 516).  
To carry out the variable speed playback  
Press any of the [SHTL], [JOG], and [VAR] buttons, then turn the Z-ring or  
move the joystick. The image changes in the forward direction when you turn  
the Z-ring clockwise, and in the reverse direction when you turn it  
Frame Memory Clip Operations 517  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
counterclockwise. Move the joystick to the right for the forward direction and  
to the left for the reverse direction.  
When you pressed the [JOG] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding  
to the turning speed of the Z-ring or the movement speed of the joystick.  
When you pressed the [SHTL] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding  
to the rotation angle of the Z-ring or amount of movement of the joystick.  
When you pressed the [VAR] button: Playback is at a speed corresponding  
to the rotation angle of the Z-ring or amount of movement of the joystick,  
in the range –1 to +3 times normal speed.  
Clip Creation  
You save a movie as a clip.  
Note  
If the number of frame memory clips exceed 100 single files (50 pair files), an  
error appears.  
Using the menu to record clips  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 ‘Clip’ and HF3 ‘Record.’  
The Record menu appears.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
518  
 
Frame memory  
selection area  
Pair selection  
buttons  
Operation target  
selection buttons  
Folder selection  
area  
2
3
4
With [Pair] off, press the operation target selection button, to select the  
operation target.  
In the folder selection area, select the folder containing the clip to be  
recorded.  
In the <Record Enable> group, select the clip type.  
• To record a normal clip, press [Clip].  
• To record an extended clip, press [Ext Clip].  
5
To set the clip name, press [Name].  
A keyboard window appears.  
6
7
8
Enter the clip name, and press Enter.  
To start recording, press [Record Start].  
To end recording, press [Record Stop].  
Frame Memory Clip Operations 519  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To set the clip duration  
1
2
Press [Clip Duration].  
A numeric keypad window appears.  
Enter a timecode value or number of frames, and press Enter.  
This confirms the clip duration.  
Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders  
You can create, rename, and delete frame memory folders.  
Creating a new folder  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF5 ‘Folder.’  
The Folder menu appears. The status area shows a list of the current folder  
settings.  
2
3
Select [New].  
A keyboard window appears.  
Enter the folder name, and press Enter.  
This confirms the folder name.  
Changing the folder name  
1
In the Frame Memory >Folder menu, select the folder with the arrow keys  
or by turning the knobs.  
Knob  
Parameter  
No.  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1 to 12  
1
2
Folder selection  
Num  
Number of files to select  
1 to 12  
consecutively from selected file  
2
3
Press [Rename].  
A keyboard window appears.  
Enter the new folder name, and press Enter.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
520  
 
Note  
The following names cannot be used for folders:  
Default, Flash1, Flash2  
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2,  
COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9  
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8,  
LPT9  
This changes the folder name.  
Deleting a folder  
1
In the Frame Memory >Folder menu, select the folder with the arrow keys  
or by turning the knobs.  
Knob  
Parameter  
No.  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1 to 12  
1
2
Folder selection  
Num  
Number of files to select  
1 to 12  
consecutively from selected file  
To select all folders, select [All].  
2
3
Press [Delete].  
A confirmation message appears.  
To carry out the deletion select [Yes], and to cancel the deletion select  
[No].  
Note  
It is not possible to delete the default folder (named “Default”).  
Clip Output  
As for still image operation, you can use the reposition and lock functions.  
For details of the operation, see “Image Output” (page 507).  
Frame Memory Clip Operations 521  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data  
Preparations  
To record ancillary data, it is first necessary in the Setup menu to select “save  
with ancillary data” as the frame memory saving mode (see “Saving a frame  
memory clip including ancillary data” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
Recording ancillary data  
To record ancillary data in a frame memory clip, use the Frame Memory >Clip  
>Record menu.  
For details of the operating sequence, see “Clip Creation” (page 518).  
To check ancillary data during recording  
If the ancillary data to be recorded is embedded audio, by first setting the signal  
output to through mode, you can listen while recording.  
For the method of setting the signal output to through mode, see “Signal  
Output Settings (Output Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Note  
For [Freeze Enable] or [Record Enable], in the <Record Enable> group,  
pressing [Clip] or [Ext Clip] to turn them on or off may result in noise. Also,  
with these buttons in the On state, selecting the signal on the frame memory  
source bus may result in noise.  
Playing back ancillary data  
You can play ancillary data recorded in a frame memory clip by normal  
playback or an auto transition of the clip transition.  
To play the ancillary data, you must use the following procedure to enable  
playback of the ancillary data. For the subsequent playback operation, see  
“Clip Playback” (page 514).  
Notes  
• After recording a frame memory clip, the ancillary data state is enabled for  
playback.  
• To play back the clip, set the signal output to through mode. For the method  
of setting through mode, see “Signal Output Settings (Output Menu)” in  
Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
• When the reposition function is on, ancillary data cannot be played back.  
• Switching reposition function between on and off may cause noise.  
• Only the AUX bus and edit preview bus can output ancillary data.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations  
522  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• On the MVS-8000A playing back ancillary data is only possible for FM1,  
FM3, FM5, and FM7. For FM2, FM4, FM6, and FM8, ancillary data cannot  
be played back. On the MVS-8000G there are no such restrictions.  
• For loop playback of clips in the following video formats, the loop playback  
range must be at least 5 frames, and set to a multiple of 5 frames.  
– 480/59.94i  
– 720/59.94P  
– 1080/59.94i  
– 1080/29.97PsF  
• Recalling operations of still images or clips can cause noise.  
• Carrying out file operations on a frame memory clip may result in the  
ancillary data being discontinuous, or in noise occurring. However, if the  
first or last frame of the clip is deleted, noise will not occur.  
• The audio sampling frequency is always 48 kHz.  
• When you play back the recorded embedded audio, depending on the device  
to be used, noises are produced at the playback start point and end point. For  
details of devices that are used for playback, contact your Sony service or  
sales representative.  
1
2
3
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF2 “Clip”, HF5 “Ancillary Enable.”  
Select the frame memory folder and file to be played back.  
Set the [Ancillary Enable] button to On.  
Frame Memory Clip Operations 523  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clip Transition Operations  
For an overview of clip transitions, see “Frame Memory Clip Function” (page  
92).  
Notes  
• The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS-8000A/8000G.  
• When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, if one of the wipe  
direction selection buttons in the transition control block is lit, it indicates the  
direction of clip playback.  
Setting a clip transition  
The following example describes the case of a clip transition using FM 1&2  
Clip on the M/E-1 bank.  
Note  
To use a clip transition effectively, the image from the frame memory clip  
being played back during the clip transition should be seen in the M/E-1  
program output. For example, inserting a key using frame memory output 1 and  
frame memory output 2.  
1
2
Display the M/E-1 >Misc >Transition menu, and in the <Transition Type>  
group select “FM1&2 Clip.”  
Press [Clip Transition].  
The Clip Transition menu appears.  
Clip Transition Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
524  
     
Clip transition display area  
Background transition display area  
Clip display area  
3
Press the [Clip] button.  
The Clip menu appears, and the status area shows a list of clips.  
Select the clip to use in the clip transition.  
4
5
Return to the Clip Transition menu, and in the <BKGD Transition Type>  
group, select the background transition type.  
Note  
For details of the background transition selected here, see the various  
adjustments in the M/E-1 >Misc >Transition menu.  
6
7
In the <Select> group, press [BKGD Transition].  
Use either of the following methods to set the background transition start  
point independently of the clip playback timing.  
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <BKGD  
Transition Set Timing> group press [Start].  
Clip Transition Operations 525  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames. (The left end of the reference  
axis (see following figure) is the position of frame 0.)  
Position of frame 0  
Reference axis  
8
9
Using either of the following methods, set the end point of the background  
transition.  
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <BKGD  
Transition Set Timing> group press [Stop].  
• Turn knob 2 to set the number of frames.  
If Wipe or DME Wipe is selected in the <BKGD Transition Type> group,  
in the <BKGD Transition Direction> group, select the background  
transition direction.  
10In the <Select> group, press [FM 1&2 Clip].  
11Using either of the following methods, set the start point of the clip.  
• Move the fader lever to the desired position, and in the <Clip Transition  
SetTiming> group press [Start].  
• Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames. (The left end of the reference  
axis (see following figure) is the position of frame 0.)  
Note  
It is not possible to set the end point.  
12In the <Clip Transition Direction> group, select the playback direction of  
the clip.  
To reset the start point and end point  
Press [Timing Reset].  
The background transition start point and end point, and the clip start point are  
all reset.  
Clip Transition Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
526  
Image Data Management  
You can carry out the following operations on the files in which images are  
saved.  
• Pair file processing  
• Move  
• Delete  
• Rename  
• Backup  
• Restore  
For an overview of file management, see page 94.  
Notes  
• The following sections describe the operations available in the MVS-8000A  
system and MVS-8000G system.  
The MVS-8000 system uses the same menus as those of Version 5.30. For  
its operating procedures, see the User’s Guide of Version 6.00 or earlier.  
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the  
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may  
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after  
stopping clip playback.  
Pair File Processing  
You can create a pair file from two single files. In the reverse direction, you  
can split a pair file into two single files.  
Creating a pair file from two single files  
Note  
Carrying out the following operation automatically switches [Pair] to On.  
The following description applies to the case of FM1&2, but the procedures are  
similar for the other cases.  
1
2
In the Frame Memory >Still >Recall menu or Frame Memory >Clip  
>Recall menu, recall the two single files you want to convert to a pair file,  
to FM1 and FM2.  
Select the folder in which the file to be moved is stored.  
Image Data Management 527  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
4
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF1 ‘Pair  
Recombination.’  
The Pair Recombination menu appears.  
Press [Couple].  
This converts the files output to FM1 and FM2 to a pair.  
Splitting a pair file into two single files  
Note  
Carrying out the following operation automatically switches [Pair] to Off.  
The following description applies to the case of FM1and FM2, but the  
procedures are similar for the other cases.  
1
2
In the Frame Memory >Still >Recall menu or Frame Memory >Clip  
>Recall menu, recall the pair file.  
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’and HF1 ‘Pair  
Recombination.’  
The Pair Recombination menu appears.  
3
Press [Separate].  
The FM1 and FM2 pair file is split into separate single files.  
Moving Files  
Moving files  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF5 ‘Move.’  
The Move menu appears. The status area shows files to be moved in the  
upper area, and destination files in the lower area.  
2
3
Select the folder which contains the file to be moved.  
Using any of the following methods, select the file to be moved.  
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the display.  
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Image Data Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
528  
 
Knob  
Parameter  
No  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1 and upwards  
1 and upwards  
1
2
File selection  
Num  
Selection of number of files in  
sequence  
4
5
Select the destination folder and file.  
Press [Move].  
A message for confirming the move appears.  
6
To confirm the move press [Yes], and to cancel press [No].  
Deleting Files  
Deleting files  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF5 ‘Delete.’  
The Delete menu appears. In the status area, whether pair mode is on or  
off, all of the saved files appear as thumbnails.  
2
3
Select the folder which contains the file to be deleted.  
Using either of the following methods, select the file to be deleted. If  
necessary, press the arrow keys to scroll the display.  
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Parameter Adjustment  
Setting values  
1 and upwards  
1 and upwards  
1
2
No  
File selection  
Num  
Selection of number of files in  
sequence  
• To delete all files, press [Select All], turning it on.  
• When a clip thumbnail is selected, the still image files making up the clip  
are also selected for deletion.  
Image Data Management 529  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
If necessary, turn the knob to check the contents of the frame memory clip  
through the thumbnail display.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
3
Viewer  
For a movie, the current frame  
position. For a still image, no effect. upwards  
00:00:00 and  
5
6
Press [Delete].  
A message for confirming the deletion appears.  
To confirm the deletion press [Yes], and to cancel press [No].  
Renaming Files  
Renaming a file  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF6 ‘Rename’  
The Rename menu appears. In the status area, whether pair mode is on or  
off, all of the saved files appear as thumbnails.  
2
Using either of the following methods, select the file to be renamed. If  
necessary, press the arrow keys to scroll the display.  
• Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area.  
• Turn the knobs.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
No  
File selection  
1 and upwards  
3
If necessary, turn the knob check the contents of the frame memory clip  
through the thumbnail display.  
Knob  
Parameter Adjustment  
Viewer For a movie, the current frame  
Setting values  
3
00:00:00 and  
position. For a still image, no effect. upwards  
4
5
Press [Rename].  
A keyboard window appears.  
Enter the new name, then press [Enter] in the keyboard window.  
This renames the file.  
Image Data Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
530  
     
Note  
The following names cannot be used:  
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3,  
COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9  
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9  
File Backups  
To back up a file saved in memory to hard disk, use the following procedure.  
1
2
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF7 ‘Backup/Restore.’  
The Backup/Restore menu appears.  
Press [Backup].  
This backs up the saved file.  
Restoring Files  
Restoring backed up files  
To recall files backed up on the hard disk, use the following procedure.  
1
2
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF4 ‘File’ and HF7 ‘Backup/Restore.’  
The Backup/Restore menu appears.  
Press [Restore].  
This recalls the backed up file.  
Image Data Management 531  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
External Hard Disk Drive Access  
In an MVS-8000A system and MVS-8000G system, you can connect a hard  
disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor, and save and recall  
image data from frame memory.  
Since image data saved in memory is lost when the system is powered off,  
using an external hard disk drive allows required data to be preserved.  
Notes  
• This function is only available on an MVS-8000A/8000G system.  
• Only one hard disk drive can be connected to a single switcher processor.  
• While the hard disk is being accessed, frame memory operations are not  
possible.  
• During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the  
target FM selection buttons (see page 514), frame memory operations may  
not be performed properly. Carry out frame memory operations after  
stopping clip playback.  
Consult your Sony service representative or sales representative about the  
hard disk drives that can be connected.  
Selecting the switcher  
When the system is operating in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher on which  
to carry out formatting, file saving, and file recall operations.  
For details of Dual Simul mode, see “System configuration (System Config)”  
(page 187).  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF1  
‘Format’ or HF2 ‘Backup/Restore.’  
The Format menu or Backup/Restore menu appears.  
2
3
In the region selection area (see page 323), press [SWR].  
A popup window for selecting the switcher appears.  
Press [SWR1] or [SWR2] to select the switcher.  
The button for the selected switcher lights.  
You can select two switchers simultaneously. In this case, the last operated  
button lights green, and the other lights amber. The menu shows the  
information for the switcher lit green.  
External Hard Disk Drive Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
532  
     
4
Press [OK].  
Hard Disk Formatting  
When you connect a hard disk drive for the first time, it is necessary to format  
the hard disk. This partitions the disk, creating five logical drives (FMHDD1  
to FMHDD5).  
1
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF1  
‘Format.’  
The Format menu appears.  
If in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher to operate (see page 532).  
To get the hard disk drive information  
In the button area press [Refresh Status].  
The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk  
drive.  
2
Press [Format].  
A popup window for confirming formatting appears.  
Note  
Carrying out formatting erases any existing data on the hard disk.  
3
4
Press [Yes].  
This starts the hard disk formatting. A progress bar and numerical  
indication appear to show the progress of the operation.  
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Success!!”  
appears.  
Press [OK].  
Saving Files  
You can save all of the files from frame memory to the external hard disk drive.  
Note  
Before carrying out this operation for the first time, it is necessary to format the  
hard disk (see previous item, “Hard Disk Formatting”).  
External Hard Disk Drive Access 533  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
In the Frame Memory menu, select VF6 ‘External HDD’ and HF2  
‘Backup/Restore.’  
The Backup/Restore menu appears.  
If in Dual Simul mode, select the switcher to operate (see page 532).  
To get the hard disk drive information  
Press [Refresh Status].  
The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk  
drive, and the names of directories within the logical drives.  
Using any of the following methods, select a logical drive (FMHDD1 to  
FMHDD5).  
• Press directly on the list to select.  
• Press a button in the <Partition> group.  
• Turn the knob.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Partition  
Logical drive selection  
1 to 5  
3
4
Press [Backup].  
A popup window for confirming file saving appears.  
Note  
When you save the files, all of the saved files in the logical drive is erased  
immediately before the saving operations.  
Press [Yes].  
This starts the file saving operation. If there is no directory in the logical  
drive, a directory is automatically created, and the files are saved within it.  
A progress bar and numerical indication appear to show the progress of the  
operation.  
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Completed.”  
appears.  
5
Press [OK].  
To rename a directory  
Select a directory in the list, and in the button area press [Rename].  
In the keyboard window that appears, enter the new directory name, and press  
[Enter]. The name of a directory is limited to eight characters.  
Note  
The following names cannot be used:  
External Hard Disk Drive Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
534  
CON, PRN, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, COM0, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,  
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9  
LPT0, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9  
Recalling Files  
You can recall all of the saved files on the hard disk drive into frame memory.  
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the procedure “Saving Files” (page 533).  
Note  
It is not possible to select a directory (logical drive) on which files are not  
saved.  
2
Press [Restore].  
A popup window for confirming file recall appears.  
Note  
When you recall the files, any existing data in frame memory is lost  
immediately before the recalling operations.  
3
4
Press [Yes].  
This starts the file recall operation. A progress bar and numerical  
indication appear to show the progress of the operation.  
When the operation is completed, a popup window reading “Completed.”  
appears.  
Press [OK].  
External Hard Disk Drive Access 535  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
External Hard Disk Drive Access  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
536  
Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds  
Color Background Setting Operations ...................................................538  
Color Background Settings Menu .....................................................538  
Basic Color Background Setting Operations .....................................538  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Color Background Setting Operations  
You carry out color background settings in the Color Bkgd menu. This section  
describes the settings menu for color background 1 as an example.  
For an overview of the color background, see page 97.  
Color Background Settings Menu  
Accessing the Color Bkgd1 menu  
Use either of the following operations.  
• In the menu control block, select the top menu selection button [COLOR  
BKGD], and press VF1 ‘Color Bkgd1.’  
• Press a cross-point button assigned to color background 1 twice in rapid  
succession.  
The above operation displays the Color Bkgd1 menu.  
Basic Color Background Setting Operations  
Making a single-color matte (Flat Color)  
If you are not using the “color mix” function to combine two colors, use the  
following procedure.  
1
In the <Matte> group of the Color Bkgd 1 menu, press [Flat Color], turning  
it on.  
You can now adjust color 1.  
Set the following parameters.  
2
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
Color Background Setting Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
538  
           
Making a color combination (color mix)  
To combine color 1 and color 2, use the following procedure.  
1
2
In the <Matte> group of the Color Bkgd1 menu, press [Mix Color], turning  
it on.  
Set the following parameters as required.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
5
Pattern size  
Soft  
Degree of softening of edge  
Pattern number  
a)  
Pattern  
1 to 24  
a) The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe. See “Wipe Pattern List” in Appendix  
(Volume 1) (page 560).  
You can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the [Mix Ptn  
Select] button, to display the Mix Ptn Select menu. Select any pattern  
appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu (standard wipe patterns 1 to 24), and  
you can then adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Size  
Adjustment  
Pattern size  
Edge softness  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
Soft  
3
4
To adjust color 1, set [Color 1] on, and to adjust color 2 set [Color 2] on,  
then adjust the parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Adjustment  
Luminance  
Saturation  
Hue  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
359.99 to 0.00  
1
2
3
If required, set the pattern modifiers.  
• When turning [Position] on and setting the pattern position  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
a)  
1
Position H  
Horizontal position  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
2
Position V  
Vertical position  
a) See page 65.  
• When turning [Multi] on and using replications of the same pattern  
Color Background Setting Operations 539  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
H Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
horizontally  
1 to 63  
2
3
V Multi  
Number of repetitions of pattern  
vertically  
1 to 63  
a)  
Invert Type  
Replication layout  
1 to 4  
a) See page 68.  
• When turning [Aspect] on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Aspect  
Aspect ratio  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 67.  
• When turning [Pairing] on and making a wipe pattern like a  
Venetian blind  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Width  
Width of the slits  
1 to 128 (integer)  
• When turning [Angle] on in the <Rotation> group and slanting the  
pattern  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Angle  
Angle of pattern rotation  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When turning [Speed] on in the <Rotation> group and rotating the  
pattern at a constant rate  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Speed  
Rotation rate of pattern  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 66.  
• When selecting H (horizontal) or V (vertical) in the <Modulation>  
group and applying waviness to the pattern  
(The modulation is always a sine wave.)  
Note  
When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system, the modulation function is  
not available.  
Color Background Setting Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
540  
Knob  
Parameter  
Amplitude  
Frequency  
Speed  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0.00 to 100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
1
2
3
Amplitude of modulation  
Frequency of modulation  
Speed of waves  
a)  
–100.00 to +100.00  
a) See page 70.  
5
To interchange color 1 and color 2, press the [Color Invert] button, turning  
it on.  
Color Background Setting Operations 541  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color Background Setting Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
542  
Chapter 9 Copy and Swap  
Basic Copy and Swap Operations ...........................................................544  
Copy and Swap Menu Operations .....................................................544  
Copy by Button Operation ................................................................545  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Copy and Swap Operations  
Copy and Swap Menu Operations  
There are two ways of carrying out a copy operation: by using the menus or by  
a simple button operation. Swap operations, and operations on DME data can  
only be done with a menu operation.  
Accessing the Copy/Swap menu  
In the menu operation section top menu selection buttons, press the [Copy/  
Swap] button, then press VF1 ‘Copy/Swap.’ The Copy/Swap menu appears.  
Here a copy/swap operation on wipe data is described by way of example,  
using the Copy/Swap >Wipe menu, but the same general procedure applies to  
all of the following menus.  
• M/E: Copying and swapping M/E data  
• Key: Copying and swapping key data  
• Wipe: Copying and swapping wipe data  
• DME Wipe: Copying and swapping DME wipe data  
• Matte: Copying and swapping matte data  
• Color: Copying and swapping color data  
• DME: Copying and swapping data by DME channels  
• Format Converter: Copying format converter data (for MVS-8000G only)  
For details, see “Settings Relating to Signal Inputs (Input Menu)” in Chapter  
16 (Volume 2).  
For an overview of the concepts involved, see “Copy and Swap” (page 98).  
For details of color corrector copy and swap, see Chapter 19 “Color  
Corrector” (Volume 2).  
Copying and swapping wipe data  
As an example, to copy or swap wipe data, use the following procedure.  
1
In the Copy/Swap menu, select HF3 ‘Wipe.’  
The Copy/Swap >Wipe menu appears.  
The status area shows lists for the copy/swap source on the left, and the  
copy/swap destination on the right.  
2
In the <Data Select> group, select either of the following.  
Wipe: The operation applies to wipes in the transition control block.  
Basic Copy and Swap Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
544  
         
Key Wipe: The operation applies to wipes in the independent key  
transition control block.  
3
4
Using any of the following methods, select the data to be copied or  
swapped.  
• Press directly on the list in the status area.  
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.  
• Turn the knobs to make the setting.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
a)  
1
Left No  
Select data for copy/swap  
source  
1 to 4  
b)  
1 to 16  
a)  
2
Right No  
Select data for copy/swap  
destination  
1 to 4  
b)  
1 to 16  
a) Transition control block wipe data  
b) Independent key transition control block wipe data  
For details of the data affected, see “Copy and Swap” (page 98).  
To copy, press [Copy], and to swap, press [Swap].  
This carries out the copy or swap.  
To undo a copy or swap  
Press [Undo], to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out.  
Copy by Button Operation  
You can carry out the following copy operations by a simple button operation.  
• M/E copy  
• Keyer copy  
• Wipe copy  
• DME wipe copy  
For an overview of the copy function, see “Copy and Swap” (page 98).  
Basic button operation  
The basic button operation is to hold down the copy source button, then press  
the destination button.  
You can undo the last operation using [Undo] in the menu (see page 545).  
Basic Copy and Swap Operations 545  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
M/E copy button operation  
In the Flexi Pad control block of each M/E bank, use the [SNAPSHOT] button.  
To copy from M/E-1 to M/E-2  
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [SNAPSHOT] button,  
then press the [SNAPSHOT] button in the M/E-2 Flexi Pad control block.  
Keyer copy button operation  
To specify the copy source, use the key delegation buttons in the key control  
block, and to specify the copy destination, use the key delegation buttons in the  
independent key transition control block.  
To copy from M/E-1 key 1 to M/E-2 key 2  
In the key control block M/E delegation buttons, press [M/E1], turning it on,  
then hold down the [KEY1] button, and in the M/E-2 independent key  
transition control block, press the [KEY2] button.  
Wipe copy button operation  
Use the [WIPE] button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M/E bank.  
To copy the M/E-1 wipe to the M/E-2 wipe  
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [WIPE] button, then press  
the [WIPE] button in the M/E-2 Flexi Pad control block.  
DME wipe copy button operation  
Use the [DME] button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M/E bank.  
To copy the M/E-1 DME wipe to the M/E-2 DME wipe  
In the M/E-1 Flexi Pad control block, hold down the [DME] button, then press  
the [DME] button in the M/E-2 Flexi Pad control block.  
Basic Copy and Swap Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
546  
Chapter 10 Misc Menu, Etc.  
Misc Menu Operations .............................................................................548  
Port Settings for Control From an External Device ..........................548  
Editing Keyboard Settings .................................................................549  
Side Flag Settings ..............................................................................550  
Safe Title Settings .............................................................................552  
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings .....553  
AUX Menu Operations ............................................................................555  
AUX Bus Settings .............................................................................555  
Status Menu ..............................................................................................556  
Video Process Settings ..............................................................................557  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Misc Menu Operations  
In the Misc menu, you can carry out the following operations.  
• Enabling and disabling operation from an external device, System Manager,  
or an editing keyboard.  
• Enabling and disabling side flags on the background bus of each of the M/E-  
1 to M/E-3 and PGM/PST banks.  
• Switching the safe title function on or off for each switcher output.  
• Displaying the transition rate, independent key transition rate, and fade-to-  
black transition rate for each of the M/E and PGM/PST banks, and changing  
the settings.  
Port Settings for Control From an External Device  
Enabling or disabling control from an external device  
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],  
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’  
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears with the status area  
showing the settings of the following ports.  
• Switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports (RS-422A, D-sub 9-pin)  
• Switcher GPI port (parallel, 25-pin)  
• DME1/DME2 Editor ports (RS-422A, D-sub 9-pin)  
• DME1/DME2 GPI ports (parallel, 25-pin)  
2
In the <Switcher> or <DME> group, press on the name of the port for  
which you want to disable control from an external device, turning it off.  
To re-enable control for the port, press on its name once more.  
Note  
For the AUX bus operation from the Remote1 to Remote4 ports of the  
switcher, the setting (Enable/Disable/Manual) in the Setup menu takes  
precedence. Only when the setting is “Manual,” the settings made in the  
Port Enable menu apply.  
For details, see “Interfacing With External Devices (Device Interface  
Menu)” under “Setup Relating to Switcher Processor” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Misc Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
548  
       
DME override  
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],  
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’  
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears.  
2
In the <DME Override> group, select the DME override mode.  
DME Override: When a switcher snapshot or effect using a DME is  
recalled, forcibly select the DME that was used when saving.  
On Air Protect: The operation is the same as the DME override function,  
except that a DME being used by an M/E bank or P/P bank that is on  
air will not be forcibly selected.  
Note  
If effects using the same DME channel are selected simultaneously in two  
or more regions, the DME is selected with the order of precedence P/P >M/  
E1 >M/E2 >M/E3.  
Enabling or disabling control from System Manager  
By installing the BZPS-8000 System Management Software (System  
Manager), you can use a computer connected on a network for management of  
some switcher data and control operations.  
To enable or disable this function, use the following procedure.  
1
2
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],  
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF1 ‘Port Enable.’  
The Misc >Enable >Port Enable menu appears.  
Press [System Manager].  
Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable.  
Editing Keyboard Settings  
Note  
The following operations are only possible when a license for the BZS-8050  
Editing Control Software is activated. For details of license registration, see  
“Installation and Device Setup (Install/Unit Config Menu)” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2).  
Misc Menu Operations 549  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Enabling or disabling control from the editing keyboard  
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],  
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF2 ‘Plug-In Editor.’  
The Misc >Enable >Plug-In Editor menu appears.  
2
In the <Control From Plug-In Editor> group, press [Editor Enable].  
Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable.  
To enable control of the preview bus only  
When control from the editing keyboard is disabled (when [Editor Enable] is  
set to Disable), to enable control of the preview bus only, press [PVW Bus  
Enable] in the <Control From Plug-In Editor> group.  
Side Flag Settings  
Note  
The side flag function is only supported on an MVS-8000A system and MVS-  
8000G system.  
The term “side flags” refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect  
ratio 4:3 embedded within a 16:9 frame, when these areas are filled with a  
selected image from the utility 1 bus.  
For details of the side flag function, see “Side Flags” on page 102.  
Enabling and disabling side flags with a menu operation  
You can enable or disable side flags for the backgrounds (A and B) of each of  
the M/E and PGM/PST banks.  
As an example, to enable side flags for background B row on the M/E-1 bank,  
use the following procedure.  
1
2
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC],  
then select VF1 ‘Enable’ and HF3 ‘Side Flags.’  
The Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu appears.  
The status area shows the buttons for Bkgd A and Bkgd B for each of the  
M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST (P/P) banks.  
In the <M/E-1 Side Flags> group, press [Bkgd B].  
Each time you press the button toggles between Enable and Disable.  
Misc Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
550  
     
To display a menu for the aspect ratio 4:3, auto side flags, and auto  
crop settings  
In the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu, press [Setup >SWER >Side Flags].  
To display a menu for assigning the side flags on/off function to a  
cross-point button  
In the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu, press [Side Flags Button Assign].  
Enabling and disabling side flags with a button operation  
For example, to enable side flags for the background B row of the M/E-1 bank,  
use the following procedure.  
1
First, in the Setup menu assign the rightmost cross-point button to the  
[SIDE FLAG] button.  
For details of the assignment operation, see “Cross-Point Settings (Xpt  
Assign Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
2
Press the [SIDE FLAG] button at the right end of the background B row of  
the M/E-1 bank.  
The button you pressed lights amber, and this enables the side flags.  
Notes  
• The operations of enabling or disabling the side flags by menu operation  
and by control panel button operation are linked.  
• When the auto side flags are on, selecting a 4:3 video material  
automatically lights the [SIDE FLAG] button, but if you press this  
button, turning it off, the side flags are temporarily disabled.  
However, when you select a different 4:3 video material, the [SIDE  
FLAG] button automatically lights once again, enabling the side flags.  
Creating an image with side flags  
For example, to create an image with side flags in the background B row of the  
M/E-1 bank, use the following procedure.  
1
2
In the M/E-1 bank cross-point control block, hold down the [UTIL] button,  
and in the background A row select the signal (utility bus 1 signal) you  
want to insert in the side flag areas.  
In the background B row, press the cross-point button corresponding to the  
4:3 video material.  
Misc Menu Operations 551  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
At this point, if auto side flags are on, this automatically adds side flags to  
the 4:3 video material. (See “Settings for Switcher Configuration (Config  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).)  
3
Use either of the following methods to turn the side flags on.  
• Use the Misc >Enable >Side Flags menu. (See page 550)  
• Use a cross-point button operation. (See previous item.)  
This adds side flags to the 4:3 video material.  
Safe Title Settings  
Switching the safe title function on or off  
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC] and  
select VF2 ‘Safe Title.’  
The Misc >Safe Title menu appears.  
2
Using any of the following methods, select the signal to which the settings  
apply.  
• Directly press the list in the status area.  
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.  
• Turn the knob to make the setting.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Output  
Signal to which the settings  
apply  
1 to 48  
Notes  
• It is not possible to change the setting for the output for which the safe  
title is set off in a Setup menu.  
• The safe title function cannot be used for output signals for which  
through mode is set to Enable in a Setup menu.  
For more information about the Setup menu settings referred to above, see  
“Signal Input Settings (Input Menu)” and “Signal Output Settings (Output  
Menu)” in Chpater 16 (Volume 2).  
3
Press [Safe Title] to set it on or off.  
Misc Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
552  
 
Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the  
Settings  
In the Transition menu, for each bank you can display a list of the M/E (or  
PGM/PST) transition rates and independent key (or DSK) transition rates, and  
change the settings.  
These settings are linked to the other transition rate setting operations.  
You can also display and set the fade-to-black transition rate.  
Displaying the Transition menu  
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [MISC], then  
select VF3 ‘Transition.’  
The Misc >Transition menu appears.  
About the Transition menu display  
The display of the independent key transition rate in the Misc >Transition  
menu depends on the selection in the <Key Transition> group of the  
Engineering Setup >Switcher >Transition menu for each of the M/E and PGM/  
PST banks.  
When [Same] (On direction and Off direction settings the same) is selected  
in the <Key Transition> group: Only “Key” (or “DSK” in the PGM/PST  
bank) appears.  
When [Independ] (On direction and Off direction settings independent) is  
selected in the <Key Transition> group: “Key(On)” and “Key(Off)”  
each appear. In the case of the PGM/PST bank, “DSK(On)” and  
“DSK(Off)” appear.  
For more details, see “Settings Relating to Video Switching (Transition  
Menu)” in Chapter 16 (Volume 2).  
Setting the transition rate in the Transition menu  
For example, to make the settings for the M/E-1 bank, use the following  
procedure.  
To set the M/E transition rate  
1
2
In the <M/E-1 Transition Rate> group of the Misc >Transition menu, press  
[Transition].  
Turn the knob to set the number of frames.  
Misc Menu Operations 553  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Transition Rate  
Transition rate  
0 to 999 (frames)  
Note  
When a clip transition is selected as the transition type, it is not possible to  
change the transition rate in this menu.  
To set the independent key transition rate  
1
In the <M/E-1 Transition Rate> group of the Misc >Transition menu, press  
[Key].  
To set the key On direction or Off direction independently, press Key(On)  
or Key(Off).  
2
Turn the knobs to set the number of frames.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
0 to 999 (frames)  
0 to 999 (frames)  
0 to 999 (frames)  
0 to 999 (frames)  
1
2
3
4
Key1 Trans Rate Key 1 transition rate  
Key2 Trans Rate Key 2 transition rate  
Key3 Trans Rate Key 3 transition rate  
Key4 Trans Rate Key 4 transition rate  
To set the fade-to-black transition rate in the Transition menu  
1
2
In the Misc >Transition menu, press [FTB].  
Turn the knob to set the number of frames.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
Transition Rate  
Transition rate  
0 to 999 (frames)  
Misc Menu Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
554  
AUX Menu Operations  
AUX Bus Settings  
Making video process settings for an AUX bus  
Make the settings as follows.  
1
In the Aux/Mon >Aux Bus menu, using any of the following methods,  
select the AUX bus to which the settings apply.  
• Directly press the list in the status area.  
• Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor.  
• Turn the knob to make the setting.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
AUX Bus  
AUX bus selection  
1 to 48  
2
3
Press [Video Process], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Video Gain  
Y Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
5
Video signal gain  
Luminance signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
C Gain  
Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00  
Hue Delay  
Black Level  
Hue delay  
Black level  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–7.31 to +109.59  
To return adjustment values to their defaults  
Press [Unity].  
AUX Menu Operations 555  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Status Menu  
The Status menu shows the following information.  
• Operating status of the DME  
Viewing the DME operating status  
To view the DME operating status, press the top menu selection button  
[STATS] in the menu control block.  
This selects VF1 ‘DME Status’ and the Status menu appears.  
DME status display  
For each DME channel, you can see how the DME is being used in the  
corresponding operation block.  
The display background color also indicates the following differences in the  
way in which a DME is being used.  
Blue: The DME is currently being used in other than the final program output.  
Red: The DME is currently being used in the final program output.  
Status Menu  
556  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Video Process Settings  
This section describes operations on the M/E-1 to M/E-3, and PGM/PST  
background A and B buses, and utility buses 1 and 2.  
For these operations, use the Misc >Video Process menu in the respective  
operating bank.  
For video process settings on other buses, see the following.  
• Settings for a particular input signal: “Signal input settings” in Chapter 16  
(Volume 2)  
• Key fill bus settings: “Video Processing” (page 405)  
• Settings for frame memory source buses 1 and 2: “Setting video processing”  
(page 498)  
• Settings for Aux 1 to 48 buses: “Making video process settings for an AUX  
bus” (page 555)  
• Overview of video process: “Video Process” (page 107)  
This section describes an example on the background A bus of the M/E-1 bank.  
For the background B bus or utility bus 1 or 2, make the adjustment with a  
similar procedure.  
Making video process settings for each bus  
1
In the menu control block, press the top menu selection button [M/E1] and  
select VF7 ‘Misc’ and HF2 ‘Video Process.’  
2
3
In the <Bkgd-A> group, press [Video Process], turning it on.  
Adjust the following parameters.  
Knob  
Parameter  
Video Gain  
Y Gain  
Adjustment  
Setting values  
1
2
3
4
5
Video signal gain  
Luminance signal gain  
–200.00 to +200.00  
–200.00 to +200.00  
C Gain  
Chrominance signal gain –200.00 to +200.00  
Hue Delay  
Black Level  
Hue delay  
Black level  
–180.00 to +180.00  
–7.31 to +109.59  
To return the parameter settings to the defaults  
Press [Unity] in the <Bkgd-A> group.  
Video Process Settings 557  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Video Process Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
558  
Appendix (Volume 1)  
Wipe Pattern List .....................................................................................560  
Standard Wipes ..................................................................................560  
Enhanced Wipes ................................................................................561  
Rotary Wipes .....................................................................................562  
Mosaic Wipes ....................................................................................563  
Random/Diamond Dust Wipes ..........................................................565  
DME Wipe Pattern List ...........................................................................566  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode .....................566  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode .....................575  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode ...................579  
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List .............................................................580  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Wipe Pattern List  
Standard Wipes  
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10  
14  
18  
22  
11  
15  
19  
23  
12  
16  
20  
24  
13  
17  
21  
Wipe Pattern List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
560  
       
Enhanced Wipes  
26  
27  
29  
49  
300  
304  
301  
302  
303  
Wipe Pattern List 561  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rotary Wipes  
100  
104  
101  
105  
102  
106  
103  
107  
150  
160  
604  
151  
162  
606  
156  
516  
624  
158  
518  
661  
Wipe Pattern List  
562  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mosaic Wipes  
200  
201  
207  
202  
208  
203  
209  
206  
210  
220  
211  
221  
212  
222  
213  
223  
224  
228  
225  
229  
226  
230  
227  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
Wipe Pattern List 563  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
236  
240  
237  
241  
238  
242  
239  
243  
244  
250  
245  
251  
246  
252  
247  
253  
254  
260  
255  
261  
256  
262  
257  
263  
264  
268  
265  
269  
266  
267  
Wipe Pattern List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
564  
Random/Diamond Dust Wipes  
270  
271  
272  
273  
274  
Wipe Pattern List 565  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DME Wipe Pattern List  
DME Wipe Patterns Available in One-Channel Mode  
Slide  
1001  
1005  
1002  
1006  
1003  
1007  
1004  
1008  
Split  
1011  
1012  
1013  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
566  
           
Squeeze  
1021  
1025  
1029  
1022  
1026  
1030  
1023  
1027  
1031  
1024  
1028  
Door  
1041  
1045  
1042  
1046  
1043  
1047  
1044  
1048  
DME Wipe Pattern List 567  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2D trans  
1051  
1055  
1061  
1068  
1052  
1056  
1062  
1053  
1057  
1063  
1054  
1058  
1064  
3D trans  
1071  
1077  
1093  
1072  
1088  
1094  
1074  
1091  
1076  
1092  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
568  
Flip tumble  
1101  
1102  
1110  
1131  
1103  
1121  
1132  
1104  
1122  
1133  
1109  
1124  
1135  
Frame in-out  
1201  
1202  
1206  
1222  
1203  
1207  
1223  
1204  
1208  
1224  
1205  
1221  
DME Wipe Pattern List 569  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Picture-in-picture  
1251  
Page turn  
1301  
1302  
1306  
1310  
1315  
1341  
1345  
1303  
1307  
1311  
1316  
1342  
1304  
1308  
1312  
1317  
1343  
1305  
1309  
1313  
1318  
1344  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
570  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Page roll  
1321  
1325  
1329  
1322  
1326  
1330  
1335  
1346  
1350  
1323  
1327  
1331  
1336  
1347  
1324  
1328  
1332  
1337  
1348  
1333  
1338  
1349  
Mirror  
1355  
1356  
1357  
1358  
DME Wipe Pattern List 571  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sphere  
1365  
Character trail  
1371  
1372  
Wave  
1378  
1379  
Ripple  
1381  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
572  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Split slide  
1384  
1388  
1385  
1389  
1386  
1387  
Sparkle  
1391  
1398  
1393  
1399  
1394  
1396  
Mosaic  
1701  
Defocus  
1702  
DME Wipe Pattern List 573  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User programmable DME  
The illustrations for patterns 1901 to 1999 show an effect register number or  
register name.  
1901  
1999  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
574  
 
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two-Channel Mode  
Slide  
2601  
2605  
2602  
2606  
2603  
2607  
2604  
2608  
Squeeze  
2621  
2625  
2622  
2626  
2623  
2627  
2624  
2628  
3D trans  
2631  
2642  
2632  
2644  
2633  
2634  
DME Wipe Pattern List 575  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Picture-in-picture  
2651  
2652  
Page turn  
2701  
2702  
2706  
2710  
2715  
2741  
2745  
2703  
2707  
2711  
2716  
2742  
2704  
2708  
2712  
2717  
2743  
2705  
2709  
2713  
2718  
2744  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
576  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Page roll  
2721  
2725  
2729  
2733  
2738  
2749  
2722  
2726  
2730  
2735  
2746  
2750  
2723  
2727  
2731  
2736  
2747  
2724  
2728  
2732  
2737  
2748  
DME Wipe Pattern List 577  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brick  
2801  
2811  
2802  
2812  
2803  
2813  
2804  
2814  
Frame in-out  
2851  
2852  
2862  
2853  
2863  
2854  
2864  
2861  
User programmable DME  
The illustrations for patterns 2901 to 2999 show an effect register number or  
register name.  
2901  
2999  
DME Wipe Pattern List  
578  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three-Channel Mode  
Brick  
3601  
User programmable DME  
The illustrations for patterns 3901 to 3999 show an effect register number or  
register name.  
3901  
3999  
DME Wipe Pattern List 579  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List  
Slide  
7001  
7005  
7002  
7006  
7003  
7007  
7004  
7008  
Squeeze  
7021  
7025  
7029  
7022  
7026  
7030  
7023  
7027  
7031  
7024  
7028  
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
580  
       
Frame in-out  
7201  
7202  
7206  
7222  
7203  
7207  
7223  
7204  
7208  
7224  
7205  
7221  
Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List 581  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Blur 124  
Copy and swap 226  
Input video processing  
223  
Luminance processing  
224  
Output video processing  
226  
Primary color correction  
223  
RGB clip 224  
Secondarycolorcorrection  
224  
Spot color adjustment 226  
YUV clip 226  
A
Border 53, 123  
parameters 410  
Brick 156  
Broken glass 134  
BS button 331  
Bus fixed mode 45  
fader operation 361  
wipe direction 363  
Bus selection 26  
Button  
Additive mix 49  
Ancillary data 92, 522  
Angle 66  
Art Edge 124  
Aspect ratio 67, 450, 458  
Attributes 184  
Audio mixer 33  
Auto  
chroma key adjustments  
382  
assignment settings 197  
numbers 30, 31  
transition 45, 183, 359  
AUTO button 287  
AUTO DELEG button 270  
AUTO INS button 284  
AUTO TRANS button 262,  
263, 311  
Auto/manual transition  
combination 360  
Autoload function 208  
AUX  
bus settings 555  
delegation buttons 288  
menu operations 555  
Auxiliary bus control block  
for AUX buses 288  
for router control 291  
settings 196  
Color data  
C
copy 100  
swap 100  
Caps Lock button 331  
Channel ID 121  
Character trail 139  
Chroma key 49  
adjustments 382  
composition 381  
shadow 51  
shadow adjustment 386  
window 50  
Circle 136  
Clean mode 49  
Clear button 330, 332  
Clip function 92  
Clip transition 44  
operations 524  
Color mix 97, 127, 539  
for edge fill matte 446  
for key fill 388  
Color palette window 333  
Combine Shadow 141  
Combiner 152  
Contrast 128  
Control panel 251  
configuration 1 251  
configuration 2 252  
configuration 3 255  
Coordinate axes 120  
Copy 98, 544  
Axis location 118  
Crop 123  
Cross-point  
Close button 330, 331  
Color  
B
button numbers 257  
button settings 196  
buttons 256  
control block 256  
hold 183  
Background 150  
combination 97, 539  
matte settings 350  
vector key 48  
A/B row 257  
changing 34  
mask 56  
Color background 97  
selection 97  
Bank selection buttons 298  
Basic menu operations 313  
Beveled edge 124  
Blind 134  
Custom mode 192  
Cut 44  
CUT button 262, 312  
Cylinder 138  
setting operations 538  
settings menu 538  
Color cancel 50  
adjustments 383  
Color corrector 223  
Blink 57  
function 404  
Index  
582  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
for independent key  
transitions 477  
DME wipes 72, 465  
copy 99, 100  
Extended VTR control 161  
External  
D
Dead zone 487  
Default recall button 323  
Defocus 123  
key 90  
processed key 270, 403,  
417  
direction 470  
Del button 332  
modifiers 469  
modify clear 476  
position 471, 478  
resizer 481  
snapshot 82, 482  
swap 99, 100  
External devices 158  
connections 197  
disk recorder control 161  
Extended VTR control  
161  
Delay setting 174  
Delegation buttons 267  
DEST button 289  
Detents 115  
Device  
GPI device control 160  
P-Bus device control 159  
shared control functions  
158  
management 193  
DEVICE connectors 295  
Device control block  
joystick 277  
Door 567  
Downstreamkeycontrolblock  
306  
Drop border 53  
parameters 411  
dual resizer effects 432  
Duration  
VTR control 161  
External hard disk drive 532  
search dial 278  
trackball 271  
Device Interface 202  
Digital multi effects 109  
Dim and Fade 130  
Direction 64, 444, 456, 470  
Disk recorder control 161  
Display 269, 286  
DME 109, 261, 263, 311  
applying to a key 400,  
415  
F
effect 171  
keyframe 171  
modes 170  
Fade to black 47, 369  
control block 287  
transition rate 369  
Fader lever 261, 307, 311  
Files 205  
setting buttons 283  
Dust mix 62, 443  
autoload function 208  
backups 531  
deleting 529  
operations 205  
renaming 530  
E
channel selection buttons  
269  
setup 202  
Edge 65  
fill 55  
modifiers 52  
special effects 122  
DME channel  
EDIT ENBL button 282  
Edit point specification  
buttons 282  
Editing buttons 283  
EFF LOOP button 284  
Effect 168  
restoring 531  
Flag 132  
copy 101  
swap 101  
Flex Shadow 125  
Flexi Pad control block  
simple type 299  
standard type 264  
Flip tumble 569  
Flip-flop mode 45  
Flying bar 134  
Format converter 190  
Frame  
DME monitor 270, 287, 309  
DME override 549  
DME patterns  
user programmable 483  
DME Wipe Modify Clear 83  
DME wipe pattern 72  
edge modification 470  
groups 72  
attributes 169  
dissolve 169, 183  
duration 171  
editing 169  
execution 180  
resizer 427  
in-out 569, 581  
Frame input mode 352  
Frame memory  
selection 466  
saving/recalling 169  
Effect execution direction  
selection buttons 284  
Emboss 54  
Enhanced wipes 561  
Enter button 330, 332  
Explosion 138  
DME wipe pattern list  
for one-channel mode 566  
for two-channel mode  
575  
clip function 92  
continuously capturing  
still images (record) 91,  
508  
DME wipe settings 466  
feed 270, 403, 418  
Index 583  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
overview 85  
pair file processing 527  
recalling a continuous  
sequence of still images  
(animation) 91, 509  
settings 200  
saving 89  
Image file  
deletion 529  
renaming 530  
Independent key transition  
37, 364  
Key 48  
1/2 row 256  
bus selection buttons 258  
control block 267  
default 57  
delegation buttons 263,  
306  
deleting 35  
density adjustment 152  
disable 183  
edge modifications 390,  
410  
inserting 35  
mask 55  
memory 56  
modifier buttons 268  
modifiers 52  
modify clear 58, 404  
output destination 403  
output status display 346,  
373  
Frame memory operations  
490  
DME wipe settings 477  
simple transitions 374  
type 365  
type selection buttons  
263, 304, 306  
capturing an input image  
496  
clip 512  
input image selection 494  
menu display 490  
preparations 490  
selecting frame memory  
495  
wipe modifiers 456  
wipe settings 455  
Independent key transition  
control block  
simple type 304  
standard type 364  
Independent key transition  
execution section 263, 305,  
307, 312  
selecting outputs 495  
Freeze 89, 131, 496  
Fringe 70  
FTB button 287  
FULL LINK 63  
Function  
Independentkeytransitionrate  
366  
settings 200  
button area 322  
selection buttons 286  
display 368  
setting by a menu  
operation 367  
setting in the Flexi Pad  
control block 366  
setting in the numeric  
keypad control block  
367  
signal adjustments 384  
source selection 152  
status display 263, 303,  
312  
G
Key active 50  
Global  
adjustment 383  
Key Border 124  
KEY button 289  
Key fill  
coordinate space 111  
effects 152  
Glow 130  
GPI Device control 160  
GPI output 183  
Graphics display 120  
Grid 121  
Input  
signal settings 199, 202  
string 331  
value 330  
selection 387  
selection buttons 268  
Key priority 343  
display 346, 373  
selecting 36  
setting by a menu  
operation 345  
setting in the transition  
control block 343  
Key setting  
Installation 192  
Installationanddevicesettings  
192  
Interpolation 151  
Invert 151  
H
HF buttons 322  
Item display 330, 331  
I
Image  
using menus 378  
Key snapshot 433  
buttons 264, 307  
recalling 434, 436  
saving 433, 435  
setting buttons 264, 307  
J
capturing 89  
data management 94, 527  
data transfer 94  
output 90  
processing 90  
recalling 90  
Joystick 277  
K
Kaleidoscope 136  
Index  
584  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
using simple transition  
module 435  
Key source  
attachment 218  
creating 213  
editing 212, 214, 218  
events 210  
execution 215  
menu macro 222  
overview 210  
registers 210  
shortcut menu 335  
shutting down 333  
switching between the  
main menu sites 335  
title button 322  
top menu list 313  
MENU button 276  
Menu macros 222  
Metal 129  
name display 264, 307  
selection 387  
selection buttons 268  
Key transition  
selection buttons 302  
Key type  
timeline 216  
selection buttons 268  
setting 379  
Keyboard window 331  
Keyer  
copy 99  
swap 99  
Keyframe 168  
control block 281  
duration 171  
Magnitude 66  
MAIN and SUB delegation  
button 235  
Minus button 330  
Mirror 135  
Misc menu operations 548  
MIX 90, 261, 263, 311  
Mix 41, 61  
Mode selection buttons 265,  
285, 303  
Modulation 69, 452  
Mono 127  
Main mask 56  
using 397, 414  
Main menu site 335  
Main/sub modifier link 63  
Maintenance 193  
Manual transition 45, 359  
Mask (DME) 130  
Masks 55, 397, 414  
Master  
effect registers 166  
status 323  
strobe 143  
MORE button 269  
Morphing 61  
Mosaic 128  
KF button 263  
Knob 269, 294  
parameter buttons 323  
K-SS button 305  
region 166  
glass 132  
wipes 563  
Motion decay 142  
Multi 67, 451, 459  
mirror 135  
snapshot registers 167  
timeline registers 167  
timelines 181  
Matte data  
copy 100  
swap 100  
Max./min. value indication  
330  
Melt 139  
move 127  
L
Multi Program 2 230  
basic operation 232  
restriction 243  
MVE-8000A 109  
MVE-9000 109  
Left button 332  
Lens 136  
Level selection buttons 290  
Lighting 140  
Line feed button 332  
Linear key 48  
Memory  
card slot 295  
initialization 192  
recall buttons 298  
Memory card/USB adaptor  
block 295  
“Memory Stick”/USB  
connections block 296  
“Memory Sticks” 296  
Menu  
N
Local coordinate space 111  
Location  
NAM 42, 90, 261, 311  
Nega 128  
size 118  
XYZ 116  
Negative NAM 61  
Network configuration 187  
Next transition 34  
selecting 34  
selection buttons 261, 310  
Non-additive mix 42, 261,  
311  
Nonlinear effects 131  
Non-Sync state 360  
Normal  
Lock function 508  
Luminance key 48  
M
M/E  
accessing 314, 321  
control block 294  
display 294  
operations 323  
organization 313  
page number button 322  
screen 322  
bank display 259  
copy 98  
swap 98  
Macro 210  
edge 413  
Index 585  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
mix 49  
P-Bus devices 158  
control 159  
Perspective 119  
Picture-in-picture 570, 576  
Plane function 50  
source name displays 289  
SEMI LINK 63  
Separate sides 150  
Sepia 127  
Numeric display 266, 303  
Numeric keypad 286  
control block 284  
window 330  
Setup 187  
Positioner 65, 448, 456, 471,  
478  
Positive NAM 61  
Posterization 128  
Preset color mix 42  
Preview 46, 363  
selection buttons 287  
Previous page button 323  
PRIOR SET button 263, 312  
PST COLOR MIX 261, 311  
DCU input/output 202  
overview 187  
panel 195  
router interface 203  
switcher 198  
system 187  
O
ON AIR indicators 270  
One-stroke mode 42  
One-time mode 42  
Operation  
Setup data saving/recalling  
194  
buttons 272  
modes 88  
settings 197  
Shadow 53, 157  
parameters 411  
Shaped Video 150  
SHIFT button 259  
Shift button 332  
Shortcut 335  
Outline 54  
parameters 412  
Output  
R
destination specification  
buttons 270  
Random/diamond dust wipes  
565  
Shotbox 186  
signal settings 200  
OVERRIDE button 270  
Reentry buttons 26, 257  
Reference region 166  
Regions 165  
selection buttons 285  
Registers 166  
Related manuals 20  
Replication 459  
Resizer 58  
Resizer DME wipe 481  
Resizer DME wipe patterns  
580  
Resume mode 192  
Right button 332  
Rings 133  
Ripple 133  
Roll 137  
SHOW KEY button 269  
Show key function 418  
Side flags  
P
DME wipe action 104  
MISC menu 550  
overview 102  
Page Roll 571  
Page turn 137, 570  
Pair file processing 94, 527  
Pair mode 87  
Pairing 68, 452  
Panel setup 195  
Panorama 137  
Parameter group button 322  
Paths 174  
settings 102  
wipe action 103  
Signal  
assignment to buttons 29  
name display 33  
selection 25  
Simple  
transition 371  
Simple P/P Software 227  
Sketch 129  
Skew 120  
Slide 566, 575, 580  
Snapshot 182  
attributes 183  
registers 167  
Soft edge 54, 456  
Softening  
DME 176  
switcher 174  
types 179  
Rotary wipes 562  
Rotation 65, 117, 450, 458  
Router interface setup 203  
RTR button 290  
Pattern key 90  
Pattern limit 46, 355  
buttons 262, 302  
setting by a menu  
operation 356  
S
settingwiththefaderlever  
356  
transition 357  
Screen saver 198  
Search dial 278  
Second (2ND) button 289  
Selected  
edge 413  
wipe pattern edge 456  
Solarization 128  
Source  
Pattern mix 61, 441  
types 61  
Pattern replication 67  
bus display 289  
coordinate space 110  
Index  
586  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
name displays 290  
Space button 332  
Speed 66  
Sphere 138  
Spin 117  
Top menu selection buttons  
294  
Top menu window 332  
TRACE button 270  
Trail 142  
User preference button 294  
User programmable DME  
574, 578  
Notes on keyframe  
creation 484  
Spiral 71, 453  
Split 64, 135, 444, 566  
fader 373  
TRANS PVW button 262,  
312  
Transformation operation  
modes 116  
patterns 483  
transition mode 75, 483  
User regions 165  
User texture pattern 149  
UTIL button 258  
Utility 185  
slide 135  
Spotlighting 143  
Spring 70, 453  
Squeeze 567, 575, 580  
Standard wipe patterns 60  
Standard wipes 560  
Start up state 192  
Status area 322  
Status menu 556  
STOP NEXT KF button 284  
Sub (subsidiary) mask 56  
using 399, 414  
Subsidiary menu site 335  
SUPER MIX 261, 311  
Super mix 42  
Transition  
auto 45  
execution 44, 351  
indicator 307  
manual 45  
mode 171  
Utility/shotbox control block  
298  
V
next 34  
V/K mode 88  
VF buttons 322  
Video  
processing 24, 405  
signal adjustment 51  
switching 200  
Video process 107  
memory 108  
operating procedure 340  
preview 46, 363  
Transition control block  
simple type 299  
standard type 260  
Transition execution  
section 261, 302, 311  
with the fader lever 359  
Transition indicator 261, 311  
function 351  
settings 349  
Swap 98, 544  
Swirl 139  
settings 557  
VTR control 161  
Switcher setup 198  
System  
Transition rate 352  
display 262, 311  
setting by a menu  
operation 355  
W
Wave 131  
Wind 143  
Window adjustment 51, 385  
WIPE 261, 263, 311  
Wipe 44, 60  
configuration 187  
features 22  
reset 192  
setting in the Flexi Pad  
control block 353  
setting in the MISC menu  
553  
setting in the numeric  
keypad control block  
354  
setup 187  
copy 99  
enhanced 60  
T
Tally interface setup 203  
Target coordinate space 110  
TC button 330  
Temporary attributes 169,  
184  
modify clear 454  
mosaic 60  
pattern list 560  
random/diamond dust 60  
rotary 60  
Transition type 41  
selecting by a menu  
operation 348  
selection buttons 261,  
301, 311  
Trim button 330  
Twist 133  
Three-dimensional  
standard 60  
swap 99  
coordinate space 110  
parameter display 122  
parameters 112  
Wipe crop 126  
Wipe direction 444, 456  
selection buttons 262,  
302, 312  
transformations 110  
Time offset execution 39  
Timecode input mode 352  
Top menu list 313  
U
Wipe modifiers 443  
UNDO button 266, 303  
Index 587  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wipe Modify Clear 71  
Wipe pattern  
aspect ratio 450, 458  
edge modification 445  
key 52  
modifiers 63  
modulation 452  
replication 451, 459  
rotation 450  
selection 438  
types 60  
variation 63  
Wipe pattern/modifier  
combinations 454  
Wipe position 448, 456  
Wipe settings 200, 438  
for independent key  
transitions 455  
Wipe snapshot 71, 460  
deleting 462  
recalling 462  
saving 461  
Wire frames 120  
X
XPT HOLD  
buttons 258, 289  
status display 303  
Y
Y balance 51  
adjustment 385  
Z
Zabton 54, 396, 413  
Z-ring 275  
Index  
588  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The material contained in this manual consists of infor-  
mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is  
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equip-  
ment described in this manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of  
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur-  
pose other than the operation or maintenance of the  
equipment described in this manual without the express  
written permission of Sony Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sony Corporation  
MVS-8000/8000SF  
System (SY)  
3-206-016-12 (1)  
Printed in Japan  
2008.05.13  
©2001  
Printed on recycled paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Silvercrest Universal Remote KH 2158 User Manual
Sony Battery Charger DC VQ800 User Manual
Sony Carrying Case SPK HCB User Manual
Sony Ericsson Portable Multimedia Player D750 User Manual
Sony Personal Computer PCG TR2 User Manual
Sony Stereo Receiver SRF HM33 User Manual
Sony VCR URC6131 User Manual
Swann Security Camera SWA31 C4 User Manual
Sylvania CRT Television 6413CTA User Manual
Symphonic TV VCR Combo WF0213C User Manual